JP2019033861A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a technique capable of appropriately inspecting a game machine.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a plurality of detection means for detecting game balls passing through a predetermined area; storage means for storing detection information as information based on detection of game balls by the detection means; calculation means for calculating game history information as information regarding a history of a game on the basis of detection information; and display means for displaying game history information calculated by the calculation means. The storage means includes means for storing detection information during a plurality of periods with predetermined timing as a boundary. The calculation means includes means for calculating game history information for each of a plurality of periods, based on detection information for each of the plurality of periods. The display means includes means for switching and displaying a plurality of pieces of game history information for each of a plurality of periods.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 35

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, there is an increase in gaming interest, a reduction in processing load on gaming machines, optimization of processing, simplification of control, simplification of structure, efficiency of development of gaming machines, Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure, control, production, etc. for the purpose of providing gaming machines that are less prone to malfunctions, and providing gaming machines in consideration of players (for example, Patent Document 1). ).

  In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as the discovery and suppression of illegal acts by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

JP 2011-172988 A

  In gaming machines such as those mentioned above, there is an increase in gaming interest, reduction in processing load on gaming machines, optimization of processing, simplification of control, simplification of structure, efficiency of development of gaming machines, and problems. Further technical improvements are desired for the purpose of providing difficult gaming machines, providing gaming machines in consideration of players, and providing more sound games.

  SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to solve at least a part of the problems described above, and the invention can be implemented as the following forms.

[Form]
A plurality of detecting means for detecting a game ball that has passed a predetermined area;
Storage means for storing detection information which is information based on the fact that a game ball is detected by the detection means;
Calculation means for calculating game history information which is information relating to a game history based on the detection information;
Display means for displaying the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
A gaming machine comprising
The storage means includes means for storing the detection information in a plurality of periods with a predetermined timing as a boundary,
The calculation means includes means for calculating the game history information for each of the plurality of periods based on the detection information for the plurality of periods.
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the display means includes means for switching and displaying a plurality of the game history information for each of the plurality of periods.

  According to the said form, a game machine can be test | inspected appropriately.

It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and display surface which are variably displayed in a symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the various counters used for jackpot lottery etc. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success / failure table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the allocation table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success / failure table for electrically-powered object open | release lottery. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a main controller, and the structure of an inspection machine in detail. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the content of the process in a game history management chip | tip and an inspection machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the main side MPU performs. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process which the main side MPU performs. It is explanatory drawing explaining the structure of the input port provided in main side MPU. It is explanatory drawing explaining the entrance detection process which the main side MPU performs. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance determination process which the main side MPU performs. It is explanatory drawing explaining a mode that the presence or absence of a ball is detected. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU of a game log | history management chip performs. It is a block diagram which shows in detail the structure of the main control apparatus with which the pachinko machine of the aspect 6 of 1st Embodiment is provided, and the structure of an inspection machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the content of the process in the game log | history management chip | tip and test | inspection machine of the aspect 6 of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows in detail the structure of the main controller with which the pachinko machine of aspect 7 of 1st Embodiment is provided, and the structure of an inspection machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the outline | summary of the process in the game log | history management chip | tip of the aspect 7 of 1st Embodiment, and an inspection machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in aspect 11 of 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the outline | summary of the process in the main side MPU of the aspect 11 of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in aspect 12 of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in aspect 23 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process which the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 23 of 1st Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance detection process which the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 23 of 1st Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the process for game history which the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 23 of 1st Embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the specific process which the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 23 of 1st Embodiment performs. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in aspect 37 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process which the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 46 of 1st Embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically a part of electrical structure of the pachinko machine in the aspect 50 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process which the main side MPU (main side CPU) in the aspect 56 of 1st Embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of an information display part. It is explanatory drawing which shows a mode that the game history information is displayed on the information display part. It is explanatory drawing which shows a mode that setting information is displayed on the information display part in setting change mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows a mode that setting information is displayed on the information display part in setting change mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows a mode that setting information is displayed on the information display part in setting change mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows a mode that setting information is displayed on the information display part in setting change mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows a mode that setting information is displayed on the information display part in setting change mode. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine 10 in the aspect 74 of 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of main side ROM. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of main side RAM. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the memory map of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process which the main side CPU of the aspect 74 of 1st Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process which the main side CPU of the aspect 75 of 1st Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process which the main side CPU of the aspect 76 of 1st Embodiment performs. It is process drawing which shows the operation | work process in case an administrator changes the lottery setting of a pachinko machine. It is process drawing which shows the operation | work process in case an administrator confirms the lottery setting of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows a part of main process which the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 87 of 1st Embodiment performs when a power supply is turned ON. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process which the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 87 of 1st Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation process which the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 87 of 1st Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows a part of main process which the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 88 of 1st Embodiment performs when a power supply is turned ON. It is a flowchart which shows a part of main process which the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 89 of 1st Embodiment performs when a power supply is turned ON. It is a flowchart which shows a part of main process which the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 90 of 1st Embodiment performs when a power supply is turned ON. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process which the main side MPU (main side CPU) of the aspect 91 of 1st Embodiment performs.

Embodiments of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
A. First embodiment:
B. Application to other configurations:
C. About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments, etc .:

A. First embodiment:
A1. Game machine structure:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as “pachinko machine”) in the first embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine body 12 that is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 disposed on the front surface of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device that control the pachinko machine body 12 are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so as not to be opened and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17.

  An opened window portion 18 is formed at a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electric decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical decoration part is comprised by the light emission means which consists of various lamps, such as LED. The light-emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect by lighting or blinking at each game time, a big win winning, a reach occurrence or the like performed by the pachinko machine 10. Further, on the back side of the front door frame 14, a glass unit 19 made of two plate glasses is disposed, and the opened window 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

  The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent out from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to a game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 onto the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is disposed below the upper plate 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch between the closed state and the open state of the discharge port 22 by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22, and the game ball is discharged from the lower plate 21 to the outside.

  An effect operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for a player to perform an input operation for a game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.

  Furthermore, an operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front. When the player operates the operation handle 25, a game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, a touch sensor 25a for permitting driving of the game ball launching mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the game ball launching by the game ball launching mechanism by a pressing operation by the player, and the operation handle 25 Is provided with a variable resistor 25c that detects the amount of rotation of the first and second rotations based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player holds the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

  Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is disposed on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, and a third control unit 53. Specifically, these mechanism portions are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

  The first control unit 51 includes a main control device 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function for controlling the main game and a function for monitoring the power source. The main control board is accommodated in a board box made of a transparent resin material. The substrate box is configured to leave an open / close trace (also referred to as an open trace or an open trace). For example, a seal seal is affixed to an openable and closable portion, and characters such as “open” appear when the substrate box is opened.

  The second control unit 52 includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The sound emission control device 90 controls light emitting means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 90. The symbol display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays a symbol or an image for production.

  The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When the instruction for launching the game ball is input from the main control device 60, the launch control device 80 launches the game ball with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball launch mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, a tank 54 to which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a slope that is gently inclined so that the game balls are connected to the lower side of the tank 54 and flow downstream. A tank rail 55 having a vertical position, a case rail 56 connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55 in the vertical direction, a supply of game balls from the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70 A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

  Next, the game board will be described. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

  FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is composed of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism is guided to the guide rail 31 and released to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30 and each accessory such as a windmill is arranged. The nails 42 and the windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

  The game board 30 is provided with a general winning port 32, a first starting port 33, a second starting port 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display unit 45. The main display unit 45 includes a special map unit 37, a universal map unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

  The general prize opening 32 is a ball opening through which a game ball can enter and is provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 32, ten game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls. In the present embodiment, three general winning ports 32a, 32b, and 32c are provided as the general winning ports 32. Hereinafter, the general winning port 32a is also referred to as a first winning port 32a, the general winning port 32b is also referred to as a second winning port 32b, and the general winning port 32c is also referred to as a third winning port 32c.

  The first start port 33 is a ball entrance where a game ball can enter. The first start port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls and a jackpot lottery described later is executed.

  The second start port 34 is a entrance for allowing game balls to enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second start port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery described later is executed. The second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as a normal electric accessory.

  The through gate 35 includes a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate serving as an opportunity for executing a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electrical instrument opening lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the winning combination is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to an open state where the electric combination 34a is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is disposed on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second start port 34 and is second. It is possible to enter the starting port 34. In this embodiment, even when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the payout of the winning ball is not executed.

  The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and an open / close door 36b that opens and closes the large winning opening 36a. The open / close door 36b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the grand prize winning opening 36a. When a game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the main control device 60 executes a big hit lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the jackpot lottery, when the jackpot or the jackpot is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. The opening / closing execution mode is a mode for executing the opening / closing process of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36. Specifically, when the open / close door 36b of the variable prize-winning device 36 shifts to the open / close execution mode, the open / close door 36b transitions from a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter to an open state in which a game ball can enter and a predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, the transition is again made to the closed state. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the large winning opening 36 a of the variable winning device 36, 15 paying balls are paid out by the payout device 71.

  Further, an out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the various entrances are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

  In the present embodiment, a game that has entered the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, the first winning port 32a, the second winning port 32b, the third winning port 32c, the big winning port 36a, and the out port 43. The ball is configured to join a discharge passage provided on the back surface of the game board 30, and a discharge passage detection sensor for detecting the game ball is provided in the discharge passage. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls launched on the game board 30 can be grasped by detecting the game balls with the discharge passage detection sensor.

  The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display unit 37a and a second symbol display unit 37b. The 1st symbol display part 37a and the 2nd symbol display part 37b are respectively comprised by the segment indicator by which the some segment light emission part was arranged in the predetermined | prescribed aspect.

  The first symbol display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed or stopped on the basis of a jackpot lottery triggered by a game ball entering the first start port 33. The first symbol display unit 37a is configured as a display mode until a segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a big hit lottery is performed in response to a game ball entering the first start port 33. Then, the first symbol variation display or predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to stop display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the game times in which the big hit lottery is executed when the game balls enter the first start port 33 are also referred to as first start port game times.

  The 2nd symbol display part 37b is a display part for displaying a 2nd symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed or stopped on the basis of a jackpot lottery triggered by a game ball entering the second start port 34. When the big winning lottery is triggered by the game ball entering the second starting port 34, the second symbol display unit 37b is displayed as a display mode until the segment indicator displays a display corresponding to the lottery result. Then, the variation display or predetermined display of the second symbol is performed. When the lottery is completed, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the segment display to stop display of the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the game times in which the big hit lottery is executed when the game balls enter the second start port 34 are also referred to as second start port game times.

  Here, the time from the start of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b until the stop display is displayed. Also called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the first symbol variation display displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also referred to as the first variation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to be displayed to the stop display is also referred to as a second variable time.

  The special figure unit 37 further includes a first holding display part 37c and a second holding display part 37d made of LED lamps at positions adjacent to the first symbol display part 37a and the second symbol display part 37b.

  The 1st reservation display part 37c displays the number of reservations of the 1st starting port 33 with the color and combination of the LED lamp to light. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first start port 33 are held.

  The second hold display unit 37d displays the number of hold of the second start port 34 according to the color or combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second start opening 34 are held.

  The universal map unit 38 includes a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electrification member opening lottery is performed with the passage of the through gate 35 as an opportunity, the universal map unit 38 causes the light emitting display to be turned on, blinked, or displayed in a predetermined manner. When the electrification opening lottery is completed, the general-purpose unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

  The round display unit 39 is configured by a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games occurring in the opening / closing execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game is opened and closed until either a predetermined upper limit duration elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36 is satisfied. A game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening / closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening / closing execution mode is ended.

  The special map unit 37, the universal map unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light-emitting display using an LED lamp. For example, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, You may be comprised by the various display apparatus which can show a lottery result and a lottery result, such as a CRT or a dot matrix display.

  The variable display unit 40 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. In addition, the structure of the display apparatus with which the variable display unit 40 is provided is not limited to the symbol display apparatus 41, For example, you may be comprised by various display apparatuses, such as a plasma display apparatus, an organic EL display apparatus, or CRT.

  When the first symbol display unit 37a performs variation display or predetermined display based on the game ball entering the first start port 33, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbol variation display or predetermined display accordingly. I do. In addition, the symbol display device 41, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs variation display or predetermined display based on the game ball entering the second start port 34, the symbol variation display or predetermined Is displayed. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the symbol variation display or the predetermined display triggered by the game ball entering the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, but when a big hit is won The effect display during the opening / closing execution mode is also performed. Hereinafter, details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing symbols and display surfaces 41a that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. FIG. 4A is an explanatory diagram showing symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 4A, the symbols indicating the numbers 1 to 8 are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. In addition, you may employ | adopt the design by which symbols, such as a character, were attached | subjected to each symbol which shows the numbers 1-8 as a symbol which is variably displayed.

  FIG. 4B is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of left, middle, and right are displayed on the display surface 41a. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 4A are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row has a periodicity from top to bottom or from below. A variable display that scrolls up is displayed. As shown in FIG. 4B, after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol is displayed on the effective line L for each symbol row. Specifically, when a game ball wins the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the variable display in which the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled in a predetermined direction with periodicity is started. The symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the symbol change display ends and the display is stopped, if the result of the big win lottery by the main controller 60 is a big win, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the active line L. It is formed. For example, the same symbol combination is formed on the effective line L. In addition, the mode of the symbol variation display in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described mode, but the number of symbol columns, the number of effective lines, the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol sequence, the symbols of each symbol column Various modes can be adopted as the mode of the variable display of symbols such as the number.

  Here, the game times are one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special information acquired based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 It is. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one jackpot lottery for one special information for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the first result display unit 37a or the second result is obtained for each game. In any one of the display units 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbol display device 41 performs a predetermined process every game. After the symbol string is variably displayed, the symbol string is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, the time required for one game time is also referred to as a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time which is a time from when the variable display is started until a predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time which is a time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. Yes.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG.4 (b), on the display surface 41a of the symbol display apparatus 41, the 1st reservation display area Ds1 and the 2nd reservation display area Ds2 are displayed. In the first hold display area Ds1, the number of holds based on winning in the first start port 33 is displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, the number of holds based on winning in the second start port 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the number of reserved game balls won in the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 is up to four each.

A2. The electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

  FIG. 5 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured with the main control device 60 as a center, and includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100.

  The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 composed of elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 temporarily stores various data and the like when the CPU 62x executes various control programs, the ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and the program recorded in the ROM 63. A RAM 64 and an input / output port 62a. The MPU 62 further includes a game history management chip 300 and an inspection terminal 65.

  The game history management chip 300 calculates various game history information to be described later on the basis of game ball entry information into a start gate, a winning gate, and a gate (hereinafter collectively referred to as “ball entrance”). To do. The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for transmitting game history information stored in the game history management chip 300 to an inspection machine described later. Details of the game history management chip 300 and the inspection terminal 65 will be described later.

  In addition, the MPU 62 includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that another element may have a part of the functions of the MPU 62.

  A payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. The main control board 61 is supplied with power of DC stable 24V from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, converts external power supplied from the commercial power source into operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. In the present embodiment, the power supply device 85 includes the capacitor 87, and continues power supply to each device for a predetermined period when a power failure occurs or when the power switch is turned off.

  In addition, on the input side of the MPU 62, an incoming detection sensor provided at each entrance is connected. Specifically, a grand prize opening detection sensor 44a that detects a game ball that has entered the grand prize opening 36a, a first start opening detection sensor 44b that detects a game ball that has entered the first start opening 33, and a first 2 a second start port detection sensor 44c that detects a game ball that has entered the start port 34, a first winning port detection sensor 44d that detects a game ball that has entered the first winning port 32a, and a second award port 32b. A second winning port detection sensor 44e for detecting a game ball that has entered the game, a third winning port detection sensor 44f for detecting a game ball that has entered the third winning port 32c, and a game ball that has passed through the through gate 35. A through-gate detection sensor 44g for detection and a discharge passage detection sensor 44h for detecting a game ball that has passed through the discharge passage described above are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered the start opening or the winning opening, and the game ball has passed through the through gate or the discharge passage. It is determined whether or not. Further, the MPU 62 executes a big hit lottery based on the game balls entering the first start port 33 and the second start port 34.

  On the output side of the MPU 62, a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the open / close door 36b of the variable winning device 36, an electric combination drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric combination 34a of the second start port 34, and a main display. The part 45 is connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuit.

  Specifically, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed. Further, when the electrification opening is selected as a result of the electrification opening lottery, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electrification accessory driving unit 44b so that the electrification accessory 34a is opened. Further, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b on the main display unit 45, and in the opening / closing execution mode, the round display on the main display unit 45 is performed. The display control of the unit 39 is executed.

  Further, a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the MPU 62. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the payout control device 70 based on the result of entering the ball. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area of the ROM 63. Specifically, when a game ball is entered into the general prize opening 32, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the first start opening 33. When the entry of the game ball is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the entry of the game ball to the second start port 34 is specified. The main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out the prize ball.

  A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 performs launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launching mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. An operation handle 25 is connected to the launch control device 80. As described above, the operation handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player holds the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the rotation operation amount. A game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

  The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 controls the driving of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 60, and the speaker 46. And the display control apparatus 100 are controlled. In addition, an effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by a player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. Various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control apparatus 100, etc. are controlled.

  The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41 and the type of symbol combination to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. The presence / absence of reach, the contents of the reach effect, and the contents of the effect executed while the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol are variably displayed are grasped. In the present embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variation time, the unit game time which is the time required for one game time is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for jackpot lottery and the like. The various counters are provided in various counter areas of the RAM 64, and are used when the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery, a display setting of the main display unit 45, a symbol display setting of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery. When distributing the jackpot type, a jackpot type counter C2 is used. A reach random number counter C3 is used for reach determination as to whether or not to generate reach when the symbol sequence to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is deviated and changed.

  A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. In addition, the variation type counter CS is used when determining the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b of the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 41. Further, the electric accessory release counter C4 is used for the electric accessory release lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is opened.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value every time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

  Further, the RAM 64 is provided with a holding information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The hold information storage area 64b is provided with a first hold area Ra and a second hold area Rb. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start port 33, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of entering are stored in the holding information storage area. 64b is stored in the first reserved area Ra in time series. When a game ball enters the second start port 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the timing of entering are stored in the holding information storage area 64b. 2 is stored in time series in the reserved area Rb.

  Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment one by one within the range of 0 to 1199, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when the game ball enters the first start port 33, the updated value is stored in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. When a game ball enters the second start port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering.

  The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the success / failure table stored in the success / failure table storage area of the ROM 63 to become a big winner. It is determined whether or not. Further, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, and is compared with the hit / fail table stored in the hit / fail table storage area of the ROM 63, and the jackpot It is determined whether or not.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is determined by the game ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. Thus, the process moves to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c in the order obtained. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is checked against a hit / fail table stored in the hit / fail table storage area of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not the jackpot random counter C1 is a jackpot.

  Next, details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to increment one by one within the range of 0 to 39 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and when the game ball enters the first start port 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. When a game ball enters the second start port 34, it is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the hold information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry.

  As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c, and when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the determination process execution area 64c The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the table. Further, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. . In the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, and the second starting port 34 is updated. Is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 after moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, and the reach is determined. It is determined whether or not it occurs. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 after moving to the determination processing execution area 64c. It is determined whether or not it occurs. However, when the result of the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot and the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the reach occurrence regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

  Reach is the stop of a combination of symbols that may be a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot for a portion of a plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. This is a display state in which the symbols are displayed in the state of the remaining symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot means a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 4B, the symbol is first displayed in the symbol row Z1 and then the same symbol as Z1 is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a symbol is displayed in the symbol row Z2, and a reach is achieved. When a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

  In addition, in the reach, in the state that the reach line is formed, while performing the variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol row, and performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, A combination of performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after reducing or not displaying a combination of symbols on which a reach line is formed. In addition, when the reach effect is being performed, or prior to the reach display, it is determined whether or not the notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. May be.

  Next, details of the variation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. For example, the variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and after reaching the maximum value, the variation type counter CS returns to zero.

  The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 41. In determining the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, a variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area of the ROM 63 is used.

  Next, details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 465, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric utility reservation area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric utility reservation area 64d moves to the electric accessory execution area 64e, the electric accessory release in the electric accessory execution area 64e is performed. A lottery is performed as to whether or not the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in the open state using the value of the counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0, 1, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in an open state, and if C4 = 2 to 465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in a closed state.

  Note that at least one of the acquired value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is the special information in the present invention. It corresponds to. Further, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is held. Also called information.

  Next, the success / failure table will be described. The success / failure table is table data for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 when the jackpot lottery is performed based on the jackpot random number counter C1. In the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the lottery mode of the big hit lottery. When the big hit lottery in the low probability mode, the success / failure table for the low probability mode is referred to. In the case of jackpot lottery in the probability mode, the success / failure table for the high probability mode is referred to.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success / failure table. FIG. 7A shows a low probability mode success / failure table (low probability mode), and FIG. 7B shows a high probability mode success / failure table.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, five values of 0 to 4 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot in the success / failure table for the low probability mode. Of the values 0 to 1199, values other than the five values 0 to 4 (5 to 1199) are out of place. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7 (b), 16 values of 0 to 15 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot in the success / failure table for the high probability mode. Of the values 0 to 1199, values other than the 16 values 0 to 15 are out of place. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery than the low probability mode.

  Further, in this embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the low probability mode hit / fail table is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the high probability mode hit / fail table. Included in the group. However, as a result of the jackpot lottery, if the probability that the high probability mode is a big hit is higher than that of the low probability mode, the number and value of random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary.

  Although not adopted in the success / failure table in the present embodiment, “small hit” may be provided as a result of the big hit lottery.

  “Small Win” is a result of the success / failure that does not trigger the transition in both the lottery mode and the support mode, although it is the transition trigger to the opening / closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 is opened / closed. On the other hand, “displacement” is a result of success / failure that does not trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode and does not trigger the transition for the lottery mode and the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set for the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set by providing a difference in the following three modes or modes.
(1) Number of times (number of rounds) of opening / closing door 36b of variable winning device 36 in opening / closing execution mode
(2) Aspects of opening / closing control of variable winning device 36 in opening / closing execution mode (3) Lottery mode (low probability mode or high probability mode) of jackpot lottery after opening / closing execution mode ends

  As an aspect of the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-described (2) opening / closing execution mode, occurrence of a game ball (winning) in the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode The high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency is relatively high or low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, one opening of the opening / closing door 36b in the opening / closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds elapse or until the number of game balls entering the opening / closing door 36b reaches 10. can do. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing door 36b in the opening / closing execution mode is set to be continuously opened until 1.6 seconds elapses or until the number of balls entering the opening / closing door 36b reaches 10. Can do.

  The opening limit time for one opening of the opening / closing door 36b and the opening limit number for one opening are the frequency of occurrence of entering the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. If the high-frequency winning mode is higher than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening and closing mode of the open / close door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode may be set longer than the low-frequency winning mode, or the opening limit number for one opening may be set longer. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the configuration may be such that the variable winning device 36 is not substantially won in the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of winning modes are not provided as the opening / closing execution mode, and the above-described high-frequency winning mode is set during the opening / closing execution mode. That is, one opening of the opening / closing door 36b in the opening / closing execution mode is set so as to continue until 30 seconds elapse or until the number of game balls entering the opening / closing door 36b reaches ten.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot, the jackpot type is distributed using the jackpot type counter C2. The sort of jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the sort table storage area of the ROM 63 as a sort table.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 8A shows a distribution table for the first start port, and FIG. 8B shows a distribution table for the second start port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to when the big hit lottery based on the entrance of the game ball to the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is referred to the second start port 34. It is referred to in the case of lottery lottery based on the entrance of game balls.

  As shown in the distribution table for the first start port in FIG. 8A, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type based on the first start port 33, 16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, 16R normal A jackpot, 8R normal jackpot is set.

  In the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot, the open / close control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, the winning lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends is the high probability mode, and the opening / closing execution mode The support mode after the end of is a jackpot that becomes the high frequency support mode.

  In the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the open / close control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, the winning lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends is the low probability mode, and the opening / closing execution mode The support mode after the end of is a jackpot that becomes the high frequency support mode.

  In the distribution table for the first start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”, “0 to 13” corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and “14 to 27” corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. "28-33" corresponds to 16R normal jackpot, and "34-39" corresponds to 8R normal jackpot.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the jackpot type. Therefore, the mode of jackpot is diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest in the 16R probability variable jackpot, the next highest in the 8R probability variable jackpot, then the 16R regular jackpot, and finally the 8R regular jackpot. Thus, by setting a plurality of types of jackpots having different advantages for the player, monotonization of the game can be suppressed, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

  As shown in the distribution table for the second start port in FIG. 8B, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, 16R probability variable jackpot and 8R normal jackpot are set as the jackpot type based on the second start port 34. ing. In the distribution table for the second start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”, “0 to 27” corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and “28 to 39” is the 8R normal jackpot. It corresponds to.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the jackpot type when the jackpot is the jackpot based on the game ball entering the first start port 33, 2 The difference between the case where a big hit is made based on the entry of the game ball into the start opening 34 and a clear difference in the advantage for the player are provided.

  As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE and uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. In addition, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to stop the segment display unit to be displayed on the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. The display mode is determined. In the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as the mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 after the end of the above (3) opening / closing execution mode, the launch of the game ball in the same mode continues in the same mode. When the comparison is made in the situation, the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are such that the frequency at which the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is opened per unit time is relatively high. Can be set.

  Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the probability of becoming an electrification opening win in the electric accessory release lottery using the electric accessory release counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. . In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning an electric combination opening in the electric combination opening lottery is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Also, in the high frequency support mode, the time for opening the electric utility item 34a once is set longer when the power combination is won than in the low frequency support mode.

  Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the case where the electrification opening is elected in the high frequency support mode and the electrification state of the electric accessory 34a occurs a plurality of times, the next one after the completion of the one disengagement state. The closing time until the opening state is started may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the time that is secured from the time when one lottery opening lottery is performed to the time when the next lottery opening lot is performed is set to be relatively shorter than in the low frequency support mode. May be.

  As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that a game ball enters the second start port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary gaming state that assists the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

  FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success / failure table (electrical accessory release lottery success / failure table) used when the electric accessory release lottery is executed.

  FIG. 9 (a) shows an electrical accessory release lottery success / failure table (for the low frequency support mode) used in the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 9 (a), in the electric component release lottery success / failure table (for the low frequency support mode), two values of 0 and 1 are set as the values of the electric component release counter C4 that is elected to win the electric utility. Value is set. 464 values of 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 to be detached. In other words, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electrified product release lottery is executed in the low frequency support mode, the electrified role is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the electrification release is won in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

  FIG. 9 (b) shows an electrical accessory release lottery success / failure determination table (for the high frequency support mode) used in the high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 9 (b), in the electric component release lottery success / failure table (for the high frequency support mode), there are 462 values of 0 to 461 as the values of the electric agent release counter C4 that is elected to win the electric utility. Value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as values of the electric accessory release counter C4 to be detached. In other words, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric component release lottery is executed in the high frequency support mode, the electric combination release win is made with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the electrification release is won in the high-frequency support mode, the electrical accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

  As described above, the high-frequency support mode is set to have a higher probability that a game ball will enter the second start port 34 than in the low-frequency support mode, according to the electric component release lottery success / failure table. .

  FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of the main control device 60 and the configuration of the inspection machine 320 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the CPU 62x, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 are also referred to as a main MPU 62, a main CPU 62x, a main ROM 63, and a main RAM 64, respectively.

  The main ROM 63 of the main MPU 62 is provided with a prize ball number data storage area and a calculation execution condition storage area.

In the award ball number data storage area, the number of game balls (award ball number data) to be paid out as a prize ball when a game ball enters each entrance is stored. In the present embodiment, the following winning ball number data is stored in the winning ball number data storage area.
Number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the first start opening 33 (first start opening prize ball number P ₁ ): 3
Number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when game balls enter the second start opening 34 (second start opening prize balls number P ₂ ): 3
Number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the first prize opening 32a (first prize mouth prize ball number P _N1 ): 10
-Number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball when a game ball enters the second prize opening 32b (second prize mouth prize ball number P _N2 ): 10
-Number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the third prize opening 32c (third prize mouth number P _N3 ): 10
-Number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the big prize opening 36a (number of prize balls P _S ): 15

  The main side MPU 62 refers to the winning ball number data stored in the winning ball number data storage area of the main side ROM 63, so that a gaming ball to be paid out as a winning ball when a gaming ball enters each entrance Determine the number of.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the winning ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in an initial setting process executed after the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Thereby, the game history management chip 300 can grasp the winning ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10.

  The calculation execution condition storage area stores a calculation execution condition which is a condition for the game history management chip 300 to start calculation for calculating the game history information. In the present embodiment, the fact that the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage reaches 500 is stored as a calculation execution condition. The calculation execution conditions stored in the main ROM 63 are transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in an initial setting process executed after the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Thereby, the game history management chip 300 can grasp the calculation execution conditions set in the pachinko machine 10.

  The game history management chip 300 is a semiconductor chip that calculates various game history information based on the game ball entry information of each game entrance and stores the calculated game history information. The game history management chip 300 includes a buffer 302 for acquiring game ball entrance information from each CPU 62x to each entrance, a register 304 for storing the number of game balls entering each entrance, and a main ROM 63. Control for the game history management chip 300, and a memory 306 for storing the number of winning balls obtained from the memory 306 for storing the number of winning balls, the memory 307 for storing the calculation execution conditions acquired from the main ROM 63, and the game history management chip 300. CPU 308 for calculating game history information based on the number of game balls entering each entrance and the number of prize balls set in each entrance when the calculation execution condition is satisfied And a calculation result storage memory 309 for storing the played game history information.

  The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for connecting the inspection machine 320 and the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65.

  The inspection machine 320 includes a CPU 321 that executes various control programs, a ROM 324 that records various control programs and fixed value data, a RAM 326 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data, and a game history management chip 300. A display unit 328 for displaying the received game history information and a connection cable 329 for connecting to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10 are provided.

  FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the contents of processing in the game history management chip 300 and the inspection machine 320.

  The buffer 302 is provided between the CPU 62x of the main MPU 62 and the register 304, and acquires the entrance information at each entrance from the CPU 62x. Specifically, the buffer 302 is provided with a plurality of bits corresponding to each entrance, and the CPU 62x turns on the bit corresponding to the entrance that has been determined that a game ball has entered (“1 )). For example, when the CPU 62x determines that a game ball has entered the first start port 33, the CPU 62x turns ON (“1”) the bit corresponding to the first start port 33 of the buffer 302.

  The buffer 302 is also provided with a bit for grasping the game mode and the state of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter also referred to as a game state) when a game ball enters each entrance. In the present embodiment, a bit for determining whether or not the normal mode is in effect (the mode that is not in the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the open / close execution mode) and the high probability mode are in effect. A bit for determining whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode, a bit for determining whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode, and the first reserved number is the upper limit A bit for determining whether or not it is in a period that is a value, a bit for determining whether or not it is in a period in which the second reserved number is an upper limit, and the front door frame 14 is open There are provided a bit for determining whether or not there is a bit and a bit for determining whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in an error that causes a trouble such as a failure. For example, when the CPU 62x determines that the normal mode is in the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33, the bit for determining whether or not the buffer 302 is in the normal mode is turned ON (“1 )).

  The register 304 stores the number of game balls that have entered each entrance. Specifically, the register 304 is configured by a plurality of counters corresponding to each entrance, and when it is determined that there is entrance information in the bit of the buffer 302 (that is, when the bit is ON). 1) is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the bit determined to have the entry information. Note that in this embodiment, the register 304 is a non-volatile register that can retain memory even when power supply is cut off.

In the present embodiment, the register 304 stores the following values by each counter corresponding to each entrance.
And large winning hole 36a to the ball entrance to the number of game balls = special winning opening ball entrance number N _S
-Number of game balls that have entered the first start port 33 = number N _{1 of} balls that have entered the first start port
-Number of game balls that have entered the second start port 34 = number N _{2 of} the second start port
-Number of game balls that have entered the first winning opening 32a = number N _{N1 of} entering the first winning opening
-Number of game balls that entered the second winning opening 32b = number N _{N2 of} entering the second winning opening
-Number of game balls that entered the third winning opening 32c = number N _{N3 of} entering the third winning opening
-Number of game balls passing through gate 35 = number of through gates _NG
-Number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage = Number of discharge passage passages N _OUT
As described above, the discharge passage passage number N _OUT matches the number of game balls fired on the game board 30.

Further, in the present embodiment, the register 304 stores the number of game balls that have entered each entrance for each game state.
・ Number of game balls that entered each entrance during normal mode ・ Number of game balls that entered each entrance during high probability mode ・ Entered each entrance during high frequency support mode Number of game balls / number of game balls that have entered each entrance during the opening / closing execution mode / game balls that have entered the first start opening 33 during the normal mode and the first reserved number is the upper limit. The number of game balls that have entered the second start opening 34 during the normal mode and the second reserved number is the upper limit value. The games that have entered the respective entry openings while the front door frame 14 is open. Number of balls / Number of game balls that entered each entrance during an error

  For example, it is determined that the bit corresponding to the first start port 33 of the buffer 302 has the ball entry information (the bit is ON), and the bit for determining whether or not the normal mode is in the information. If it is determined that there is a bit (the bit is ON), the value of the first start entrance ball number counter, which is a counter for storing the number of game balls entering the first start port 33, is set to 1. Is added, and 1 is added to the value of the first start entrance ball number counter in the normal mode, which is a counter for storing the number of game balls entering the first start port 33 during the normal mode. The

  The winning ball number data storage memory 306 is a memory for storing the winning ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, prize ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 and stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306. . Accordingly, the content of the winning ball number data stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306 is the same as the content of the winning ball number data stored in the main ROM 63.

  The calculation execution condition storage memory 307 is a memory for storing calculation execution conditions set in the pachinko machine 10. The calculation execution condition is a condition for starting a calculation for calculating game history information as described above. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the calculation for calculating the game history information is started every time the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage reaches 500. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the calculation execution conditions stored in the main ROM 63 are transmitted to the game history management chip 300 by the CPU 62x and stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307. Therefore, the contents of the calculation execution conditions stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 are the same as the contents of the calculation execution conditions stored in the main ROM 63. As a calculation execution condition, the number of game balls that have passed or entered other than the discharge passage may be stored as a reference, or a number other than 500 may be stored as a reference.

The CPU 308 determines whether or not the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 is satisfied. When the CPU 308 determines that the calculation execution condition is satisfied, the award ball number data storage memory 306 Various game history information is calculated on the basis of the number-of-a-game data stored in and the number of game balls that have entered the entrances stored in the register 304. In the present embodiment, the CPU 308 calculates the following value as the game history information every time the value of the discharge passage passage number N _OUT stored in the register 304 reaches 500.

・ Role ratio = Number of game balls paid out as prize balls due to actuating action (number of prize balls) / Total number of game balls delivered as prize balls (total prize balls)
= (N ₂ × P ₂ + N _S × P _S ) / (N _N1 × P _N1 + N _N2 × P _N2 + N _N3 × P _N3 + N ₁ × P ₁ + N ₂ × P ₂ + N _S × P _S )
・ Consecutive character ratio = Number of game balls paid out as winning balls due to continuous action actuated (number of consecutive feature award balls) / Total number of gaming balls paid out as prize balls (total number of winning balls)
= (N _S × P _S ) / (N _N1 × P _N1 + N _N2 × P _N2 + N _N3 × P _N3 + N ₁ × P ₁ + N ₂ × P ₂ + N _S × P _S )
・ Risk rate (total)
= Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls (total number of prize balls) / Number of game balls launched on the game board 30 = (N _N1 × P _N1 + N _N2 × P _N2 + N _N3 × P _N3 + N ₁ × P ₁ + N ₂ × P ₂ + N _S × P _S ) / N _OUT

The basis for calculating the above values is as follows.
・ Number of game balls that are paid out as prize balls due to the operation of the prize (number of prize balls)
= Number of game balls paid out as winning balls when the electric winning combination 34a as a normal electric winning combination and the variable winning device 36 as a special electric winning combination are activated = to the second starting opening 34 and the big winning opening 36a Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the entrance of the game balls of = N ₂ × P ₂ + N _S × P _S
・ Number of game balls paid out as prize balls due to continuous feature activation (number of consecutive feature prize balls)
= Number of game balls paid out as prize balls by operating the variable winning device 36 as a special electric accessory = Games paid out as prize balls based on the entrance of game balls into the big prize opening 36a Number of spheres = N _S × P _S
-Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the first to third winning openings 32a to 32c = N _N1 × P _N1 + N _N2 × P _N2 + N _N3 × P _N3
・ Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls (total prize balls)
= Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the entrance of game balls to the first to third winning openings 32a to 32c, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34 and the big winning opening 36a = _{N N1 × P N1 + N N2} × P N2 + N N3 × P N3 + N 1 × P 1 + N 2 × P 2 + N S × P S

  Further, in the present embodiment, the following game history information is calculated based on the number of game balls that have entered the entrances counted for each game state.

・ Payout ratio (in normal mode)
= Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entering the first start port 33 during the normal mode / Based on game balls entering the first start port 33 during the normal mode Number of game balls paid out as prize balls + number of game balls paid out as prize balls on the basis of the entrance of game balls into the first to third winning ports 32a to 32c during the normal mode Tamari (in normal mode)
= Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls in the normal mode / Number of game balls launched on the game board 30 in the normal mode / race rate (in the high frequency support mode)
= Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls during the high frequency support mode / Number of game balls launched to the game board 30 during the high frequency support mode / BY (in normal mode)
= Number of gaming balls paid out as winning balls based on the entering of gaming balls into the first to third winning ports 32a to 32c during the normal mode + the first holding number during the normal mode is the upper limit value The number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entering the first start port 33 during the period + the second start port during the normal mode and the second reserved number is the upper limit value Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on game balls entering 34 / number of game balls fired on game board 30 during normal mode / BY _MIN (in normal mode)
= Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the first to third winning ports 32a to 32c during the normal mode / game balls launched to the game board 30 during the normal mode Number of balls and the entrance rate when the front door frame is open = the number of game balls that enter the entrance when the front door frame 14 is open / the number of game balls that are launched on the game board 30 and the entrance rate during error = Number of game balls that have entered each entrance during an error / number of game balls that have been fired on the game board 30 The above-described game history information is merely an example, and other game history information is calculated. It is good.

  When the CPU 308 calculates the various game history information, the CPU 308 stores the calculated game history information in the calculation result storage memory 309 and resets the values of the counters in the register 304 to “0”. Hereinafter, various game history information calculated every time 500 game balls are launched onto the game board 30 will be collectively referred to as a “short-term game history information group”.

  The calculation result storage memory 309 is a memory for storing game history information calculated by the CPU 308. In this embodiment, the calculation result storage memory 309 is configured by a non-volatile memory capable of holding the memory even when power supply is cut off. Has been. The calculation result storage memory 309 also stores information related to the order in which the short-term game history information group is written, and the CPU 308 calculates when there is no empty area for writing the calculated short-term game history information group. The short-term game history information group that has been written is stored in an area in which the short-term game history information group having the oldest written order is stored. That is, the calculation result storage memory 309 is configured to be overwritten in order from the oldest short-term game history information group (first-in / first-out method), and the latest short-term game history information group is always stored. It becomes a state.

  In the present embodiment, the calculation result storage memory 309 has a capacity capable of storing 1200 short-term game history information groups calculated every time 500 game balls are launched to the game board 30. doing. For example, if game balls are fired continuously for 10 hours per day, 60000 game balls will be fired per day. Therefore, 120 short-term game history information groups are calculated per day. The result is stored in the memory 309 for storing results. Therefore, the calculation result storage memory 309 can store the short-term game history information group for the latest 10 days.

  When the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the inspection machine 320 transmits a transmission request command for requesting transmission of game history information to the game history management chip 300. When the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65. Thereby, the inspection machine 320 acquires the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 and causes the display unit 328 to display the acquired game history information.

  As described above, in this embodiment, every time the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage reaches 500, that is, every time 500 game balls are fired on the game board 30, a game such as an accessory ratio is obtained. History information is calculated and stored in the calculation result storage memory 309. Then, the calculated game history information is displayed on the display unit 328 of the inspection machine 320.

A3. Details of various processes executed in the gaming machine:
Next, each process executed by the MPU 62 (CPU 62x in this embodiment) will be described. The processing of the MPU 62 is roughly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

  First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main MPU 62. In step S10101, an initial setting process is executed. Specifically, initial setting of each control device when power is turned on, determination of the validity of data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Further, in the present embodiment, in the initial setting process, a process of transmitting operation data to the game history management chip 300 is executed. Specifically, the calculation data (prize ball number data and calculation execution conditions) stored in the main ROM 63 are transmitted to the game history management chip 300. As will be described later, the game history management chip 300 that has received the calculation data stores the prize ball number data and the calculation execution condition in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 and the calculation execution condition storage memory 307, respectively. Is sent to the main MPU 62. After executing Step S10101, the process proceeds to Step S10102.

  In step S10102, it is determined whether a setting completion command has been received. If it is determined in step S10102 that a setting completion command has been received (S10102: YES), the process proceeds to step S10103, and interrupt permission is set to permit generation of timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10102 that a setting completion command has not been received (S10102: NO), the process of step S10102 is executed again. That is, until the setting completion command is received, the process does not proceed to step S10103, and the interrupt permission setting for permitting the generation of the timer interrupt process is not performed.

  After executing Step S10103, the process proceeds to the remaining process of Steps S10104 to S10107. That is, the main MPU 62 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing as described later, but a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes in steps S10104 to S10107 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S10104 to S10107 are non-periodic processes that are executed irregularly.

  In the remaining process, first, in step S10104, an interrupt prohibition setting is performed to prohibit the generation of the timer interrupt process. In subsequent step S10105, random number initial value update processing for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S10106, variation counter updating processing for updating the variation type counter CS is performed. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 64, the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S10107, an interrupt permission setting for switching from a state in which the generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which the timer interrupt processing is permitted is performed. After executing the process of step S10107, the process returns to step S10104, and the processes of step S10104 to step S10107 are repeated.

  Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 62 (CPU 62x in this embodiment) will be described.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the main MPU 62. The timer interrupt process is started at a specific cycle (4 msec cycle in this embodiment).

  In the timer interrupt process, a lottery random number update process is first executed in step S10201. In the lottery random number update process, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after executing the process of sequentially reading the current numerical information from the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, and adding 1 to each of the read numerical information Then, a process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10202.

  In step S 10202, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in the random number initial value update process, and the process advances to step S 10203 to update the variation type counter CS in the variation type counter update process. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10204.

  In step S10204, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 36c and 34b is executed. For example, when the information for switching the special winning opening 36a to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 36c is started, and when the information for switching to the closed state is set. The output of the drive signal is stopped. In addition, when the information for switching the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory driving unit 34b is started, and the information to be switched to the closed state is set. If set, output of the drive signal is stopped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10205.

  In step S10205, read processing is executed. In the reading process, a signal other than the incoming ball signal is read and the read information is stored for use in future processing. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10206.

  In step S10206, a signal received from each of the incoming detection sensors 44a to 44h is read, and an incoming detection process for performing processing corresponding to the read information is executed. The details of the entry detection process will be described later in detail. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10207.

  In step S 10207, the ball detection information is output to the bit of the buffer 302 of the game history management chip 300. Specifically, the bit corresponding to the entrance for which it is determined that a game ball has entered in the entrance detection processing in step S10206 is set to ON (“1”), and the bit corresponding to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Is turned on (“1”). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10208.

  In step S10208, a timer update process for updating the numerical information of a predetermined timer counter provided in the main RAM 64 is executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10209 to execute a prize ball command output setting process. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10210.

  In step S10210, a start-up entrance process that accompanies the entry of game balls into the first start-up opening 33 and the second start-up opening 34 is executed. In the starting ball entry processing, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are determined based on the determination that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. The value is acquired and the acquired counter value is stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64. After executing step S10210, the process proceeds to step S10211.

  In step S <b> 10211, a through gate entry process for entering (passing) a game ball into the through gate 35 is executed. In the through process for the through gate, the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired based on the determination that the game ball has entered (passed through) the through gate 35, and the acquired counter value is used as the power of the RAM 64. Store in the reserved area 64d. After executing Step S10211, the process proceeds to Step S10212.

  In step S10212, a game times control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In the game times control process, jackpot lottery, display control of the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, and the like are performed. After executing Step S10212, the process proceeds to Step S10213.

  In step S10213, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. In the game state transition process, a process of shifting the game state to an opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like is executed. After executing step S10213, the process proceeds to step S10214.

  In step S10214, an electric combination support process for controlling the electric combination 34a is executed. In the electric utility support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is in an open state (electric accessory release lottery), and when it is determined to be in an open state, the electric accessory 34a is driven and controlled. After executing Step S10214, the process proceeds to Step S10215.

  In step S10215, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, a process for launching a game ball to the game area PA when the operation handle 25 is operated by the player is executed. After executing step S10215, the process proceeds to step S10216.

  In step S10216, external information setting processing is executed so as to control the start and end of output of an external signal according to the processing results of various processing executed in the current timer interrupt processing. After executing step S10216, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

  Next, the entrance detection process executed in step S10206 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) will be described.

  In the entrance detection process, a process for confirming the detection results of the entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h is executed. In this confirmation, the input port 62b of the input / output port 62a of the main MPU 62 is confirmed. Here, prior to the description of the incoming ball detection process, the configuration of the input port 62b provided in the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 62 b provided in the main MPU 62. The input port 62b is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that eight types of signals can be handled simultaneously. An area for storing “0” or “1” information according to the voltage of each signal is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, the area includes 0th bit D0 to 7th bit D7.

  Further, more than eight types of signals are input to the input port 62b. In order to limit the number of simultaneously input targets to eight types, the signal group to be input to the input port 62b depends on the driver IC. It is switched through switching control. In the entrance detection process, a signal group to be input to the input port 62b is set to each of the entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h.

  In such a situation, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the big winning opening detection sensor 44a, and the first bit D1 is the ball entry signal from the first start opening detection sensor 44b. Corresponding information is stored, the second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the pitch signal from the second starting port detection sensor 44c, and the third bit D3 indicates the pitch signal from the first winning port detection sensor 44d. Corresponding information is stored, the fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the winning signal from the second winning opening detection sensor 44e, and the fifth bit D5 is stored in the winning signal from the third winning opening detection sensor 44f. Corresponding information is stored, information corresponding to the incoming signal from the through gate detection sensor 44g is stored in the sixth bit D6, and the seventh bit D7 is input from the discharge passage detection sensor 44h. Information corresponding to a sphere signals are stored.

  In this case, when each of the entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h does not detect the passing of the game ball, it outputs an HI level signal indicating that it is not detected as an entrance signal, and the passing of the game ball Is detected, the LOW level signal indicating that the ball is being detected is output. However, the main control board 151 is provided with an inverting circuit, and the signal state is inverted before the detection signals are input to the input port 62b. When the LOW level signal is received through the inverting circuit, the input port 62b stores "0" information (data 0 or none information) in the corresponding bit, and receives the HI level signal through the inverting circuit. If it is, information “1” (data 1 or presence information) is stored in the corresponding bit.

  That is, in a situation where the passing of the game ball is not detected by the entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h, information of “0” corresponding to the information indicating non-detection is stored in the corresponding bit, and the passing of the game ball is detected. In such a situation, “1” information corresponding to information indicating that detection is in progress is stored in the corresponding bit.

  Each of the incoming ball detection sensors 44a to 44h outputs a LOW level signal as an incoming ball signal while not detecting the passing of a game ball, and HI as an incoming ball signal while detecting the passing of a gaming ball. It may be configured to output a level signal. In this case, the inverting circuit may be omitted.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the entrance detection process executed by the main MPU 62. FIG. 15A is a flowchart showing the incoming ball detection process executed by the main MPU 62. FIG. 15B is an explanatory diagram schematically showing a ball entry determination area used in the ball entry detection process. In the entrance detection process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 15A, first, in step S10301, the information currently stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 is stored in the register of the main MPU 62. A process of shifting to the 1 entrance determination area WA1 is executed. The first entry determination area WA1 is composed of 8 bits as shown in FIG. 15 (b-1), and stores all of the information stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7. It is possible data capacity. In this case, the storage source bits in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 and the storage destination bits in the first entrance determination area WA1 are determined in a one-to-one correspondence, for example, the 0th bit. Information of D0 is always stored in a predetermined bit in the first entrance determination area WA1.

  In a succeeding step S10302, a wait process for detecting the incoming ball is executed. In this wait process, the main MPU 62 waits without executing any process until a predetermined wait time elapses. In this pachinko machine 10, 10 μsec is set as the wait time, but it does not disturb the execution of the periodic timer interrupt process, and the effects described below are sufficiently exerted by setting the wait process. However, the specific wait time is arbitrary, but it is preferably in the range of 2 μsec to 500 μsec, more preferably in the range of 10 μsec to 100 μsec.

  Incidentally, it takes at least 1.2 μsec to execute the process of one step. Therefore, even if the process of step S10302 is not set, a forcible wait time of 1.2 μsec occurs between steps S10301 and S10303. In this regard, in step S10302, not only the minimum time required for executing the process but also an additional wait time is set between the process of step S10301 and the process of step S10303.

  In a succeeding step S10303, a process of shifting the information currently stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 to the second entrance determination area WA2 in the register of the main MPU 62 is executed. Incidentally, since the information update at the input port 62b is performed at an interval shorter than the time from the completion of step S10301 to the start of step S10303, the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 in step S10303. The information transferred from can be different from that in step S10301.

  Similarly to the first entry determination area WA1, the second entry determination area WA2 is composed of 8 bits as shown in FIG. 15 (b-2), and the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 described above. It has a data capacity that can store all of the stored information. In this case, the storage source bits in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 and the storage destination bits in the second entry determination area WA2 are determined in a one-to-one correspondence with each other. The relationship between the bit and the storage destination bit is the same as in the case of the first entry determination area WA1.

  Then, in step S10304, after executing the ball entering determination process, the ball entering detection process is terminated. The entrance determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a ball entering determination process executed by the main MPU 62. In the entry determination process, first, in step S10401, 8 is set in the entry determination counter provided in the main RAM 64. The numerical information of the entrance determination counter corresponds to 8 entrance entrance bits. Specifically, in the present embodiment, “8” in the numerical information of the pitch determination counter is the 0th bit D0 of the big winning opening 36a, and “7” is the 1st bit D1 of the first start opening 33, “6”. Is the second bit D2 of the second starting port 34, "5" is the third bit D3 of the first winning port 32a, "4" is the fourth bit D4 of the second winning port 32b, and "3" is the third winning port. The fifth bit D5, “2” of 32c corresponds to the sixth bit D6 of the through gate 35, and “1” corresponds to the seventh bit D7 of the discharge passage. In subsequent step S10402, each bit information corresponding to the numerical information of the current entrance determination counter in the first entrance determination area WA1 and the second entrance determination area WA2 is grasped. Each piece of information grasped in this case is information read from the same bit in the input port 62b.

  In subsequent step S10403, AND processing of each information grasped in step S10402 is executed, and the AND processing result is stored in a register. In step S10404, the first post-computation area WA3 and the second post-computation area WA4 are stored. Among them, the AND processing result is stored in the corresponding bit on the side different from the side on which the information on the result of the AND processing is stored in the ball entry detection processing in the processing time of the previous timer interrupt processing. The first post-computation area WA3 and the second post-computation area WA4 are composed of 8 bits as shown in FIGS. 15 (b-3) and 15 (b-4), and the first entry determination area WA1. The data capacity can store all the information of the AND processing result of each bit and each bit of the second entry determination area WA2. In this case, the order of bits in the first entrance determination area WA1 and the second entrance determination area WA2 subjected to AND processing, and the order of each bit in the first post-computation area WA3 and the second post-computation area WA4, Is uniquely defined.

  After that, in step S10405, in the first post-computation area WA3 and the second post-computation area WA4, information on the result of the AND process is stored in the ball entry judgment process in the previous timer interrupt process. Therefore, the bit information corresponding to the numerical information of the current entrance determination counter is read. In step S10406, an inversion process for inverting the read information between “0” and “1” is executed.

  Thereafter, in step S10407, AND processing of the AND processing result information in step S10403 and the inversion processing result information in step S10406 is executed. In subsequent step S10408, the AND processing result is the ball detection detection start information. It is determined whether or not it is “1” corresponding to. If it is determined in step S10408 that the AND process result is “1”, the process proceeds to step S10409 and subsequent steps.

  In step S10409, it is determined whether or not the numerical information of the current entry determination counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to one of the first start port 33 and the second start port 34. If it corresponds to either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, “1” is set to the start port entrance flag provided in the main side RAM 64 in step S10410, and step S10411 is performed. Then, 1 is added to the numerical information of the three prize ball counters provided in the main RAM 64.

  The start entrance ball flag specifies the entrance of the game ball to the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 by the main MPU 62 and the game ball to the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. It is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 62 that the process corresponding to the incoming ball is in a state where a process other than the execution of the prize ball should be executed. Incidentally, since the entrance detection sensors 44b and 44c are provided in the first start opening 33 and the second start opening 34, respectively, the entrance into the first start opening 33 and the entrance into the second start opening 34 are performed. May be simultaneously recognized within the range of one processing of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, in order to respond to this, the start ball entering flag is provided in correspondence with the number of the start ports 33 and 34, and specifically, two are provided. The three prize ball counter is a counter for specifying in the main MPU 62 the number of times to output a three prize ball command instructing execution of three prize balls.

  If a negative determination is made in step S10409, it is determined in step S10412 whether or not the current numerical value information of the winning determination counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to the big winning opening 36a (variable winning device 36). judge. If it corresponds to the variable winning device 36, “1” is set to the big prize opening entrance flag provided in the main RAM 64 in step S 10413, and provided in the main RAM 64 in step S 10414. 1 is added to the numerical information of the 15 prize ball counters.

  The big winning mouth entry flag is a process corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the variable prize winning device 36, while the main MPU 62 specifies the game ball entry into the variable prize winning device 36. This is a flag for the main MPU 62 to specify that processing other than execution is to be executed. The 15 prize ball counter is a counter for the main MPU 62 to specify the number of times to output 15 prize ball commands instructing execution of 15 prize balls.

  If a negative determination is made in step S10412, it is determined in step S10415 whether or not the numerical information of the current entry determination counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to the through gate 35. If it corresponds to the through gate 35, “1” is set to the through passage flag provided in the main RAM 64 in step S10416.

  The through pass flag specifies that the main side MPU 62 specifies that the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 and that the process corresponding to the entry of the game ball into the through gate 35 is to be executed. This is a flag for specifying by the MPU 62.

  If a negative determination is made in step S10415, in step S10417, the current numerical value information of the winning determination counter corresponds to one of the first winning port 32a, the second winning port 32b, and the third winning port 32c. It is determined whether or not the information indicates a bit. If it corresponds to any one of the first winning port 32a, the second winning port 32b, and the third winning port 32c, in step S10418, the general winning port entrance flag provided in the main RAM 64 is set to “1”. Is set, and in step S10419, 1 is added to the numerical value information of the three prize ball counters provided in the main RAM 64.

  The general winning entry pitch flag is a flag for the main side MPU 62 to specify the entering of a game ball into the first winning entry 32a, the second winning entry 32b, or the third winning entry 32c. By the way, the first winning opening 32a, the second winning opening 32b, and the third winning opening 32c are provided with the ball detection sensors 44d, 44e, 44f, respectively. There is a case where the ball entering the winning port 32b and the ball entering the third winning port are simultaneously grasped within the range of one processing time of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, in order to cope with this, the general winning opening entrance flag is provided corresponding to the number of the general winning openings 32a, 32b, 32c, and specifically, three are provided. The 10-award ball counter is a counter for specifying in the main MPU 62 the number of times to output a 3-award ball command instructing the execution of 10 award balls.

  If a negative determination is made in step S10417, it means that the current entry corresponds to the discharge passage, so in step SAD20, the discharge passage passage flag provided in the main RAM 64 is set to “1”. Set. The discharge passage passage flag is a flag for the main side MPU 62 to specify that the game ball has passed through the discharge passage.

  When a negative determination is made in step S10408, or after execution of any one of steps S10411, S10414, S10416, S10419, and S10420, the process proceeds to step S10421. In step S10421, the entrance determination counter is decremented by 1, and then it is determined in step S10422 whether the entrance determination counter is “0”.

  If the entry determination counter is not “0”, the processing of steps S10402 to S10420 is executed for the bits corresponding to the numerical information of the entry determination counter updated in step S10421. When the processing of step S10402 to step S10420 is executed for the numerical information set in step S10401, an affirmative determination is made in step S10422, and the main entrance determination processing is terminated.

  Next, by executing the above-mentioned ball entering detection process (FIG. 15), the general winning port 32, the variable winning device 36, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, the through gate 35, and the discharge passage are discharged. The manner in which the presence or absence of a ball is detected will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the presence / absence of a ball is detected. First, the timing for monitoring the detection results (hereinafter also referred to as “entrance information”) in the entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17A is a timing chart for explaining the timing for monitoring each entry information.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, in the configuration in which the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is activated at a cycle of T1 (specifically, 4 msec), the process for monitoring the entrance information is performed each time the timer interrupt process is performed. It is performed twice (step S10301, step S10303). The process of monitoring each set of entry information is executed so that the timing is changed, but the process of monitoring the entry information on the front side (step S10301) is T2 with respect to the timing when the timer interrupt process is started. It is executed at the timing when the time elapses.

  In this case, the timing at which the entrance detection process is executed in the timer interrupt process is executed before the process whose processing time is likely to fluctuate, such as the game time control process and the electric role support process. The processing executed prior to the detection processing is processing in which the processing time is relatively difficult to fluctuate. Therefore, the period until the process of monitoring the incoming ball information on the front side in the timer interrupt process of each processing time is the same, substantially the same or similar at T2. Therefore, among the processes for monitoring a set of incoming ball information included in each processing time of the timer interrupt process, the process for monitoring the incoming ball information on the front side is periodically executed.

  In addition, among the processes for monitoring each set of entry information, between the process for monitoring the entry information on the front side (step S10301) and the process for monitoring the entry information on the rear side (step S10303), A waiting process for entering a ball (step S10302) is executed. In such a waiting process, no waiting process is executed and only a wait is made until a certain waiting time T3 elapses. Accordingly, among the processes for monitoring a set of incoming ball information included in each processing time of the timer interrupt process, the process for monitoring the incoming ball information is periodically executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17B, description will be given of the contents of the calculation executed when the entrance determination is performed. FIG. 17B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the calculation executed when the entry determination is performed. Actually, various operations are performed in units of 1 bit, but in the following description, the contents of the operations will be described in units of 1 byte. However, a configuration in which an operation in units of 1 byte as described below is actually performed may be employed.

  In the case of FIG. 17B, first, in the process of monitoring the incoming information on the front side in the n-th timer interruption process, “00100000” is displayed in the first incoming determination area WA1, as shown in FIG. 17B1. "Is set. In this case, the entry information of the third prize opening detection sensor 44f among the entry detection sensors 44a to 44h is information indicating that a game ball is detected (hereinafter also referred to as entry information), The entry information of other sensors is information indicating that no game ball is detected (hereinafter also referred to as no entry information).

  In the process of monitoring the incoming information on the rear side in the n-th timer interruption process, “10100000” is set in the second incoming determination area WA2, as shown in FIG. 17B2. In this case, each of the entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h includes the exit passage detection sensor 44h and the third winning port detection sensor 44f as entry information, and the other sensors as entry information. .

  When the information of the first entry determination area WA1 and the second entry determination area WA2 is set as described above, the AND processing result is “00100000” as shown in FIG. Information is set in the area WA3 after the first calculation as a monitoring result of the entrance information in the timer interruption process of the nth processing time. In addition, when the monitoring result of the entrance information is set in the area WA3 after the first calculation in the n-1th timer interrupt process, the monitoring result of the entrance information in the nth timer interrupt process is the second calculation. It is set in the rear area WA4. In addition, although the entry determination process is executed using the monitoring result of the entry information at the (n-1) th time and the monitoring result of the entry information at the nth time, the contents of the calculation of this process are omitted here.

  Next, in the process of monitoring the previous-side entry information in the (n + 1) th timer interruption process, “10100110” is set in the first entry determination area WA1, as shown in FIG. 17 (B4). In this case, each of the entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h includes the exit passage detection sensor 44h, the third winning opening detection sensor 44f, the second start opening detection sensor 44c, and the first start opening detection sensor 44b. The other sensors have no entry information.

  In the process of monitoring the incoming ball information on the rear side in the (n + 1) th timer interruption process, “101000110” is set in the second incoming ball judging area WA2, as shown in FIG. 17 (B5). In this case, each of the entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h includes the exit passage detection sensor 44h, the third winning opening detection sensor 44f, and the first start opening detection sensor 44b. No entry information.

  When the information of the first entrance determination area WA1 and the second entrance determination area WA2 is set as described above, the AND processing result is “10110000” as shown in FIG. The information is set in the second post-computation area WA4 as a monitoring result of the entrance information in the timer interruption process of the (n + 1) th processing time.

  Thereafter, in the entry determination process (FIG. 16) in the (n + 1) th timer interruption process, first, the monitoring result of the entry information in the nth timer interruption process is read out from the first post-calculation area WA3 and read out. Inversion processing is performed on the information of the monitored results. Then, as shown in FIG. 17 (B7), “11011111” is obtained. Then, the monitoring result of the entrance information in the (n + 1) th timer interrupt process is ANDed with the information on the result of the inversion process. As a result, “10000010” is obtained as shown in FIG. In this case, in the entry determination process, it is determined that the entry of the game ball is detected by the discharge passage detection sensor 44h, and it is determined that the entry of the game ball is detected by the first start port detection sensor 44b. .

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 17B4, the second start port detection sensor 44c is information indicating that there is an entry in the process of monitoring the entry information on the front side in the (n + 1) th timer interruption process. Is caused by electrical noise. In this case, even if it is confirmed that there is a change from the no entry information to the presence information, it is not immediately determined that the entry has occurred, but the entry is made when the presence information is confirmed multiple times. This is a configuration that identifies occurrence. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17 (B5), in the process of monitoring the incoming ball information on the rear side in the (n + 1) th timer interruption process, the second start port detection sensor 44c is the no-going ball information. Noise generation is not handled as game balls.

  In addition, the third winning hole detection sensor 44f enters in each of the process of monitoring one set of entry information in the n-th timer interrupt process and the process of monitoring one set of entry information in the n + 1-th timer interrupt process. Although it is ball presence information, this indicates a state in which a game ball whose occurrence has already been detected is continuously detected. In this case, since the occurrence of the entry is specified on the condition that the monitoring result of the entry information in the n-th timer interruption process is “0”, the entry of one game ball is made up of a plurality of entries. I will not treat it as a ball.

  When the entrance detection process is executed as described above, the detection results of the entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h are monitored, and the entrance corresponding to the game ball is generated. Are added to the three prize ball counters, the ten prize ball counters, and the fifteen prize ball counters according to the place of entry. If any one of these counters is “1” or more, the prize ball command is set in the prize ball command output setting process (step S10209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13). The awarded ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70. In this case, the output setting of the prize ball command is performed only once in one processing time of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, for example, even if the 15 prize ball counter is “2” or more, the 15 prize ball commands are transmitted only once in one process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined plurality (for example, two or three) of prize ball commands may be transmitted in one processing time.

  In addition, there may be a case where each of the three prize ball counters, the ten prize ball counters, and the 15 prize ball counters is “1” or more. In this case, an output of a prize ball command with a large number of prize balls is output. have priority. That is, the output of 15 prize ball commands has priority over the output of 10 prize ball commands and the output of 3 prize ball commands, and the output of 10 prize ball commands has priority over the output of 3 prize ball commands. .

  When the 15 prize ball counter is set to “1” or more and the 15 prize ball command is set as an output target, 1 is subtracted from the 15 prize ball counter. Further, when the 10 prize ball counter is set to “1” or more and the 10 prize ball command is set as an output target, 1 is subtracted from the 10 prize ball counter. When the three prize ball counter is set to “1” or more and the three prize ball command is set as an output target, the three prize ball counter is decremented by one.

  Next, processing executed by the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 will be described. In the present embodiment, the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 executes the following main process as the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300.

  In step S10501, it is determined whether calculation data including winning ball number data and calculation execution conditions is received. If it is determined in step S10501 that calculation data has been received (S10501: YES), the process proceeds to step S10502. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10501 that calculation data has not been received (S10501: NO), the process of step S10501 is executed again. That is, until the calculation data is received, the infinite loop is continued without proceeding to the next step S10502.

  In step S10502, the received winning ball number data is stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10503, and the received calculation execution condition is stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10504.

  In step S10504, a setting completion command means that the storage of the winning ball number data in the winning ball number data storage memory 306 is completed and the storage of the calculation execution conditions in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 is completed. Is transmitted to the main CPU 62x. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10505.

In step S10505, it is determined whether or not the bit of the buffer 302 includes the entrance information received from the main CPU 62x ("1" is stored in the bit). If it is determined in step S10505 that the bit in the buffer 302 has the entry information received from the main CPU 62x (S10505: YES), the process proceeds to step S10506, and the counter of the register corresponding to the bit in the buffer 302 is set to 1. to add. Specifically, for example, when the bit corresponding to the first start opening entry information in the buffer 302 is “1” and the bit corresponding to the normal mode is “1”, the big prize of the register 304 is obtained. with it adds 1 to counter corresponding to the mouth ball entrance number N _S, 1 is added to the counter corresponding to the winning opening ball entrance number in the normal mode. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10507. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10505 that there is no entry information received from the main CPU 62x in the bit of the buffer 302 (S10505: NO), the process proceeds to step S10507 without executing step S10506.

In step S10507, it is determined whether or not the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 is satisfied. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the value of the discharge passage passage number N _OUT stored in the register 304 is 500, that is, whether or not the number of game balls launched to the game board 30 has reached 500. judge. If it is determined in step S10507 that the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 is satisfied (S10507: YES), the process proceeds to step S10508.

  In step S10508, based on the winning ball number data stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306 and the number of game balls that have entered the respective entrances stored in the register 304, various types of game history information are stored. An arithmetic process for calculating is performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10509, and the various game history information calculated is stored in the calculation result storage memory 309. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10510, and the number of game balls that enter the entrances stored in the register 304 is cleared to zero. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10511.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S10507 that the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 is not satisfied (S10507: NO), step S10511 is not executed without executing step S10508 to step S10510. Proceed to

  In step S10511, it is determined whether or not a game history information transmission request command has been received from the inspection machine 320. If it is determined that a transmission request command has been received (S10511: YES), the process proceeds to step S10512. The game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320. The inspection machine 320 causes the display unit 328 to display the received game history information. After executing Step S10512, the process returns to Step S10505, and the processing from Step S10505 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10511 that a game history information transmission request command has not been received from the inspection machine 320 (S10511: NO), the process returns to step S10505 without executing the process of step S10512. The processing after S10505 is repeated.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the game history management chip 300 can calculate the game history information, which is information correlated with the behavior of the game ball in the executed game. If the gaming machine has been tampered with, etc., the calculated game history information may be an unnatural value different from the assumed value. Therefore, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can determine whether the pachinko machine 10 has been tampered with by checking the game history information. As a result, the game soundness can be improved.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the game history management chip 300 includes a calculation result storage memory 309 that stores the calculated game history information in a nonvolatile manner. Since the game history information is information having a correlation with the behavior of the game ball in the executed game, the game history information is different for each pachinko machine 10 and is unique information of the pachinko machine 10. That is, the game history information is information that reflects the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10. According to the present embodiment, game history information that is information reflecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the operation result storage memory 309 of the game history management chip 300 stored in the housing of the pachinko machine 10 body. To do. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10, the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be inspected by acquiring game history information from the main body of the pachinko machine 10 itself. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the pachinko machine 10 can acquire information on the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 by a hall computer installed in the game hall. However, since the pachinko machine 10 circulates repeatedly, the pachinko machine 10 may be placed in a state where it is not connected to the hall computer. In this case, the conventional pachinko machine 10 holds information on the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10. Can not do it. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment stores the game history information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10, in the operation result storage memory 309 of the game history management chip 300 stored in the housing of the pachinko machine 10 body. Since it is stored, even if the pachinko machine 10 is not connected to the hall computer, the game history information can be acquired from the main body of the pachinko machine 10. That is, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment always has a one-to-one correspondence between the pachinko machine 10 and the game history information, regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 (a state installed in a game hall or a distribution state). The pachinko machine 10 can be managed and inspected. As a result, the game soundness can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the game history management chip 300 and the main CPU 62x are both mounted on the main MPU 62, and are configured to operate with the same power source. Therefore, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall and the game history information of the pachinko machine 10 is calculated by the hall computer, a problem has occurred in the power system of the hall computer. Even when a problem occurs in the processing of the hall computer, the game history information can be calculated as long as power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10. If the main CPU 62x and the game history management chip 300 are operated by different power sources, and if there is a problem with the power supply of the game history management chip 300, the game is being executed by the pachinko machine 10. Regardless, there is a problem that the game history information cannot be calculated. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the main CPU 62x and the game history management chip 300 are operated by the same power source, the game history information is always calculated if the game can be executed. Can do. Therefore, the reliability of game history information can be improved.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the calculation result storage memory 309 is stored inside the substrate box, which is a space in which a trace of opening and closing (also referred to as an open trace and an open trace) remains. Accordingly, when the operation result storage memory 309 is physically contacted, a trace of opening the substrate box remains. Therefore, if the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 is changed through physical contact with the calculation result storage memory 309, the change is grasped from the trace of the board box. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, unauthorized modification of game history information can be prevented. Since the pachinko machine 10 is in constant circulation, various external contacts are made in the process of circulation, but the calculation result storage memory 309 is stored inside the substrate box where traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 10 is in circulation, unauthorized modification of the game history information by someone can be suppressed. In addition, since the game history information is information acquired based on the executed game, it is possible to manage and inspect the game-related characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 using the game history information. Therefore, according to this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 can be appropriately managed and inspected by preventing unauthorized modification of the game history information reflecting the game-related characteristics of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game soundness can be improved.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the game history management chip 300 acquires the winning ball number data stored in the winning ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63, so the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 relating to the paid-out winning ball Can be calculated. Further, even if different prize ball number data is set for each type (model) of the pachinko machine 10, the game history management chip 300 uses the award ball number data set for each type of the pachinko machine 10 to correct the game. History information can be calculated. If the gaming machine has been tampered with, etc., the calculated game history information may be an unnatural value different from the assumed value. Therefore, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can appropriately determine whether the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified by confirming correct game history information. As a result, the game soundness can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the main CPU 62x transmits a signal including the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63 to the game history management chip 300, so that the game history management is performed. The configuration in which the chip 300 cannot access the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63, or the storage position of the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63 by the game history management chip 300 Even in a configuration in which (memory address) cannot be grasped, the game history management chip 300 can acquire the winning ball number data stored in the winning ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the main process of the main CPU 62x, the timer interrupt process interrupt is not permitted until the setting completion command is received, and the game ball launch control process included in the timer interrupt process is not executed. It has a configuration. That is, since the game ball is not fired until the storage of the winning ball number data in the winning ball number data storage memory 306 is completed, the gaming ball leaks from the calculation target of the game history information by the gaming history management chip 300. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, game history information for each period until 500 game balls are detected by the discharge passage detection sensor 44h is calculated and stored, so that each pachinko machine 10 uses 500 game balls. Even if there is a variation in the time until the game is detected, game history information that does not affect the variation in the time can be calculated and stored. That is, even when there is a difference in the frequency with which the game balls are fired, it is possible to calculate and store highly accurate game history information that is less susceptible to the difference. Further, the required storage capacity can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the entrance information to each entrance is stored as it is.

  If the type (model) of the pachinko machine 10 is different, the characteristics of the game are also different, so the optimum conditions for executing the calculation for calculating the game history information are also different. Therefore, different calculation execution conditions are stored for each type (model) of the pachinko machine 10. According to the present embodiment, the game history management chip 300 acquires the calculation execution conditions stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, so that the calculation set for each type (model) of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. When the execution condition is satisfied, a calculation for calculating the game history information can be executed.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, after the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 performs an operation for calculating the game history information, the number of game balls entering each entrance stored in the register 304 Since the (counter value) is erased, it is possible to store information relating to the number of game balls entered in the register 304 again. Accordingly, the storage capacity required for the register 304 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the game history information of the pachinko machine 10 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320, the inspection machine 320 can display the game history information of the pachinko machine 10. Then, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can check the game history information displayed on the inspection machine 320.

A4. Other aspects of the first embodiment:
<Aspect 1>
In the first embodiment, the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 is set to reach 500 gaming balls detected by the discharge passage detection sensor 44h. It is good also as a structure by which the time interval which performs a calculation is set as execution conditions. For example, one hour may be set as a time interval for executing the calculation, and the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 may calculate the game history information every time one hour elapses. The inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can confirm detailed game history information calculated every hour, and can appropriately determine whether the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified. Become. As a result, the game soundness can be improved.

  In addition, since the characteristics of a game differ if the kind (model) of the pachinko machine 10 differs, the optimal conditions (time interval) for performing the calculation for calculating the game history information also differ. Therefore, different calculation execution conditions are stored for each type (model) of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, also in this aspect 1, the game history management chip 300 acquires the calculation execution conditions stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, so that it is set for each type (model) of the pachinko machine 10. The calculation can be executed when the calculation execution condition is satisfied.

  Further, the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 measures the elapsed time since the calculation is executed, determines whether or not a game is being performed by the player, and determines that the game is not being performed. During the period, the measurement of elapsed time may be interrupted. Specifically, for example, when a state where there is no entry information in the bit of the buffer 302 has elapsed for a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes), it is determined that the game has not been performed, and the measurement of the elapsed time is interrupted. When the entry information is confirmed at the bit 302, it may be determined that the game has been resumed and the measurement of the elapsed time is resumed. According to this configuration, the game history information can be calculated only for a period during which a game is actually performed.

  The elapsed time may be measured using a timer counter, or may be configured to use RTC date and time information by providing an RTC (Real-Time Clock). Moreover, it is good also as a structure which calculates game history information for every predetermined time.

<Aspect 2>
In the first embodiment, the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 is set to reach 500 gaming balls detected by the discharge passage detection sensor 44h. As an execution condition, a configuration may be set in which the occurrence of power shutoff is detected. Specifically, when the power failure monitoring circuit 86 detects the occurrence of power interruption, the power failure monitoring circuit 86 outputs a signal indicating that the power interruption has occurred to the game history management chip 300. The CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 that has received the signal determines that a power interruption has occurred and calculates game history information. In this configuration, the register 304 is configured by a volatile memory, and the number-of-entry information is erased. According to such a configuration, the game history information can be calculated based on the number of game balls detected during the period from when the supply of power to the pachinko machine 10 is started until the power is cut off. it can. That is, the game history information is calculated for each business day of the game hall since the game history information is calculated for each period from the start to the end of the game hall business. Therefore, since the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can easily grasp whether or not the characteristics of the game history information have changed across the business days of the game hall, the pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified or the like. It is possible to appropriately determine whether or not it is. As a result, the game soundness can be improved.

  Furthermore, if the capacitor 87 for supplying power to the game history management chip 300 is provided even after the power is cut off, the memory 309 for calculating game history information by the CPU 308 and storing the calculation results of the game history information. It is possible to reliably complete the storage in the memory.

<Aspect 3>
In the first embodiment, the main CPU 62x may be configured to be able to access the calculation result storage memory 309, and the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41. . According to this configuration, since the game history information is displayed on the symbol display device 41 of the pachinko machine 10, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 uses a dedicated device (such as the inspection machine 320) for checking the game history information. The game history information of the pachinko machine 10 can be confirmed without using it. The main CPU 62x can access the calculation result storage memory 309, but preferably has a configuration in which data cannot be changed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game history information from being destroyed or rewritten by noise, a program bug, or the like.

<Aspect 4>
In the first embodiment, the main CPU 62x is configured to be able to access the calculation result storage memory 309 and notifies that the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 does not satisfy a predetermined condition. It is good also as a structure which equips the front surface (for example, the predetermined location of the main display part 45) of the pachinko machine 10 with the LED lamp for this. For example, the LED lamp may be configured to emit light when a specific value included in the game history information (for example, a bonus rate, a continuous bonus rate, or a payout rate (during normal mode)) is not included in a predetermined range. Good. According to this configuration, the inspector of the pachinko machine can easily find the pachinko machine 10 in which the specific value included in the game history information is not included in the predetermined range. Then, by checking the game history information of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 has been tampered with. As a result, the game soundness can be improved. In particular, if the nail near the first start port 33 or the general winning port (first to third winning ports 32a to 32c) is illegal, the above-mentioned payout ratio (in normal mode) is the design of the pachinko machine. It will deviate from a predetermined range (for example, 0.60 to 0.70) that is sometimes assumed. Therefore, when the payout ratio (during the normal mode) is not included in a predetermined range (for example, 0.60 to 0.70), the LED lamp is caused to emit light, so that the first start port 33 and the general winnings are obtained. It is possible to appropriately determine whether the nail near the mouth (first to third prize winning openings 32a to 32c) has been cheated.

  Furthermore, the light emission mode (color) of the LED lamp in accordance with the degree of deviation from a predetermined range of specific values (for example, an accessory ratio, a continuous accessory ratio, and a payout ratio (in normal mode)) included in the game history information It is good also as a structure which determines. For example, the first LED lamp emits blue light when the accessory ratio is included in a predetermined range (0.70 or less), and the first LED lamp when the accessory ratio is 0.71 to 0.80. May emit purple light, and the first LED lamp may emit red light when the ratio of the accessory is 0.81 to 1.00. The second LED lamp emits blue light when the continuous character ratio is included in a predetermined range (0.60 or less), and the second LED lamp when the continuous character ratio is 0.61 to 0.70. May emit purple light, and the second LED lamp may emit red light when the ratio of successive objects is 0.71 to 1.00. In addition, when the payout ratio (in the normal mode) is included in the predetermined range (0.60 to 0.70), the third LED lamp emits blue light, and the payout ratio (in the normal mode) is 0.71. In the case of ˜0.80, the third LED lamp may emit purple light, and when the payout ratio (in the normal mode) is 0.81 to 1.00, the third LED lamp may emit red light. According to this configuration, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can easily grasp how far the specific value included in the game history information deviates from the predetermined range. The main CPU 62x can access the calculation result storage memory 309, but preferably has a configuration in which data cannot be changed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game history information from being destroyed or rewritten by noise, a program bug, or the like.

<Aspect 5>
In the first embodiment, the calculation data (prize ball number data and calculation execution conditions) stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed by the main MPU 62 (CPU 62x). However, the game history management chip 300 can access the award ball number data storage area and the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, and the game history management chip 300 immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Configuration for accessing the main ROM 63 to obtain calculation data (prize ball number data and calculation execution conditions) and storing the acquired calculation data in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 and calculation execution condition storage memory 307 It is good. According to such a configuration, the processing load on the main MPU 62 can be reduced.

<Aspect 6>
In the first embodiment, the game history management chip 300 is configured to calculate game history information such as the ratio of the bonuses. However, the number of entered balls stored in the register is stored as it is, and the inspection machine 320 The game history information may be calculated. According to such a configuration, the processing load of the game history management chip 300 can be reduced. Hereinafter, the details of the aspect 6 will be described focusing on differences from the first embodiment.

  FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of the main control device 60 and the configuration of the inspection machine 320 included in the pachinko machine 10 according to the aspect 6 of the first embodiment.

  The main ROM 63 of the main MPU 62 is provided with a prize ball number data storage area and a storage execution condition storage area.

  As in the first embodiment, the number of game balls (award ball number data) to be paid out as a prize ball when a game ball enters each entrance is stored in the prize ball number data storage area. Yes. As in the first embodiment, the winning ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process that is executed after the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Is done. Thereby, the game history management chip 300 can grasp the winning ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the storage execution condition storage area, storage execution conditions that are conditions under which the game history management chip 300 executes storage processing described later are stored. In this aspect 6, the fact that the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage reaches 500 is stored as a storage execution condition. The storage execution condition stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed after the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Thereby, the game history management chip 300 can grasp the storage execution condition set in the pachinko machine 10.

  The game history management chip 300 includes a buffer 302 for acquiring game ball entrance information from each CPU 62x to each entrance, a register 304 for storing the number of game balls entering each entrance, and a main ROM 63. Control of the game history management chip 300 and the memory execution condition storage memory 307a for storing the memory execution condition acquired from the main ROM 63, and the memory for managing the game history management chip 300 CPU 308 that controls the number of games, and a number-of-entry memory 309 a that sequentially stores the number of game balls that have entered the entrances stored in the register 304. The storage process described above is a process for storing the number of game balls that have entered the entrances stored in the register 304 in the number-of-entry storage memory 309a.

  The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for connecting the inspection machine 320 and the pachinko machine 10. In this aspect 6, the number-of-entry information stored in the number-of-entry storage memory 309a and the number-of-prize-ball data stored in the prize-ball-number data storage memory 306 are transmitted to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65. Is done.

  The inspection machine 320 includes a CPU 321 that executes various control programs, a ROM 324 that records various control programs and fixed value data, a RAM 326 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data, and a display that displays various information. A part 328 and a connection cable 329 for connecting to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10 are provided.

  In this aspect 6, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the game history management chip 300 sends a transmission request command for requesting transmission of the number-of-entry information and prize-number data. Send to. When the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspecting machine 320, it enters the number-of-entry information stored in the number-of-entry storage memory 309a via the inspecting terminal 65 and stores the number of winning balls data. The prize ball number data stored in the memory 306 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320. Then, the inspection machine 320 calculates game history information based on the received number-of-entry-number information and prize-ball-number data, and causes the display unit 328 to display the calculated game history information.

  FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the contents of processing in the game history management chip 300 and the inspection machine 320 according to aspect 6 of the first embodiment.

  Since the contents of processing in the buffer 302 and the register 304 are the same as those in the first embodiment described above, description thereof will be omitted.

  The winning ball number data storage memory 306 is a memory for storing the winning ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10. In this aspect 6, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the prize ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 and stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306. . Accordingly, the content of the winning ball number data stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306 is the same as the content of the winning ball number data stored in the main ROM 63.

  The storage execution condition storage memory 307 a is a memory for storing storage execution conditions set in the pachinko machine 10. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the storage execution condition stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 by the CPU 62x and stored in the storage execution condition storage memory 307a. Therefore, the content of the storage execution condition stored in the storage execution condition storage memory 307 a is the same as the content of the storage execution condition stored in the main ROM 63.

The CPU 308 determines whether or not the storage execution condition stored in the storage execution condition storage memory 307a is satisfied. If the CPU 308 determines that the storage execution condition is satisfied, each CPU 308 stores each input stored in the register 304. Information regarding the number of game balls that enter the ball opening is stored in the memory 309a for storing the number of balls, and the value of each counter in the register 304 is reset to “0”. In this aspect 6, every time the value of the discharge passage passage number N _OUT stored in the register 304 reaches 500, the CPU 308 relates to the number of game balls entering each entrance stored in the register 304. The information is stored in the incoming ball number storage memory 309a. In the following, the information regarding the number of game balls entering each entrance that is counted while 500 game balls are launched onto the game board 30 is also referred to as a “short-term entrance number information group”.

  The number-of-entries storage memory 309a is a memory for sequentially storing information on the number of entrances (short-term entrance number information group) stored in the register 304. In this embodiment, the memory is stored even if the power supply is cut off. Is constituted by a non-volatile memory capable of holding The memory 309a for storing the number of incoming balls also stores information regarding the order in which the short-term incoming number information group is written, and the CPU 308, when there is no empty area for writing the short-term incoming number information group, The short-term incoming number information group is stored in the area in which the short-term incoming number information group having the oldest written order is stored. In other words, the memory 309a for storing the number of incoming balls is configured to be overwritten in order from the oldest short-term incoming ball number information group (first-in / first-out method). It becomes a memorized state.

  In this aspect 6, the memory 309a for storing the number of incoming balls is short-term input that is information on the number of incoming game balls to each of the entrances counted while 500 game balls are launched on the game board 30. It has a capacity capable of storing 1200 ball number information groups. For example, if game balls are fired for 10 hours in a day, 60000 game balls will be fired per day. The number of entered balls is stored in the memory 309a. Therefore, the number-of-entries storage memory 309a can store a short-term entrance number information group for the last 10 days.

  As described above, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the inspection machine 320 transmits a transmission request command to the game history management chip 300. When the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, the CPU 308 transmits the short-term incoming number information group and the winning ball number data to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65. Then, the inspecting machine 320 calculates game history information such as an accessory ratio based on the short-term incoming number information group and the winning ball number data, and causes the display unit 328 to display the calculated game history information.

  Specifically, in this aspect 6, the inspection machine 320 can calculate one short-term game history information group for one short-term entry number information group, like the CPU 308 of the first embodiment. It is possible to add the number of game balls entered to each entrance stored in each of a plurality of short-term entry number information groups, and use the added entry number for long-term game history information. (Long-term game history information group) can be calculated. That is, the inspection machine 320 of this aspect 6 is not only a short-term game history information group based on the number of balls entered into each entrance in a short period of time when 500 game balls have been launched, but also, for example, 600,000 (about It is possible to calculate a long-term game history information group based on the number of balls entered into each entrance for a long period of time when game balls for 10 days) are launched.

  In this aspect 6, the following configuration may be adopted.

  The inspection machine 320 may be configured to be able to display the received short-term incoming number information group on the display unit 328. Further, the inspection device 320 may be configured to receive each counter value stored in the register 304 and display each received counter value on the display unit 328.

  Further, instead of the configuration in which the game history management chip 300 transmits the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 to the inspection machine 320, the main CPU 62x is the prize stored in the main ROM 63. It is good also as a structure which transmits ball number data with respect to the test | inspection machine 320. FIG. According to such a configuration, the memory 306 for storing the number of prize balls can be omitted, and the manufacturing cost of the game history management chip 300 can be reduced.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the time interval which performs a memory | storage process is set as a memory | storage execution condition memorize | stored in the memory | storage execution condition storage area of main side ROM63. For example, one hour is set as the time interval for executing the storage process, and the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 may execute the storage process every time one hour elapses.

  In addition, as a storage execution condition stored in the storage execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, it may be configured that the occurrence of power shut-off is detected. Specifically, when the power failure monitoring circuit 86 detects the occurrence of power interruption, the power failure monitoring circuit 86 is configured to output a signal indicating that power interruption has occurred to the game history management chip 300, and the game history management chip that has received the signal. The CPU 308 of 300 may determine that a power interruption has occurred and execute a storage process.

  In the aspect 6, the calculation for calculating the game history information is executed by the CPU 321 of the inspection machine 320. However, the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 executes a part or all of the calculation, and the calculation is performed. It is good also as a structure which transmits the game history information which is the result of this to the test | inspection machine 320. FIG.

<Aspect 7>
In the first embodiment, the game history management chip 300 calculates the game history information such as the ratio of the bonuses. However, the entry information in the buffer is stored as it is, and the inspecting machine 320 is based on the entry information. The game history information may be calculated. According to such a configuration, the processing load of the game history management chip 300 can be reduced. Hereinafter, the details of the aspect 7 will be described focusing on differences from the first embodiment.

  FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of the main control device 60 and the configuration of the inspection machine 320 included in the pachinko machine 10 according to the aspect 7 of the first embodiment.

  In this aspect 7, the main MPU 62 is provided with an RTC 96 (RTC: Real-Time Clock) that outputs date information and time information to the game history management chip 300. The RTC 96 includes a backup power source, and can update date information and time information even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

  The main ROM 63 of the main MPU 62 is provided with a prize ball number data storage area. In this aspect 7, the calculation start condition storage area is not provided.

  As in the first embodiment, the number of game balls (award ball number data) to be paid out as a prize ball when a game ball enters each entrance is stored in the prize ball number data storage area. Yes. As in the first embodiment, the winning ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process that is executed after the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Is done. Thereby, the game history management chip 300 can grasp the winning ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10.

  The game history management chip 300 includes a buffer 302 for acquiring game ball entry information from the CPU 62x to each entrance, and a prize ball number data storage memory 306 for storing prize ball number data acquired from the main ROM 63. The CPU 308 is responsible for overall control of the game history management chip 300, and the entry information storage memory 309b for sequentially storing the entry information of the game balls into the entry openings stored in the buffer 302. .

  The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for connecting the inspection machine 320 and the pachinko machine 10. In the aspect 7, when the inspection machine 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the number of winning balls stored in the memory 306 for storing the winning ball information and the number of winning ball data stored in the memory 309b for storing ball information. Data is transmitted to the inspection machine 320.

  The inspection machine 320 includes a CPU 321 that executes various control programs, a ROM 324 that records various control programs and fixed value data, a RAM 326 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data, and a display that displays various information. A part 328 and a connection cable 329 for connecting to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10 are provided.

  In this aspect 7, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the game history management chip 300 sends a transmission request command for requesting transmission of entry information and prize ball number data. Send to. When the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, the entry information and the like stored in the entry information storage memory 309b via the inspection terminal 65 and the prize ball number data storage are stored. The prize ball number data stored in the memory 306 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320. Then, the inspection machine 320 calculates game history information based on the received entry information and the winning ball number data, and causes the display unit 328 to display the calculated game history information.

  FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an outline of processing in the game history management chip 300 and the inspection machine 320 according to aspect 7 of the first embodiment.

  Since the contents of the processing in the buffer 302 are the same as those in the first embodiment described above, description thereof is omitted.

  The entry information storage memory 309b is a memory for sequentially storing entry information stored in the buffer 302 and information regarding a game state when a game ball enters, and in this embodiment, power supply is cut off. However, it is configured by a non-volatile memory that can hold the memory. Further, in the present embodiment, when the entry information and information regarding the game state are stored, the date and time information when the game ball enters each entrance is added and stored. In addition, the entry information storage memory 309b also stores information about the order in which entry information and the like are written, and the CPU 308 enters the entry when there is no empty area for writing entry information and the like. Information and the like are stored in an area in which the entry information and the like having the oldest written order are stored. That is, the entry information storage memory 309b is configured to be overwritten in order from the oldest entry information (first-in / first-out method), and the latest entry information is always stored. It becomes a state.

  The winning ball number data storage memory 306 is a memory for storing the winning ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10. In this aspect 7, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the prize ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 and stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306. . Accordingly, the content of the winning ball number data stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306 is the same as the content of the winning ball number data stored in the main ROM 63. Further, in this aspect 7, when the inspection machine 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320.

  As described above, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the game history management chip 300 sends a transmission request command for requesting transmission of entry information and prize ball number data. Send to. When the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, the entry information stored in the entry information storage memory 309b via the inspection terminal 65, information on the game state, and date / time information, The prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320. Then, the inspection machine 320 calculates game history information based on the received information, and causes the display unit 328 to display the calculated game history information.

  Specifically, the inspection machine 320 of this aspect 7 calculates game history information (short-term game history information group) based on the number of balls entered into each entrance for a short period of time when 500 game balls are launched. In addition to, for example, game history information (long-term game history information group) is calculated based on the number of balls entered into each entrance for a long period of time when 600000 (about 10 days) game balls have been launched. Is possible. That is, it is possible to calculate game history information in an arbitrary period.

  Furthermore, in this aspect 7, since the date information (year / month / day information and time information) is added to the entry information etc., the inspecting machine 320 has a range of the date / time information added to the received entry information etc. It is also possible to calculate game history information by designating a range of dates and times for which game history information is to be calculated. Therefore, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can perform a detailed inspection based on the game history information specifying the date and time range.

  In this aspect 7, the following configuration may be adopted.

  The inspection machine 320 may be configured to be able to display the received entry information and the like on the display unit 328. According to such a configuration, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can grasp the date and time when the game ball is detected by each ball detection sensor.

  Further, instead of the configuration in which the game history management chip 300 transmits the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 to the inspection machine 320, the main CPU 62x is the prize stored in the main ROM 63. It is good also as a structure which transmits ball number data with respect to the test | inspection machine 320. FIG. According to such a configuration, the memory 306 for storing the number of prize balls can be omitted, and the manufacturing cost of the game history management chip 300 can be reduced.

  Further, in aspect 7, the calculation for calculating the game history information is configured to be executed by the CPU 321 of the inspection machine 320, but part or all of the calculation is executed by the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300. It is good also as a structure which transmits the game history information which is the result of this to the test | inspection machine 320. FIG.

<Aspect 8>
In the first embodiment and the other aspects described above, the operation execution condition or the storage execution condition is stored in the main ROM 63, and the game history management chip 300 acquires these conditions from the main ROM 63. The game history management chip 300 may be configured to store these conditions in a nonvolatile memory from the beginning. According to this configuration, an inappropriate calculation execution condition or storage execution condition is stored in the main ROM 63, and the occurrence of a situation where the game history information or the number-of-entry information cannot be properly stored can be suppressed. it can. For example, an extremely short period (for example, the discharge passage passage number N _OUT = 5) is stored as the calculation execution condition or the storage execution condition, and the calculation result storage memory 309 or the entered ball number storage memory 309a is stored. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where only game history information or number-of-entry information is stored for an extremely short period (for example, about one hour).

<Aspect 9>
In the first embodiment and the other aspects described above, a function for storing the number of game balls that enter each entrance, a function for calculating game history information such as a ratio of bonuses, and the calculated game history information Although the game history management chip 300 has a function to store, the main CPU 62x (the main MPU 62 excluding the game history management chip 300) may have a part of these functions. The game history management chip 300 may not be provided, and the main CPU 62x (the main MPU 62 excluding the game history management chip 300) may have all of these functions. According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to separately provide the game history management chip 300, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. However, according to the configuration in which the game history management chip 300 is provided, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the main CPU 62x.

<Aspect 10>
In the first embodiment and the other aspects described above, the gaming history management chip 300 includes a part or all of the functions of the functional units other than the gaming history management chip 300 (for example, the inspection machine 320 and the main CPU 62x). Alternatively, a part or all of the functions provided in the game history management chip 300 may be provided in a functional unit other than the game history management chip 300. For example, if the game history management chip 300 has a part of the functions of the inspection machine 320, the processing load and manufacturing cost of the inspection machine 320 can be further reduced. If the inspection machine 320 includes a part, the processing load and manufacturing cost of the game history management chip 300 can be further reduced.

<Aspect 11>
In the first embodiment, the game history management chip 300 calculates the game history information such as the ratio of bonuses. However, the game history management chip 300 is not provided, and the main CPU 62x calculates the game history information. Also good. Hereinafter, the details of the aspect 11 will be described focusing on differences from the first embodiment.

  FIG. 23 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the aspect 11 of the first embodiment. In this aspect 11, the point that the game history management chip 300 is not provided, and the point that the main RAM 64 is provided with the number-of-entries storage area and the calculation result storage area are the same as in the first embodiment (FIG. 5). Is different.

  The main CPU 62x updates the number of game balls that have entered the respective entrances stored in the number-of-entries storage area of the main RAM 64, based on the information about the game balls received from the input / output port 62a. To do. When the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 is established, the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63 and the main RAM 64 Based on the number of game balls entered at each entrance, stored in the number-of-games storage area, game history information is calculated and the game history information is stored in the main RAM 64 as a result of calculation. Remember in the area. This will be specifically described below.

FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram schematically illustrating an outline of processing in the main MPU 62 according to aspect 11 of the first embodiment. The main CPU 62x determines whether or not the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 is satisfied. If the main CPU 62x determines that the calculation execution condition is satisfied, the main CPU 62x Information relating to the number of game balls that enter the respective entrances stored in the cache is stored in the number-of-entry storage area of the main RAM 64. In this aspect 11, every time the value of the discharge passage passage number N _OUT stored in the cache of the main CPU 62x reaches 500, the main CPU 62x provides information on the number of game balls entering each entrance. And stored in the number-of-entries storage area of the main RAM 64. Note that, as described above, the information regarding the number of game balls that enter the entrances counted while 500 game balls are fired on the game board 30 is also referred to as a “short-term entry number information group”. .

  The incoming number storage area of the main RAM 64 is an area for sequentially storing information on the number of incoming balls (short-term incoming number information group). Information on the order in which the short-term incoming number information group is written is also stored in the incoming number storage area of the main RAM 64, and the main CPU 62x has no empty area for writing the short-term incoming number information group. In this case, the short-term incoming number information group that is newly written is stored in the area in which the short-term incoming number information group that has the oldest writing order is stored. That is, the incoming number storage area of the main side RAM 64 is configured to be overwritten in order from the oldest short-term incoming number information group (first-in first-out method), and the latest short-term incoming number information is always the latest. The group is stored.

  In this aspect 11, the number-of-entries storage area of the main side RAM 64 is information regarding the number of game balls that enter each entrance, counted while 500 game balls are fired on the game board 30. It has a capacity capable of storing 1200 short-term incoming number information groups. For example, if game balls are fired for 10 hours in a day, 60000 game balls will be fired per day. It is stored in the number-of-entrances storage area of the main RAM 64. Therefore, the number-of-entries number storage area of the main RAM 64 can store a short-term number-of-entries information group for the last 10 days.

  Then, each time the calculation execution condition is satisfied, the main CPU 62x newly calculates one short-term game history information group for one newly stored short-term entry number information group. Further, each time the calculation execution condition is satisfied, the main CPU 62x plays a game at each entrance stored in each of the plurality of short-term entrance number information groups including the newly stored short-term entry number information group. The number of balls entered is added, and the long-term game history information (long-term game history information group) is calculated using the added number of balls entered. That is, the main CPU 62x of this aspect 11 is not limited to the short-term game history information group based on the number of balls entered into each entrance in a short period of time when 500 game balls are launched, but, for example, 600,000 (about It is possible to calculate a long-term game history information group based on the number of balls entered into each entrance for a long period of time when game balls for 10 days) are launched. The calculated game history information is stored in the calculation result storage area of the main RAM 64.

  The calculation result storage area of the main RAM 64 includes an area for sequentially storing short-term game history information groups and an area for storing long-term game history information groups. In the area for sequentially storing the short-term game history information group, information on the order in which the short-term game history information group is written is also stored, and the main CPU 62x has no free area for writing the short-term game history information group. The newly calculated short-term game history information group is stored in an area in which the short-term game history information group having the oldest writing order is stored. That is, the area for sequentially storing the short-term game history information group in the main RAM 64 is configured to be overwritten in order from the oldest short-term game history information group (first-in / first-out method), and always has the latest short-term game history information group. The game history information group is stored. The area for storing the long-term game history information group is overwritten with the newly calculated long-term game history information group each time the calculation execution condition is satisfied. That is, in the area for storing the long-term game history information group, the latest long-term game history information group calculated based on a plurality of short-term game number information groups including the latest short-term game number information group is stored. become.

  When the inspection device 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the inspection device 320 transmits a transmission request command to the main CPU 62x. When the main CPU 62x receives the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, the main CPU 62x transmits the game history information stored in the main RAM 64 to the inspection machine 320. Then, the inspection machine 320 causes the display unit 328 to display the received game history information.

  Further, in this aspect 11, when a predetermined operation for displaying the game history information on the symbol display device 41 is executed, the game history information stored in the main RAM 64 is controlled by sound emission control via the input / output port 62x. It is output to the device 90 and displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  Further, in this aspect 11, even if the supply of power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the short-term incoming number information group and the game history information stored in the main RAM 64 are counted by the backup power supplied from the capacitor 87. It is configured to be retained for days.

  According to such a configuration, the main CPU 62x, which is a single processing unit, executes a process for proceeding with a game such as a jackpot lottery process and a process for calculating and storing game history information. There is no need to provide a dedicated game history management chip 300 for calculating and storing history information, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Further, a short-term incoming number information group, which is information regarding the number of game balls entering each entrance, counted while 500 game balls are launched on the game board 30, is stored in the main RAM 64. Therefore, it is possible to store the incoming information of the game ball in the same format (for example, the configuration of storing the incoming information stored in the incoming information storage memory 309b in FIG. 22). In comparison, the most recent short-term game history information group and long-term game history information group can be calculated while greatly reducing the memory capacity required for the main RAM 64.

  The main CPU 62x is not limited to the configuration that calculates both the short-term game history information group and the long-term game history information group as the game history information, and may be configured to calculate only one of them.

<Aspect 12>
FIG. 25 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the aspect 12 of the first embodiment. The difference from the above-described aspect 11 (FIG. 23) is that the main-side MPU 62 is provided with a flash memory 64x that is a non-volatile memory that can be rewritten and can retain memory even when the power supply is cut off. This is the point. The flash memory 64x stores the number-of-balls storage area for storing the short-term game number information group in the above-described aspect 11, and the short-term game history information group and the long-term game history information group in the above-described aspect 11. The calculation result storage area is provided.

  The main CPU 62x of this aspect 12 is configured to store the short-term incoming number information group and the calculated game history information in the flash memory 64x every time the calculation execution condition is satisfied.

  According to such a configuration, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced as compared with the configuration including the game history management chip 300. Further, even if the supply of power to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted for a long period of time, the short-term incoming number information group and the game history information are retained, so that the pachinko machine 10 is in any state (for example, the pachinko machine for a long period of time). 10), the pachinko machine 10 and the game history information can always be linked one-on-one, and the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be managed. Can be inspected.

  Moreover, since it is not necessary to provide an area for storing the short-term incoming number information group and the game history information in the main RAM 64, the storage capacity of the main RAM 64 can be suppressed, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced. can do.

<Aspect 13>
In the first embodiment and the other aspects described above, the main controller 60 sends the game mode, which is a mode capable of executing a game progress process, which is a process for progressing a game, and game history information to the inspection machine 320. It is good also as a structure which can be switched and switched to the test | inspection mode which is a mode to output. The game progress process is a process that is executed based on the detection of the game ball by the ball detection sensors 44a to 44h. The jackpot lottery process, the electric character release lottery process, the prize ball payout process, the main display unit 45, the opening / closing door 36b and the electric accessory 34a are opened / closed.

  In the inspection mode, the game progress process may not be executed even when the game ball passes through the area detected by the entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h.

  Specifically, for example, when shifting to the inspection mode, the inspection mode flag for determining whether or not the inspection mode is in the main control device 60 is turned ON. Then, main controller 60 determines whether or not the inspection mode flag is ON. If it is determined that the inspection mode flag is ON, the main control device 60 does not proceed to the processing flow for executing the normal game progress processing. Then, the process proceeds to the processing flow for the inspection mode. As a result, even when the main controller 60 receives a signal indicating that a game ball has been detected from the ball detection sensors 44a to 44h, the main controller 60 performs processing based on the reception of the signal (for example, a jackpot random number The process of acquiring the value of the counter C1, the payout process of prize balls, the process of transmitting a command to the sound emission control device 90, etc.) is not executed.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute, in the inspection mode, a process that is not preferable to be executed in parallel with the game progress process, a process that is likely to cause a malfunction when executed in parallel with the game progress process, and the like. . Further, according to such a configuration, since the game progress process is not executed in the inspection mode, when developing the program for the process to be executed in the inspection mode, a countermeasure when the game progress process is executed in parallel is taken. Since this need not be taken into consideration, the development efficiency of a program for processing executed in the inspection mode can be greatly improved.

  The game history information is information whose contents change when a game ball is detected and a game progress process is executed. Therefore, if a configuration for executing the process of outputting the game history information in parallel with the game progress process is employed, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 is inspecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 with the game history information. When the game progress process is executed, the contents of the game history information may change at any time, and it may be difficult to perform the inspection smoothly. On the other hand, according to the configuration of the aspect 13, since the game history information is output in the inspection mode in which the game progress process is not executed even when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, the game history information is output. It is possible to suppress the content of the game history information from changing during the game. As a result, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can smoothly perform the inspection.

  In addition, the aspect which outputs game history information in test | inspection mode is not restricted to the aspect which outputs game history information to the test | inspection machine 320, and may display it. For example, the game history information may be output and displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  Further, the information output in the inspection mode is not limited to the game history information but may be other information. For example, other information based on the detection of the game ball by the ball detection sensors 44a to 44h, such as the game ball entrance information and the number of balls entered, may be used.

<Aspect 14>
Among the first embodiment and the other aspects described above, in the configuration in which the main control device 60 can execute by switching between the game mode and the inspection mode, the game mode is changed from the game mode to the inspection mode. When a predetermined operation (hereinafter also referred to as a “mode switching operation”) is performed by the inspector, the game progress process being executed is completed up to a predetermined processing stage at the timing when the game is completed. It may be configured to shift from the mode to the inspection mode.

  Specifically, for example, when a mode switching operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is executed during the game progress processing of the game mode, (A jackpot lottery process, an electric role opening lottery process, a prize ball payout process, a symbol change display process on the main display unit 45, an opening / closing process of the door 36b and the electric accessory 34a, etc.) Complete the process. Then, when the game progress process is completed up to a predetermined process stage, the process after the process stage is not executed, and a standby state is entered. Then, the game mode is shifted to the inspection mode at the timing when all of the game progress processes being executed are completed up to a predetermined processing stage.

  According to such a configuration, the game mode is changed from the game mode to the inspection mode at the timing immediately after the mode switching operation is performed regardless of whether or not the game progress process being executed is completed up to a predetermined process stage. Compared with the configuration to be transferred, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems when shifting to the inspection mode.

  For example, a configuration in which the game progress process being executed is shifted from the game mode to the inspection mode at the timing immediately after the mode switching operation is performed regardless of whether or not the process has been completed up to a predetermined processing stage. In the case where it is adopted, when the mode switching operation is executed during the period in which the symbol change display process in the main display unit 45 is executed as the game progress process in the game mode, the symbol in the main display unit 45 is displayed. In the middle of the variable display, the mode is changed to the inspection mode, and it becomes difficult to control the timing of the symbol stop and the symbol variation time. On the other hand, according to the configuration of the aspect 14, for example, when the mode switching operation is performed during the period in which the symbol variation display process is performed in the game mode, the symbol variation display process is performed. The inspection mode is entered at the timing when the processing is completed up to the processing stage where the symbol is terminated and the symbol is stopped. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems such as difficulty in controlling the timing of symbol stop and control of symbol variation time.

  It should be noted that when the examination mode is shifted (returned) to the game mode, the game progress process in the remaining processing stages that are scheduled to be executed before the examination mode is shifted may be executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable that the expected game progress process ends in an incomplete state.

  In addition, when a mode switching operation is performed during the execution of the game progress process in the game mode, the game mode is shifted to the inspection mode at the timing when all the processes of the respective game progress processes are completed. It is good. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems when the game progress process is resumed.

  In addition, when a mode switching operation is executed during the execution of the game progress process in the game mode, the main RAM 64 stores information enabling the game execution process to be interrupted and resuming the interrupted game progress process. It is good also as a structure which transfers to a test | inspection mode from game mode at the timing which memorize | stores and the said memory | storage is completed. According to such a configuration, the pachinko machine 10 quickly shifts from the game mode to the inspection mode, so that it is possible to inspect many pachinko machines 10 in a short period of time.

  Further, the mode switching operation for shifting from the game mode to the inspection mode is not limited to the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button, but may be another mode. For example, a single operation of pressing a mode switching button may be used. In addition, when the inspection machine 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the same processing as when the mode switching operation is performed may be performed.

<Aspect 15>
Among the first embodiment and the other aspects described above, in the configuration in which the main control device 60 can execute by switching between the game mode and the inspection mode, 10 minutes from the time when the inspection mode is entered during the inspection mode. When the automatic return condition that the time has passed is satisfied, a predetermined operation for shifting from the inspection mode to the game mode (for example, pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button) is not executed. Even so, it may be configured to shift from the inspection mode to the game mode.

  According to such a configuration, when 10 minutes have elapsed since the transition to the inspection mode, even if a predetermined operation for shifting from the inspection mode to the game mode has not been performed, the inspection mode Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent a predetermined operation from being performed and not returning to the game mode. For example, even if the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 inspects the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 based on the game history information output in the inspection mode and then forgets to perform a predetermined operation, the inspection mode is set. Since 10 minutes have elapsed from the time of transition, the game mode is restored, so that a situation occurs in which the player cannot play a game on the pachinko machine 10 without returning to the game mode in which the pachinko machine 10 can execute the game progress process. Can be suppressed.

  The automatic return condition is not limited to the condition that 10 minutes have elapsed from the time when the mode is changed to the inspection mode, but may be another mode. For example, it may be a condition that 5 minutes have elapsed from the time of transition to the inspection mode, or a condition that 10 minutes have elapsed since the inspection machine 320 was removed from the inspection terminal 65.

  In addition, the predetermined operation for shifting from the inspection mode to the game mode is not limited to the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button, but may be another mode. For example, a single operation of pressing a mode switching button may be used.

<Aspect 16>
In the first embodiment and the other aspects described above, a RAM clear button for initializing the main-side RAM 64 is provided in the main control device 60, and an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button (hereinafter, referred to as a RAM clear button) When “deletion operation” is executed, the information stored in the main RAM 64 may be erased (initialized).

  Furthermore, the main controller 60 may be configured to be able to execute by switching between the game mode and the inspection mode. Then, in the state after the transition to the inspection mode and before the transition to the game mode, for example, the state in the inspection mode or the state where the power is turned off after the transition to the inspection mode, the RAM clear button is pressed. Even when an erasing operation of pressing the power button is executed, the information stored in the main RAM 64 may not be erased.

  According to such a configuration, the state after the transition to the inspection mode and before the transition to the game mode is a case where an erasing operation for erasing the information stored in the main RAM 64 is performed. However, since the information stored in the main RAM 64 is not erased, an erasure operation is erroneously executed in order to shift to the game mode in the state after the transition to the inspection mode and before the transition to the game mode. Even if it is a case, it can suppress that the said information is deleted accidentally.

  For example, the erasing operation for erasing the information stored in the main RAM 64 is an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button, and the mode is shifted between the game mode and the inspection mode. In the configuration in which the operation for pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button, the intention to press the power button while pressing the mode switching button in order to shift from the inspection mode to the gaming mode is incorrect. The power button may be pressed while the RAM clear button is pressed. However, according to the configuration of this aspect 16, in the state after the transition to the inspection mode and before the transition to the game mode, an erasing operation is performed in which the power button is pressed by mistake while the RAM clear button is pressed. Even if it is a case, it can suppress that the said information is deleted accidentally.

  More specifically, for example, when the game mode is shifted to the inspection mode, the game progress process that has been executed in the game mode is temporarily stopped, and the stopped game progress process is returned to the inspection mode. When adopting a configuration in which information for resuming later is stored in the main RAM 64, the intention is to press the power button while pressing the mode switching button in order to return from the inspection mode to the game mode, but the RAM clear button If the power button is pressed while pressing, the information for resuming the game progress process is erased, and the game progress process cannot be resumed after returning to the inspection mode. May be disadvantageous. On the other hand, according to the configuration of this aspect 16, in the state after the transition to the inspection mode and before the transition to the gaming mode, the power button is pressed while erroneously pressing the RAM clear button in order to transition to the gaming mode. Even if it is pressed, information stored in the main RAM 64 can be prevented from being erased by mistake, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged. Can do.

  The game history information may be stored in the main RAM 64. According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to separately provide a dedicated memory for storing game history information, so that the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In addition, when an erasing operation is executed, the game history stored in the main RAM 64 regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 (power on / off state, game mode or inspection mode). The information may not be erased, and only information other than the game history information stored in the main RAM 64 (information stored in order to resume the game progress process) may be erased (initialized). . According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress intentional deletion of game history information that deviates from a predetermined specified range.

  The erasing operation is not limited to the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button, but may be another mode. For example, a single operation of pressing a RAM clear button may be used.

<Aspect 17>
Among the first embodiment and the other aspects described above, when the main control device 60 shifts between the game mode and the inspection mode and can be executed, when the main control device 60 shifts from the game mode to the inspection mode, The game stop command, which is a command indicating that the game progress process is temporarily stopped after entering the inspection mode, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90, and the game progress process that has been executed is performed in the test mode. It may be configured to temporarily stop. Specifically, for example, when the display shifts to the inspection mode during execution of the symbol variation display on the main display unit 45, the display on the main display unit 45 is turned off and the symbol variation time on the main display unit 45 is counted. To stop. Further, when the main control device 60 shifts from the inspection mode to the game mode, a game restart command, which is a command indicating that the game progress processing is restarted by shifting to the game mode, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. It is good also as composition to do.

  Then, when the game stop command is received, the sound emission control device 90 temporarily stops the effect that is being executed, and then when the game restart command is received, the effect that is temporarily stopped. Is configured to resume. According to such a configuration, even when the main control device 60 shifts between the game mode and the inspection mode, the game progress process executed by the main control device 60 (for example, the symbol on the main display unit 45). (Variable display processing) and effects controlled by the sound emission control device 90 (for example, symbol variable display processing in the symbol display device 41) can be synchronized, and the player feels uncomfortable after shifting to the game mode. Can be suppressed.

  Note that the sound emission control device 90 may be configured not to stop the effect being executed even when the game stop command is received. Specifically, for example, when a game stop command is received during the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 41, the symbol variation display layer is maintained while the control of the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 41 is continued. A layer of another image (for example, a black image) is displayed on the screen. However, since the control of the symbol variation display in the symbol display device 41 is continued, the symbol variation display is continued under the black image layer. Then, when the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41 has elapsed, the symbol variation display ends under the black image layer, but the symbol does not stop but is slightly shaken.

  When the game restart command is received from the main control device 60, the black image layer displayed above the symbol variation display layer is removed, and the symbol layer is displayed again. At this time, the main control device 60 shifts (returns) from the inspection mode to the game mode, and resumes the stopped game progress process (design variation display on the main display unit 45).

  Then, main controller 60 resumes the symbol variation display on main display unit 45 that has stopped counting the variation time. When the remaining variation time has elapsed, that is, the symbol variation on main display unit 45 is detected. When it is time to stop, a symbol stop command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. The sound emission control device 90 that has received the symbol stop command transmits a symbol stop command to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 displays the symbol that has been displayed in a slightly swaying manner on the symbol display device 41. Stop completely.

  According to such a configuration, when the main control device 60 is in the inspection mode, the display on the main display unit 45 is turned off, and the display on the symbol display device 41 is a black image. When the main control device 60 shifts from the inspection mode to the game mode, the symbol variation display on the main display unit 45 that has stopped counting the variation time is resumed, and the symbols on the symbol display device 41 are variably displayed. It becomes an aspect or the display aspect which shakes small. The symbol on the symbol display device 41 is also stopped at the timing when the symbol on the main display unit 45 is stopped. That is, the symbol variation display on the main display unit 45 and the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 41 can be synchronized. Further, even when a game stop command is received, the control of the effect that is being executed is not stopped, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems caused by temporarily stopping the control of the effect that is being executed. For example, when the production control is resumed from the state where the production control is temporarily stopped, the timing of the plurality of productions may be shifted when the production is executed, or the symbol display device For example, there is a difference between the moving image displayed on 41 and the sound output from the speaker 46.

  If the main control device 60 adopts a configuration in which the symbol stop command is not transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 even when it is time to stop the symbol change in the main display unit 45, The variation display of the symbols on the display device 41 will continue in a slightly swaying manner, and thereafter a variation command transmitted from the main control device 60 or a standby command transmitted when no hold information is stored. The symbol in the symbol display device 41 is stopped by receiving.

<Aspect 18>
In the said 1st Embodiment and said other aspect, it is good also as a structure which displays the game history information memorize | stored in the said pachinko machine 10 on the symbol display apparatus 41 when it becomes predetermined time. Specifically, for example, the game mode may be changed from the game mode to the inspection mode at 11:10 pm, and the game history information of the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41. According to such a configuration, the game history information of each pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the symbol display device 41 around 11:10 pm after the game hall is closed. The person can quickly inspect and confirm the game history information of many pachinko machines 10 after closing the game hall without taking the trouble of shifting each pachinko machine 10 from the game mode to the inspection mode.

  The game history information stored in the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41 when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer. According to such a configuration, for example, all the pachinko machines 10 installed in the game hall are simultaneously shifted to the inspection mode, and the game history information of each pachinko machine 10 is displayed on each symbol display device 41. Therefore, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can quickly inspect and confirm the game history information of many pachinko machines 10 without taking the trouble of shifting each pachinko machine 10 from the game mode to the inspection mode. It becomes.

<Aspect 19>
In the said 1st Embodiment and said other aspect, it is good also as a structure which always displays game history information on the symbol display apparatus 41. FIG. According to such a configuration, the player or the inspector can always check the game history information, so that when the game history information deviates from a predetermined range or the like occurs, It becomes possible to notice the incident. As a result, it is possible to quickly ensure the game soundness.

<Aspect 20>
In the first embodiment and the other aspects described above, a 7-segment display constituted by seven light-emitting diodes is provided on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10, and games stored in the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the 7-segment display. It is good also as a structure which displays the information relevant to historical information. For example, when the main control device 60 shifts from the gaming mode described above to the inspection mode, whether the accessory ratio, the payout ratio (in the normal mode), etc. stored in the pachinko machine 10 are within a predetermined range. It is good also as a structure which is displayed on a 7 segment display.

  More specifically, for example, when the main control device 60 shifts from the game mode to the inspection mode, “1” indicating that the display relating to the accessory ratio is performed is displayed on the 7-segment display, and then the accessory ratio Is within the predetermined range (specifically, when the accessory ratio is 0.700 or less), “O” indicating OK is displayed on the 7-segment display, while the accessory ratio is If “E” is not within the predetermined range, “E” indicating an error may be displayed on the 7-segment display. After the display regarding the ratio of the actors, “2” indicating that the display regarding the ratio of the consecutive actors is performed is displayed on the 7-segment display, and the ratio of the consecutive actors is within a predetermined range (specifically, If the consecutive character ratio is 0.600 or less), “O” meaning “OK” is displayed on the 7-segment display, while if the consecutive character ratio is not within the predetermined range, , “E” indicating an error may be displayed on the 7-segment display. “2” indicating that the display related to the payout ratio (in normal mode) is to be performed is displayed on the 7-segment display after displaying the continuous character ratio, and the payout ratio (in normal mode) is within the predetermined range. (Specifically, when the payout ratio (in normal mode) is within the range of 0.60 to 0.70), “O” indicating OK is displayed on the 7-segment display, On the other hand, when the payout ratio (in the normal mode) is not within a predetermined range, “E” indicating an error may be displayed on the 7-segment display.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to quickly and easily inspect game history information such as an accessory ratio. In addition, since the 7-segment display consumes little power, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the game history information is inspected with only a small amount of power from the capacitors and batteries provided in the pachinko machine 10. It becomes possible to do.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which always displays the information relevant to the game history information memorize | stored in the pachinko machine 10 on a 7 segment display. According to such a configuration, it is possible to simply and quickly inspect the game history information such as the proportion of an accessory without switching from the game mode to the inspection mode. Further, even in the pachinko machine 10 that does not have the inspection mode, it is possible to simply and quickly inspect the game history information such as the ratio of the accessory. Further, if the 7-segment display is provided on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10, the 7-segment display does not enter the player's field of view. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the user from being able to concentrate on the game. On the other hand, when the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 inspects the game history information of the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine body 12 supported by the hinge 15 is rotated forward and provided on the back surface of the pachinko machine body 12. Since it is only necessary to confirm the display on the 7-segment display, it is possible to easily and quickly inspect the game history information such as the ratio of the items. Instead of the 7-segment display, another display that can display the game history information in a manner that can recognize the game history information, such as a segment display constituted by a number of light emitting diodes other than seven, may be adopted.

<Aspect 21>
In the first embodiment and the other aspects described above, the sound emission control device 90 may be configured to calculate game history information. Specifically, for example, the main CPU 62x of the main control device 60 transmits a signal including the winning ball number data stored in the winning ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63 in the initial setting process to the sound emission control device 90. The sound emission control device 90 calculates game history information based on the acquired winning ball number data and the game ball entry information transmitted from the main control device 60, and the calculated game history information. May be displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  According to such a configuration, the voice light emission control device 90 cannot access the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63, or the voice light emission control device 90 is in the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63. Even if the storage position (memory address) of the stored prize ball number data cannot be grasped, the prize emission ball stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63 by the sound emission control device 90 It becomes possible to acquire numerical data, and it is possible to calculate game history information. Further, since the sound emission control device 90 calculates the game history information instead of the main control device 60, the processing load on the main control device 60 can be greatly reduced.

<Aspect 22>
The first embodiment and the other aspects described above can be applied not only to the pachinko machine 10 that can shift from the gaming mode to the inspection mode, but also to a gaming machine that can shift from the gaming mode to another mode. . For example, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine having a game state display mode capable of displaying a state of processing relating to a game such as a state of a high probability mode flag or a high frequency support mode flag, a content of stored hold information, and the like. it can.

<Aspect 23>
FIG. 26 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the aspect 23 of the first embodiment. In this aspect 23, the game history management chip 300 is not provided, and the main CPU 62x is configured to calculate the above-described game history information. The main RAM 64 is divided into two areas (a first area and a second area). The first area of the main RAM 64 is an area for developing a program or the like for executing processing related to the progress of the game. The second area of the main RAM 64 is used as an area for developing a program or the like for executing a process for calculating / displaying game history information (hereinafter also referred to as a game history process). The main CPU 62x executes the writing of information only to the first area of the main RAM 64 when executing a process related to the progress of the game (a process other than the game history process), and when executing the game history process. The information writing is executed only for the second area of the main RAM 64.

  The first area of the main RAM 64 is also used as an 8-bit entrance detection information storage area, a stack area, and the like, which will be described later. The second area of the main RAM 64 is also used as an 8-bit buffer area, a prize ball totaling buffer, a calculation buffer, a calculation result buffer, a stack area, and the like, which will be described later. Details of these will be described later.

  A game history information display unit 45z is connected to the input / output port 62a. The game history information display unit 45z is composed of four 7-segment displays, and is provided on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. As will be described later, the game history information calculated by the main CPU 62x is displayed on the game history information display unit 45z.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) according to aspect 23 of the first embodiment. Also in this aspect, the timer interrupt process is started at a cycle of 4 msec as in the first embodiment. The difference from the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) of the first embodiment described above is that the contents of the ball entry detection process shown in step S10606 are different, and the game history for calculating and displaying the game history information. The process is added as the last process of the timer interrupt process (step S10616), and the ball detection information output process (the process of step S10207 in FIG. 13) is a process of outputting the ball detection information to the game history management chip. The other processing is the same as the processing described in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 13) of the first embodiment described above. Hereinafter, the entrance detection process in step S10606 shown in FIG. 27 and the game history process shown in step S10616 will be described.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating a ball entering detection process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) according to the aspect 23 of the first embodiment. In the entrance detection processing of this aspect 23, it is determined that there is no information in the bit of the input port 62b (“0”) in the previous timer interrupt processing (one time before), and the bit of the input port 62b is determined in the current timer interrupt processing. If it is determined that there is information ("1") and the bit is again determined to have information ("1") in the timer interrupt process, a game is entered at the entrance corresponding to the bit. It is determined that a ball has entered. Hereinafter, an example of the incoming ball detection process will be described.

  In step S10701, the information currently stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 (FIG. 14) of the input port 62b described above (hereinafter also referred to as ball entry determination information) is read, and is read as step S10702. The entry determination information is stored in the first buffer which is an 8-bit buffer. That is, the first buffer is a buffer for storing the ball-entry determination information read from each bit of the input port 62b in the current timer interrupt process. The second buffer, which will be described later, is an 8-bit buffer that stores the ball entry determination information read from each bit of the input port 62b in the previous timer interrupt process. In this aspect, the first buffer and the second buffer are provided in the first area of the main RAM 64. After executing Step S10702, the process proceeds to Step S10703.

  In step S10703, 8 is set in the entrance determination counter provided in the main RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to 10704. Note that the numerical information of the entrance determination counter is the same as that of the entrance determination counter (step S10401) used in the entrance determination process (FIG. 16) of the first embodiment described above. It corresponds to the bit. Specifically, in this aspect, “8” of the numerical information of the pitch determination counter is the 0th bit D0 of the big winning opening 36a, “7” is the 1st bit D1 of the first start opening 33, and “6” The second bit D2 of the second start port 34, “5” is the third bit D3 of the first winning port 32a, “4” is the fourth bit D4 of the second winning port 32b, and “3” is the third winning port 32c. The fifth bit D5, “2” corresponds to the sixth bit D6 of the through gate 35, and “1” corresponds to the seventh bit D7 of the discharge passage.

  In step S10704, it is determined whether or not there is entry determination information in the bit corresponding to the numerical information of the entry determination counter in the second buffer, that is, the entry determination information stored in the bit is “1”. It is determined whether or not. If it is determined in step S10704 that the entry determination information is not “1” (S10704: NO), the process proceeds to step S10705. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10704 that the entry determination information is “1” (S10704: YES), the process proceeds from step S10705 to step S10709, which will be described later, to step S10710. .

  In step S10705, it is determined whether or not there is entry determination information in the bit corresponding to the numerical information of the entry determination counter in the first buffer, that is, the entry determination information stored in the bit is “1”. It is determined whether or not. If it is determined in step S10705 that the entry determination information is “1” (S10705: YES), the process proceeds to step S10706. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10705 that the entry determination information is not “1” (S10705: NO), the process proceeds from step S10706 to step S10709, which will be described later, to step S10710. .

  In step S10706, whether or not there is the entry determination information in the bit corresponding to the numerical information of the entry determination counter in the current input port 62b, that is, the entry determination information stored in the bit is “1”. It is determined whether or not. If it is determined in step S10706 that the entry determination information is “1” (S10706: YES), the process proceeds to step S10707. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10706 that the entry determination information is not “1” (S10706: NO), the process proceeds from step S10707 to step S10709, which will be described later, to step S10710. .

  In step S10707, it is determined whether the numerical information of the current entrance determination counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to which type of entrance, and a game ball has entered the entrance corresponding to the bit. Turns on the entrance flag indicating. Specifically, for example, when it is determined that the numerical information of the current winning determination counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to the big winning opening 36a, it is determined that a game ball has entered the big winning opening 36a. Turn on the winning prize entry flag shown. For example, when it is determined that the numerical information of the current entry determination counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to the second start opening 34, it indicates that a game ball has entered the second start opening 34. Turn on the second start entrance ball flag. After executing Step S10707, the process proceeds to Step S10708.

  In step S10708, 1 is added to the numerical information of the prize ball counter corresponding to the entrance where the entrance flag is turned ON in step S10707, that is, it is determined that a game ball has entered. Specifically, for example, when the big prize entrance ball flag is turned on, the 15 prize ball counter is incremented by 1, and when the second start entrance ball flag is turned on, 3 prize balls Add 1 to the counter. After executing Step S10708, the process proceeds to Step S10709.

  In step S10709, the entrance determination counter is decremented by 1. Thereafter, in step S10710, it is determined whether or not the entrance determination counter is “0”.

  If it is determined in step S10710 that the ball entry determination counter is not “0” (S10710: NO), the bits corresponding to the numerical information of the ball entry determination counter updated in step S10709 are processed in steps S10704 to S10708. Execute the process. When the processing from step S10704 to step S10708 is executed for the numerical information set in step S10703, the ball entry determination counter becomes “0”, and an affirmative determination (S10710: YES) is made in step S10710. The process proceeds to S10711.

  In step S10711, the 8-bit entry determination information stored in the first buffer is stored (copied) in the second buffer. As a result, the ball entry determination information acquired from the input port 62b in the current timer interruption process is referred to in the ball entry detection process in the next timer interruption process. After executing Step S10711, the process proceeds to Step S10712.

  In step S10712, entry detection information indicating that an entry of a game ball has been detected in the entry detection process of the current timer interrupt process is stored in an entry detection information storage area capable of storing 8-bit information. . Specifically, the entry detection information storage area indicates “1” when the entry flag is ON for each bit corresponding to each of the above eight entrances. If the flag is OFF, “0” is stored as the entry detection information. For example, as a result of execution of the ball detection process in the timer interruption process of this time, the ball winning flag and the second starting ball flag are ON, and the ball flags corresponding to other ball openings are OFF. In some cases, the 8-bit entry detection information “00000101” is stored in the entry detection information storage area. The 8-bit entry detection information stored in the entry detection information storage area is referred to in a game history process to be described later. After executing Step S10712, the present ball detection process is terminated.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a game history process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) according to the aspect 23 of the first embodiment. In this game history process, a bonus rate and a continuous bonus rate are calculated, and a process for displaying them on the game history information display unit 45z is executed. Specifically, the bonus rate is calculated, and the calculated bonus rate is displayed on the game history information display unit 45z for 5 seconds. Thereafter, the continuous character ratio is calculated, and the calculated continuous character ratio is displayed on the game history information display unit 45z for 5 seconds. Thereafter, the bonus rate is calculated again, and the calculated bonus rate is displayed on the game history information display unit 45z for 5 seconds. In this way, the bonus rate and the continuous bonus rate are alternately displayed on the game history information display unit 45z. Hereinafter, an example of specific processing will be described.

  In step S10801, a save process is executed to save information stored in a register in the main CPU 62x (hereinafter also referred to as register information) to the stack area of the second area of the main RAM 64. In this mode 23, before the game history process (step S10616 in FIG. 27) is executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27), the process related to the progress of the game (FIG. 27) is a process other than the game history process. In this saving process, the register information relating to the progress of the game is saved in the stack area of the second area of the main RAM 64. Specifically, the value of the stack pointer in the main CPU 62x (address value indicating the top level of the stack area of the first area) is saved (Pushed) to the bottom of the stack area of the second area of the main RAM 64. Then, an address value indicating the top level of the stack area of the second area of the main RAM 64 is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x. Thereafter, the register information stored in the registers in the main CPU 62x is sequentially saved in the stack area indicated by the stack pointer set in the main CPU 62x (the uppermost stage of the stack area in the second area of the main RAM 64). (Push) By executing this save process, the address value of the stack area of the second area of the main RAM 64 is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, so the main CPU 62x stores the game history information described below. The calculation / display process can be executed using the second area of the main RAM 64. After executing Step S10801, the process proceeds to Step S10802.

  In step S10802, it is determined whether or not the abnormality flag stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is ON. The abnormality flag is a flag that is turned on when a prize ball total value to be described later is an abnormal value. If it is determined in step S10802 that the abnormality flag is ON (S10802: YES), the process proceeds to step S10803, and the prize ball total value is cleared to zero. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10804, and the abnormality flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10805. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10802 that the abnormality flag is not ON (S10802: NO), the process proceeds to step S10805 without executing the processes in steps S10803 and S10804.

  In step S10805, an OR process is executed for each corresponding bit in the ball entry detection information storage area and the buffer area, and the result (logical sum) of each OR process is stored (overwritten) in the corresponding bit in the buffer area. Details of this processing will be described later. The buffer area is an area capable of storing the same 8-bit information as the entrance detection information storage area, and is provided in the second area of the main RAM 64. After executing Step S10805, the process proceeds to Step S10806.

  In step S10806, it is determined whether or not the ball entry detection information is present in at least one of the eight bits in the buffer area (whether or not “1” is stored in one or more bits). . If it is determined in step S10806 that at least one bit in the buffer area has the ball entry detection information (S10806: YES), the process proceeds to step S10807.

  In step S10807, a target setting process for setting a target bit of a prize ball totaling process to be described later is executed among the eight bits in the buffer area. In this aspect, in one target setting process, two consecutive bits are set as targets for the prize ball counting process. Further, as will be described later, when the target setting process is executed in the next or subsequent timer interrupt process, two consecutive bits positioned next to the two bits set in the previous target setting process Is set as the target of the prize ball counting process. In this way, the two bits subject to the prize ball counting process are sequentially shifted to the next. In addition, after the last two bits of the eight bits are set as the target of the prize ball counting process, the first two bits are used for the prize ball counting process in the target setting process to be executed next. Set the target again. As described above, in this aspect, the order of the two bits set as the processing target of the prize ball totaling process from the eight bits in the buffer area is determined in advance. After executing step S10807, the process proceeds to step S10808, and a prize ball totaling process corresponding to the set bit is executed. Here, a specific example of the processing from step S10805 to step S10808 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a specific process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) according to the aspect 23 of the first embodiment. As described above, the entrance detection information storage area is an 8-bit storage area provided in the first area of the main RAM 64, and each bit corresponds to each entrance. Specifically, in this aspect, the 0th bit D0 of the pitch detection information storage area is the big winning opening 36a, the first bit D1 is the first starting port 33, the second bit D2 is the second starting port 34, the third Bit D3 corresponds to the first winning opening 32a, the fourth bit D4 corresponds to the second winning opening 32b, the fifth bit D5 corresponds to the third winning opening 32c, the sixth bit D6 corresponds to the through gate 35, and the seventh bit D7 corresponds to the discharge passage. doing.

  The buffer area is an 8-bit storage area provided in the second area of the main RAM 64, and each bit corresponds to each entrance. Specifically, in this aspect, the 0th bit D0 of the buffer area is the big prize opening 36a, the first bit D1 is the first start port 33, the second bit D2 is the second start port 34, and the third bit D3 is the first bit. The first winning port 32a, the fourth bit D4 correspond to the second winning port 32b, the fifth bit D5 corresponds to the third winning port 32c, the sixth bit D6 corresponds to the through gate 35, and the seventh bit D7 corresponds to the discharge passage. That is, each bit in the buffer area corresponds to each bit in the ball entry detection information storage area.

  When it is determined in the above-described entrance detection processing (FIG. 28) that a game ball has entered the entrance such as the big prize opening 36a, a game ball out of the 8 bits in the entrance detection information storage area. The bit corresponding to the entrance that is determined to have entered the ball is turned ON (“1”).

  FIG. 30 (A1) shows an example of processing when the n-th timer interrupt processing is executed. In the n-th timer interruption process, it is determined that a game ball has entered the second start port 34 and the first winning port 32a in the ball detection process, and the eight bits of the ball detection information storage area are stored. The value of is “00001100”. Further, the value of the 8 bits in the buffer area before the OR process is executed is “00000000”. Therefore, the value of the eight bits in the buffer area after executing the OR process is “00001100”. Thereby, the entry detection information in the entry detection information storage area that is updated each time the timer interrupt process is executed is set as a processing target of a prize ball counting process described later, and the buffer area until the process is executed. Will be held.

  In the n-th timer interrupt process, among the 8 bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area after the OR process is executed, two consecutive bits of 0th bit D0 and 1st bit D1 are awarded. Set as the processing target.

  In the winning ball counting process, when the 0th bit D0 (bit corresponding to the big winning opening 36a) set as the processing target of the winning ball counting process is “1”, it is stored in the winning ball counting buffer. “15” is added to the total number of award balls and the number of consecutive feature award balls. On the other hand, when the 0th bit D0 is “0”, the addition is not performed. In this aspect, the winning ball totaling buffer is configured as a ring buffer, and is configured to store the number of winning balls paid out during the most recent predetermined period. The number of consecutive winning award balls is the number of gaming balls paid out as winning balls due to the continuous winning action, and paid out as winning balls based on the entering of gaming balls into the big winning opening 36a. It means the number of game balls.

  Further, in the prize ball counting process, when the first bit D1 (bit corresponding to the first start port 33) set as the processing target of the prize ball counting process is “1”, the prize ball counting buffer is stored. Add “3” to the total number of prize balls stored. On the other hand, when the first bit D1 is “0”, the addition is not performed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 30A1, since the 0th bit D0 is “0” and the first bit D1 is also “0”, the above addition is not performed.

  After the winning ball totaling process is executed, two bits (the 0th bit D0 and the first bit D1) set as targets for the winning ball totaling process in the buffer area are cleared to zero.

  FIG. 30 (A2) shows an example of processing when the (n + 1) th timer interrupt processing is executed. In the (n + 1) th timer interruption process, it is determined in the entry detection process that a game ball has entered the second winning opening 32b, and the value of the eight bits in the entry detection information storage area is “00010000”. " Also, the value of the 8 bits in the buffer area before the OR process is executed is “00001100” which is the same as the buffer area after the prize ball totaling process in the n-th timer interrupt process. Therefore, the value of the 8 bits in the buffer area after executing the OR process is “00011100”.

  In the (n + 1) th timer interrupt process, the two consecutive bits of the second bit D2 and the third bit D3 out of the eight bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area after the OR process is executed are awarded. Set as the processing target.

  In the prize ball counting process, when the second bit D2 (bit corresponding to the second start port 34) set as the processing target of the prize ball counting process is “1”, it is stored in the prize ball counting buffer. “3” is added to the total number of prize balls and the number of winning prize balls. On the other hand, when the second bit D2 is “0”, the addition is not performed. The number of winning award balls is the number of game balls paid out as winning balls due to the actuating action, and as winning balls based on the entrance of gaming balls into the second start opening 34 and the big winning opening 36a. This means the number of game balls that have been paid out.

  Further, in the prize ball counting process, if the third bit D3 (bit corresponding to the first winning port 32a) set as the processing target of the prize ball counting process is “1”, the prize ball counting buffer is stored. “10” is added to the total number of prize balls stored. On the other hand, when the third bit D3 is “0”, the addition is not performed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 30 (A2), since the second bit D2 is “1”, “3” is added to the total number of prize balls and the number of winning prize balls. Further, since the third bit D3 is “1”, “10” is added to the total number of winning balls.

  After the winning ball totaling process is executed, two bits (second bit D2 and third bit D3) set as targets for the winning ball totaling process in the buffer area are cleared to zero.

  FIG. 30 (A3) shows an example of processing when the (n + 2) th timer interrupt processing is executed. In this n + 2 timer interruption process, it is determined that the game ball has entered (passed) the through gate 35 in the entry detection process, and the value of the 8 bits in the entry detection information storage area is “ 01000000 ”. Also, the value of the 8 bits in the buffer area before the OR process is executed is “00010000”, which is the same as the buffer area after the prize ball totaling process in the n + 1-th timer interrupt process described above. Therefore, the value of the 8 bits in the buffer area after executing the OR process is “01010000”.

  In the (n + 2) -th timer interrupt process, a winning ball totaling process is performed on two consecutive bits of the fourth bit D4 and the fifth bit D5 among the eight bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area after the OR process is executed. Set as the processing target.

  In the winning ball totaling process, when the fourth bit D4 (bit corresponding to the second winning port 32b) set as the processing target of the winning ball totaling process is “1”, it is stored in the winning ball totaling buffer. “10” is added to the total number of winning balls. On the other hand, when the fourth bit D4 is “0”, the addition is not performed.

  Further, in the prize ball counting process, when the fifth bit D5 (bit corresponding to the third winning port 32c) set as the processing target of the prize ball counting process is “1”, the prize ball counting buffer is stored. “10” is added to the total number of prize balls stored. On the other hand, when the fifth bit D5 is “0”, the addition is not performed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 30A3, the fourth bit D4 is “1”, so “10” is added to the total number of winning balls. Further, since the fifth bit D5 is “0”, the above-described addition is not performed.

  After the winning ball totaling process is executed, two bits (fourth bit D4 and fifth bit D5) set as targets for the winning ball totaling process in the buffer area are cleared to zero.

  FIG. 30A4 shows an example of processing when the (n + 3) th timer interrupt processing is executed. In the n + 3th timer interruption process, it is determined in the ball entry detection process that a game ball has entered the big prize opening 36a, and the value of the 8 bits in the ball entry detection information storage area is “00100001”. It has become. Further, the value of the eight bits in the buffer area before the OR process is executed is “01000000”, which is the same as the buffer area after the winning ball totaling process in the n + 2th timer interrupt process. Therefore, the value of the eight bits in the buffer area after executing the OR process is “01100001”.

  In the (n + 3) th timer interrupt process, two consecutive bits of the sixth bit D6 and the seventh bit D7 out of the eight bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area after the OR process is executed are awarded. Set as the processing target.

  However, in this aspect, the sixth bit D6 corresponds to the through gate 35, and the seventh bit D7 corresponds to the discharge passage. No prize ball is set in the through gate 35 and the discharge passage. Therefore, in this aspect, when the sixth bit D6 and the seventh bit D7 are set as the target of the prize ball counting process, the total number of prize balls is not added in the prize ball counting process. Thereafter, the two bits (sixth bit D6 and seventh bit D7) set as targets for the prize ball totaling process in the buffer area are cleared to zero.

  Thereafter, in the (n + 4) th timer interrupt process, the 0th bit D0 and the first bit D1 are set again as the processing target of the winning ball totaling process. Thereafter, the same processing is repeatedly executed. However, as will be described later, when there is no entry detection information in the bits of the buffer area (all bits are “0”), the target setting process (step S10807) and the winning ball totaling process (step S10808) ) Is not executed. Further, in this aspect, at least one bit in the buffer area has the ball detection information again from a state in which there is no ball detection information in the bits in the buffer area (all bits are “0”). When the target setting process is executed and the target setting process is executed, the two bits set as the processing target of the prize ball totaling process in the previous target setting process are stored, and the position is next to the two bits. Two consecutive bits are set as the processing target of the prize ball totaling process. When the two bits set as the processing target of the winning ball totaling process in the previous target setting process are the sixth bit D6 and the seventh bit D7, the second bit of the 0th bit D0 and the first bit D1 is 2 A set of consecutive bits is set as a target for the prize ball counting process.

  As described above, in this aspect, two bits out of the eight bits in the buffer area are set as targets for the prize ball counting process in one timer interrupt process, so at least one bit in the buffer area When there is ball entry detection information, the timer interruption process is executed four times, whereby the prize ball totaling process is executed for all eight bits in the buffer area.

  Returning to the description of FIG. After the prize ball counting process of step S10808 is executed, the process proceeds to step S10809.

  In step S10809, calculation result display control processing is executed. Specifically, a control is executed to display on the game history information display unit 45z a value stored in a calculation result buffer (to be described later) (a calculated game history information ratio or a continuous role ratio). After executing Step S10809, the process proceeds to Step S10810.

  In step S10810, it is determined whether it is the execution timing of the arithmetic processing for calculating game history information. Specifically, when a predetermined time (30 minutes in this embodiment) has elapsed since the power-on of the pachinko machine 10 or when 5 seconds have elapsed since the previous execution of the arithmetic processing, at the timing of executing the arithmetic processing. Judge that there is. If it is determined in step S10810 that it is time to execute the arithmetic processing (S10810: YES), the process proceeds to step S10811. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S10810 that it is not the timing for executing the arithmetic processing (S10810: NO), the processing proceeds to step S10813 without executing the processing of steps S10811 and S10812 described later.

  In step S10811, the type of game history information calculated in the calculation process (task 1 and task 2 described later) is set. In this aspect, as the type of game history information to be calculated, an accessory ratio and a continuous accessory ratio are alternately set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10812, and task 1 is designated as the next task to be executed in a task process (step S10814) described later. After executing Step S10812, the process proceeds to Step S10813.

  In step S10813, a process of restoring the register information saved in the stack area of the second area of the main RAM 64 in the save process described above to the register of the main CPU 62x is executed. Specifically, the register information sequentially saved from the stack area indicated by the stack pointer set in the main CPU 62x (the top level of the stack area of the second area of the main RAM 64) is sequentially stored in the main CPU 62x. Return (pop) the internal register. Thereafter, the value of the stack pointer (address value indicating the uppermost stage of the stack area in the first area) saved at the bottom of the stack area in the second area is returned (popped) to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x. By executing this return processing, the address value of the stack area of the first area of the main RAM 64 is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, so that the main CPU 62x again returns to the first RAM 64 in the main RAM 64. It becomes possible to execute processing relating to the progress of the game using the area. Thereafter, the game history processing is terminated.

  Returning to the description of step S10806. If it is determined in step S10806 that there is no entry detection information in the buffer area bits (all bits are “0”) (S10806: NO), the process proceeds to step S10814.

  In step S10814, any one of designated tasks is executed from the following three tasks. If no task is specified, task 3 is executed. That is, instead of sequentially executing three tasks in one timer interrupt process, only one designated task among the three tasks is executed in one timer interrupt process.

[Task 1]
The dividend and divisor necessary for calculating the game history information set as the calculation target are stored in the calculation buffer. Specifically, for example, in the case where it is set to calculate a bonus ratio, the prize prize ball number is saved as a dividend and the total prize ball count is saved as a divisor. Further, for example, when it is set so as to calculate the consecutive combination ratio, the number of consecutive combination prize balls is stored as a dividend and the total number of winning balls is stored as a divisor in the calculation buffer. Thereafter, task 2 is designated as the next task to be executed when the process proceeds to step S10806 in the timer interrupt process from the next time onward.

[Task 2]
An operation for dividing the dividend stored in the operation buffer by the divisor is executed, and the operation result (quotient) is stored in the operation result buffer. Thereafter, task 3 is designated as the next task to be executed when the process proceeds to the process of step S10806 in the next timer interrupt process.

[Task 3]
It is determined whether or not the prize ball total value (number of winning prize balls, number of consecutive winning prize balls, total number of winning balls) is valid. Then, task 3 is designated as the next task to be executed when the process proceeds to step S10806 in the timer interrupt process after the next time. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning ball total value is valid, the abnormality flag is not turned ON, and task 3 is designated as the next task. Here, the case where the total number of prize balls is not valid means that if the number of winning prize balls exceeds the total number of winning balls, or if the number of consecutive winning prize balls exceeds the total number of winning balls, This is a case where there is a contradiction in the total value of prize balls, such as when the number of prize prize balls exceeds the number of prize prize balls.

  After executing the designated task among the above-described three tasks, the process proceeds to the above-described step S10809, and the game history information display unit displays the value (combination ratio or continuous combination ratio) stored in the calculation result buffer. Processing to display at 45z is executed. In this aspect, information indicating the type of game history information is displayed on the first 7-segment display constituting the game history information display unit 45z, and the value of game history information is displayed on the remaining three 7-segment displays. To do.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present aspect described above, the process related to the progress of the game included in the timer interrupt process (the process other than the game history process) is the time until the next timer interrupt process is started (in this aspect, 4 msec). However, the time required for the process related to the progress of the game to end varies depending on the progress of the game. On the other hand, since the game history process is a process unrelated to the progress of the game, the process related to the progress of the game is executed in one timer interrupt process rather than the time for executing the game history process. It is preferable to preferentially secure the time for this. In addition, various processes included in the game history process (for example, award ball totaling process and arithmetic process for each bit) can be executed continuously in a single timer interrupt process without being completed. There is no effect on progress. Therefore, in this aspect, even when the execution time of the process related to the progress of the game becomes maximum according to the progress status of the game, the execution time of one timer interrupt process (the execution of the process related to the progress of the game) Various processes included in the game history process are divided into a plurality of processes such that (time + game history process execution time) is shorter than the time until the next timer interrupt process starts. In each timer interrupt process, the divided processes are executed, and the various processes are completed by executing the timer interrupt process a plurality of times. As a result, according to this aspect, it is possible to execute the game history process while securing the time required to execute the process related to the progress of the game in one timer interrupt process.

  Specifically, according to this aspect, in one execution of the timer interrupt process, one of the two tasks (task 1 and task 2) constituting the arithmetic process that is a process for calculating the game history information. Can be executed, and by executing the timer interrupt processing twice, all of the two tasks constituting the arithmetic processing are executed, so both tasks are executed in one execution of the timer interrupt processing. Compared to the configuration, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process can be shortened. As a result, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process becomes longer than 4 msec, which is an interval for starting execution of the timer interrupt process (hereinafter also referred to as an interrupt interval), and the timer interrupt process is reduced to 4 msec. It is possible to suppress the fact that it cannot be executed at intervals.

  Further, according to this aspect, a series of processes in which the execution order is determined is divided into a plurality of tasks, and in one execution of the timer interrupt process, after executing one task of the plurality of tasks Since a task to be executed next to the one task is specified, a series of times when the timer interrupt process takes longer than the interrupt interval of the timer interrupt process when incorporated in the timer interrupt process. Even a process can be executed by being incorporated into a timer interrupt process. Specifically, according to this aspect, when the calculation process for calculating the game history information is incorporated in the timer interrupt process, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process is longer than 4 msec. Also in the gaming machine having the configuration, the arithmetic processing can be incorporated and executed in the timer interrupt processing executed at intervals of 4 msec. In addition, the arithmetic processing for calculating the game history information does not affect the progress of the game even if all tasks are not executed in one execution of the timer interrupt processing. The required time can be allocated to the execution time of other processes included in the timer interrupt process, and the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved.

  Further, according to this aspect, in one execution of the timer interrupt process, two bits among the eight bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area are set as processing targets for the prize ball counting process, and the setting is performed. The winning ball counting process can be executed for the processed bits, and the winning ball counting process is executed for all the eight bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area by executing the timer interruption process a plurality of times. To do. Therefore, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the prize ball totaling process is executed for all the eight bits D0 to D7 in one execution of the timer interrupt process. Can do. As a result, the time required for executing the timer interrupt process becomes longer than 4 msec, which is the interval for starting the execution of the timer interrupt process, and the timer interrupt process cannot be executed at an interval of 4 msec. Can be suppressed.

  Further, according to this aspect, when two bits are set out of the eight bits D0 to D7 of the buffer area as the target of the prize ball totaling process, they are set in a predetermined order. It is not necessary to execute a determination process as to which bit is set as the processing target of the sphere counting process, the process can be simplified, and as a result, the processing speed can be improved. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity for storing information such as programs and parameters necessary for executing the determination process.

  Further, according to this aspect, the main CPU 62x has a time shorter than the shortest interval (in the present aspect, about 18 msec) detected by two game balls successively entering one entrance. Since the timer interrupt process can be executed four times, the winning ball totaling process (see FIG. 29) is performed on all eight processing target candidates (bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area) in a time shorter than the shortest interval. Step S10808) can be executed. Therefore, even if two game balls enter the same entrance, the first entry of the first game ball is detected at the entrance. The updated entry detection information is set as the processing target and the winning ball counting process is executed, and then the incoming ball detection information corresponding to the remaining other entrances is set as the processing target and the winning ball counting process is performed. Is executed, the winning ball counting process may be completed for all the pieces of entry detection information before the entry of the next second game ball is detected at the entrance. it can. That is, at the time when the entry detection information updated based on the entry of the second game ball being detected at the entrance is set as the processing target and the prize ball counting process is executed, Already, the winning ball counting process for the updated ball detection information based on the detection of the first game ball at the entrance is completed. The effect by this structure is demonstrated below.

  As in this aspect, in the configuration in which binary information of “0” or “1” indicating whether or not a game ball has entered is used as the entry detection information, the second entry to a certain entrance The entry detection updated from “0” to “1” based on the entry of the first game ball into the entrance before the entrance of the game ball is detected at the entrance When the prize ball counting process is not executed for the information, the entry detection information corresponding to the entrance is still “when the entrance of the second game ball is detected at the entrance. “1” remains, and the entry of the second game ball cannot be recorded. That is, despite the fact that two game balls have successively entered the entrance, the entry detection information corresponding to the entrance is one game at the entrance. It cannot be distinguished from the situation where only the ball is entered, and in the winning ball counting process, one game ball is treated as a situation where it has entered the entrance. As a result, there may be a case where an accurate number of winning balls cannot be recorded in the winning ball counting process.

  On the other hand, according to this aspect, when the second game ball is detected at the entrance, it is already updated by the entry of the first game ball at the entrance. Since the winning ball counting process is executed for the received ball detection information and the ball detection information is “0”, it is possible to record the ball of the second game ball. . As a result, it is possible to record the exact number of winning balls in the winning ball counting process. As a result, it is possible to adopt binary information of “0” or “1” indicating whether or not a game ball has entered, while ensuring accuracy in the winning ball counting process, The storage capacity for storing the entry detection information can be reduced, and the processing speed of the prize ball counting process can be improved.

  Further, according to this aspect, the game history processing (FIG. 29) is information held in the register in the main CPU 62x and information for executing processing related to the progress of the game is stored in the second area of the main RAM 64. 29 is stored in the stack area (step S10801 in FIG. 29), so that when the main CPU 62x starts the game history process, the register in the main CPU 62x is executing immediately before the start of the game history process. In the case of holding information for execution of processing relating to the progress of this, the information can be temporarily moved (saved) by writing the information in the stack area of the second area of the main RAM 64. Therefore, the information for executing the process related to the progress of the game held in the register in the main CPU 62x is deleted, and when the game history process is executed by the main CPU 62x, the register for the game history is stored in the register in the main CPU 62x. Information for executing the process can be held.

  Further, according to this aspect, the game history process (FIG. 29) is a return process (FIG. 29) for holding the information written in the stack area of the second area of the main RAM 64 in the save process in the register of the main CPU 62x. Step S10813), when the game history process is terminated, the information for executing the process related to the progress of the game is again held in the register of the main CPU 62x and executed before the start of the game history process. The process related to the progress of the game can be executed again from the state immediately before the start of the game history process.

  In addition, according to this aspect, the save process and the return process are included in the game history process, so even if only the program for executing the game history process is deleted, the process related to the progress of the game other than the game history process Can be provided without any problem. That is, it is possible to easily delete only the program for executing the game history process without modifying the program for executing the process related to the progress of the game other than the game history process. As a result, for example, when the gaming machine is improved so as not to execute the game history process, or when a new gaming machine that does not execute the game history process is developed based on the gaming machine, the design change is minimized. It becomes possible to limit.

  In addition, according to this aspect, the main CPU 62x writes information in the game history processing only to the second area of the main RAM 64, so that the information is written to the first area of the main RAM 64. It is possible to prevent the information from being rewritten by executing the game history process. Therefore, in the configuration in which the process related to the progress of the game is executed using the first area of the main RAM 64, the game history process can be prevented from affecting the process related to the progress of the game. .

  Further, according to this aspect, the main CPU 62x writes information in the process related to the progress of the game only to the first area of the main RAM 64, so that the main CPU 62x writes the information to the second area of the main RAM 64. It is possible to prevent information being rewritten due to execution of processing relating to the progress of the game. Therefore, in the configuration in which the game history process is executed using the second area of the main RAM 64, it is possible to suppress the process related to the progress of the game from affecting the game history process.

  In addition, according to this aspect, since the 8-bit buffer area capable of storing the entry detection information is provided, the entry detection information in the entry detection information storage area that is updated every time the timer interrupt process is executed, It can be held until it is set as a processing target of the winning ball counting process and the process is executed.

  In addition, according to this aspect, as shown in FIG. 29, when the winning ball counting process (step S10808) is executed in one timer interrupt process, the arithmetic process (task 1 and task 2 in step S10814) is executed. do not do. In other words, both the prize ball counting process and the calculation process are not executed in one timer interrupt process, so that the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process can be shortened. As a result, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process is longer than the interrupt interval of the timer interrupt process, and the timer interrupt process cannot be executed at the interrupt interval. be able to. Further, according to this aspect, the winning ball counting process in which the game ball entry status and the processing load correlate is executed in preference to the arithmetic processing in which the game ball entry status and the processing load do not correlate. , It is possible to suppress the execution interval of the winning ball counting process from being increased, and as a result, the winning ball total value which is the processing result of the winning ball counting process cannot accurately reflect the entering situation of the game ball. Can be suppressed. Specifically, for example, before the winning ball counting process is executed for a certain bit in the buffer area, the next game ball enters the entrance corresponding to the bit, and two It is possible to suppress handling of a game ball as a single game ball.

  In addition, according to this aspect, as shown in FIG. 29, when the prize ball totaling process (step S10808) is not executed and it is determined that it is the execution timing of the arithmetic process (step S10810: YES). Since the calculation process (task 1 and task 2 in step S10814) is executed, neither the prize ball counting process nor the calculation process is executed in one timer interruption process. In addition, it is possible to execute another process independent of these processes (in this aspect, a process for determining the validity of the prize ball total value (task 3 in step S10814)). Further, in this aspect, when one of the prize ball counting process and the arithmetic process is executed in one timer interrupt process, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process is shorter than the interrupt interval. Therefore, in a situation where neither the prize ball counting process nor the calculation process is executed, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process is executed by executing a process having a shorter processing time than the prize ball counting process and the calculation process. Can be reliably suppressed from becoming longer than the interrupt interval.

  In addition, according to this aspect, in the arithmetic processing in one timer interrupt process, it is possible to calculate two types of game history information, that is, a bonus rate and a continuous bonus rate. Since the process for calculating either one of the consecutive character ratios is executed, compared with the configuration for executing the process for calculating the two types of game history information in the calculation process in one timer interrupt process. The time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process can be shortened. As a result, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process becomes longer than the interrupt interval, and it is possible to prevent the timer interrupt process from being executed at a predetermined interrupt interval. . Further, the storage capacity of the main RAM 64 for temporarily storing the calculated game history information can be reduced.

  Also, according to this aspect, in the incoming detection processing, when the incoming determination information of the bit corresponding to each entrance is “0” → “1” → “1”, it corresponds to the bit. Since it is determined that a game ball has entered the entrance, the occurrence of erroneous detection due to electrical noise can be suppressed as in the first embodiment described above.

<Aspect 24>
In the above-described aspect 23, as the game history information, it is configured to calculate the role ratio and the continuous role ratio, but the game history information to be calculated is not limited to these, and the various game history information shown in the first embodiment is used. It can be set as the structure to calculate. For example, it is good also as a structure which calculates the ball exit rate shown in 1st Embodiment, a payout ratio, etc. In this case, the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage (the number of game balls that have been fired on the game board 30) is also counted in the same manner as the above-described prize ball counting process (step S10808 in FIG. 29). do it.

<Aspect 25>
In the game history process (FIG. 29) of the above-described aspect 23, when it is determined in step S10802 that the abnormality flag is ON, the prize ball total value is cleared (step S10803), and the abnormality flag is turned OFF (step S10802). S10804) The configuration may be such that when the abnormality flag is turned ON a predetermined number of times within a predetermined period, information indicating that an abnormality has occurred is displayed on the game history information display unit 45z.

<Aspect 26>
In the above aspect 23, the calculation process, which is a process of calculating game history information, is divided into a plurality of tasks and executed. However, the type of the process divided into the plurality of tasks is not limited to the calculation process, The processing can be divided into a plurality of tasks and executed. For example, in a configuration in which the sound light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 sets the content of the effect to be executed, the processing for setting the content of the effect may be divided into a plurality of tasks and executed.

<Aspect 27>
In the above-described aspect 23, as the processing target of the winning ball totaling process, two bits out of the eight bits in the buffer area are set as the processing target, but the number of processing target bits is two. The number is not limited to this, and may be other numbers. For example, five bits may be set as a processing target in one timer interrupt process. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which sets all eight bits as a process target in one timer interruption process. Further, only predetermined bits (e.g., 6 bits of 0th bit D0 to 5th bit D5 in which a winning ball is set) out of 8 bits can be set as a processing target. In the timer interrupt processing, two bits may be set as a processing target.

<Aspect 28>
In the above aspect 23, the first area of the main side RAM 64 is allocated as a storage area for executing processing related to the progress of the game, and the second area of the main side RAM 64 is allocated as a storage area for executing processing for game history. However, the second area of the main RAM 64 may be assigned as a storage area for executing processing other than the game history processing.

  The main RAM 64 may be divided into three or more areas. For example, the third area, which is the third area of the main RAM 64, may be assigned as a storage area for executing processing for outputting game history information to the outside.

<Aspect 29>
In the above aspect 23, the game history process includes the save process and the return process, but other processes other than the game history process may include the save process and the return process. For example, the process scheduled to be deleted when the design of the gaming machine is changed may include a save process and a return process.

<Aspect 30>
In the above aspect 23, the game history process is incorporated in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27), but the game history process may be incorporated in the main process (FIG. 12). Further, in the above-described aspect 23, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27) is configured so that the game history process is incorporated as a process different from the process related to the progress of the game, but as a process different from the process related to the progress of the game. A process other than the game history process may be incorporated in the timer interrupt process. For example, a configuration in which a transmission process for transmitting information related to a game status to a hall computer installed in a game hall at a predetermined timing is incorporated in a timer interrupt process as a process different from a process related to the progress of the game It is good. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the various processes different from the process regarding progress of a game are integrated in the main process.

<Aspect 31>
In the above aspect 23, the game history management chip 300 is not provided, and the main CPU 62x executes the game history processing (FIG. 29) to calculate the game history information. The main CPU 62x may execute the game history processing (FIG. 29) and calculate the game history information. According to such a configuration, the game history information can be calculated in two systems, so that the game history information can be calculated even if a problem occurs in one system. In addition, if the game history information calculated from the two systems is compared, and the configuration is to notify (display) whether or not these values match, the reliability and accuracy of the calculated game history information are confirmed. It becomes possible to do.

  Further, the game history management chip 300 may be configured to execute the game history processing (FIG. 29) described in the above aspect 23 and calculate game history information.

<Aspect 32>
In step S10805 of the game history process (FIG. 29) of the above aspect 23, the information stored in each bit of the ball entry detection information storage area (FIG. 30) provided in the first area of the main RAM 64 is ORed. Although it is configured to read in the processing, instead of this configuration, an 8-bit storage area corresponding to the entry detection information storage area (hereinafter also referred to as a second entry detection information storage area) is stored in the second RAM 64. In the configuration provided in the area, the information stored in each bit of the entrance detection information storage area provided in the first area of the main RAM 64 is provided in the second area of the main RAM 64. It is good also as a structure which copies (copy) to the 2nd entrance detection information storage area, and reads the information of the each replicated bit in OR process of step S10805.

  Further, the entrance detection information storage area may be provided in the second area of the main RAM 64.

<Aspect 33>
In step S10814 of the game history processing (FIG. 29) of the above-described aspect 23, when the calculation processing (task 1 or task 2) for calculating the game history information is not executed, the prize ball total value included in task 3 is validated. Although the process for determining the sex is always executed, the process for determining the validity of the prize ball total value may be executed only once each time the game history information is newly calculated. Specifically, for example, after the validity of the prize ball total value is determined in task 3, the determined flag indicating that it has been determined is turned ON, and when the task 3 is executed next, the determined flag Is set to ON, the process of determining the validity of the prize ball total value is not executed. Then, in the task 1 executed again, the determined flag may be turned off. According to such a configuration, one game history process is completed while determining the validity of the prize ball total value that is the basis for calculating the game history information and ensuring the validity of the game history information. It is possible to further reduce the processing time required for the process.

<Aspect 34>
In step S10810 of the game history process (FIG. 29) of the above aspect 23, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 minutes) has elapsed since the power-on of the pachinko machine 10, or 5 seconds have elapsed since the previous execution of the arithmetic process. In this case, it is determined that it is time to execute the arithmetic processing and the game history information is calculated. However, instead of this configuration, the first time immediately after the power is turned on without waiting for the elapse of a predetermined time since the power is turned on. It may be determined that it is the timing for executing the arithmetic processing, and thereafter, every time 5 seconds have elapsed from the previous execution of the arithmetic processing, it is determined that it is the timing for executing the arithmetic processing. In this configuration, until the total number of prize balls in the prize ball total value reaches 60000, the calculated game history information is blinked when displayed on the game history information display unit 45z, and the total number of prize balls is 60000. After reaching the game history information, the calculated game history information may be turned on when displayed on the game history information display unit 45z. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not a sufficient amount of statistical data is accumulated as a prize ball total value that is a basis for calculation of displayed game history information. Instead of the total number of winning balls, a configuration may be adopted in which the flashing display is switched to the lighting display on the basis of the total value of the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage (the number of game balls that have been launched on the game board 30). .

<Aspect 35>
In step S10807 of the game history process (FIG. 29) in the above-described aspect 23, the plurality of processing target candidates for the prize ball counting process are fixed in advance as eight bits in the buffer area. Divide eight bits into two groups of four, select one of the two groups as a candidate for a plurality of processing targets for the prize ball totaling process, and select four bits belonging to the selected group It is good also as a structure which sets two bits from among these as a processing target of a prize ball totaling process. However, as in the above-described aspect 23, when one of the two groups is selected, the plurality of processing target candidates for the prize ball counting process are fixed in advance as eight bits of the buffer area. It is not necessary to execute the processing to be performed, and the processing can be simplified. As a result, the processing speed can be improved. Furthermore, the storage capacity for storing information such as programs and parameters necessary for selecting one of the two groups can be reduced.

<Aspect 36>
In the game history process (FIG. 29) of the above aspect 23, the tasks (various processes) to be executed in the game history process in the current timer interrupt process based on the remaining time until the next timer interrupt process is started. The number and type may be determined. According to such a configuration, the task can be executed by effectively utilizing the remaining time until the next timer interrupt process is started.

<Aspect 37>
FIG. 31 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the aspect 37 of the first embodiment. In this aspect 37, the game history management chip 300 is not provided, and the main CPU 62x is configured to execute the process (game history process) for calculating and displaying the game history information described above. The main RAM 64 is divided into two areas (a first area and a second area) as in the above-described aspect 23 (FIG. 26), and the first area of the main RAM 64 relates to the progress of the game. It is used as an area for storing programs for executing processing, various flags (high probability mode flag, high frequency support mode flag, etc.), etc., and the second area of the main RAM 64 is for calculating and displaying game history information. Is used as an area for storing a program for executing the above process (game history process) and various numerical information (game history information such as the above-mentioned prize ball total value, number of balls entered, bonus rate ratio, etc.) . Then, as in the above-described aspect 23 (FIG. 26), the main CPU 62x writes information to the first area of the main RAM 64 when executing a process related to game progress (a process other than the game history process). When the game history process is executed, information is written only to the second area of the main RAM 64.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 31, the main MPU 62 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has a flash that is a non-volatile memory that can be rewritten and can retain memory even when the power supply is cut off. A memory 64x is provided. In this embodiment, a NAND flash memory is used as the flash memory 64x, but a NOR flash memory may be used. In the game history process, the main CPU 62x of this aspect executes a process of writing various numerical information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 to the flash memory 64x at a predetermined timing. Specifically, for example, every time the total number of winning balls in the winning ball total value reaches 500, the main CPU 62x executes a process of writing various winning ball total values and the like in the flash memory 64x. That is, the flash memory 64x stores various pieces of numerical information (game history information such as award ball total value, number of balls entered, and bonus rate) acquired based on game execution.

  As described above, according to the configuration of the present aspect, various numerical information (game history information such as award ball total value, number of balls entered information, and ratio of bonuses) acquired based on the execution of the game is stored in the flash memory 64x. Since it is stored, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off for a long period of time, these various numerical information can be held. For example, even when power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 over a long period of time in the distribution process, a normal game is being executed in the pachinko machine 10 based on various numerical information stored in the flash memory 64x. It is possible to inspect whether or not.

<Aspect 38>
In the above aspect 37, a flash memory clear button that can be pressed is provided on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10, and the flash memory clear button is stored in the flash memory 64x when the button is continuously pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). It may be configured such that the information (award ball total value, number of balls entered, game history information such as a percentage of bonuses, etc.) is deleted.

  Specifically, for example, an erasing IC chip capable of executing an erasing process for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x is provided, and the erasing process is performed while the flash memory clear button is pressed. A high level signal is input to the input terminal of the IC chip. Then, the erasure processing IC chip is configured to execute an erasure process for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x based on the fact that the Hi level signal input to the input terminal continues for 10 seconds. . According to such a configuration, compared to a configuration in which the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased by the processing of the main CPU 62x, the influence on the processing related to the game execution of the main CPU 62x and the operation of the main RAM 64. The information stored in the flash memory 64x can be erased while suppressing the above.

  Further, the flash memory clear button may be configured to be stored in a space where an open trace remains. Specifically, for example, the flash memory clear button is stored inside a substrate box to which a seal sticker that leaves an opening mark is affixed. It is good also as a structure which cannot be performed.

  According to the configuration of this aspect, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to open the board box of the pachinko machine 10 and operate the flash memory clear button. The trace of opening will remain in the substrate box of the pachinko machine 10. That is, there is a possibility that the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased by opening the board box of the pachinko machine 10 based on whether or not the trace of opening remains in the board box of the pachinko machine 10. It becomes possible to grasp whether or not.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified (for example, an illegal modification of a nail), the executed game is affected by the unauthorized modification, and further, the pachinko machine 10 In some cases, the information stored in the flash memory 64x (for example, the ratio of the items) may be affected by the unauthorized modification. A person who inspects whether or not a normal game is being executed by the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, also referred to as “inspector”) confirms the information stored in the flash memory 64x, thereby checking the pachinko machine 10 with the information. Unauthorized alterations can be found. For this reason, a person who desires to prevent an inspector from discovering that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified by deleting the information (hereinafter, also referred to as “illegal person”). May exist.

  However, according to the configuration of this aspect, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x, it is necessary to open the board box of the pachinko machine 10 and operate the flash memory clear button. Then, since traces of opening remain in the board box of the pachinko machine 10, even if an unauthorized person erases the information stored in the flash memory 64x, the information is erased for illegal concealment. There will be a trace of the possibility. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal unauthorized modification performed on the pachinko machine 10, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the generation of motivation to perform unauthorized modification on the pachinko machine 10, and the soundness of the game Can be improved.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 may be circulated by transaction, and a person who wants to newly distribute the pachinko machine 10 (so-called used pachinko machine) for which a game has already been executed can be used in the flash memory of the pachinko machine 10 There is a case where there is a legitimate request that the information stored in 64x is deleted and then distributed. Therefore, only a person who desires to delete the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 for a valid reason (hereinafter also referred to as a “legitimate person”) can erase the trace of opening the board box. If the distribution system which can perform is constructed | assembled, it will become possible to promote the smooth distribution | circulation of the pachinko machine 10, ensuring the soundness of a game. Specifically, for example, by establishing a distribution system in which only the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 10 as a legitimate person can put a new seal seal, while ensuring the soundness of the game, the pachinko machine 10 smooth distribution can be promoted.

  The configuration in which the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased based on the operation of the flash memory clear button is not limited to the above configuration, and various other configurations can be employed. For example, when the flash memory clear button is pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the information stored in the flash memory 64x may be deleted. Further, for example, the IC chip for erasure processing is not provided, and the main CPU 62x monitors whether or not the flash memory clear button is pressed, and the flash memory clear button continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). When pressed, the information may be erased by executing an erasing program for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x.

  In addition, the flash memory clear button is not limited to the configuration stored inside the substrate box with the seal sticker attached, but is stored inside the space where the trace of opening (also called the trace of opening or the trace of opening / closing) remains. Other configurations may be used as long as they are configured. For example, the flash memory clear button is housed in the space covered by the lid member, and if the space is not opened by destroying at least a part of the lid member, the flash memory clear button is operated. It is good also as a structure which cannot do. According to such a configuration, in order to operate the flash memory clear button, the lid member must be destroyed to open the space, so that when the flash memory clear button is pressed, the flash memory is stored. The broken lid member remains as a trace of the open space. In addition, for example, a flash memory clear button is connected to a plurality of case bodies (for example, a box-shaped case body and a lid-shaped case body capable of sealing an open portion of the box-shaped case body). As a configuration that is housed inside a board box that is configured by being joined together, and when a plurality of case bodies that constitute the board box are separated, a predetermined portion of the joint portion (caulking portion) needs to be destroyed. Also good. According to such a configuration, in order to operate the flash memory clear button, it is necessary to break a predetermined portion of the coupling portion (crimping portion) and separate a plurality of case bodies to open the board box. When the flash memory clear button is pressed, a joint portion (caulking portion) in which a predetermined portion is destroyed remains as a trace that the base box is opened. Furthermore, the flash memory clear button was configured to be housed inside the substrate box coupled by the coupling portion (caulking portion) described above, and was peeled off by leaving the adhesive layer on the adhesion target when peeled off. It is good also as a structure which affixes the seal seal | sticker which leaves the trace of this so that the boundary between several case bodies may be straddled. According to such a configuration, when the flash memory clear button is pressed, the sealing seal is peeled off in addition to the trace of opening of the substrate box called the coupling portion (caulking portion) in which the predetermined portion is broken or A trace of the opening of the substrate box remains, such as the seal seal being cut at the boundary between the case bodies.

<Aspect 39>
In the above aspect 37, the above-described inspection machine 320 (FIG. 10) for inspecting whether or not various game history information is within a normal range is connected to the inspection terminal 65 provided on the main MPU 62. When a predetermined signal (for example, an erasure command) is received from the inspection machine 320, information stored in the flash memory 64x (game history information such as award ball total value, number of balls entered, bonus rate, etc.) ) May be deleted.

  Specifically, for example, as in the above-described aspect 38, an erasing IC chip capable of executing an erasing process for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x is provided and connected to the inspection terminal 65. When an erasing command is transmitted from the inspection machine 320, the erasing command is input to the input terminal of the erasing IC chip. Then, the erasure processing IC chip executes erasure processing for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x based on the reception of the erasure command from the input terminal.

  According to the configuration of this aspect, the erasing IC chip erases the information stored in the flash memory 64x based on the receipt of the erasing command command from the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65. The person who has the inspection device 320 can erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x. That is, it becomes possible to restrict the deletion of the information by a person who does not have the inspection machine 320.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified (for example, an illegal modification of a nail), the executed game is affected by the unauthorized modification, and further, the pachinko machine 10 In some cases, the information stored in the flash memory 64x (for example, the ratio of the items) may be affected by the unauthorized modification. A person (inspector) who inspects whether or not a normal game is being executed by the pachinko machine 10, for example, connects the inspection machine 320 to the inspection terminal 65, and uses the information stored in the flash memory 64x as an inspection machine. By confirming with 320, an unauthorized modification applied to the pachinko machine 10 can be found. For this reason, there is a possibility that there is a person (unauthorized person) who has a desire to prevent the inspector from discovering that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified by deleting the information. .

  However, according to the configuration of this aspect, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x, the inspection machine 320 that can be connected to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10 is required. If the persons who can have the inspection machine 320 are restricted, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the flash memory 64x from being erased by an unauthorized person. It is possible to suppress the generation of motivation to make various modifications and improve the soundness of the game.

  The pachinko machine 10 may be circulated by transaction, and a person who wants to newly circulate a pachinko machine 10 that has already been played (so-called used pachinko machine 10) may flash the pachinko machine 10 There is a case where there is a legitimate request that the information stored in the memory 64x is erased and then distributed. Therefore, only those who have a desire to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 for a valid reason (for example, the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 10) and the inspector described above have the inspection machine 320. If a distribution system that can be used is constructed, smooth distribution of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted while ensuring the soundness of the game.

  Further, when the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased, the information stored in the flash memory 64x is transmitted to the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 prior to the deletion. It is good also as a structure to be.

  Specifically, for example, the above-described erase processing IC chip starts transmission of information stored in the flash memory 64x based on the reception of the erase command from the input terminal. The command is transmitted to the inspection machine 320. Upon receiving the transmission start command, the inspection device 320 shifts to a receivable mode in which information can be received, and transmits a receivable command indicating the receivable mode to the erasure processing IC chip. The IC chip for erasure processing that has received the receivable command starts transmitting information stored in the flash memory 64x. When the transmission of the information is completed, the erasure processing IC chip transmits a transmission completion command to the inspection device 320. The inspection device 320 that has received the transmission completion command checks whether there is an error such as data loss in the received information, and if there is no error, transmits the reception completion command to the erasure processing IC chip. The IC chip for erasure processing executes erasure processing for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x based on the reception of the reception completion command.

  According to such a configuration, even if the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased from the flash memory 64x even if it is erased by an erroneous operation contrary to the intention of the person having the inspection device 320, Since the information that has been performed remains in the inspection machine 320, the information can be confirmed by the inspection machine 320.

  Note that the configuration in which the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the inspection device 320 is not limited to the above configuration, and various other configurations may be adopted. it can. For example, when the IC chip for erasure processing is not provided, the main CPU 62x monitors whether or not the erasure command is received from the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65, and the erasure command is received. Further, the information may be erased by executing an erase program for erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x. When the main CPU 62x receives an erasure command from the inspection device 320, the main CPU 62x transmits information stored in the flash memory 64x to the inspection device 320 and then executes an erasure program for erasing the information. Thus, the information stored in the flash memory 64x may be erased.

  In this aspect, the configuration is such that the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased by using the inspection machine 320 for inspecting whether or not various game history information is within the normal range. The configuration is not limited to the configuration using the machine 320, and the information may be erased using a dedicated terminal for erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x.

<Aspect 40>
In the above aspect 37, the flash memory clear button stored in the space in which the trace of the opening remains is continuously pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), and predetermined from the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65. When a signal (for example, an erase command) is received, information stored in the flash memory 64x (award ball total value, number of entered balls, game history information such as a bonus rate) is erased. Also good.

  Specifically, for example, as in the above-described aspect 38, an erasure processing IC chip capable of executing erasure processing for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x is provided, and the flash memory clear button is pressed. The Hi level signal is input to the input terminal of the erasing IC chip during the period. Then, the erasing IC chip can perform an erasing process for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x based on the fact that the Hi level signal input to the input terminal continues for 10 seconds. Transition to execution standby mode. When the erase processing IC chip receives an erase command command from the inspection machine 320 in the erase processing execution standby mode, the erase processing IC chip executes an erase process for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x.

  According to the configuration of this aspect, the flash memory clear button is stored inside the substrate box where the trace of opening remains, so in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10, The substrate box of the pachinko machine 10 is opened and the flash memory clear button is operated, and the trace of opening remains in the board box of the pachinko machine 10. Further, since the IC chip for erasure process erases the information stored in the flash memory 64x based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65, it has the inspection machine 320. A person can erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x. Therefore, there is a possibility that the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased by opening the board box of the pachinko machine 10 based on whether or not the trace of opening remains in the board box of the pachinko machine 10. Whether or not the information is deleted by a person who does not have the inspection machine 320 can be restricted.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified (for example, an illegal modification of a nail), the executed game is affected by the unauthorized modification, and further, the pachinko machine 10 In some cases, the information stored in the flash memory 64x (for example, the ratio of the items) may be affected by the unauthorized modification. A person (inspector) who inspects whether or not a normal game is being executed by the pachinko machine 10, for example, connects the inspection machine 320 to the inspection terminal 65, and uses the information stored in the flash memory 64x as an inspection machine. By confirming with 320, an unauthorized modification applied to the pachinko machine 10 can be found. For this reason, there is a possibility that there is a person (unauthorized person) who has a desire to prevent the inspector from discovering that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified by deleting the information. .

  However, according to the configuration of this aspect, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x, the inspection machine 320 that can be connected to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10 is required. If the persons who can have the inspection machine 320 are restricted, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the flash memory 64x from being erased by an unauthorized person. Furthermore, even if an unauthorized person has the inspection machine 320, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x, the board box of the pachinko machine 10 is opened and the flash memory It is necessary to operate the clear button. Then, since the trace of opening remains in the board box of the pachinko machine 10, even if the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased, there is a possibility that the information is erased for illegal concealment. Such a trace will remain. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the flash memory 64x from being erased by an unauthorized person, and to make it difficult to conceal unauthorized modification performed on the pachinko machine 10. As a result, it is possible to further suppress the generation of motivation to improperly modify the pachinko machine 10 and improve the soundness of the game.

  The pachinko machine 10 may be circulated by transaction, and a person who wants to newly circulate a pachinko machine 10 that has already been played (so-called used pachinko machine 10) may flash the pachinko machine 10 There is a case where there is a legitimate request that the information stored in the memory 64x is erased and then distributed. Therefore, only those who have a desire to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 for a valid reason (for example, the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 10) and the inspector described above have the inspection machine 320. In addition, if a distribution system in which only a legitimate person can erase the trace of the opening of the substrate box is constructed, it is possible to promote smooth distribution of the pachinko machine 10 while ensuring the soundness of the game. It becomes possible.

  In addition, as a configuration in which the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased based on the fact that the flash memory clear button receives a predetermined operation and receives a predetermined signal from the inspection device 320, the above configuration is used. Not limited to this, various other configurations can be employed. For example, when the flash memory clear button is pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the erasure processing IC chip may be shifted to the above-described erasure processing execution standby mode. For example, when an erase command is received from the inspection device 320, the erase IC chip shifts to the above-described erase process execution standby mode, and the flash memory clear button is set for a predetermined time (for example, the erase process execution standby mode). (10 seconds) When the button is continuously pressed, an erasing process for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x may be executed. Further, for example, the configuration may be such that the IC chip for erasure processing is not provided, and the main CPU 62x executes a function equivalent to that of the IC chip for erasure processing and erases information stored in the flash memory 64x.

  Similarly to the above-described aspect 39, when the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased, the information stored in the flash memory 64x is connected to the inspection terminal 65 prior to the erase. It is good also as a structure transmitted to the inspection machine 320 made. According to such a configuration, even if the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased from the flash memory 64x even if it is erased by an erroneous operation contrary to the intention of the person having the inspection device 320, Since the information that has been performed remains in the inspection machine 320, the information can be confirmed by the inspection machine 320.

<Aspect 41>
In the above aspect 37, an operation panel that receives an input operation of authentication information (for example, a password) and a display that displays the input authentication information are provided on the back of the pachinko machine 10, and the authentication information input by the operation panel Information stored in the flash memory 64x when the authentication information individually set in the pachinko machine 10 is matched (game history information such as prize ball total value, number of balls entered, and ratio of bonuses) It is good also as a structure by which is deleted.

  Specifically, for example, in the same manner as in the above-described aspect 38, an erasing IC chip capable of executing an erasing process for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x is provided and input via the operation panel is provided. The authentication information is input to the input terminal of the erasing IC chip. Then, the erasure processing IC chip determines whether or not the authentication information input from the operation panel matches the authentication information stored in the ROM of the erasure processing IC chip. When the determination is made, an erasing process for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x is executed.

  According to the configuration of this aspect, the erasure processing IC chip is stored in the flash memory 64x based on the fact that the authentication information received by the receiving unit matches the authentication information set in the pachinko machine 10. Since the information is deleted, a person who has the authentication information set in the pachinko machine 10 (for example, a person who knows the password set in the pachinko machine 10) is stored in the flash memory 64x. Information can be erased. That is, it becomes possible to restrict the deletion of the information by a person who does not have the authentication information set in the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified (for example, an illegal modification of a nail), the executed game is affected by the unauthorized modification, and further, the pachinko machine 10 In some cases, the information stored in the flash memory 64x (for example, the ratio of the items) may be affected by the unauthorized modification. A person (inspector) who inspects whether or not a normal game is being executed by the pachinko machine 10 confirms the information stored in the flash memory 64x, so that unauthorized modification made to the pachinko machine 10 is performed. Can be found. For this reason, there is a possibility that there is a person (unauthorized person) who has a desire to prevent the inspector from discovering that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified by deleting the information. .

  However, according to the configuration of this aspect, it is necessary to have the authentication information set in the pachinko machine 10 in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x. And if the person who can have the authentication information set in the pachinko machine 10 is restricted, the information stored in the flash memory 64x can be prevented from being erased by an unauthorized person, As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of motivation to improperly modify the pachinko machine 10, and to improve the soundness of the game.

  The pachinko machine 10 may be circulated by transaction, and a person who wants to newly circulate a pachinko machine 10 that has already been played (so-called used pachinko machine 10) may flash the pachinko machine 10 There is a case where there is a legitimate request that the information stored in the memory 64x is erased and then distributed. Therefore, only those who desire to delete the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 for a valid reason (for example, the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 10) are set in the pachinko machine 10. If a distribution system capable of having authentication information is constructed, smooth distribution of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted while ensuring the soundness of the game.

  Note that the authentication information input to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x is not limited to the password, and various authentication information can be employed. For example, as authentication information, an authentication character (password, passphrase) that is a combination of a plurality of character strings, a barcode of a specific pattern, a password generated according to a predetermined rule (for example, a one-time password), a specific person Biometric authentication information (fingerprint, iris, vein pattern, etc.) can be used.

<Aspect 42>
In the above aspect 37, when an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, information stored in the main side RAM 64 Among them, information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used for controlling the execution of the game including the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag) is erased and stored in the second area. The information (information acquired based on the executed game such as the prize ball total value, game history information such as the number of winning balls, and the ratio of bonuses) may not be deleted.

  Specifically, for example, immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main CPU 62x determines whether or not the RAM clear button is pressed, and the RAM clear button is pressed. If it is determined that the information is stored in the main RAM 64, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is deleted, and the information stored in the second area is not deleted. The configuration.

  According to such a configuration, information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (information acquired based on the executed game) is stored in the first area of the main RAM 64. Information (information used for controlling the execution of the game) can be erased. Specifically, for example, when a malfunction occurs in the game execution control, or when the game hall starts or ends, information used for game execution control is deleted to control the gaming machine. There is a desire to execute initialization but not to delete information acquired based on the executed game. According to the configuration of this aspect, by operating the RAM clear button, the information used for controlling the execution of the game is deleted while leaving the information acquired based on the executed game, and the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to execute control initialization.

  Furthermore, in addition to the RAM clear button described above, a second RAM clear button for erasing information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. When the operation of pressing the second RAM clear button for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) is executed during the state, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 may be deleted. .

  Specifically, for example, the main CPU 62x monitors whether or not the second RAM clear button is pressed, and the state where the second RAM clear button is pressed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). If it is determined that the information is stored in the main RAM 64, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is deleted.

  According to such a configuration, information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 that cannot be erased by operating the RAM clear button (information acquired based on the executed game) It can be erased by operating the second clear button.

  Furthermore, the second RAM clear button may be configured to be stored inside a space where an open trace remains. Specifically, for example, the second RAM clear button is stored in the inside of the substrate box to which a seal sticker that leaves an opening trace is affixed, and can be pressed unless the seal sticker is peeled off to open the substrate box. It is good also as a structure which cannot be performed.

  According to the configuration of this aspect, in order to erase the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to open the board box of the pachinko machine 10 and operate the second RAM clear button. There will be traces of opening in the substrate box of the pachinko machine 10. That is, the information stored in the second area of the main side RAM 64 is erased by opening the substrate box of the pachinko machine 10 based on whether or not the trace of opening remains in the board box of the pachinko machine 10. It becomes possible to grasp whether or not there is a possibility.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified (for example, an illegal modification of a nail), the executed game is affected by the unauthorized modification, and further, the pachinko machine 10 In some cases, the information (for example, the proportion of an accessory) stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 may be affected by the unauthorized modification. A person (inspector) who inspects whether or not a normal game is being executed by the pachinko machine 10 confirms information stored in the flash memory 64x and information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64. As a result, it is possible to find an unauthorized modification applied to the pachinko machine 10. For this reason, there is a possibility that there is a person (unauthorized person) who has a desire to prevent the inspector from discovering that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified by deleting the information. .

  However, according to the configuration of this aspect, in order to erase the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64, it is necessary to open the board box of the pachinko machine 10 and operate the second RAM clear button. . Then, since traces of opening remain in the board box of the pachinko machine 10, even if an unauthorized person erases the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64, the information is illegally concealed. Therefore, there remains a trace that it may have been deleted. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal unauthorized modification performed on the pachinko machine 10, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the generation of motivation to perform unauthorized modification on the pachinko machine 10, and the soundness of the game Can be improved.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 may be circulated by transaction, and a person who wants to newly distribute a pachinko machine 10 (so-called used pachinko machine) for which a game has already been executed is the main side of the pachinko machine 10 There is a case where there is a legitimate request that information stored in the second area of the RAM 64 is to be distributed after being erased. Therefore, only a person who has a desire to delete the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 of the pachinko machine 10 for a valid reason (a legitimate person) can erase the trace of opening the board box. If the distribution system is established, it is possible to promote smooth distribution of the pachinko machine 10 while ensuring the soundness of the game. Specifically, for example, by establishing a distribution system in which only the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 10 as a legitimate person can put a new seal seal, while ensuring the soundness of the game, the pachinko machine 10 smooth distribution can be promoted.

  In addition, as a structure of the space in which the trace of opening (also referred to as the trace of opening or the trace of opening / closing) remains, various configurations described in the aspect 38 can be employed.

<Aspect 43>
In the aspect 37, an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, and the RAM is within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). When the clear button is not pressed, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is deleted, and the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is not deleted. On the other hand, when the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while pressing the RAM clear button, and the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). The information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is not erased, and the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is erased. It may be configured to be.

  Specifically, for example, immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main CPU 62x determines whether or not the RAM clear button is pressed, and the RAM clear button is pressed. If it is determined that the RAM clear button is pressed, it is monitored whether or not the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). If the main CPU 62x determines that the RAM clear button has not been pressed within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the main CPU 62x erases the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64. However, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is not erased. On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM clear button is pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the main CPU 62x deletes the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64. First, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is erased.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to select information to be deleted from information stored in the main RAM 64 by executing different operations on the RAM clear button. That is, since the target information to be deleted can be selected without providing another operation unit (for example, a button or the like) for selecting the target information to be deleted, the structure of the pachinko machine 10 can be simplified. Can be achieved.

  Specifically, for example, when trouble occurs in the game execution control or when the game hall starts or ends, information used for game execution control (stored in the first area of the main RAM 64). When the initialization of the control of the gaming machine is to be executed by deleting the stored information), an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button is executed and for a predetermined time (for example, 10 Second), the RAM clear button has not been pressed, while the information acquired based on the executed game (information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64) is deleted and the game is deleted. When a new machine is to be distributed, an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button and executing the RAM clear button There depressed state may be directly to continue a predetermined time (e.g. 10 seconds). As described above, by performing different operations on the RAM clear button, it is possible to select information to be deleted from the information stored in the main RAM 64.

  Since the above-described game history process cannot be executed while the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is being erased, the number of game balls entering each entry slot, There is a possibility that an error may occur in the prize ball total value. Therefore, if the configuration is such that the game execution is not started until the end of the erasure process (for example, a configuration that suppresses the launch of the game ball), the occurrence of the error can be suppressed.

  Further, in this aspect, an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button is executed, and the RAM clear button is not pressed within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). If this happens, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is erased, and further, it is determined whether the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is valid. If it is determined that the information is not erased, the information may be erased if it is determined that the information is not valid. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from being started while the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is not valid. Note that the case where the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is not valid is, for example, the case where the number of winning prize balls exceeds the total number of winning balls, or the total number of consecutive winning prize balls For example, when the number of winning balls is exceeded, the number of consecutive prize winning balls exceeds the number of winning prize balls, or the like.

<Aspect 44>
In the aspect 37, an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, and the RAM is within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). When the clear button is not pressed, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is deleted, and the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is not deleted. On the other hand, when the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while pressing the RAM clear button, and the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). The information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is not only erased, but is stored in the second area of the main RAM 64. Information may be configured to be erased.

  Specifically, for example, immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main CPU 62x determines whether or not the RAM clear button is pressed, and the RAM clear button is pressed. Is determined, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is erased. Further, the main CPU 62x monitors whether or not the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), and the RAM clear button has been pressed within the predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). If it is determined that there is no such state, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is not erased. On the other hand, when it is determined that the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the main CPU 62x also deletes information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64. .

  According to such a configuration, similarly to the above-described aspect 43, by performing different operations on the RAM clear button, the information to be deleted is selected from the information stored in the main RAM 64. It becomes possible to do. Further, by executing an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button and continuing the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the main RAM 64 Both the information stored in the first area and the information stored in the second area can be erased.

  Since the above-described game history process cannot be executed while the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is being erased, the number of game balls entering each entry slot, There is a possibility that an error may occur in the prize ball total value. Therefore, if the configuration is such that the game execution is not started until the end of the erasure process (for example, a configuration that suppresses the launch of the game ball), the occurrence of the error can be suppressed.

<Aspect 45>
In the above aspect 37, when the operation of pressing the RAM clear button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) is performed while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON. The information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 may be deleted.

  Specifically, for example, the main CPU 62x monitors whether or not the RAM clear button is pressed, and the state where the RAM clear button is pressed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). When the determination is made, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is erased from the information stored in the main RAM 64.

  According to such a configuration, it is stored in the second area of the main side RAM 64 without separately providing an operation unit (for example, a button) for erasing information stored in the second area of the main side RAM 64. It becomes possible to delete the information. Note that during the execution of the process of deleting the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64, the above-described game history process cannot be temporarily executed. There is a possibility that errors may occur in the number of balls entered and the total number of winning balls. Therefore, if the configuration is such that the execution of the game is temporarily stopped during the period from the start to the end of the execution of the erasure process (for example, the configuration that temporarily suppresses the launch of the game ball), the occurrence of the error is suppressed. can do.

<Aspect 46>
In each of the above aspects, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (acquired based on the executed game such as the total value of prize balls, game history information such as information on the number of balls entered, and the ratio of bonuses) When information is deleted, information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used for controlling the execution of a game such as a high probability mode flag and a high frequency support mode flag) is always deleted. It is good also as a structure. That is, when a predetermined operation for erasing information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is executed, or when a predetermined operation for deleting information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is performed. When a signal is received from another device (for example, the inspection machine 320), not only the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is erased but also stored in the first area of the main RAM 64. A configuration in which information is always deleted may also be used.

  According to such a configuration, the information acquired based on the executed game (information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64) is erased, but used to control the execution of the game. Generation of information (information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64) is maintained without being erased. Specifically, for example, the information acquired based on the executed game is information serving as collateral for determining the fairness of the game executed in the pachinko machine 10, and thus information serving as the collateral Is deleted, information used for controlling the execution of the game in the pachinko machine 10 (for example, information on the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag indicating the gaming state) is deleted, and the pachinko machine 10 It is preferable to initialize the gaming state. According to the configuration of this aspect, when erasing information acquired based on the executed game (information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64), information used for controlling the execution of the game ( (Information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64) is deleted, so that information used for controlling the execution of the game is deleted despite the deletion of the information that serves as collateral for determining the fairness of the game. By not erasing (information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained as it is.

  Also, for example, information that is used to control the execution of a game even though information acquired based on the executed game (information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64) is erased. In the case of a configuration in which (information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64) is maintained without being erased, information acquired based on the executed game (the second area of the main RAM 64) In some cases, the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are maintained as they are in the pachinko machine 10 even though the information stored in (2) is deleted. In this case, when a game is executed in the pachinko machine 10, the game is started in the high probability mode or the high frequency support mode in a state where information acquired based on the executed game is not a sufficient amount as statistical data. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the game history information such as the proportion of an accessory is calculated as a biased value. Therefore, as in this aspect, based on the information stored in the second area of the main side RAM 64 (game history information such as the total value of winning balls, information on the number of balls entered, and the ratio of bonuses) When the acquired information is erased, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used for controlling the execution of the game such as the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag) is always used. By adopting a configuration in which the game history information is erased, it is possible to prevent the game history information such as an accessory ratio from being calculated as a biased value.

  In addition, various operation modes can be adopted as an operation for deleting information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64. For example, while pressing the RAM clear button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). An operation, an operation to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing a second RAM clear button provided separately on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, a pachinko machine while pressing both the RAM clear button and the second RAM clear button For example, an operation of turning on the power of the machine 10 can be employed.

  Further, for example, an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button is executed, and the RAM clear button is not pressed within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, among the information stored in the main RAM 64, information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (used to control the execution of a game including a high probability mode flag, a high frequency support mode flag, etc. Information is deleted and information stored in the second area (information acquired based on the executed game such as the total value of prize balls, information on the number of balls entered, game history information such as the ratio of bonuses) May not be erased.

  According to such a configuration, information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (information acquired based on the executed game) is stored in the first area of the main RAM 64. Information (information used for controlling the execution of the game) can be erased. Specifically, for example, when a malfunction occurs in the game execution control, or when the game hall starts or ends, information used for game execution control is deleted to control the gaming machine. There is a desire to execute initialization but not to delete information acquired based on the executed game. According to the configuration of this aspect, by operating the RAM clear button, the information used for controlling the execution of the game is deleted while leaving the information acquired based on the executed game, and the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to execute control initialization.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) according to this aspect. The main CPU 62x executes this main process as the power is turned on.

  In step S10901, it is determined whether the RAM clear button is being pressed. If it is determined in step S10901 that the RAM clear button is not being pressed (step S10901: NO), the process proceeds to step S10902 to be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10901 that the RAM clear button is being pressed (step S10901: YES), the process proceeds to step S10903, and whether or not the state where the RAM clear button is pressed continues. Determine.

  If it is determined in step S10903 that the state where the RAM clear button is pressed is not continued, that is, if it is determined that the RAM clear button is not pressed (step S10903: NO), step S10904 is performed. Then, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is erased, and the initial setting process for the first area is executed. Then, it progresses to step S10908 mentioned later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10903 that the state in which the RAM clear button has been pressed continues (step S10903: YES), the process proceeds to step S10905, where the RAM clear button has been pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). ) Determine whether it is continuing.

  If it is determined in step S10905 that the pressed state of the RAM clear button has not been continued for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) (step S10905: NO), the process returns to step S10903, and the state in which the RAM clear button has been pressed continues. It is determined whether or not. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10905 that the RAM clear button has been pressed for a predetermined time (eg, 10 seconds) (step S10905: YES), the process proceeds to step S10906. That is, if the pressed state of the RAM clear button does not continue for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the process proceeds to step S10904 described above. If the pressed state of the RAM clear button continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), The process proceeds to step S10906.

  In step S10906, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is deleted, and the initial setting process for the first area is executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10907, where the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is deleted, and the initial setting process for the second area is executed. Then, it progresses to step S10908 mentioned later.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10901 that the RAM clear button is not being pressed (step S10901: NO), the process proceeds to step S10902, and the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is valid. It is determined whether or not. Specifically, for example, is the prize ball total value (number of winning prizes, consecutive winning prizes, total prizes) that is information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 valid? Determine whether or not. Here, the case where the total number of prize balls is not valid means that if the number of winning prize balls exceeds the total number of winning balls, or if the number of consecutive winning prize balls exceeds the total number of winning balls, This is a case where there is a contradiction in the total value of prize balls, such as when the number of prize prize balls exceeds the number of prize prize balls. If it is determined in step S10902 that the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is not valid (step S10902: NO), the process proceeds to the above-described steps S10906 and S10907, and the first RAM 64 in the main RAM 64 is first processed. The information stored in the area and the information stored in the second area are erased. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10908. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10902 that the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is valid (step S10902: YES), the process directly proceeds to step S10908.

  In step S10908, an interrupt permission is set to permit the generation of the timer interrupt process. After executing step S10908, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps S10909 to S10912. The remaining processes in steps S10909 to S10912 are the same as the remaining processes in steps S10104 to S10107 in FIG.

  According to the processing flow described above, information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (based on executed games such as award ball total value, game history information such as the number of balls entered, and the ratio of bonuses) Information (acquired in step S10906), the information (high probability mode flag, high frequency support mode flag, etc.) always stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is always executed. A process of erasing (information used for controlling the execution of the game) (the process of step S10907) is executed.

<Aspect 47>
In each of the above aspects, the information stored in the flash memory 64x (information acquired based on the executed game such as the total value of winning balls, information on the number of balls entered, game history information such as the ratio of bonuses) is deleted. In this case, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used for controlling the execution of the game such as the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag) may be deleted. . That is, when an operation for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x is executed, a predetermined signal for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x is sent to another device (for example, the inspection machine 320). ), Not only the information stored in the flash memory 64x but also the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 may be deleted.

  According to such a configuration, although information acquired based on the executed game (information stored in the flash memory 64x) is erased, information used for controlling the execution of the game (mainly The occurrence of a situation in which the information stored in the first area of the side RAM 64 is maintained without being erased can be suppressed. Specifically, for example, the information acquired based on the executed game is information serving as collateral for determining the fairness of the game executed in the pachinko machine 10, and thus information serving as the collateral Is deleted, information used for controlling the execution of the game in the pachinko machine 10 (for example, information on the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag indicating the gaming state) is deleted, and the pachinko machine 10 It is preferable to initialize the gaming state. According to this configuration, when erasing information (information stored in the flash memory 64x) acquired based on the executed game, information used for controlling the execution of the game (first side of the main RAM 64). (Information stored in the area) is deleted, so that information used for controlling the execution of the game (the main RAM 64 of the first) is used even though the information that is collateral for judging the fairness of the game is deleted. The occurrence of a situation in which the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained as it is because the information stored in one area) is not erased can be suppressed.

  Further, when information stored in the flash memory 64x (information acquired based on the executed game) is erased, information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (high probability mode) is always used. Information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (information acquired based on the executed game), in addition to information used to control the execution of the game such as a flag and a high frequency support mode flag) It may be configured to be erased.

<Aspect 48>
In some of the aspects described above, the main RAM 64 is divided into two areas (a first area and a second area), and the first area of the main RAM 64 is for executing processing related to the progress of the game. Used as an area for storing programs, various flags (high probability mode flag, high frequency support mode flag, etc.), etc., the second area of the main RAM 64 is a process for calculating and displaying game history information (for game history) Processing) and various numerical information (the above-mentioned prize ball total value, number information of balls entered, game history information such as the ratio of bonuses) etc. Instead of the configuration, a RAM (RAM used for the game progress process) responsible for the function of the first area of the main RAM 64 and a RAM (game history function) responsible for the function of the second area of the main RAM 64. Used sense RAM) and may also be configured to include separately.

<Aspect 49>
Of the above aspects, in the aspect including the flash memory 64x, the flash memory 64x may be configured to be stored in a space in which traces of opening remain (for example, a substrate box with a seal sticker). . According to such a configuration, in order to improperly modify the information stored in the flash memory 64x, the base box of the pachinko machine 10 is opened, and the board of the pachinko machine 10 is opened. There will be traces of opening in the box. That is, based on whether or not a trace of opening remains in the board box of the pachinko machine 10, the board box of the pachinko machine 10 is opened and the information stored in the flash memory 64x is illegally modified. It becomes possible to grasp whether or not there is a possibility. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal unauthorized modification applied to information stored in the flash memory 64x, and in turn, to generate motivation to perform unauthorized modification to information stored in the flash memory 64x. Can be suppressed, and the soundness of the game can be improved.

  In addition, as a structure of the space in which the trace of opening (also referred to as the trace of opening or the trace of opening / closing) remains, various configurations described in the aspect 38 can be employed.

<Aspect 50>
FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram schematically illustrating a part of the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the aspect 50. The main side MPU 62 of this aspect is provided with a ball entry detection IC 62c between the input / output port 62a and the main side CPU 62x.

  The entrance detection IC 62c is electrically connected to each entrance detection sensor 44a to 44h via the input / output port 62a, and each entrance entrance is based on signals received from the entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h. It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the game, and information indicating the result of the determination (entry information that is information regarding whether or not a game ball has entered the respective game entrances) is input to the main CPU 62x and the inspection terminal And output to the inspection machine 320 connected to 65. This will be specifically described below.

  Each of the entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h for detecting the entrance of a game ball to each entrance is electrically connected to the 0th bit D0 to the 7th bit D7 which are 8 input bits provided in the input port 62b. The eight input bits D0 to D7 are electrically connected to the eight input bits R0 to R7 provided in the ball entry detection IC 62c, respectively. In this aspect, a Lo level signal is always input to each of the eight input bits R0 to R7 provided in the incoming ball detection IC 62c, and the incoming ball of the game ball enters the incoming ball port. When detected by the detection sensor, the signal input to the input bit corresponding to the entrance detection sensor among the eight input bits R0 to R7 rises from the Lo level to the Hi level.

  The entrance detection IC 62c determines whether or not a game ball has entered the entrance, based on signals output from the entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h. In this aspect, the incoming ball detection IC 62c monitors the eight input bits R0 to R7 respectively corresponding to the eight incoming ball detection sensors 44a to 44h, and Lo in the signal input to each input bit. When the rising edge from the level to the Hi level is detected, it is determined that the game ball has entered the entrance corresponding to the input bit. However, when the rising edge is detected but the Hi level state does not continue for a predetermined period, and when the rising edge is detected but the rising edge is a rising edge that occurs within a predetermined interval from the latest falling edge. Therefore, since the detected rising edge is likely to be noise, it is determined that no game ball has entered the entrance corresponding to the input bit. It should be noted that various methods can be adopted as a method for determining whether or not a game ball has entered each entrance, for example, similar to the above-described entrance determination processing (FIGS. 16 and 17). The method may be adopted.

  The entrance detection IC 62c determines whether or not a game ball has entered at each entrance for each predetermined period, and enters the entrance information, which is information indicating the result of the determination, through serial transmission communication. The data is output to the CPU 62 x and also output to the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65. In the present embodiment, since eight entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h are provided, the entrance detection IC 62c receives entrance information (8 indicating whether or not a game ball has entered at each of the 8 entrances. (Entrance information for bits) is output every predetermined period (every 4 ms). Specifically, the entry detection IC 62c always outputs a Lo level signal, and outputs a Hi level signal of 50 μs as a start bit every predetermined period (every 4 ms) in which the presence / absence of the entry is determined. After that, a 50 μs Hi level signal (with entry) or Lo level signal (without entry) corresponding to the presence / absence of entry of game balls at each of the eight entrances is output for 8 bits. A 50 μs Lo level signal is output as a stop bit.

  The main CPU 62x that has received the entrance information from the entrance detection IC 62c performs processing related to the progress of the game, such as the jackpot lottery and the award of the winning ball, based on the received entrance information of each entrance. Run. Further, the main CPU 62x executes the above-described processing for game history (FIG. 29), and also executes processing related to calculation and display of game history information such as the ball-out rate (total), the ratio of the bonuses, and the ratio of consecutive bonuses. To do. The main CPU 62x stores the numerical information used in the game history information calculation process and the calculated game history information in the flash memory 64x.

  Next, an inspection using the inspection machine 320 capable of receiving the entrance information output from the entrance detection IC 62c will be described.

  In this aspect, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 is playing a game ball while the game is being executed in the pachinko machine 10, that is, the player or the inspector operates the operation handle 25 of the pachinko machine 10. While the game is being executed as usual by being fired on the board 30, it is checked whether or not a legitimate game is being executed in the pachinko machine 10 during this inspection by using the inspection machine 320. To do. This will be specifically described below.

  The inspecting machine 320 includes an incoming information receiving mode, which is a mode for receiving incoming information of game balls at each entrance from the entrance detection IC 62c, and a type and award of the entrance provided in the pachinko machine 10. Entrance information setting mode for setting entrance information, which is information relating to the number of balls, and game history information for calculating the various game history information described above based on the received entrance information and the set entrance information. The calculation mode can be executed.

  When inspecting whether or not a legitimate game is being executed in the pachinko machine 10, the inspector connects the connection cable 329 of the inspection machine 320 to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10, and the inspection machine 320. Is operated to shift the inspection machine 320 to the above-described entrance information reception mode. The player or the inspector operates the operation handle 25 of the pachinko machine 10 to be inspected to fire the game ball on the game board 30 and continues the execution of the game as usual.

  The inspection device 320 outputs a Hi level signal to the output permission signal line 329b in the connection cable 329 when the entrance information reception mode is entered. The output permission signal line 329b is electrically connected to the output permission determination bit 62d of the ball entry detection IC 62c via the inspection terminal 65. The ball entry detection IC 62c determines whether or not a Hi level signal is input to the output permission determination bit 62d, and determines that a Hi level signal is input to the output permission determination bit 62d. Only during a certain period, the above-described entrance information is output to the information transmission signal line 329a in the connection cable 329 via the inspection terminal 65 by serial transmission communication.

  In the entrance information reception mode, the inspection machine 320 receives entrance information corresponding to 8 entrances every predetermined period, and measures (counts) the number of entrances of game balls to each entrance. And remember. Then, the inspection machine 320 causes the display unit 328 to display information indicating the number of game balls that have been entered (counted) into each entrance. That is, every time a player or an inspector executes a game and a game ball enters each entrance, information indicating the number of entrances corresponding to each entrance displayed on the display unit 328 is 1. Is added. As a result, the display unit 328 of the inspection machine 320 displays the number of game balls that have entered the entrances after shifting to the entrance information reception mode.

  After a sufficient inspection period (for example, about 10 hours) has elapsed, when the inspector operates the operation unit 327 of the inspection machine 320 to end the entrance information reception mode, the inspection machine 320 displays the entrance information. Switch to setting mode.

  When the inspection machine 320 shifts to the entrance information setting mode, the display unit 328 displays an input screen for allowing the inspector to input the type of entrance and the number of prize balls for each entrance. In this aspect, since the inspection machine 320 has received 8 bits of entrance information for each predetermined period in the entrance information reception mode, the display unit 328 displays each of the 8 entrances. An input screen for inputting the type of entrance and the number of winning balls is displayed. The type of the entrance is a type of entrance where the entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h such as the first start port 33, the second start port 34, the big winning port 36a, and the discharge passage are provided. The number of prize balls is the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when one game ball enters the entrance.

  The inspector operates the operation unit 327 to input entrance information (entrance entrance type information and prize ball number information) to the inspector 320 for each entrance. Specifically, the inspector can obtain information (type information) indicating what number bit corresponds to which type of entrance into the entrance information output from the entrance detection IC 62c, and which type Information on the number of prize balls to be set at the entrance (prize ball number information) is ascertained based on the specifications and manuals of the pachinko machine 10, and the obtained information is stored in the inspection machine 320. input. When the inspector completes the input of the entrance information, the inspection machine 320 shifts to the game history information calculation mode.

  When the inspection machine 320 shifts to the game history information calculation mode, the number of game balls entered for each entrance measured in the entrance information reception mode and the type set in the entrance information setting mode Based on the information and the prize ball number information, the various game history information described above is calculated. For example, the inspecting machine 320 calculates the above-mentioned ball-out rate (total), the bonus rate, and the continuous bonus rate. When the calculation of the various game history information is completed, the inspection machine 320 causes the display unit 328 to display the calculated various game history information.

  The inspector can confirm whether or not a legitimate game has been executed during the inspection period by checking various game history information displayed on the display unit 328 of the inspection machine 320.

  As described above, according to this aspect, the ball detection IC 62c outputs the ball input information to the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 without going through the main CPU 62x. 320 can receive the entry information that is not affected by the main CPU 62x.

  For example, in the case of adopting a configuration in which entry information is output via the main CPU 62x to the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 without adopting the configuration of this aspect, the main side If the CPU 62x has a problem or is illegally modified, the ball entry information output to the inspection machine 320 may be affected by the problem or unauthorized modification. In addition, the game history information calculated and displayed by the main CPU 62x may be unreliable due to the malfunction of the main CPU 62x or the influence of unauthorized modification.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the incoming ball detection IC 62c outputs the incoming ball information to the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 without going through the main CPU 62x. Even if a defect occurs in the game or an unauthorized modification is made, the entry information output to the inspection machine 320 is not affected by the defect or the unauthorized modification. As a result, the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 can execute a process based on the entry information that is not affected by the malfunction or unauthorized modification. Specifically, the inspection machine 320 can calculate game history information based on the entry information that is not affected by the main CPU 62x. Therefore, there is a possibility that the inspector who examines the performance of the pachinko machine 10 may have a defect in the main CPU 62x or improperly modified, and the game history calculated and displayed by the main CPU 62x. Even if the reliability of the information is low, the game history information that is not affected by the main CPU 62x can be confirmed by the inspection machine 320. As a result, game soundness can be ensured.

  Further, according to this aspect, the incoming ball detection IC 62c outputs the incoming ball information corresponding to each of the plural inlets to the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 by the serial transmission method. Therefore, for example, the configuration of the inspection terminal 65 for passing the incoming information to the inspection machine 320 can be simplified as compared with the case where the configuration in which the incoming information is output by the parallel transmission method is adopted. The configuration of the inspection machine 320 that receives the entry information can be simplified.

  Specifically, if a configuration is adopted in which entry information corresponding to each of the plurality of entrances is output by the parallel transmission method, the inspection terminal 65 is set to the number of the entrances. It is necessary to provide a corresponding output unit (for example, an output bit). Similarly, the inspection machine 320 needs to include an input unit (for example, an input bit) corresponding to the number of the plurality of entrances. In addition, since the number of entrances provided in the pachinko machine 10 is different for each type of pachinko machine 10 (for each model), the inspection machine 320 having a different number of input units for each type of pachinko machine 10 (for each model). Need to be prepared.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the incoming ball detection IC 62c transmits the incoming ball information corresponding to each of the plural inlets to the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 in a serial transmission system. Therefore, the inspection terminal 65 includes at least one output unit capable of outputting the entrance information by the serial transmission method regardless of the number of entrances provided in the pachinko machine 10. And it is sufficient. Therefore, the configuration of the inspection terminal 65 can be simplified. Similarly, the inspection machine 320 is configured to include at least one input unit that can input the entrance information output by the serial transmission method regardless of the number of entrances provided in the pachinko machine 10. Since it is good, the structure of the inspection machine 320 can be simplified. Further, even when the inspection machine 320 is connected to the pachinko machine 10 having a different number of entrances, the inspection machine 320 inputs entrance information corresponding to each of the entrances by a serial transmission method. can do. That is, the inspection machine 320 can be used for other pachinko machines 10 having different numbers of entrances. As a result, the versatility of the inspection machine 320 can be improved.

  In addition, according to the present aspect, the entrance detection IC 62c provides the entrance information to the inspection machine 320 only when receiving a Hi level signal from the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65. Since it outputs, it can suppress that the entrance information of the said pachinko machine 10 will be output outside except the case where the signal of the said Hi level is received. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the entrance information of the pachinko machine 10 from being analyzed and abused by a malicious person.

<Aspect 51>
In the above aspect 50, in the entrance information setting mode of the inspection machine 320, the entrance information is manually input to the inspection machine 320 by operating the operation unit 327 by the inspector, but instead of this configuration, The entrance information may be received by the inspection machine 320 from the pachinko machine 10 and set.

  Specifically, for example, when the inspection machine 320 shifts to the entrance information setting mode, a signal that requests transmission of entrance information via the connection cable 329 and the inspection terminal 65 (entrance entrance information transmission). Request command) is transmitted to the ball entry detection IC 62c. Upon receiving the signal (entrance entrance information transmission request command), the entrance detection IC 62c transmits the entrance information of the pachinko machine 10 to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65 and the connection cable 329. The inspection machine 320 sets the entrance information received from the entrance detection IC 62c for each entrance and ends the entrance information setting mode.

  As described above, according to this aspect, the entrance detection IC 62c outputs entrance information (award ball number information and type information) to the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65. In addition, it is possible to save the trouble of manually inputting the entrance information (award ball number information and type information) to the inspection machine 320, and erroneous entry information (award ball number information and (Type information) can be prevented from being input. As a result, the inspection machine 320 can calculate the game history information based on the entrance information and accurate entrance information (prize ball number information and type information).

  In this aspect, the entrance detection IC 62c transmits the entrance information of the pachinko machine 10 to the inspection device 320 based on the reception of a predetermined signal (entrance entrance information transmission request command). However, instead of this configuration, the ball detection IC 62c is triggered by the connection cable 329 of the inspection machine 320 being connected to the inspection terminal 65 (that is, the connection cable 329 of the inspection machine 320 is used for inspection). It is good also as a structure which transmits the entrance information of the said pachinko machine 10 to the test | inspection machine 320, when connecting to the terminal 65 is detected. According to this configuration, after the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the inspection machine 320 can quickly execute a process that requires the entrance information.

  In this aspect, the entrance detection IC 62 c transmits the entrance information to the inspection machine 320. However, instead of this configuration, the main CPU 62 x stores the entrance information stored in the main ROM 63. The information may be read and transmitted to the inspection machine 320.

<Aspect 52>
In the above aspect 50, the entrance detection IC 62c serializes the entrance information via the inspection terminal 65 only during the period when it is determined that the Hi level signal is input to the output permission determination bit 62d. Although it is configured to output by transmission-type communication, other configurations may be employed instead of this configuration. For example, the entrance detection IC 62c transmits the entrance information via the inspection terminal 65 only in a period when it is determined that a signal of a predetermined pattern is input to the output permission determination bit 62d. It is good also as a structure output by this communication. In addition, for example, when the entrance detection IC 62c determines that a signal of a predetermined pattern is input to the output permission determination bit 62d, the entrance information is output via the inspection terminal 65 by serial transmission communication. It is good also as composition to do. For example, when it is determined that a predetermined switch is provided on the inspection terminal 65 and a cable terminal having a predetermined shape is connected to the inspection terminal 65 and the predetermined switch is pressed, The incoming ball detection IC 62c may be configured to output the incoming ball information by serial transmission communication via the inspection terminal 65.

<Aspect 53>
In the above aspects 50 to 52, the inspection machine 320 may be configured to shift to the entrance information reception mode after the entrance information setting is completed in the entrance information setting mode. According to such a configuration, since the type of each entrance is set at the time of transition to the entrance information reception mode, each entrance is displayed on the display unit 328 of the inspection machine 320 during the entrance information reception mode. And the number of balls entered can be displayed.

  As a result, the inspector can know which type of entrance the game ball has entered in the entrance information reception mode. In addition, the inspector has a match between the information displayed on the display unit 328 (type of each entrance and the number of entrances) and the number of game balls actually entered in each entrance as confirmed visually. By confirming whether or not it has been made, it is possible to confirm whether or not the entry information output from the entry detection IC 62c is authentic.

<Aspect 54>
In the above aspects 50 to 53, the inspection machine 320 has the game history information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 triggered by the connection cable 329 being connected to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10. It is good also as a structure which transfers to the game history information reception mode which is a mode which receives this, and then transfers to the entrance information setting mode, entrance information reception mode, and game history information calculation mode mentioned above.

  Specifically, for example, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10, the inspection machine 320 shifts to the game history information reception mode. When the inspection machine 320 shifts to the game history information reception mode, the inspection machine 320 transmits a signal requesting transmission of game history information (game history information transmission request command) to the main CPU 62x via the connection cable 329 and the inspection terminal 65. . The main CPU 62x that has received the signal (game history information transmission request command) receives the game history information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 via the inspection terminal 65 and the connection cable 329. Send to. When the game history information received from the main CPU 62x is stored in the RAM 326, the inspection machine 320 ends the game history information reception mode and shifts to the entrance information setting mode.

  When the inspection machine 320 shifts to the entrance information setting mode, the main CPU 62x sends a signal (entrance entrance information transmission request command) for requesting transmission of entrance information via the connection cable 329 and the inspection terminal 65. Send to. The main CPU 62x that has received the signal (entrance port information transmission request command) transmits the entrance information of the pachinko machine 10 to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65 and the connection cable 329. When setting the entrance information received from the main CPU 62x for each entrance, the inspection machine 320 ends the entrance information setting mode and shifts to the entrance information reception mode.

  When the inspection machine 320 shifts to the entrance information reception mode, it receives entrance information corresponding to 8 entrances every predetermined period, and counts (counts) the number of game balls entering each entrance. ) And remember. Then, the inspection machine 320 causes the display unit 328 to display information indicating the number of game balls that have been entered (counted) into each entrance. That is, every time a player or an inspector executes a game and a game ball enters each entrance, information indicating the number of entrances corresponding to each entrance displayed on the display unit 328 is 1. Is added. As a result, the display unit 328 of the inspection machine 320 displays the number of game balls that have entered the entrances after shifting to the entrance information reception mode.

  When the inspector operates the operation unit 327 of the inspection machine 320 to end the entry information reception mode after a sufficient inspection period (for example, about 10 hours), the inspection machine 320 calculates the game history information. Enter mode.

  When the inspection machine 320 shifts to the game history information calculation mode, the number of game balls entered for each entrance measured in the entrance information reception mode and the type set in the entrance information setting mode Based on the information and the prize ball number information, the various game history information described above is calculated. For example, the inspecting machine 320 calculates the above-mentioned ball-out rate (total), the bonus rate, and the continuous bonus rate. When the calculation of the various game history information is completed, the inspection machine 320 stores the various game history information calculated in the game history information calculation mode and the various game history information received in the game history information reception mode (stored in the flash memory 64x). The displayed game history information) is displayed on the display unit 328. In other words, the display unit 328 of the inspection machine 320 has a game history for the inspection period in which the connection cable 329 of the inspection machine 320 is connected to the pachinko machine 10 and the entry information is received in the entry information reception mode. Information and game history information for the past predetermined period calculated by the main CPU 62x of the pachinko machine 10 and stored in the flash memory 64x are displayed.

  As described above, according to this aspect, the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 receives the game history information (hereinafter also referred to as first game history information) stored in the flash memory 64x. Can be displayed. Further, the inspection machine 320 can execute a process based on the incoming ball information received during the inspection period. Specifically, the inspection machine 320 calculates game history information based on the received ball information received during a predetermined inspection period connected to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10, and the game history information (hereinafter referred to as the game history information). , Also referred to as second game history information). Therefore, for example, the inspector who inspects the pachinko machine 10 is based on the first game history information stored in the flash memory 64x included in the pachinko machine 10 and the entrance information received by the inspector 320 during a predetermined inspection period. It is possible to compare the second game history information.

  Here, if there is a change in the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 due to a problem with the pachinko machine 10 or unauthorized modification (for example, modification of a nail, etc.) The first game history information (game history information calculated by the main CPU 62x based on the entry information in the past predetermined period) stored in the flash memory 64x provided in the pachinko machine 10, and the inspection machine 320 performs a predetermined inspection. There may be a difference between the second game history information calculated based on the entry information in the period. Accordingly, an inspector who inspects the pachinko machine 10 checks whether there is a problem or an illegal modification (for example, a modification of a nail) in the pachinko machine 10 by paying attention to the difference between the two game history information. can do.

  The inspection machine 320 may be configured to receive the game history information by shifting to the game history information reception mode after receiving and setting the entrance information in the above-described entrance information setting mode. Further, after calculating the game history information in the inspection period in the above-described game history information calculation mode, the inspection machine 320 shifts to the game history information reception mode and receives the game history information stored in the flash memory 64x. It is good also as a structure.

<Aspect 55>
In the above aspects 50 to 54, the number of entrances provided in the pachinko machine 10 is not limited to eight, and may be nine or more, or may be seven or less. The entrance detection IC 62c may be configured to output entrance information corresponding to the number of entrances. For example, when the number of entrances provided in the pachinko machine 10 is 7 or less, the entrance detection IC 62c outputs entrance information using the first half of the 8 bits output by the serial transmission method. It is good also as composition to do. Further, for example, when the number of entrances provided in the pachinko machine 10 is 9 or more, the entrance detection IC 62c executes 9-bit or more input by executing 8-bit output by the serial transmission method a plurality of times. It is good also as a structure which outputs the entrance information corresponding to a ball opening. Further, the entrance detection IC 62c may be configured to output entrance information such as 16 bits or 32 bits at a time by a serial transmission method.

<Aspect 56>
In the above aspect 23, the main CPU 62x executes the game history process as one process included in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23: step S10616). However, instead of this structure, the CPU 62x performs the game history process. It is good also as a structure which does not perform in a timer interruption process but performs in the remaining time of the main process mentioned above. This will be specifically described below.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main process executed by the main CPU 62x in the aspect 56. In step S11001, an initial setting process is executed. Specifically, initial setting of each control device when power is turned on, determination of the validity of data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. After executing step S11001, the process proceeds to step S11002, and interrupt permission is set to permit generation of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 13).

  After executing step S11002, the process proceeds to the residual processing in steps S11003 to S11007. In other words, the main CPU 62x is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process as described above, but a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process. The irregular time (residual time) is used to repeatedly execute the processing of steps S11003 to S11007 (residual processing). .

  In step S11003, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the generation of timer interrupt processing. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11004 to execute a random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI, and the process proceeds to step S11005 to execute a change counter update process for updating the change type counter CS. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 64, the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11006.

  In step S11006, the above-described game history processing (FIG. 29) is executed. As described above, the game history process includes a plurality of tasks (task 1 and task 2 in step S10814 in FIG. 29) that are sequentially executed to complete calculation of game history information. The main CPU 62x executes a part of the plurality of tasks in one execution of the game history process included in the remaining process. That is, the main CPU 62x completes the calculation of the game history information set as the calculation target by executing the game history processing a plurality of times. After executing step S11006, the process proceeds to step S11007, and an interrupt permission setting for switching from a state in which the generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which the timer interrupt processing is permitted is performed. After executing the process of step S11007, the process returns to step S11003, and the processes of step S11003 to step S11007 are repeated.

  As described above, according to this aspect, the remaining time including the game history process in the remaining time in the main process (the period from the end of execution of one timer interrupt process to the start of execution of the next timer interrupt process) Since the process is repeatedly executed, it is possible to prevent the execution of the remaining process including the game history process from being started even though the execution of one timer interrupt process has not ended. That is, it is possible to quickly calculate the game history information by repeatedly executing the remaining process including the game history process in a period when the timer interrupt process is not executed while giving priority to the execution of the timer interrupt process.

  In addition, if a configuration in which the game history process is included in the timer interrupt process and is executed without adopting the configuration of this aspect, from the start to the end of one execution of the timer interrupt process. For example, although a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of execution of one timer interrupt process, the next timer interrupt process execution start timing is reached. There is a possibility that the execution of the next timer interrupt process cannot be started until the execution of the one timer interrupt process is not completed yet. In this case, there is a possibility that a failure occurs in the progress of the game because the start of execution of the next timer interrupt process is delayed.

  On the other hand, according to this aspect, since the game history process is included in the remaining process and executed, the timer interrupt process is performed once compared with the configuration in which the game history process is included in the timer interrupt process and executed. The time required from the start to the end of execution can be shortened. As a result, for example, a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the execution of one timer interrupt process, and one timer interrupt is still in spite of the timing for starting the next timer interrupt process. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the execution of a process has not ended, and to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the execution of the next timer interrupt process cannot be started until the execution of the one timer interrupt process is completed. can do. As described above, according to the present aspect, for the game history during a period in which the timer interrupt process is not executed while suppressing the occurrence of a problem in the progress of the game due to the delay in starting the next timer interrupt process. It is possible to calculate the game history information efficiently and promptly by repeatedly executing the remaining process including the process.

  Furthermore, according to this aspect, the game history process includes a plurality of tasks (task 1 and task 2 in step S10814 in FIG. 29) that are sequentially executed to complete calculation of the game history information. Since the CPU 62x executes a part of a plurality of tasks in one execution of the game history process, for example, the CPU 62x is configured to execute all of the plurality of tasks in one execution of the game history process. As compared with, the time required from the start to the end of one execution of the game history process can be shortened. Specifically, for example, even if the condition for starting execution of the timer interrupt process is satisfied during the execution of the game history process, the currently executed game history process is completed in a short time. It is possible to shorten the time until the execution of the timer interrupt process is started. As a result, it is possible to quickly calculate the game history information by repeatedly executing the remaining process while suppressing the occurrence of a problem due to the delay in starting the execution of the timer interrupt process.

  Further, according to this aspect, the length of the remaining time changes according to the time length required from the start to the end of the timer interrupt process. Specifically, for example, if the length of one timer interrupt process is increased, the remaining time from the end of the one timer interrupt process to the start of the next timer interrupt process is shortened. As the processing length decreases, the remaining time from the end of the one timer interrupt processing to the start of the next timer interrupt processing increases. When the remaining time is short, the number of executions of the game history process can be reduced. On the other hand, when the remaining time is long, the number of executions of the game history process can be increased. That is, the number of executions of the game history process can be changed according to the length of the remaining time.

<Aspect 57>
In the first embodiment and each of the above aspects, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 may have a plurality of settings with different probabilities of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery. Specifically, for example, even in the same low probability mode, it may be configured to have six stages of lottery settings (“lottery setting 1” to “lottery setting 6”) having different probabilities of winning a big jackpot in the jackpot lottery. . This will be specifically described below.

  The main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 according to this aspect includes six types of low-probability mode success / failure tables corresponding to each of six lottery settings from “lottery setting 1” to “lottery setting 6”. . Then, main controller 60 performs a big hit lottery with reference to a success / failure table corresponding to the set lottery setting. For example, if the pachinko machine 10 is set to the lottery setting 1 and the lottery mode is the low probability mode, the main controller 60 refers to the low probability mode success / failure table of the lottery setting 1. Run a jackpot lottery.

  In this aspect, the low-probability mode success / failure table of lottery setting 1 is set with five values of 0 to 4 among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 of 0 to 1199 as winning values. Yes. In addition, in the success / failure table for the low probability mode of the lottery setting 2, among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 of 0 to 1199, six values of 0 to 5 are set as values to win the jackpot. In addition, in the success / failure table for the low probability mode of the lottery setting 3, seven values of 0 to 6 are set as values to win the jackpot out of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 of 0 to 1199. In addition, in the success / failure table for the low probability mode of the lottery setting 4, eight values of 0 to 7 are set as values to win the jackpot out of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 of 0 to 1199. Also, in the success / failure table for the low probability mode of the lottery setting 5, nine values of 0 to 8 are set as values to win the jackpot out of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 of 0 to 1199. In addition, in the success / failure table for the low probability mode of the lottery setting 6, ten values of 0 to 9 are set as values to win the jackpot out of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 of 0 to 1199.

  That is, in this aspect, the larger the number following “lottery setting”, the higher the winning probability of the big hit lottery in the low probability mode.

  In this aspect, regardless of which of the six lottery settings is set, in the high probability mode, the jackpot lottery is executed with reference to the same success / failure table. That is, in the high probability mode, regardless of the lottery setting, the probability of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery is the same. However, as another mode, even in the high probability mode, the larger the number following “lottery setting”, the higher the probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery may be configured.

  In this aspect, the six-stage lottery setting change can be executed when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. This will be specifically described below.

  In this aspect, the main control board 61 located on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a setting change keyhole and a setting change button. When the administrator who manages the pachinko machine 10 changes the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10, first, the setting change key is inserted into the keyhole with the power of the pachinko machine 10 turned off. Then, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on in a state where the inserted key is turned to the setting change side (for example, a state where the key is turned clockwise), the pachinko machine 10 is activated as a setting change mode.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is activated as the setting change mode, information indicating the current lottery setting (hereinafter also referred to as setting information) is displayed on the game history information display unit 45z described above. For example, when the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is “lottery setting 1”, “1” is displayed on the game history information display unit 45z. Each time the administrator presses the setting change button, the setting information displayed on the game history information display unit 45z is “1” → “2” → “3” → “4” → “5” → “6” ”→“ 1 ”→“ 2 ”...

  When the administrator turns the setting change key from the setting change side to the original position in a state where the setting information displayed on the game history information display unit 45z is the value desired by the administrator, the game history information display unit The lottery setting corresponding to the setting information displayed at 45z is changed. Specifically, for example, when the administrator presses the setting change button and “6” is displayed on the game history information display section 45z, the setting change key is turned from the setting change side to the original position. Then, the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed to “lottery setting 6”.

  Thus, according to this aspect, by changing the lottery setting in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to change the probability of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery. As a result, even if the same pachinko machine 10 is used, the probability that the variable winning device 36 as a special electric accessory will operate is changed as a result of the jackpot lottery, so that it is calculated as game history information as described above. The value of the bonus rate or the continuous bonus rate will converge to a value corresponding to the changed new lottery setting. That is, by changing the lottery setting in the pachinko machine 10, game history information such as the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. In other words, the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed by a simple method such as changing the lottery setting in the pachinko machine 10.

  In each aspect described below, the information on the entrance to each entrance, the information on the number of entrances, the total number of prize balls, and the like, which are information that is the basis for calculating the above-described game history information, are “game history basic information”. "

<Aspect 58>
When the lottery setting in the pachinko machine 10 is changed in the above aspect 57 (a configuration in which the lottery setting for the big hit lottery can be changed), various memories (main-side RAM 64, flash memory 64x, etc.) are changed before the lottery setting is changed. The game history basic information stored in the memory may be deleted, and the game history information may be calculated and displayed based on the game history basic information stored in various memories after the lottery setting is changed.

  The reason for this configuration will be described. When the lottery setting in the pachinko machine 10 (setting of the probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery) is changed, the probability that the variable winning device 36 as a special electric accessory will be operated is changed. As described above, the values of the above-mentioned bonus rate and continuous bonus rate will converge to values corresponding to the changed new lottery setting. That is, before and after the change of the lottery setting, the value that should be converged for the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio changes.

  Even if the lottery setting is changed, the game history basic information acquired after the lottery setting is changed is stored without deleting the game history basic information stored before the change of the lottery setting. If the configuration is adopted, when the game history information is calculated, the influence of the game history basic information stored before the change of the lottery setting is included, and the pachinko machine 10 original after the change of the lottery setting is included. It may take time until the characteristics of the game are reflected in the game history information.

  Therefore, in this aspect, when the lottery setting is changed, the game history basic information stored before the change of the lottery setting is deleted, and the game history basic information acquired and stored after the change of the lottery setting is performed. Based on the above, game history information is calculated and displayed.

  According to this aspect, the game history information such as the ratio of the winning combination and the ratio of the continuous winning combination quickly converges to the value corresponding to the changed lottery setting, and the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to check game history information corresponding to the lottery setting currently set at an early stage.

<Aspect 59>
In the above aspect 57 (configuration in which the lottery setting of the big hit lottery can be changed), even after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the game history basic information stored in the various memories before the change of the lottery setting is changed. The game history basic information acquired after the lottery setting is changed without being erased is added to and stored in various memories, and the game history basic information stored in the various memories is stored before and after the lottery setting is changed. Based on this, the game history information may be calculated and displayed.

  According to this aspect, it is possible to calculate and display game history information including the influence of the change in the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 has the game history information as a total including the influence of the change of the lottery setting within the appropriate range as a result of the change of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 being operated in the game hall. Can be confirmed.

<Aspect 60>
When the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed in the above aspect 57 (configuration in which the lottery setting of the big hit lottery can be changed), the game history basic information stored before the change of the lottery setting is deleted, The game history basic information acquired after the change of the current lottery setting may be stored, and the game history information may be calculated and displayed based on the stored game history basic information.

  In such a configuration, when the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed again before the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed is accumulated to a predetermined amount. May be configured to record information indicating that the lottery setting has been changed in a short period of time (hereinafter also referred to as short-term change information) and to display the short-term change information.

  Specifically, for example, before the total number of winning balls in the total number of winning balls as the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed reaches 1000, the pachinko machine again. When ten lottery settings are changed, short-term change information indicating that the lottery setting has been changed in a short time is recorded, and the short-term change information is displayed on the game history information display unit 45z. . Further, for example, an LED lamp for displaying short-term change information may be provided on the game history information display unit 45z, and when the short-term change information is recorded, the LED lamp may emit light.

  According to this aspect, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 confirms whether or not the lottery setting has been changed in the short-term in the pachinko machine 10 by confirming whether or not the short-term change information is displayed. can do. As a result, it is possible to suppress a change in the lottery setting based on an unauthorized intention by the administrator of the pachinko machine 10.

  Specifically, for example, before the pachinko machine 10 is inspected by an inspector, the manager of the pachinko machine 10 is in a situation where games are not often executed in the gaming machine after the winning probability is changed. Regardless, there is a possibility that the lottery setting is changed again and the game history basic information and the game history information stored in the pachinko machine 10 are erased. However, according to this aspect, when the lottery setting is changed again in a short period in spite of the fact that the game is not often executed in the pachinko machine 10 after the lottery setting is changed, The short-term change information will be recorded and displayed. Therefore, by checking the short-term change information, the inspector recognizes that the lottery setting may have been changed in a short period of time due to an illegal intention such as deletion of the game history basic information and game history information. It becomes possible to do. As a result, it is possible to suppress a change in the lottery setting based on an unauthorized intention by the administrator of the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, when the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed again before the predetermined time has elapsed since the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the information indicating that the lottery setting has been changed in a short period of time. (Short-term change information) may be recorded, and the short-term change information may be displayed. According to such a configuration, even if a game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10 between the change of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 and the change, the predetermined time is changed between the change of the lottery setting. If it has passed, short-term change information is not displayed. Therefore, although it is a relatively long time between the change of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10, the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10 between the change and the change. Regardless, it is possible to suppress misidentification by the inspector that the lottery setting may have been changed in a short period of time due to unauthorized intentions.

<Aspect 61>
In the above aspect 57 (a configuration in which the lottery setting for the jackpot lottery can be changed), it is possible to store and display the game history basic information and the game history information in a plurality of latest periods with the change in the past lottery setting as a boundary. Good. And when the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the game history basic information and the game history information in the oldest period among the plurality of the most recently stored periods are erased, and the lottery setting of this time It is good also as a structure which memorize | stores the game history basic information acquired after the change.

  In such a configuration, when the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed again before the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed is accumulated to a predetermined amount. May be configured to record information indicating that the lottery setting has been changed in a short period of time (hereinafter also referred to as short-term change information) and to display the short-term change information.

  Specifically, for example, before the total number of winning balls in the total number of winning balls as the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed reaches 1000, the pachinko machine again. When ten lottery settings are changed, short-term change information indicating that the lottery setting has been changed in a short time is recorded, and the short-term change information is displayed on the game history information display unit 45z. . Further, for example, an LED lamp for displaying short-term change information may be provided on the game history information display unit 45z, and when the short-term change information is recorded, the LED lamp may emit light.

  According to this aspect described above, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can check the game history information for each of the most recent periods with the change of the past lottery setting in the pachinko machine 10 as a boundary. . That is, the inspector can check whether or not there is a situation in which the game history information does not fall within an appropriate range in the process in which the lottery setting has been changed in the past in the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, according to this aspect, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 confirms whether or not the short-term change information is displayed, thereby determining whether or not the lottery setting has been changed in the short-term in the pachinko machine 10. Can be confirmed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a change in the lottery setting based on an unauthorized intention by the administrator of the pachinko machine 10.

  Specifically, for example, before the pachinko machine 10 is inspected by the inspector, the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 repeatedly changes the lottery setting in a short period of time, so that a plurality of the pachinko machines 10 nearest to the pachinko machine 10 are changed. There is a possibility that the game history basic information and the game history information in the period will be deleted. However, according to this aspect, when the lottery setting is repeatedly changed in a short period, the above-described short-term change information is recorded and displayed. Therefore, the inspector can recognize that there is a possibility that the lottery setting has been changed in a short time due to an unjust intention by checking the short-term change information. As a result, it is possible to suppress a change in the lottery setting based on an unauthorized intention by the administrator of the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, when the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed again before the predetermined time has elapsed since the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the information indicating that the lottery setting has been changed in a short period of time. (Short-term change information) may be recorded, and the short-term change information may be displayed. According to such a configuration, even if a game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10 between the change of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 and the change, the predetermined time is changed between the change of the lottery setting. If it has passed, short-term change information is not displayed. Therefore, although it is a relatively long time between the change of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10, the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10 between the change and the change. Regardless, it is possible to suppress misidentification by the inspector that the lottery setting may have been changed in a short period of time due to unauthorized intentions.

<Aspect 62>
After the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed in the above aspect 57 (a configuration in which the lottery setting for the jackpot lottery can be changed), the game history basic information that is the basis for calculating the game history information is sufficient as statistical data. Until it is accumulated, the game history basic information stored before the lottery setting is changed may be stored (stored) without being deleted.

  Further, until the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting is changed is accumulated as a sufficient amount of statistical data, the game history basic stored before the lottery setting is changed is stored. The game history information calculated based on the information is flashed and displayed on the game history information display unit 45z, and the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting is changed is accumulated as a sufficient amount of statistical data. After that, the game history information is calculated based on the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting is changed, and the calculated game history information is lit and displayed on the game history information display unit 45z. Also good.

  Specifically, for example, before the lottery setting is changed until the total number of winning balls reaches 60000 in the award total value as the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting is changed. The game history basic information stored in is stored without being erased. And before the lottery setting was changed, it was memorized until the total number of winning balls reached 60000 in the award total value as the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting was changed. The game history information calculated based on the game history basic information is configured to blink on the game history information display unit 45z. The game stored before the lottery setting is changed after the total number of prize balls reaches 60000 in the total value of prize balls as the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting is changed. The history basic information is erased, the game history information is calculated based on the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting is changed, and the calculated game history information is lit on the game history information display section 45z. It is set as the structure made to do.

  According to this aspect, it is possible to prevent the game history basic information stored before the change of the lottery setting is intentionally erased by changing the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. For example, if the game history basic information acquired and stored before the change of the lottery setting is deleted immediately after the change of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is adopted, the pachinko machine 10 Before being inspected by the inspector, the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 changes the lottery setting and erases the game history basic information and the game history information stored before the change of the lottery setting. There is a possibility. On the other hand, according to this aspect, the game history basic information stored before the change of the lottery setting is sufficient as the statistical data of the game history acquired and stored after the lottery setting is changed. Since it is not erased until a predetermined amount is accumulated, it is possible to suppress a change in the lottery setting due to an unauthorized intention by the administrator of the pachinko machine.

  Further, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 is acquired after the lottery setting is changed by checking whether the game history information displayed on the game history information display unit 45z is blinking display or lighting display. Thus, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the game history basic information stored in this way is accumulated up to a predetermined amount sufficient as statistical data.

  In addition to the total number of winning balls, various criteria may be adopted as conditions for erasing the game history basic information stored before the lottery setting is changed and switching from blinking display to lighting display. it can. For example, the total value of the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage (the number of game balls fired on the game board 30) may be used as a reference.

<Aspect 63>
In the above aspect 57 (a configuration in which the lottery setting for the jackpot lottery can be changed), it is possible to store and display the game history basic information and the game history information in a plurality of latest periods with the change in the past lottery setting as a boundary. Good. And when the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed is accumulated up to a predetermined amount sufficient as statistical data. Until, the game history basic information and game history information in the oldest period among the plurality of the most recent periods that have already been stored are not deleted, and are acquired and stored after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. After the game history basic information has been accumulated up to a predetermined amount sufficient as statistical data, the game history basic information and the game history information in the oldest period among the most recently stored multiple periods may be deleted. Good.

  Specifically, for example, when the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the total of the prize ball total values as the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. Until the number of prize balls reaches 60,000, the game history basic information and game history information in the oldest period among the most recently stored periods are not deleted, and the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. The game history in the oldest period among the most recent periods already stored after the total number of prize balls in the total value of prize balls as the game history basic information acquired and stored after reaching 60000 The basic information and the game history information may be deleted.

  According to this aspect, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can check the game history information for each of a plurality of latest periods with the change of the past lottery setting in the pachinko machine 10 as a boundary. That is, the inspector can check whether or not there is a situation in which the game history information does not fall within an appropriate range in the process in which the lottery setting has been changed in the past in the pachinko machine 10.

  Furthermore, according to this aspect, the game history basic information and the game history information in a plurality of most recent periods with the change of the past lottery setting as a boundary are intentionally obtained by repeatedly changing the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. Can be prevented from being erased.

  For example, if the game history basic information and the game history information in the oldest period among a plurality of the most recent periods with a change in the past lottery setting as a boundary immediately after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, If the configuration to be erased is adopted, before the pachinko machine 10 is inspected by the inspector, the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 repeatedly changes the lottery setting so that the pachinko machine 10 is in a plurality of the most recent periods. There is a possibility that the game history basic information and the game history information will be deleted.

  On the other hand, according to this aspect, the game history basic information and the game history information in the oldest period among a plurality of the most recent periods with the change of the past lottery setting as a boundary are changed after the lottery setting is changed. Since the acquired game history basic information is not erased until a sufficient predetermined amount is accumulated as statistical data, it is possible to suppress a change in the lottery setting due to an unauthorized intention by the administrator of the pachinko machine 10. .

<Aspect 64>
In the above-described aspect 57 (configuration in which the lottery setting for the jackpot lottery can be changed), the acquired game history basic information is stored separately for each lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of acquisition, and the game history information is stored for each lottery setting. It is good also as a structure which calculates and displays.

  Specifically, for example, when the game history basic information is stored in various memories, the lottery setting at the timing when the game history basic information is acquired is added and stored. When calculating / displaying the game history information, the game history basic information may be extracted for each lottery setting, and the game history information for each lottery setting may be calculated / displayed.

  Further, as another specific configuration, a storage area corresponding to each lottery setting is provided in various memories, and when the acquired game history basic information is stored, the memory area corresponding to the currently set lottery setting is stored. It is good also as a structure to memorize | store. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 is set to the lottery setting 1, the acquired game history basic information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the lottery setting 1, and the pachinko machine 10 is set to the lottery setting 2. Is stored in the storage area corresponding to the lottery setting 2. When calculating / displaying the game history information, the game history information for each lottery setting may be calculated / displayed based on the game history basic information stored in each storage area.

  According to such a configuration, for example, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can play game history information calculated based on the game history basic information acquired in a state where the pachinko machine 10 is set to the lottery setting 1. Each game history calculated for each lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10, such as game history information calculated based on the game history basic information acquired when the pachinko machine 10 is set to the lottery setting 2 Information can be confirmed. Then, the inspector confirms whether the game history information calculated for each lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is within an appropriate range, so that the game history information is appropriate in the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to confirm whether or not there is a lottery setting that does not fall within the range.

<Aspect 65>
In the aspect 57, the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the game history information display unit 45z. However, a lottery setting display unit for displaying the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is provided separately from the game history information display unit 45z. It is good also as a structure provided in the back side of the said pachinko machine 10.

<Aspect 66>
In each of the above aspects, the calculated game history information itself is displayed on the game history information display unit 45z. However, the game history information itself is not displayed and the game history information is within a predetermined range. It may be configured to display information indicating whether or not the game is stored on the game history information display unit 45z or other display unit. For example, it is good also as a structure which displays with the color of the LED lamp which light-emits whether the accessory ratio as game history information and the continuous accessory ratio are each settled in the predetermined range.

<Aspect 67>
In each of the above aspects, the game history information display unit 45z provided on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 may have a configuration in which four 7-segment displays are arranged adjacent to each other in a horizontal row. The game history information display unit 45z not only displays the game history information but also displays setting information instead of the game history information during the setting change mode for changing the lottery setting. Part 45z ".

  FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration of the information display unit 45z in the aspect 67. The information display unit 45z is configured by arranging four 7-segment indicators 45z1 to 45z4 adjacent to one horizontal line. Each of the 7-segment indicators 45z1 to 45z4 includes seven segment light emitting units A to G and a DP light emitting unit indicating a decimal point. Depending on the combination of the light emission of these light emitting units, “1” , “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “7”, “8”, “9”, “0”, “b”, “L.”, “6.” It is possible to display various numerical values, characters, symbols, and the like. In this aspect, seven segment light emission parts AG and DP light emission part are comprised by red LED (light emitting diode).

  In the following, the 7-segment display 45z1 disposed at the left end is also referred to as the left-end 7-segment display 45z1, and the 7-segment display 45z2 disposed adjacent to the right side of the left-end 7-segment display 45z1 Also referred to as a display 45z2, the 7-segment display 45z3 disposed adjacent to the right side of the left middle 7-segment display 45z2 is also referred to as the right middle 7-segment display 45z3, and is adjacent to the right side of the right middle 7-segment display 45z3. The 7-segment display 45z4 arranged at the right end is also referred to as a right-end 7-segment display 45z4.

  As shown in FIG. 35, the left end 7-segment display 45z1 and the left middle 7-segment display 45z2 display information for identifying the type of game history information to be displayed when displaying the game history information. Is used as an area for displaying (type information display area). The middle 7 segment display 45z3 and the right end 7 segment display 45z4 are used as an area (numerical information display area) for displaying the numerical information of the game history information corresponding to the type displayed in the type information display area. The Hereinafter, a specific example in which game history information is displayed on the information display unit 45z will be described.

  FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which game history information is displayed on the information display unit 45z. In FIG. 36, the segment light emitting units and DP light emitting units that are lit are shown in black, and the segment light emitting units and DP light emitting units that are not lit are not painted in black and are white. It is written in the unplugged state. The same applies to the drawings after FIG.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect, the main control device 60 always displays the game history information on the information display unit 45z in a state other than during the setting change mode in which the lottery setting described above is changed. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present aspect, the main control device 60 calculates the above-mentioned payout rate (during the normal mode) as the game history information, and the calculated exit rate (during the normal mode) is displayed on the information display unit 45z. To display. The definition of the launch rate (in normal mode) is as follows.
・ Ride rate (in normal mode)
= Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls in the normal mode / Number of game balls fired on the game board 30 in the normal mode (= Number of game balls passed through the discharge passage in the normal mode (normal Number of outs in mode))
Note that the normal mode means a mode that is not in the high probability mode, in the high frequency support mode, or in the opening / closing execution mode based on the big win, as described above. Further, in the following, the pitch rate (in normal mode) is also referred to as “base (in normal mode)”.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to this aspect, the main controller 60 divides a section every time the measured number of discharge passage passages N _OUT reaches 60000, and calculates a base (in the normal mode) for each section. Then, the information display unit 45z alternately displays two types of bases (during the normal mode) having different sections to be calculated. Specifically, the information display unit 45z of this aspect displays the following two types of bases (in the normal mode).

"BL": Base under measurement (in normal mode)
The exit rate calculated in the current section until the number N _OUT of the discharge passage currently measured reaches 60000 (in normal mode)
"B6": Measured base (in normal mode)
The exit rate calculated in the section immediately before the section where the measured discharge passage passage number N _OUT reaches 60000 and is currently being measured (in normal mode)

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to this aspect, the information display unit 45z alternately switches between “measured base (in normal mode)” and “measured base (in normal mode)” every 5 seconds.

  When the information display unit 45z displays “base under measurement (in normal mode)”, “bL.” Is displayed in the type information display area, and “base under measurement (in normal mode) is displayed in the numerical information display area. ) ”Is displayed in two digits. Specifically, when “bL.” Is displayed in the type information display area, the segment light-emitting portions C, D, E, F, and G of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1 are in a light-emitting state, and the left middle 7-segment The segment light emitting portions D, E, F, and DP light emitting portions of the display 45z2 are in a state of emitting light. The right middle 7-segment display 45z3 and the right end 7-segment display 45z4 constituting the numerical information display area display numerical information of “base under measurement (in normal mode)”. In this mode, the integer part of the numerical value obtained by rounding off the calculated third base value of the “base under measurement (in normal mode)” and multiplying by 100 is displayed in the numerical information display area. In the example shown in FIG. 36, the information display unit 45z displays information such as “bL.35”, and the value of “base under measurement (in normal mode)” obtained by rounding off the third decimal place value is It means “0.35”. In addition, when the value of “base under measurement (in normal mode)” obtained by rounding off the third decimal place value is “1.00” or more, the value multiplied by 100 becomes 100 or more. The information display unit 45z displays information such as “bL.99.”.

  When the information display unit 45z displays “measured base (in normal mode)”, “b6.” Is displayed in the type information display area, and “measured base (in normal mode) is displayed in the numerical information display area. ) ”Is displayed in two digits. Specifically, when “b6.” Is displayed in the type information display area, the segment light-emitting portions C, D, E, F, and G of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1 are in a light-emitting state, and the left middle 7-segment The segment light emitting portions A, C, D, E, F, G, and DP light emitting portions of the display unit 45z2 are in a state of emitting light. Then, numerical information of “measured base (in normal mode)” is displayed on the right middle 7-segment display 45z3 and the right end 7-segment display 45z4 constituting the numerical information display area. In this aspect, the integer part of the numerical value obtained by rounding off the calculated third base value of the “measured base (in normal mode)” to 100 times is displayed in the numerical information display area. In the example shown in FIG. 36, the information display unit 45z displays information such as “b6.35”, and the value of “measured base (in normal mode)” obtained by rounding off the third decimal place value is It means “0.35”. In addition, when the value of “measured base (in normal mode)” rounded off to the third decimal place is “1.00” or more, the value multiplied by 100 becomes 100 or more. The information display unit 45z displays information such as “b6.99.”.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect, when the information display unit 45z displays the game history information, even if the numerical value to be displayed in the numerical information display area is a single digit value, the middle 7 “0” is displayed on the segment display 45z3 and a numerical value is displayed in two digits. For example, when the value of “base under measurement (in normal mode)” obtained by rounding off the third decimal place value is “0.07”, the value multiplied by 100 is 7, so in this case The information display unit 45z displays information such as “bL.07”.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect, when displaying the game history information, “bL.” And “b6.” Are alternately displayed in the type information display area of the information display unit 45z. No information other than the two types of information is displayed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect, when displaying the game history information, the following light emitting units are used in the left end 7-segment display 45z1 and the left middle 7-segment display 45z2 constituting the type information display area. No light is emitted.
[Light emission part of type information display area not used when displaying game history information]
-Segment light emission part A, B and DP light emission part of left end 7 segment display 45z1-Segment light emission part B of left middle 7 segment display 45z2

In other words, when displaying the game history information, only the following light emitting units are used among the left end 7 segment display 45z1 and the left middle 7 segment display 45z2 constituting the type information display area (light emission). ).
[Light emitting part of type information display area used when displaying game history information]
・ Segment light emission part C, D, E, F, G of left end 7 segment display 45z1
-Segment light emission part A, C, D, E, F, G, and DP light emission part of left middle 7 segment display 45z2 For reference, FIG. 36 shows the type information display area used when displaying the game history information. The light emitting part is shown in a cross-hatched manner.

  Next, a display mode of the information display unit 45z in the setting change mode for changing the lottery setting described above will be described. In this mode, during the setting change mode, the information display unit 45z displays setting information that is information indicating the current lottery setting or information indicating the lottery setting after the change. This will be specifically described below.

  FIG. 37 and FIG. 38 are explanatory diagrams showing how the setting information is displayed on the information display unit 45z during the setting change mode. FIGS. 37 and 38 show a state in which “1” to “6” are displayed as setting information (numerical information) indicating the lottery setting in the numerical information display area of the information display section 45z.

  As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is activated as the setting change mode, the information display unit 45z displays numerical information indicating the current lottery setting in the numerical information display area. When the administrator presses the setting change button, the information display unit 45z displays numerical information indicating the lottery setting after the change in the numerical information display area. Then, when the administrator turns the setting change key from the setting change side to the original position, the setting change mode ends, and the information display unit 45z displays the game history information again in the numerical information display area.

  In this mode, during the setting change mode, “-(2 hyphens)” is displayed in the type information display area of the information display section 45z, and “1” to “6” are displayed in the numerical information display area. Either setting information is displayed. A display pattern such as “-(two hyphens)” displayed in the type information display area in the setting change mode is a display pattern that is not displayed when information related to the type of game history information is displayed.

  Specifically, during the setting change mode, the segment light emission part G of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1 constituting the type information display area of the information display part 45z emits light, and the segment light emission part of the left middle 7-segment display 45z2 G emits light. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to this aspect, only the light emitting unit used when displaying the game history information is used during the setting change mode. In other words, the light emitting units that are not used when the game history information is displayed are not used even during the setting change mode.

  Further, in this aspect, of the right middle 7 segment display 45z3 and the right end 7 segment display 45z4 constituting the numerical information display area of the information display section 45z, the right middle 7 segment display 45z3 is not used, and the right end 7 segment Numerical information indicating the lottery setting is displayed using only the display 45z4. That is, the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z can display numerical information of two digits, but “0” is displayed on the right middle 7-segment display 45z3 in the first digit in the setting change mode. The numerical information of any one of “1” to “6” indicating the lottery setting is displayed only on the rightmost 7-segment indicator 45z4 in the second digit.

  As described above, according to this aspect, the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z and the numerical information regarding the lottery setting is displayed. The display mode of the type information display area is clearly different. Therefore, for example, the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 clearly distinguishes whether the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z or whether the numerical information regarding the lottery setting is displayed. It can be recognized separately. As a result, the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 is prevented from misidentifying the numerical information displayed in the numerical information display area between the numerical information of the game history information and the numerical information related to the lottery setting. it can.

  Furthermore, according to this feature, the light emitting part of the type information display area that is not used when displaying the game history information (the segment light emitting parts A, B, DP light emitting part, left middle 7 segment display of the leftmost 7 segment display 45z1) Since the segment light emitting part B) of 45z2 is not used even during the setting change mode, there are light emitting parts that are not used (hereinafter referred to as unused light emitting parts) in the type information display area. Therefore, for example, even if a problem occurs in the unused light emitting section of the type information display area, the display mode in the type information display area is not affected. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the display mode is affected when a problem occurs in the light emitting section of the type information display area.

  In addition, for example, since a light emitting element (LED) serving as a non-use light emitting portion does not need to emit light, components necessary for causing the light emitting element to emit light can be omitted. Therefore, the cost of the information display part 45z can be reduced.

  Furthermore, according to this aspect, the number of digits of the displayed numerical value is displayed when the numerical information regarding the game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area and when the numerical information regarding the lottery setting is displayed. Since there is a difference, even if there is a problem in the display of the type information display area, whether the numerical information displayed in the numerical information display area is game history information or not to the administrator Can be clearly distinguished and recognized. That is, when a two-digit numerical value is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z, the administrator determines that the numerical value displayed in the numerical information display area is game history information, and the numerical value is displayed. When a one-digit numerical value is displayed in the information display area, it can be determined that the numerical value displayed in the numerical information display area is the setting information.

<Aspect 68>
In the aspect 67, the information display unit 45z is configured to light and display “-(2 hyphens)” in the type information display area during the setting change mode. In the mode, “-(2 hyphens)” may be blinked in the type information display area.

  According to such a configuration, the type information display area is displayed when the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z and when the numerical information regarding the lottery setting is displayed. The display mode is more clearly different. Therefore, for example, the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 further clarifies whether the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z or whether the numerical information regarding the lottery setting is displayed. It can be recognized and distinguished. As a result, the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 is prevented from misidentifying the numerical information displayed in the numerical information display area between the numerical information of the game history information and the numerical information related to the lottery setting. it can.

  Furthermore, according to this aspect, in the setting change mode in which numerical information relating to the lottery setting is displayed in the numerical information display area, “-(two hyphens)” in the type information display area flashes. It is possible to alert the manager of the machine 10 that it is an important state to carefully change the lottery setting.

<Aspect 69>
In the aspect 67, the information display unit 45z is configured to light and display “-(2 hyphens)” in the type information display area during the setting change mode. During the mode, nothing may be displayed in the type information display area. This will be specifically described below.

  FIG. 39 and FIG. 40 are explanatory diagrams showing how the setting information is displayed on the information display unit 45z during the setting change mode. 39 and 40 show a state in which “1” to “6” are displayed as numerical information indicating the lottery setting in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z. As shown in FIG. 39, in this mode, in the setting change mode, all of the left end 7-segment display 45z1 and the left middle 7-segment display 45z2 constituting the type information display area of the information display section 45z are displayed. The segment light emitting unit and the DP light emitting unit are turned off. That is, as described above, during the setting change mode, the type information display area of the information display unit 45z is in a state where nothing is displayed.

  Thus, according to this aspect, the type information is displayed when the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z and when the numerical information regarding the lottery setting is displayed. The display mode of the display area is clearly different. Therefore, for example, the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 clearly distinguishes whether the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z or whether the numerical information regarding the lottery setting is displayed. It can be recognized separately. As a result, the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 is prevented from misidentifying the numerical information displayed in the numerical information display area between the numerical information of the game history information and the numerical information related to the lottery setting. it can.

  Furthermore, according to this aspect, even if a problem has occurred in which some of the light emitting units (segment light emitting units A to G, etc.) constituting the type information display area do not emit light, all the light emitting units do not emit light. As long as such a serious problem does not occur, the display mode of the type information display area differs between when the game history information is displayed and when the lottery setting setting information is displayed. Therefore, according to this aspect, even if there is a problem that some light emitting units (LEDs) constituting the type information display area do not emit light to the administrator, all the light emitting units do not emit light. As long as no serious trouble has occurred, it is possible to recognize whether the numerical information displayed in the numerical information display area is game history information or lottery setting information. That is, the administrator determines that the numerical value displayed in the numerical information display area is game history information when at least some of the light emitting units emit light in the type information display area, and sets the type information display area. It can be determined that the numerical value displayed in the numerical value information display area is the setting information for the lottery setting only when all the light emitting units that are configured are turned off.

<Aspect 70>
In the aspect 67, the information display unit 45z is configured to light and display “-(2 hyphens)” in the type information display area during the setting change mode. During the mode, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of display patterns are switched and displayed in a short period (for example, every 0.5 seconds) in the type information display area. This will be specifically described below.

  FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing how the setting information is displayed on the information display unit 45z during the setting change mode. In the example shown in FIG. 41, a state in which “1” is displayed as numerical information indicating the lottery setting in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z is shown. In the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect, during the setting change mode, the following two types of display patterns are alternately displayed every 0.5 seconds in the type information display area of the information display unit 45z.

-Display pattern A in the type information display area:
The display pattern B of the display pattern / type information display area in which the segment light-emitting portions C, D, E, and G of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1 are turned on (light-emitting) and all the light-emitting portions of the left middle 7-segment display 45z2 are turned off. :
Display pattern in which all the light emitting sections of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1 are turned off and the segment light emitting sections C, D, E, and G of the left middle 7-segment display 45z2 are lit (lighted)

  The display pattern A and the display pattern B described above are display patterns that are not displayed in the type information display area when the game history information is displayed. Further, in the display pattern A and the display pattern B, only the light emitting unit used when displaying the game history information is used. In other words, in the display pattern A and the display pattern B, the light emitting unit that is not used when the game history information is displayed is not used.

  Thus, according to this aspect, the type information is displayed when the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z and when the numerical information regarding the lottery setting is displayed. The display mode of the display area is clearly different. Therefore, for example, the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 clearly distinguishes whether the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z or whether the numerical information regarding the lottery setting is displayed. It can be recognized separately. As a result, the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 is prevented from misidentifying the numerical information displayed in the numerical information display area between the numerical information of the game history information and the numerical information related to the lottery setting. it can.

  Furthermore, according to this aspect, the display pattern in the type information display area dynamically changes during the setting change mode in which numerical information relating to the lottery setting is displayed in the numerical information display area. The administrator can be alerted that the lottery setting must be carefully changed.

  Furthermore, according to this aspect, the light emitting part of the type information display area that is not used when displaying the game history information (the segment light emitting parts A and B of the leftmost 7 segment display 45z1, the DP light emitting part, the middle 7 segment display Since the segment light emitting part B) of 45z2 is not used even during the setting change mode, there are light emitting parts that are not used (hereinafter referred to as unused light emitting parts) in the type information display area. Therefore, for example, even if a problem occurs in the unused light emitting section of the type information display area, the display mode in the type information display area is not affected. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the display mode is affected when a problem occurs in the light emitting section of the type information display area.

  Moreover, since the light emitting element (LED) used as a non-use light emission part does not need to light-emit, the component required in order to light-emit the said light emitting element can be abbreviate | omitted. Therefore, the cost of the information display part 45z can be reduced.

  In this aspect, in the setting change mode, two types of display patterns are alternately displayed in the type information display area of the information display unit 45z, but three or more types of display patterns are sequentially switched. The display may be repeatedly displayed.

<Aspect 71>
In each of the above aspects, when the “number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage during the normal mode (out number during the normal mode)” being measured is less than 6000, for example, “bL.” In the type information display area May be displayed in a blinking manner, and in the case of 6000 or more, it may be lit up. According to such a configuration, the person who confirms the blinking display of “bL.” In the type information display area indicates that “the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage during the normal mode (the number of outs in the normal mode). ) ”Is less than 6000, and the numerical value displayed in the numerical information display area is the“ base under measurement (in normal mode) ”calculated in a state where a sufficient amount of statistical data is not accumulated. Can be recognized.

  In addition, “bL.” In the type information display area is turned on, and “the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage during the normal mode (the number of outs in the normal mode)” during measurement is less than 6000, for example. In this case, a numerical value in the numerical information display area may be displayed in a blinking manner. According to such a configuration, the person who confirmed the blinking display of the numerical value in the numerical information display area has the “number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage during the normal mode (the number of outs in the normal mode)” being measured. Recognize that the numerical value displayed in the numerical information display area is less than 6000 and is a “base under measurement (in normal mode)” calculated in a state where a sufficient amount of statistical data is not accumulated. be able to.

  Further, when the “number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage during the normal mode (the number of outs during the normal mode)” being measured is less than 6000, for example, “bL.” In the type information display area and numerical information A numerical value in the display area may be displayed blinking, and in the case of 6000 or more, it may be lit up. According to such a configuration, the person who confirms the blinking display of “bL.” In the type information display area and the numerical value in the numerical information display area indicates that “the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage during the normal mode” (The number of outs in the normal mode) is less than 6000, and the numerical value displayed in the numerical information display area is the “base under measurement (in a state where a sufficient amount of statistical data is not accumulated” In the normal mode).

  Note that various game history basic information can be adopted as a reference for determining whether the display is blinking or lighting. For example, the “number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage (total number of outs)” being measured may be employed.

<Aspect 72>
In each of the above aspects, when the numerical information indicating the lottery setting is displayed in the numerical information display area in the setting change mode, all the light emitting units constituting the middle right seven-segment display 45z3 are turned off and used. Instead, the numerical information indicating the lottery setting is displayed in one digit using only the rightmost 7-segment display 45z4. Instead of this configuration, the right middle 7-segment display 45z3 is also used to display two digits. It is good also as a structure which displays the numerical information which shows lottery setting. For example, when the numerical information indicating the lottery setting has only one digit information, “0” may be displayed on the middle 7 segment display 45z3.

<Aspect 73>
In each of the above aspects, the lottery setting is not limited to the six types 1 to 6, and the type of lottery setting may be 5 or less or 7 or more types. The number of 7-segment displays constituting the information display unit 45z is not limited to four, and may be three or less, or five or more. Further, the number of 7-segment displays constituting the type information display area of the information display section 45z is not limited to two, and may be one or three or more. Further, the number of 7-segment displays constituting the numerical information display area of the information display section 45z is not limited to two, and may be one or three or more. Moreover, the information display part 45z may be comprised by light emitting elements other than LED, such as organic EL, and may be comprised by the display element (display element) which does not light-emit. For example, the information display unit 45z may be configured by a display element that employs an electrophoresis method used for liquid crystal or electronic paper.

<Aspect 74>
FIG. 42 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the aspect 74 of the first embodiment. In this aspect 74, the game history management chip 300 is not provided, and the main CPU 62x calculates the above-described game history information. Below, the detail of the various structures with which the main-control apparatus 60 is provided is demonstrated, about the other structure, the code | symbol same as 1st Embodiment and each aspect mentioned above is attached | subjected, and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 42, the main ROM 63 includes program storage means 63a and program data storage means 63b. The main RAM 64 includes data storage means 64a and stack means 64b.

  The main CPU 62x is configured to include a register set 62x1, and executes various processes by combining and executing a plurality of types of programs stored in the program storage means 63a of the main ROM 63. Each program is configured by combining a plurality of previously reserved instructions such as an operation instruction, a transfer instruction, a rotate instruction, a shift instruction, a jump instruction, a call instruction, and a return instruction. Multiple instructions are executed sequentially in the order defined in the program.

  The register set 62x1 includes an A register (accumulator register), an F register (flag register), a general-purpose register, and a stack pointer (SP). The A register and the general-purpose register are formed with a size of 1 byte (8 bits), and the stack pointer (SP) is formed with a size of 2 bytes (16 bits). The register set 62x1 may include other registers, and may further include, for example, registers such as an index register, an interrupt register, a refresh register, and a program counter.

  The A register stores data (value) that is an operation target of an operation instruction and an operation result.

  The state of the F register automatically changes according to the operation result of the operation instruction and the execution result of a specific instruction such as a load instruction.

  General-purpose registers are used in the same way as general program variables. Specifically, data (values) are temporarily stored, counters are configured, and memory addresses are specified. Used to do.

  The stack pointer (SP) is a stack for accessing the first stack area 64b1 (see FIG. 44 described later) and the second stack area 64b2 (see FIG. 44 described later) of the stack means 64b configured in the main RAM 64. Stores the pointer reference address. Specifically, the stack pointer (SP) stores the first stack area reference address SP1 when accessing the first stack area 64b1, and the second stack area reference when accessing the second stack area 64b2. Stores the address SP2.

  FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the main ROM 63. As described above, the main ROM 63 includes the program storage unit 63a and the program data storage unit 63b.

  The program storage means 63a has a first program control area 63a1 that stores the first program 63p1, and a second program control area 63a2 that is different from the first program control area 63a1 and stores the second program 63p2. doing.

  The first program 63p1 includes a game progress program, a storage program, and a change program. Then, the main CPU 62x executes a game progress process for controlling the progress of the game by executing the game progress program, executes the storage process by executing the storage program, and executes the change program by executing the change program. To implement. Details of the game progress process, the storage process, and the change process will be described later.

  The second program 63p2 includes a game history information calculation display program, a save program, and a return program. Then, the main CPU 62x performs the game history information calculation display process for calculating and displaying the game history information described above by executing the game history information calculation display program, and executes the save process by executing the save program. The restoration process is executed by executing the restoration program. Details of the game history information calculation display process, the save process, and the return process will be described later.

  The program data storage means 63b is an area different from the first program data area 63b1 and the first program data area 63b1 for storing various data necessary for executing the first program 63p1, and the second program 63p2 And a second program data area 63b2 for storing various data necessary for executing. The first program data area 63b1 stores, for example, data such as a success / failure table and a distribution table used in the above-described jackpot lottery process, and the second program data area 63b2 includes, for example, a game history information calculation display process. Stores various fixed value data to be used.

  As described above, the first program control area 63a1 for storing the first program 63p1, the first program data area 63b1 for storing data necessary for executing the first program 63p1, and the second program 63p2 for storing the second program 63p2. The second program data area 63b2 for storing data necessary for executing the second program control area 63a2 and the second program 63p2 is configured in different areas of the main ROM 63, respectively.

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the main RAM 64. As described above, the main RAM 64 includes the data storage unit 64a and the stack unit 64b.

  The data storage means 64a corresponds to the first data storage area 64a1 corresponding to the first program 63p1 capable of updating data and the second program 63p2 which is an area different from the first data storage area 64a1 and capable of updating data. The second data storage area 64a2. The first data storage area 64a1 stores, for example, various data (various flags such as a high probability mode flag) updated in the game progress process, and the second data storage area 64a2 stores, for example, a game history Various data updated in the information calculation display process is stored.

  The stack means 64b is a first stack area 64b1 accessible by the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP), and an area different from the first stack area 64b1, and the stack pointer (SP) And a second stack area 64b2 accessible by the second stack area reference address SP2. The first stack area 64b1 corresponds to the first program 63p1 (game progress program, storage program, change program), and the second stack area 64b2 corresponds to the second program 63p2 (game history information calculation display program, save program, return program) Program).

  As described above, the first stack area 64b1 and the first data storage area 64a1, and the second program 63p2 (in which data can be updated and referred to by processing by the first program 63p1 (game progress program, storage program, change program) The second stack area 64b2 and the second data storage area 64a2 that can update and refer to data by processing by a game history information calculation display program, save program, and return program are configured in different areas of the main RAM 64, respectively. ing. The data in the second stack area 64b2 and the second data storage area 64a2 cannot be updated by the processing by the first program 63p1, but the data can be referred to, and the first stack is processed by the processing by the second program 63p2. Although the data in the area 64b1 and the first data storage area 64a1 cannot be updated, the data can be referred to.

  FIG. 45 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a memory map of the main controller 60. As shown in FIG. 45, the internal ROM area corresponding to the main ROM 63 and the internal RAM area corresponding to the main RAM 64 are allocated in this order in the memory space in this aspect. In this aspect, in the built-in ROM area, the first program control area 63a1, the first program data area 63b1, the unused area, the second program control area 63a2, and the second program data area 63b2 are allocated in this order. In the built-in RAM area, the first data storage area 64a1, the first stack area 64b1, the second data storage area 64a2, the second stack area 64b2, and the unused area are allocated in this order.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 62x according to the aspect 74 of the first embodiment. Also in this aspect, the timer interrupt process is executed at a cycle of 4 msec, as in the first embodiment.

  Each process described on the left side of the page of FIG. 46 is a process executed by the main CPU 62x executing the first program 63p1 stored in the first program control area 63a1. Each process described on the right side of the page is a process that is executed by executing the second program 63p2 stored in the second program control area 63a2 by the main CPU 62x.

  In step S11101, the main CPU 62x executes the game progress program included in the first program 63p1, thereby executing a game progress process that is a process for progressing the game. Specifically, in the game progress process, the process group shown in steps S10601 to S10615 of FIG. After performing the process of step S11101, the process proceeds to step S11102.

  In step S11102, the main CPU 62x executes the storage process by executing the storage program included in the first program 63p1. In the storage process, the first stack in which the values of the A register and the F register among the plurality of registers can be accessed by the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) by a push instruction (PUSH). Store in area 64b1. At this time, the values of the A register and the F register are stored in the first stack area 64b1 by one push instruction (PUSH AF) using the special code AF that designates the A register and the F register as a transfer target.

  After executing step S11102, the main CPU 62x executes the save processes 1, 2, and 3 shown in steps S11103 to S11105 by executing the save program included in the second program 63p2. This will be specifically described below.

  In the save process 1 shown in step S11103, the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) is changed to the address W21 of the second data storage area 64a2 by the load instruction (LD (W21), SP). Store in the area specified by. At this time, the value of the F flag may change due to the change of the state of the TZ flag of the F register by the load instruction. After performing the save process 1 in step S11103, the process proceeds to step S11104.

  In the save process 2 shown in step S11104, the second stack area reference address SP2, which is a fixed value, is stored in the stack pointer (SP) by a load instruction (LD SP, fixed value). At this time, the second stack area reference address SP2 stored in the stack pointer (SP) is a fixed value stored in advance in the second program data area 63b2 of the main ROM 63, for example. In this aspect, since no data is stored in the second stack area 64b2 at the time of executing the save process 2, the fixed value stored in the stack pointer (SP) in the save process 2 is the bottom of the second stack area 64b2. Is an address value indicating. After performing the save process 2 in step S11104, the process proceeds to step S11105.

  In the save process 3 shown in step S11105, the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register are designated by the address W22 of the second data storage area 64a2 by a plurality of load instructions (LD (W22), registers). To remember. A configuration in which the values of the A register, F register, and general register are stored in the second data storage area 64a2 by a single load instruction using a special code that designates the A register, F register, and general register as transfer targets. It is good. After performing the process of step S11105, the process proceeds to step S11106.

  In step S11106, the main CPU 62x executes a game history information calculation display process by executing a game history information calculation display program included in the second program 63p2. In the game history information calculation display process, the above-described game history information is calculated, and a process for displaying the calculated game history information on the information display unit 45z is performed. Specifically, in the game history information calculation display process, the process group shown in steps S10802 to S10812 of FIG. 29 described above is performed. At this time, in the game history information calculation display process, the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register change.

  After executing the game history information calculation display process in step S11106, the main CPU 62x executes the return programs 1 and 2 shown in steps S11107 and S11108 by executing the return program included in the second program 63p2. This will be specifically described below.

  In the return process 1 shown in step S11107, the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register are stored in the second data storage area by the save process 3 (step S11105) by a plurality of load instructions (LD register, (W22)). The value stored in the area specified by the address W22 of 64a2 is set. It should be noted that a configuration in which the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register are set to the values stored in the second data storage area 64a2 by the save process 3 (step S11105) by one load instruction using a special code. Good. In the return process 1, when the value of the F register is changed in the save process 1 (step S11103), a value different from that immediately after the game progress process is finished is stored in the F register. After performing the process of step S11107, the process proceeds to step S11108.

  In the return process 2 shown in step S11108, the first stack area stored in the area specified by the address W21 of the second data storage area 64a2 by the save process 1 (step S11103) by the load instruction (LDSP, (W21)). The reference address SP1 is stored in the stack pointer (SP), and the main CPU 62x ends the execution of the second program 63p2. After performing the process of step S11108, the process proceeds to step S11109.

  In step S11109, the main CPU 62x executes the changing process by executing the changing program included in the first program 63p1. In the change process, the value of the A register and the F register among the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register set by the return process 1 (step S11107) is stored by the pop instruction (POP) (step S11102). To change the value to the value stored in the first stack area 64b1. At this time, the values of the A register and the F register are changed to the values stored in the first stack area 64b1 by the storage process (step S11102) by one pop instruction (POP AF) using a special code. At this time, in the return process 1 (step S11107), even if a value different from that immediately after the game progress process is stored in the F register, the value in the F register is the same value as that immediately after the game progress process is ended. Can be changed. After executing the process of step S11109, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

  As described above, according to this aspect, the evacuation process 3 (step S11105 in FIG. 46) and the return process 1 (step S11107 in FIG. 46) are performed, so that the second program 63p2 returns to the first program 63p1. At this time, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem due to the change in the value of the register used in the first program 63p1.

  Further, according to this aspect, there is a possibility that the state of the F register changes before the save process 3 is performed (for example, when a load instruction is executed in the save process 1 (step S11103 in FIG. 46)). Before executing the save process 1, after storing the values of the A register and the F register in the storage process (step S11102 in FIG. 46) by the storage program included in the first program 63p1, and after completing the process by the second program 63p2 In the change process (step S11109 in FIG. 46) by the change program included in the first program 63p1, the values of the A register and the F register are changed to the values stored in the storage process. Therefore, for example, even if the state of the F register changes in the save process 1, the state of the F register returns to the same state as that immediately after the end of the game progress process by the first program 63p1 (step S11101 in FIG. 46). 2 There is no possibility of affecting the processing to be performed after returning from the processing by the program 63p2. As a result, a plurality of programs can be configured independently.

  In addition, according to this aspect, a game for controlling the progress of a game can be achieved simply by adding a game history information calculation / display program for executing the game history information calculation / display process (step S11106 in FIG. 46) to the second program 63p2. The game history information calculation display process can be added without affecting the progress process (step S11101 in FIG. 46). Therefore, a game history information calculation display program can be easily created independently of the game progress program for executing the game progress process.

  Further, according to this aspect, as shown in FIG. 45, the memory space used by the processing by the first program 63p1 and the memory space used by the processing by the second program 63p2 are arranged independently of each other. Both memory spaces can be prevented from physically interfering with each other, and for example, illegal activities performed on one process (memory space) can be prevented from affecting other processes (memory space). can do.

  Further, according to this aspect, in the save process 3 (step S11105 in FIG. 46), all the values of each register are stored in the second stack area 64b2 by one push instruction (PUSH ALL). In addition, since the value of each register is stored in the second data storage area 64a2 by the load instruction, it is possible to store only the used register in the second data storage area 64a2. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity necessary for storing the value of each register in the saving process 3. In addition, according to this aspect, the value of each register is not stored in the second stack area 64b2, but the value of each register is stored in the second data storage area 64a2. It is possible to expand the storage capacity of the second data storage area 64a2 by reducing the storage capacity of the second stack area 64b2.

  Further, for example, when the capacity of data to be stored in the stack area by a push instruction (PUSH) exceeds the upper limit of the storage capacity of the stack area of the main RAM 64, all the data stored in the stack area is stored. If the configuration is such that a reset process for erasing data is performed, assuming that the value of each register is stored in the second stack area 64b2 by a push command (PUSH) in the save process 3, the reset process is performed. There is a risk of being. Furthermore, if the save process 3 is configured to store all register values in the second stack area 64b2 by a single push instruction (PUSH ALL), the possibility that the reset process will be performed is further increased. End up. On the other hand, according to this aspect, the push instruction (PUSH ALL) is not used in the save process 3, and the value of each register is stored in the second data storage area 64a2 by the load instruction (LD). It is possible to avoid the risk that the reset process is executed.

<Aspect 75>
In the configuration shown in the above aspect 74, timer interrupt processing described below may be performed instead of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 62x according to aspect 75 of the first embodiment. The same steps as those included in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 46 are assigned the same step numbers. 46 differs from the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 46 in that the save process 1 shown in step S11103 in FIG. 46 is omitted and the contents of the return process 2 shown in step S11108 in FIG. 46 are different. Is a point. This will be specifically described below.

  In step S11101, the main CPU 62x executes the game progress program included in the first program 63p1, thereby executing a game progress process that is a process for progressing the game. Specifically, in the game progress process, the process group shown in steps S10601 to S10615 of FIG. After performing the process of step S11101, the process proceeds to step S11102.

  In step S11102, the main CPU 62x executes the storage process by executing the storage program included in the first program 63p1. In the storage process, the first stack in which the values of the A register and the F register among the plurality of registers can be accessed by the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) by a push instruction (PUSH). Store in area 64b1. At this time, the values of the A register and the F register are stored in the first stack area 64b1 by one push instruction (PUSH AF) using the special code AF that designates the A register and the F register as a transfer target.

  After executing step S11102, the main CPU 62x executes the save programs 2 and 3 shown in steps S11104 and S11105 by executing the save program included in the second program 63p2. That is, in this aspect, the main CPU 62x does not implement the save process 1 in step S11103 described above. This will be specifically described below.

  In the save process 2 shown in step S11104, the second stack area reference address SP2, which is a fixed value, is stored in the stack pointer (SP) by a load instruction (LD SP, fixed value). At this time, the second stack area reference address SP2 stored in the stack pointer (SP) is a fixed value stored in advance in the second program data area 63b2 of the main ROM 63, for example. In this aspect, since no data is stored in the second stack area 64b2 at the time of executing the save process 2, the fixed value stored in the stack pointer (SP) in the save process 2 is the bottom of the second stack area 64b2. Is an address value indicating. After performing the save process 2 in step S11104, the process proceeds to step S11105.

  In the save process 3 shown in step S11105, the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register are designated by the address W22 of the second data storage area 64a2 by a plurality of load instructions (LD (W22), registers). To remember. A configuration in which the values of the A register, F register, and general register are stored in the second data storage area 64a2 by a single load instruction using a special code that designates the A register, F register, and general register as transfer targets. It is good. After performing the process of step S11105, the process proceeds to step S11106.

  In step S11106, the main CPU 62x executes a game history information calculation display process by executing a game history information calculation display program included in the second program 63p2. In the game history information calculation display process, the above-described game history information is calculated, and a process for displaying the calculated game history information on the information display unit 45z is performed. Specifically, in the game history information calculation display process, the process group shown in steps S10802 to S10812 of FIG. 29 described above is performed. At this time, in the game history information calculation display process, the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register change.

  After executing the game history information calculation display process of step S11106, the main CPU 62x executes the return program included in the second program 63p2, thereby executing the return process 1 and the return process A shown in steps S11107 and S11108a. To do. That is, in this aspect, the main CPU 62x performs the return process A shown in step S11108a instead of the return process 2 in step S11108 described above. This will be specifically described below.

  In the return process 1 shown in step S11107, the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register are stored in the second data storage area by the save process 3 (step S11105) by a plurality of load instructions (LD register, (W22)). The value stored in the area specified by the address W22 of 64a2 is set. It should be noted that a configuration in which the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register are set to the values stored in the second data storage area 64a2 by the save process 3 (step S11105) by one load instruction using a special code. Good. In the return process 1, when the value of the F register is changed in the save process 1 (step S11103), a value different from that immediately after the game progress process is finished is stored in the F register. Further, the special code may not be used, and the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register may be set to the values stored in the second data storage area 64a2 by a plurality of load instructions. After performing the process of step S11107, the process proceeds to step S11108a.

  In the return process A shown in step S11108a, the first stack area reference address SP1, which is a fixed value, is stored in the stack pointer (SP) by a load instruction (LD SP, fixed value). At this time, the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) is a fixed value stored in advance in the second program data area 63b2 of the main ROM 63, for example. Hereinafter, this fixed value will be described.

  In this aspect, at the time when all the processes (the processes of steps S10601 to S10615) constituting the game progress process (step S11101) are completed, the data stored in the first stack area 64b1 does not exist. Thus, the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) is an address value that designates the bottom of the first stack area 64b1.

  Thereafter, when the main CPU 62x executes the storage process (step S11102) and starts executing the second program 63p2, a predetermined amount of data is stored in the first stack area 64b1. As a result, the main CPU 62x executes the storage process (step S11102), and is stored in the stack pointer (SP) immediately after the execution of the second program 63p2 (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47). The first stack area reference address SP1 is an address value that designates a position moved by a predetermined amount from the bottom of the first stack area 64b1.

  Since the amount of data stored in the first stack area 64b1 by the execution of the storage process (step S11102) and the start of the execution of the second program 63p2 is the same every time (every timer interrupt process), the first stack area The amount of movement of the reference address SP1 is the same every time. Accordingly, the first stack stored in the stack pointer (SP) at the time immediately after the main CPU 62x executes the storage process (step S11102) and starts the execution of the second program 63p2 (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47). The area reference address SP1 has the same address value every time.

  Then, the fixed value stored in the stack pointer (SP) in the return process A (step S11108a) of this aspect is the time immediately after the end of the storage process (step S11102) and the start of the execution of the second program 63p2 (FIG. 47). Is set to the same address value as the address value stored in the stack pointer every time. As a result, even if the save process 1 (step S11103 in FIG. 46) described above is omitted, the storage process (step S11102) for the value of the stack pointer (SP) is terminated by the return process A (step S11108a) of this aspect. It is possible to return to the value immediately after the execution of the second program 63p2 is started (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47).

  The main CPU 62x ends the process of step S11108a described above, ends the execution of the second program 63p2, starts executing the first program 63p1, and proceeds to step S11109.

  In step S11109, the main CPU 62x executes the changing process by executing the changing program included in the first program. In the change process, the value of the A register and the F register among the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register set by the return process 1 (step S11107) is stored by the pop instruction (POP) (step S11102). To change the value to the value stored in the first stack area 64b1. At this time, the values of the A register and the F register are changed to the values stored in the first stack area 64b1 by the storage process (step S11102) by one pop instruction (POP AF) using a special code. At this time, the value of the F register has changed after the storage process (step S11102) has been performed, and in the return process 1 (step S11107), a value different from that immediately after the game progress process has been stored is stored in the F register. Even in this case, the value of the F register can be changed to the same value as that immediately after the game progress process is completed. After executing the process of step S11109, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

  As described above, according to this aspect, in addition to the effects shown in aspect 74 described above, the following effects can be achieved.

  In this aspect, at the time when all the processes (the processes of steps S10601 to S10615) constituting the game progress process (step S11101) are completed, the data stored in the first stack area 64b1 does not exist. Thus, the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) is an address value that designates the bottom of the first stack area 64b1. Therefore, the main CPU 62x executes the storage process (step S11102) and immediately after the execution of the second program 63p2 is started (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47), the first stored in the stack pointer (SP). The stack area reference address SP1 has the same address value every time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, since the fixed value may be stored in the stack pointer (SP) by the return process A (step S11108a) of this aspect, the save process 1 shown in the aspect 74 can be omitted. As a result, the processing of the main CPU 62x can be simplified, and the second data storage area 64a2 required for saving the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP). The storage capacity can be reduced.

<Aspect 76>
Instead of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 47, timer interrupt processing described below may be performed.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 62x according to aspect 76 of the first embodiment. The same steps as those included in the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 47 are denoted by the same step numbers. The main difference from the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 47 is that the save process 3 shown in step S11105 of FIG. 47 is omitted and the return process 1 shown in step S11107 of FIG. 47 is omitted. 48, processing for setting all register values to 0 is added after the processing shown in steps S11102 and S11108a of FIG. This will be specifically described below.

  In step S11101, the main CPU 62x executes the game progress program included in the first program 63p1, thereby executing a game progress process that is a process for progressing the game. Specifically, in the game progress process, the process group shown in steps S10601 to S10615 of FIG. After performing the process of step S11101, the process proceeds to step S11102.

  In step S11102, the main CPU 62x executes the storage process by executing the storage program included in the first program 63p1. In the storage process, the first stack in which the values of the A register and the F register among the plurality of registers can be accessed by the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) by a push instruction (PUSH). Store in area 64b1. At this time, the values of the A register and the F register are stored in the first stack area 64b1 by one push instruction (PUSH AF) using the special code AF that designates the A register and the F register as a transfer target. After performing the process of step S11102, the process proceeds to step S11102-2.

  In step S11102-2, the main CPU 62x executes the first clear process by executing the first clear program included in the first program 63p1. In the first clear process, the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register are set to 0 by a plurality of load instructions (LD register, 0). Note that the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register may be set to 0 by a single load instruction using a special code.

  After executing Step S110102-2, the main CPU 62x executes the save process 2 shown in Step S11104 by executing the save program included in the second program 63p2. That is, in this aspect, the main CPU 62x does not perform the save process 1 in step S11103 and the save process 3 in step S11105. This will be specifically described below.

  In the save process 2 shown in step S11104, the second stack area reference address SP2, which is a fixed value, is stored in the stack pointer (SP) by a load instruction (LD SP, fixed value). At this time, the second stack area reference address SP2 stored in the stack pointer (SP) is a fixed value stored in advance in the second program data area 63b2 of the main ROM 63, for example. In this aspect, since no data is stored in the second stack area 64b2 at the time of executing the save process 2, the fixed value stored in the stack pointer (SP) in the save process 2 is the bottom of the second stack area 64b2. Is an address value indicating. After performing the save process 2 in step S11104, the process proceeds to step S11106. That is, in this aspect, the main CPU 62x does not implement the save process 3 in step S11105 described above.

  In step S11106, the main CPU 62x executes a game history information calculation display process by executing a game history information calculation display program included in the second program 63p2. In the game history information calculation display process, the above-described game history information is calculated, and a process for displaying the calculated game history information on the information display unit 45z is performed. Specifically, in the game history information calculation display process, the process group shown in steps S10802 to S10812 of FIG. 29 described above is performed. At this time, in the game history information calculation display process, the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register change.

  After performing the game history information calculation display process of step S11106, the main CPU 62x executes the second clear program included in the second program 63p2, thereby performing the second clear process shown in step S11107a. That is, in this aspect, the main CPU 62x does not implement the return process 1 in step S11107 described above.

  In the second clear process shown in step S11107a, the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register are set to 0 by a plurality of load instructions (LD register, 0). Note that the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register may be set to 0 by a single load instruction using a special code.

  After executing the second clear process in step S11107a, the main CPU 62x executes the return program A shown in step S11108a by executing the return program included in the second program 63p2.

  In the return process A shown in step S11108a, the first stack area reference address SP1, which is a fixed value, is stored in the stack pointer (SP) by a load instruction (LD SP, fixed value). At this time, the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) is a fixed value stored in advance in the second program data area 63b2 of the main ROM 63, for example. Hereinafter, this fixed value will be described.

  In this aspect, at the time when all the processes (the processes of steps S10601 to S10615) constituting the game progress process (step S11101) are completed, the data stored in the first stack area 64b1 does not exist. Thus, the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) is an address value that designates the bottom of the first stack area 64b1.

  Thereafter, when the main CPU 62x executes the storage process (step S11102) and the first clear process (step S11102-2) and starts executing the second program 63p2, a predetermined amount of data is stored in the first stack area 64b1. The As a result, the main CPU 62x executes the storage process (step S11102) and the first clear process (step S11102-2), and immediately after the execution of the second program 63p2 is started (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47). The first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) is an address value for designating a position moved by a predetermined amount from the bottom of the first stack area 64b1.

  The amount of data stored in the first stack area 64b1 by the execution of the storage process (step S11102), the first clear process (step S11102-2) and the execution of the second program 63p2 is changed every time (every timer interrupt process). Therefore, the movement amount of the first stack area reference address SP1 is the same every time. Accordingly, the stack pointer at the time immediately after the main CPU 62x executes the storage process (step S11102) and the first clear process (step S11102-2) and starts the execution of the second program 63p2 (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47). The first stack area reference address SP1 stored in (SP) has the same address value every time.

  Then, the fixed value stored in the stack pointer (SP) in the return process A (step S11108a) of this aspect ends the storage process (step S11102) and the first clear process (step S110102-2), and the second program 63p2 Is set to the same address value as the address value stored in the stack pointer every time immediately after the start of execution (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47). As a result, even if the save process 1 (step S11103 in FIG. 46) described above is omitted, the value of the stack pointer (SP) is stored in the storage process (step S11102) and the second process by the return process A (step S11108a) of this aspect. It is possible to return to the value at the time point (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47) immediately after the 1 clear process (step S110102-2) is finished and the execution of the second program 63p2 is started.

  The main CPU 62x ends the process of step S11108a described above, ends the execution of the second program 63p2, starts executing the first program 63p1, and proceeds to step S11109.

  In step S11109, the main CPU 62x executes the changing process by executing the changing program included in the first program. In the changing process, the values of the A register and the F register are changed to the values stored in the first stack area 64b1 by the storing process (step S11102) by the pop instruction (POP). At this time, the values of the A register and the F register are changed to the values stored in the first stack area 64b1 by the storage process (step S11102) by one pop instruction (POP AF) using a special code. At this time, even if the value of the F register is changed after the storage process (step S11102) is performed, the value of the F register can be changed to the same value as that immediately after the game progress process is finished. . After executing the process of step S11109, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

  As described above, according to this aspect, in addition to the effects shown in aspects 74 and 75 described above, the following effects can be achieved.

  According to this aspect, the first clear process (step S11102-2 in FIG. 48) is performed by the first program 63p1, and the second clear process (step S11107a in FIG. 48) is performed by the second program 63p2. Without executing the save process 3 (step S11105 in FIG. 47) and the return process 1 (step S11107 in FIG. 47), the register value at the time immediately before the start of the execution of the second program 63p2 and the second program 63p2 The register value at the time immediately after the end of execution can be matched. Therefore, when returning from the second program 63p2 to the first program 63p1, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems due to changes in the register values used in the first program 63p1. Since the saving process 3 and the restoring process 1 described above can be omitted, the storage capacity of the second data storage area 64a2 required in the saving process 3 and the restoring process 1 can be reduced.

  Further, in this aspect, in one timer interrupt process, the first clear process is performed after all the various processes included in the game progress process (step S11101 in FIG. 48) are completed, and after the first clear process, Since the game progress process is not performed, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem in the game progress process by setting the register value to 0 in the first clear process.

<Aspect 77>
In the storage process in step S11102 of the above aspect 74, aspect 75, and aspect 76, the value of the specific register (A register, F register) may be stored in the first data storage area 64a1 by a load instruction. In this case, in the change process of step S11109, the value of the specific register (A register, F register) may be changed to the value stored in the first data storage area 64a1 by the load instruction. Further, the specific register that is the target of the storage process in step S11102 and the change process in step S11109 may be configured to include only the F register.

  Further, in the above aspect 74, the execution of the game progress process (step S11101 in FIG. 46) by the first program 63p1 is interrupted in the middle, interrupted from the storage process in step S11102 to the change process in step S11109, and then interrupted. It is good also as a structure which restarts implementation of the game progress process which has been performed.

  In addition, in the above aspect 76, the first clear process (step S110102-2) may be performed after the game progress process (step S11101) and before the storage process (step S11102). . Even with such a configuration, the same effects as those of the above aspect 76 can be obtained.

<Aspect 78>
Among the above modes, in the configuration capable of executing the setting change mode, various modes can be adopted as a method for starting the pachinko machine 10 as the setting change mode and an operation method in the setting change mode. This will be specifically described below.

  In this aspect, the main control board 61 located on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the setting change keyhole and the RAM clear button described above, and is not provided with the setting change button described above. . When the administrator who manages the pachinko machine 10 changes the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10, first, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. Then, the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10 are opened, and a setting change key is inserted into the setting change key hole. Then, it is assumed that the inserted key is turned to the setting change side (for example, turned clockwise). In this state, if the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM clear button is pressed, the pachinko machine 10 is activated as a setting change mode.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to this aspect is activated as a setting change mode when all of the following conditions 1 to 3 are satisfied when the power is turned on.
Condition 1: The inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are in an open state. Condition 2: The key hole for setting change is located on the setting changing side. Condition 3: The RAM clear button is pressed. When the machine 10 is turned on, if the condition 3 is satisfied but either of the conditions 1 and 2 is not satisfied, the pachinko machine 10 does not start in the setting change mode and the main RAM 64 is initialized. Execute the process to convert.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is activated as the setting change mode, information (setting information) indicating the current lottery setting is displayed on the information display unit 45z described above. For example, when the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is “lottery setting 1”, “1” is displayed on the information display unit 45z. Then, every time the administrator presses the RAM clear button, the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z is “1” → “2” → “3” → “4” → “5” → “6” → “ It is switched in the order of “1” → “2”.

  In a state where the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z is a value desired by the administrator, the administrator enters a game ball into a predetermined entrance (for example, the out entrance 43) and enters the predetermined entrance When the detection sensor (for example, the discharge passage detection sensor 44h) detects the game ball, the change to the lottery setting corresponding to the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z is confirmed. Specifically, for example, when the game ball is detected by the discharge passage detection sensor 44h in a state where “6” is displayed as the setting information on the information display unit 45z, the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is “lottery setting”. 6 ”. When the administrator turns the setting change key from the setting change side to the original position, the pachinko machine 10 ends the setting change mode.

  Thus, according to this aspect, since the setting change button can be omitted, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Moreover, according to this aspect, when changing the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10, since it is necessary to make the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 open, for example, the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. Even if an unauthorized person (hereinafter also referred to as an unauthorized person) attempts to illegally change the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10, there is no means for opening the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14. As long as the lottery settings cannot be changed. Therefore, the security of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Even if an unauthorized person can open the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14, a warning is given from the speaker 46 of the pachinko machine 10 when the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are opened. Since a sound and a warning sound (for example, “the door is open”) are output, the administrator can easily notice a situation where an unauthorized person is changing the lottery setting. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a change in the lottery setting by an unauthorized person.

  In this aspect, the pachinko machine 10 is activated as the setting change mode that both the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are in the open state, but either the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is activated. It may be one of the conditions that the pachinko machine 10 is activated as the setting change mode that either one is in the open state.

  Further, in this aspect, the detection of the game ball by the discharge passage detection sensor 44h is adopted as a condition for confirming the change of the lottery setting. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the detection of the game ball by another entrance detection sensor is selected by lottery. You may employ | adopt as a condition which confirms the change of a setting. For example, as a condition for confirming the change of the lottery setting, detection of a game ball by the first winning opening detection sensor 44d may be employed. The first winning opening detection sensor 44d is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first winning opening 32a, which is a general winning opening.

  Further, in this aspect, every time the administrator presses the RAM clear button in the setting change mode, the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z is “1” → “2” → “3” → “4” → “ 5 ”→“ 6 ”→“ 1 ”→“ 2 ”... However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, a setting change button is provided separately from the RAM clear button. Each time the user presses the setting change button, the setting information displayed on the information display section 45z is “1” → “2” → “3” → “4” → “5” → “6” → “1 It is good also as a structure switched in order of "->" 2 "....

  Further, in this aspect, the configuration is provided with the keyhole for changing the setting, but the configuration may not be provided with the keyhole for changing the setting. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to be activated as a setting change mode when the conditions 1 and 3 are satisfied when the power is turned on. In addition, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 satisfies the above conditions 1 and 3 when the power is turned on, is the pachinko machine 10 activated as a setting change mode or executed a RAM clear process for initializing the main RAM 64? It is good also as a structure which performs the selection mode which makes an administrator select. In the selection mode, the RAM clear button is pressed to select whether to start the setting change mode or to execute the RAM clear process, and the selection is confirmed by pressing the RAM clear button for a predetermined time. Also good. In the selection mode, the setting is made only when a game ball is entered into a predetermined entrance (for example, the outlet 43) and a predetermined entrance detection sensor (for example, the discharge passage detection sensor 44h) is detected. It is good also as a structure which can select starting as a change mode. Even if it is such a structure, it can suppress that persons other than an administrator change the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 illegally.

<Aspect 79>
Of the above-described aspects, in the configuration capable of executing the setting change mode, the configuration change mode may be configured to notify that the setting change mode is in progress. This will be specifically described below.

  In this aspect, when starting the setting change mode, main controller 60 transmits a setting change mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has been started, to sound emission control device 90.

  When receiving the setting change mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 outputs a sound indicating that the setting change mode is in effect from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, sound such as “in the setting change mode” is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. In addition, when receiving the setting change mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the symbol display device 41 to display information indicating that it is in the setting change mode. Specifically, for example, the sound emission control device 90 transmits a command for causing the symbol display device 41 to display a character string such as “in setting change mode” to the display control device 100, and the display that has received the command. The control device 100 causes the symbol display device 41 to display a character string such as “in the setting change mode”. In addition, when receiving the setting change mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 controls the various lamps 47 so as to blink repeatedly by alternately turning on and off at the maximum luminance.

  When the main control device 60 ends the setting change mode, the main control device 60 transmits a setting change mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has ended, to the sound emission control device 90. When receiving the setting change mode end command, the sound emission control device 90 ends the various controls for notifying that the setting change mode is in progress.

  Thus, according to this aspect, since the speaker 46, the symbol display device 41, and the various lamps 47 are notified that the setting change mode is being performed, the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 is in the setting change mode. It can be easily recognized. Further, even if an unauthorized person illegally shifts the pachinko machine 10 to the setting change mode, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the speaker 46 or the symbol display device 41 that the pachinko machine 10 is in the setting change mode. Therefore, surrounding players and managers can notice that the pachinko machine 10 is in the setting change mode by an unauthorized person. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress the change of the lottery setting by an unauthorized person.

  Furthermore, when starting the setting change mode, main controller 60 transmits information indicating that the setting change mode has started to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. The hall computer that has received the information indicating that the setting change mode has started displays the information of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode on the management screen. Then, when the setting change mode is ended, main controller 60 transmits information indicating that the setting change mode is ended to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal.

  According to such a configuration, even if the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 is not in the vicinity of the pachinko machine 10, the presence of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode is indicated by the management screen by the hall computer. It becomes possible to recognize. Therefore, for example, even if the pachinko machine 10 is in the setting change mode by an unauthorized person, the administrator can confirm that the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode exists by using the management screen by the hall computer. Can be recognized. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress the change of the lottery setting by an unauthorized person.

<Aspect 80>
Among the above aspects, in the configuration capable of executing the setting change mode, when the lottery setting is changed in the setting change mode, among the information stored in the main RAM 64 after the setting change mode ends, It is good also as a structure initialized except information regarding a game state. This will be specifically described below.

  In this mode, when the lottery setting is changed in the setting change mode, the main side RAM 64 is initialized except for information relating to the gaming state, and the setting change mode is terminated without changing the lottery setting in the setting change mode. In this case, the main-side RAM 64 is not initialized and the game progress mode is entered in which the game can proceed. In addition, in this aspect, “information about the gaming state” that is not initialized is a flag indicating whether the state of the high probability mode flag, the state of the high frequency support mode flag, or the open / close execution mode (during jackpot). It is a state.

  Thus, according to this aspect, when the lottery setting is changed in the setting change mode, the main side RAM 64 is initialized, so the information stored in the main side RAM 64 after the lottery setting is changed, and the lottery It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem in the progress of the game due to inconsistency with the information stored in the main RAM 64 before the setting is changed.

  Furthermore, according to this aspect, even when the lottery setting is changed in the setting change mode and the main RAM 64 is initialized, the information related to the gaming state among the information stored in the main RAM 64 is erased. Therefore, for example, it is possible to change the lottery setting in the pachinko machine 10 while maintaining a gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In this aspect, the main-side RAM 64 is initialized after the end of the setting change mode. However, when an operation for starting the setting change mode when the pachinko machine 10 is turned off is accepted, the setting change mode is set. Before starting, it is good also as a structure which initializes main side RAM64 except the information regarding a game state. Even with such a configuration, inconsistency occurs between the information stored in the main RAM 64 after the lottery setting is changed and the information stored in the main RAM 64 before the lottery setting is changed, It is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems in the progress of the game.

  Further, in this aspect, when the main RAM 64 is initialized, the information relating to the gaming state is not erased, but all information (including information relating to the gaming state) stored in the main RAM 64 is initialized. It is good also as composition to do.

  Further, the “information regarding gaming state” that is not initialized is not limited to the above, and may include, for example, holding information.

<Aspect 81>
Of the above aspects, in the configuration in which the setting change mode can be executed, the information stored in the main RAM 64 is inconsistent due to noise or the like, and the game proceeds when the main RAM 64 is initialized. Before returning to the possible game progress mode, it is good also as a structure which transfers to setting change mode. This will be specifically described below.

  In this aspect, the main control device 60 executes a monitoring process for monitoring whether or not an abnormality such as inconsistency occurs in the information stored in the main RAM 64 in the timer interrupt process. Specifically, for example, in the monitoring process, it is monitored whether values in a range that should not be stored in each area of the main RAM 64 are stored. If it is determined in the monitoring process that an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 64, the process relating to the progress of the game is stopped and the main RAM 64 is forcibly initialized. Then, after the initialization of the main RAM 64 is completed, the main control device 60 shifts to the above-described setting change mode before shifting to the game progress mode in which the game can proceed. The cause of the abnormality such as inconsistency in the information stored in the main RAM 64 is, for example, noise such as electromagnetic waves, or a player having an unauthorized intention brought a magnet or the like close to the pachinko machine 10. Etc.

  And if it is set as the structure which alert | reports that the pachinko machine 10 is in setting change mode similarly to the aspect 79 mentioned above, the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 will be that the said pachinko machine 10 shifted to setting change mode. You can notice. And an administrator determines the lottery setting of the said pachinko machine 10 in setting change mode, and the said pachinko machine 10 transfers to game progress mode after that.

  The reason for this configuration will be described. When the main RAM 64 is forcibly initialized due to noise or the like, the lottery setting information is also rewritten with setting information different from the setting information originally intended by the administrator. there is a possibility. If the lottery setting information is not initialized (not changed) even when the main RAM 64 is initialized, the setting information may be maintained different from the setting information originally intended by the administrator. is there. Therefore, as in this aspect, when the main RAM 64 is forcibly initialized due to noise or the like, the mode is changed to the setting change mode before returning to the game progress mode in which the game can proceed. Then, the administrator can correct the lottery setting information to the originally intended setting information before the pachinko machine 10 returns to the game progress mode.

  Furthermore, in this aspect, when the main RAM 64 is forcibly initialized due to noise or the like, the above-described information regarding the gaming state may not be initialized. According to such a configuration, even if the main RAM 64 is forcibly initialized due to noise or the like, the information regarding the gaming state is not initialized (not erased), so the player can play the game The game can be resumed while maintaining the state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the forced initialization of the main RAM 64 due to noise or the like.

  In this aspect, the configuration is changed to the setting change mode after the initialization of the main RAM 64, but the setting change mode is not changed after the initialization of the main RAM 64, and the lottery setting is changed to the initial value (for example, “lottery setting”). It is good also as a structure which transfers to the game progress mode which can advance a game after setting to 1 ").

  Further, in this aspect, when the main side RAM 64 is initialized, the information about the gaming state is not erased. However, when the main side RAM 64 is initialized, the information about the gaming state may be erased.

<Aspect 82>
Of the above-described aspects, in the configuration capable of executing the setting change mode, it may be configured to notify whether the lottery setting has been changed or not changed in the setting change mode. This will be specifically described below.

  In this aspect, when the lottery setting is changed in the setting change mode, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 outputs a sound indicating that the lottery setting has been changed from the speaker 46, and the lottery setting is changed. By displaying a character string indicating that the lottery has been made on the symbol display device 41, it is notified that the lottery setting has been changed.

  Specifically, for example, when the main control device 60 shifts to the setting change mode, the main lottery setting information is saved in a predetermined area of the main RAM 64. Then, the setting information of the lottery setting newly determined in the setting change mode is compared with the setting information of the lottery setting before the change that has been saved, and if the setting information is different, the lottery setting A setting change command, which is a command indicating that has been changed, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90.

  When receiving the setting change command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the lottery setting has been changed. Specifically, for example, a sound such as “the lottery setting has been changed” is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. In addition, when receiving the setting change command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the symbol display device 41 to display information indicating that the lottery setting has been changed. Specifically, for example, the sound emission control device 90 transmits a command for causing the symbol display device 41 to display a character string such as “the lottery setting has been changed”, and receives the command. The displayed control device 100 causes the symbol display device 41 to display a character string such as “the lottery setting has been changed”. In addition, when receiving the setting change command, the sound emission control device 90 controls the various lamps 47 so as to blink alternately by turning on and off at the maximum brightness.

  On the other hand, when the setting change mode is ended while the lottery setting is maintained without being changed, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 transmits a sound indicating that the lottery setting has been maintained without changing the speaker. 46, and a character string suggesting that the lottery setting has been maintained without being changed is displayed on the symbol display device 41 to notify that the lottery setting has been maintained without being changed.

  Specifically, for example, when the main control device 60 shifts to the setting change mode, the main lottery setting information is saved in a predetermined area of the main RAM 64. Then, the setting information of the lottery setting newly determined in the setting change mode is compared with the setting information of the lottery setting before change that has been saved, and if these setting information matches, the lottery A setting maintenance command, which is a command indicating that the setting has been maintained without being changed, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90.

  When receiving the setting maintenance command, the voice light emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a voice suggesting that the lottery setting has been maintained without being changed. Specifically, for example, a sound such as “the lottery setting was not changed” is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. In addition, when receiving the setting maintenance command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the symbol display device 41 to display information suggesting that the lottery setting has been maintained without being changed. Specifically, for example, the sound emission control device 90 transmits a command for causing the symbol display device 41 to display a character string such as “the lottery setting was not changed” to the display control device 100, and the command is displayed. The received display control device 100 causes the symbol display device 41 to display a character string such as “the lottery setting was not changed”. In addition, when receiving the setting maintenance command, the sound emission control device 90 controls the various lamps 47 to be lit instead of blinking.

  Thus, according to this aspect, when the lottery setting is changed in the setting change mode, the fact that the lottery setting has been changed is notified, so that the administrator or the player can check whether the lottery setting has been changed. Can be confirmed.

  In particular, in the above-described aspect 81, in the setting change mode after the forced initialization of the main RAM 64 due to noise or the like, a player who has played a game on the pachinko machine 10 has a lottery setting set by the administrator. It is assumed that it will be a suspicion whether it has been changed. However, according to this aspect, when the lottery setting is changed, the fact that the lottery setting has been changed is notified, so that the player can confirm whether or not the lottery setting has been changed. More specifically, it is possible to make the player know only whether or not the lottery setting has been changed in the setting change mode without grasping what setting information the current lottery setting is. . As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the player must restart the game with an uneasy feeling without knowing whether or not the lottery setting has been changed by the manager.

  In this aspect, when the lottery setting is not changed, the fact that the lottery setting is maintained without being changed is notified. However, when the lottery setting is not changed, nothing is notified. It is good also as a structure which does not carry out, or it is good also as a structure which alert | reports the aspect different from the case where a lottery setting is changed like "it ends setting change mode." Even in such a configuration, the player can determine that the lottery setting has not been changed when there is no notification such as “the lottery setting has been changed”, so the player can play the game with an uneasy feeling. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that must be resumed.

<Aspect 83>
In the aspect 82, the main control device 60 may be configured to include the changed lottery setting setting information in the setting change command that is a command indicating that the lottery setting has been changed. Then, each time the sound emission control device 90 receives a setting change command including setting information for the lottery setting after the change, the setting information for the lottery setting after the change is sequentially stored in a RAM serving as a storage unit included in the sound emission control device 90. It is good also as composition to do. And the audio | voice light emission control apparatus 90 is good also as a structure which displays the log | history of a change of a lottery setting on the symbol display apparatus 41, when predetermined operation is received from the administrator of the pachinko machine 10, etc. FIG.

  According to such a configuration, the history of changes in the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 can be stored without using the limited storage capacity of the main side RAM 64 of the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10. The administrator of the pachinko machine 10 can easily confirm how the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 has been operated by the change history of the lottery setting displayed on the symbol display device 41. .

<Aspect 84>
Of the above aspects, in the configuration capable of executing the setting change mode, the lottery setting cannot be changed, but the administrator can check the current lottery setting. Good. This will be specifically described below.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to this aspect, when a specific operation is executed under a specific condition, enters a game stop state in which a game cannot be progressed, and then shifts to a setting confirmation mode.

In this embodiment, the specific condition refers to a state where all of the following conditions are satisfied.
Condition 1: The special symbol is not changing in the special symbol unit 37. Condition 2: The normal symbol is not changing in the normal symbol unit 38. Condition 3: The variable winning device 36 as the special electric accessory is not operating. Condition 4: The electric accessory 34a as a normal electric accessory is not operating. Condition 5: A predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) has elapsed since the last game ball was fired. Below is a state where even if the progress of the game is stopped (interrupted), the result of the game is not affected.

  In this embodiment, the specific operation is an operation of pressing a RAM clear button provided on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  That is, when the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 according to this aspect detects that the RAM clear button has been pressed during the game progress mode in which the game can proceed, the above-described specific conditions are satisfied. If it is determined whether or not the above-described specific condition is satisfied, the setting confirmation mode is entered. When it is detected that the RAM clear button has not been pressed again, the setting confirmation mode is terminated and the game progress mode is restored to allow the game to proceed.

  While in the setting confirmation mode, main controller 60 executes random number update processing for updating the jackpot random number counter and the like and power supply monitoring processing, but performs other processing necessary for the progress of the game (various input in timer interrupt processing). The ball processing or the like is not executed and the game is stopped (the game cannot be progressed), and setting information indicating the current lottery setting is displayed on the information display unit 45z. For example, when the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is “lottery setting 1”, “1” is displayed on the information display unit 45z.

  In addition, during the game progress mode, regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery or the result of the electric player opening lottery, the accessory that always keeps a certain operation (predetermined operation) (hereinafter also referred to as a constantly operating agent) In the pachinko machine 10 having the above, the main control device 60 continues the operation of the always-operating accessory as it is even when the game progress mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode. Specifically, the main control device 60 is configured to continuously execute the control processing of the operating accessory in addition to the random number update processing and the power supply monitoring processing after shifting to the setting confirmation mode. When the main control device 60 ends the setting confirmation mode and returns to the game progress mode in which the game can proceed, the main control device 60 resumes the execution of other processes necessary for the progress of the game that has been avoided. To do.

  According to such a configuration, even when the game progress mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode and when the game returns to the game progress mode from the setting confirmation mode, the operation of the constantly operating accessory is not stopped or changed. For example, it is possible to suppress a player from illegally obtaining a favorable result by launching a game ball aiming at a timing at which the operation of an always-moving accessory stops or changes. Can do.

  In addition, in this mode, the operation of the always-operating accessory is continuously continued even during the setting confirmation mode. However, the operation of the always-acting accessory is temporarily stopped at the timing when the game progress mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode. The operation of the always-operating accessory that has been stopped at the timing when the setting confirmation mode is returned to the game progress mode may be resumed. According to such a configuration, the processing can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the operation of the always-operating accessory is continued. In addition, it is possible to ensure that the actions of the always-operating accessory are continuously connected during the game progress mode in which the game can proceed. In addition, according to such a configuration, when returning from the setting confirmation mode to the game progress mode, the operation of the always-operating accessory is resumed from the same state as that at the timing when the game progress mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, when returning from the setting confirmation mode to the game progress mode, the operation tool is always operated from a state different from the state at the timing when the game progress mode is switched to the setting confirmation mode (for example, a disadvantageous state or advantageous state for the player). Therefore, it is possible to avoid that the game must be resumed from a state different from the state in which the player has stopped the game.

  Further, in this aspect, the operation of pressing the RAM clear button is employed as the specific operation for shifting to the setting confirmation mode, but various operations can be employed as the specific operation. For example, as the specific operation, an operation of inserting a setting change key into the setting change keyhole and turning it to the setting change side may be adopted. According to such a configuration, since the setting change key is required to confirm the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10, a person who does not have the setting change key sets the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. It can suppress that it can confirm.

<Aspect 85>
In the above aspect 84, the operation of the constantly operating accessory is continued as it is even during the setting confirmation mode. However, when the operation confirming mode is shifted to, the constantly operating accessory is shifted to a predetermined initial state ( Alternatively, the operation may be stopped after moving to the initial position. This will be specifically described below.

  When the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 according to this aspect shifts from the game progress mode to the setting confirmation mode, the always-operating accessory until the always-operating accessory shifts to the initial state (or moves to the initial position). Continue the control process. Then, when the main control device 60 detects that the always-operating accessory has shifted to the initial state (or moved to the initial position), the main control device 60 stops the control processing of the always-acting accessory and performs the operation of the always-operating accessory. Stop. After that, when the main control device 60 ends the setting confirmation mode and returns to the game progress mode in which the game can proceed, the main control device 60 is necessary for the control process of the always-operating accessory and the progress of the game that has been avoided. Resume execution of other processing.

  When the main controller 60 returns from the setting confirmation mode to the game progress mode before detecting that the always-operating accessory has shifted to the initial state (or moved to the initial position), the always-operating accessory The control process is continued as it is. That is, in this aspect, the constantly operating accessory is configured not to stop the operation in a state other than the initial state (or a position other than the initial position).

  According to such a configuration, for example, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a malfunction in an always-acting accessory that may cause a malfunction when the operation is stopped in a state other than the initial state (or a position other than the initial position). Can do.

<Aspect 86>
Of each of the above aspects, in the configuration capable of executing the setting confirmation mode, the configuration confirmation mode may be notified during the setting confirmation mode. This will be specifically described below.

  In this aspect, when starting the setting confirmation mode, main controller 60 transmits a setting confirmation mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode has been started, to sound emission control device 90.

  When receiving the setting confirmation mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that it is in the setting confirmation mode. Specifically, for example, a sound such as “in the setting confirmation mode” is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. In addition, when receiving the setting confirmation mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the symbol display device 41 to display information indicating that it is in the setting confirmation mode. Specifically, for example, the sound emission control device 90 transmits a command for causing the symbol display device 41 to display a character string such as “in setting confirmation mode” to the display control device 100, and the display that has received the command. The control device 100 causes the symbol display device 41 to display a character string such as “in setting confirmation mode”. In addition, when receiving the setting confirmation mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 controls the various lamps 47 so as to blink repeatedly by alternately turning on and off at the maximum luminance.

  When the main controller 60 ends the setting confirmation mode, the main controller 60 transmits a setting confirmation mode end command, which is a command indicating the end of the setting confirmation mode, to the sound emission controller 90. When receiving the setting confirmation mode end command, the sound emission control device 90 ends the various controls for notifying that the above-described setting confirmation mode is in progress.

  Thus, according to this aspect, since it is notified by the speaker 46, the symbol display device 41, and various lamps 47 that it is in the setting confirmation mode, the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 is in the setting confirmation mode. It can be easily recognized. Further, even if an unauthorized person illegally shifts the pachinko machine 10 to the setting confirmation mode, the pachinko machine 10 indicates that it is in the setting confirmation mode, such as the speaker 46, the symbol display device 41, and various types. Since the notification is given by the lamp 47, surrounding players and managers can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the setting confirmation mode by an unauthorized person. Therefore, confirmation of the lottery setting by an unauthorized person can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, when starting the setting confirmation mode, main controller 60 transmits information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has been started to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. The hall computer that has received the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has been started displays the information of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode on the management screen. Then, when the setting check mode is ended, main controller 60 transmits information indicating that the setting check mode is ended to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal.

  According to such a configuration, even if the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 is not in the vicinity of the pachinko machine 10, the presence of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode is indicated by the management screen by the hall computer. It becomes possible to recognize. Therefore, for example, even when the pachinko machine 10 is in the setting confirmation mode by an unauthorized person, the administrator can confirm that the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode exists by using the management screen by the hall computer. Can be recognized. Therefore, confirmation of the lottery setting by an unauthorized person can be suppressed.

<Aspect 87>
Of the above aspects, in the configuration capable of executing the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the configuration change mode and the setting confirmation mode can only be executed after the pachinko machine 10 is once powered off. Good. That is, a configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 executes the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when a predetermined operation is performed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily turned off and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. It is good. This will be specifically described below.

  The “setting change keyhole” and “setting change key” in each of the above modes are not limited to the case of shifting to the setting change mode for changing the lottery setting in this mode and the mode described below. Since it is also used when shifting to the setting confirmation mode for confirming the setting, it is also simply referred to as “setting keyhole” and “setting key”, respectively.

  In this aspect, the main control board 61 located on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a power switch, a RAM clear button, a setting keyhole, a setting change button, and an information display section 45z. ing. After the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect is turned on by operating the power switch and the execution of the game progress mode in which the game can proceed is started, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is once turned off. Otherwise, it is configured not to be able to shift to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is configured to be executed.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect executes the setting change mode when all of the following conditions A1 to A3 are satisfied when the power is turned on (ON).
Condition A1: The inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are in an open state. Condition A2: The setting key is inserted into the setting keyhole and is positioned on the ON side. Condition A3: The RAM clear button is pressed. What

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to this aspect executes the setting confirmation mode when all of the following conditions B1 to B3 are satisfied when the power is turned on (ON).
Condition B1: The inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are in an open state Condition B2: A setting key is inserted into the setting keyhole and is positioned on the ON side Condition B3: The RAM clear button is pressed Not

  Hereinafter, after the manager of the pachinko machine 10 describes an example of a work process for shifting the pachinko machine 10 after the execution of the game progress mode is started to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the pachinko machine 10 An example of the process executed at 10 will be described.

  FIG. 49 is a process diagram showing an operation process when the administrator changes the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the process W101, the manager inserts a key into the cylinder lock 17 of the pachinko machine 10 whose lottery setting is to be changed, rotates it to the open side, and rotates the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 to be in the open state. At the same time, the front door frame 14 is rotated with respect to the inner frame 13 to be opened. By rotating the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11, the administrator can access various operation units provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Next, it progresses to process W102 and an administrator operates the power switch provided in the back side of the said pachinko machine 10, and turns off a power supply. Next, the process proceeds to step W103.

  In step W103, the administrator inserts a setting key into a setting key hole provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and turns it to the setting change side (hereinafter also referred to as the ON side). Next, the process proceeds to Step W104, and the administrator operates the power switch while pressing the RAM clear button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10. If it does so, the pachinko machine 10 will transfer to setting change mode after starting (process W105), and the setting information of the present lottery setting will be displayed on the information display part 45z (process W106). Specifically, for example, when the current setting information of the pachinko machine 10 is “1”, “1” is lit and displayed on the information display unit 45z. Next, the process proceeds to step W107.

  In step W107, the administrator presses a setting change button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 to change the setting information. Specifically, for example, every time the administrator presses the setting change button, the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z is “1” → “2” → “3” → “4” → “5”. Since switching is performed in the order of “6” → “1” → “2”..., The administrator presses the setting change button until the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z becomes the desired setting information. . Next, the process proceeds to step W108.

  In step W108, the administrator confirms that the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z is the desired setting information, and then presses the RAM clear button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. To confirm the changed setting information. Next, in step W109, the administrator returns the setting key to the OFF side, and removes the key from the setting key hole. If it does so, the pachinko machine 10 will transfer to the game progress mode which can advance a game (process W110), and game history information will be displayed on the information display part 45z (process W111). Next, the process proceeds to step W112, and the manager removes the key from the cylinder lock 17 with the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 being closed. Through such a process, the administrator can change the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10.

  FIG. 50 is a process diagram showing an operation process when the administrator confirms the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10.

  In step W201, the administrator inserts a key into the cylinder lock 17 of the pachinko machine 10 whose lottery setting is to be confirmed and turns it to the open side, and rotates the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 to bring it into the open state. At the same time, the front door frame 14 is rotated with respect to the inner frame 13 to be opened. By rotating the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11, the administrator can access various operation units provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Next, it progresses to process W202 and the administrator operates the power switch provided in the back side of the said pachinko machine 10, and turns off a power supply. Next, the process proceeds to step W203.

  In step W203, the administrator inserts a setting key into a setting key hole provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and turns the key to the ON side. Next, the process proceeds to step W204, and the administrator operates the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10. If it does so, the pachinko machine 10 will transfer to the setting confirmation mode after starting (process W205), and the setting information of the present lottery setting will be displayed on the information display part 45z (process W206). Specifically, for example, when the current setting information of the pachinko machine 10 is “1”, “1” is displayed blinking on the information display unit 45z. The administrator can confirm the current setting information of the pachinko machine 10 by confirming the setting information blinking on the information display unit 45z. Next, the process proceeds to step W207.

  In step W207, after confirming the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z, the administrator returns the setting key to the OFF side and removes the key from the setting key hole. Then, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a game progress mode in which the game can proceed (process W208), and game history information is displayed on the information display unit 45z (process W209). Next, the process proceeds to step W <b> 210, and the manager removes the key from the cylinder lock 17 with the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 being closed. Through such a process, the administrator can check the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the process which the main side MPU62 (main side CPU62x) of the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect performs is demonstrated.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart illustrating a part of main processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the aspect 87 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on.

  In step S11201, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in advance in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the sub-side control devices (the sound emission control device 90, the display control device 100, the payout control device 70, etc.) are operable. In order to wait for the state to be reached, a wait process is executed for about 1 second, for example. Then, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11202, and an internal function register setting process is executed. Then, it progresses to step S11203 and performs the process for alert | reporting that the said pachinko machine 10 was turned on and started. Specifically, an activation command indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has been activated is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. When receiving the activation command, the sound emission control device 90 executes a process for notifying that the pachinko machine 10 has been activated. Specifically, for example, a sound such as “being activated” or a predetermined alarm sound is output from the speaker 46. After executing Step S11203, the process proceeds to Step S11204.

  In step S11204, it is determined whether the power recovery flag is ON.

  Here, the power recovery flag will be described. In this aspect, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or when a power failure occurs, various information (information indicating the game state, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main CPU 62x is mainly used. Retreat to a predetermined area of the side RAM 64. When the saving of these pieces of information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, a RAM determination value (for example, a checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64. Remember. Note that after the supply of power from the commercial power supply is cut off, the power supply is switched from a backup power supply such as a capacitor. Thus, the power recovery flag is a flag for identifying at the time of power-on whether or not information for returning to the state when the power was turned off last time is stored in the main RAM 64.

  If it is determined in step S11204 that the power recovery flag is ON (step S11204: YES), the process proceeds to step S11205, and the RAM determination value of the main RAM 64 is calculated. In this aspect, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM determination value. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11206, and whether or not the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) is normal, that is, the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) and the RAM determination value ( It is determined whether or not the checksum value matches. If it is determined in step S11206 that the RAM determination value is normal (step S11206: YES), the process proceeds to step S11208 described later.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11204 that the power recovery flag is not ON (step S11204: NO), and if it is determined in step S11206 that the RAM determination value is not normal (step S11206: NO). In step S11207, the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON. That is, the RAM abnormality flag is a flag that is turned on when the power recovery flag is OFF or when the power recovery flag is ON but the RAM determination value is not normal. Information stored in the main RAM 64 is stored in the RAM abnormality flag. It is a flag indicating that the state is not normal. After executing Step S11207, the process proceeds to Step S11208.

  In step S11208, it is determined whether the RAM clear button is ON. If it is determined in step S11208 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S11208: NO), the process proceeds to step S11209, and whether or not all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON. Determine. The frame opening switch is a switch that is turned on when the inner frame 13 is open with respect to the outer frame 11, and the door opening switch is a state where the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13. It is a switch that is sometimes turned on.

  If it is determined in step S11209 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step S11209: NO), the process proceeds to step S11210, and whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is ON. Determine whether.

  If it is determined in step S11210 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11210: NO), the process proceeds to step S11211, and a power recovery process for returning to the previous power-off state is executed. Specifically, in the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the main RAM 64 is written into the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the data saved in the main RAM 64 is restored to the register of the main CPU 62x. Then, the state of the register of the main CPU 62x is restored to the state before the power is shut off. After executing step S11211, the process proceeds to step S11212, and the power recovery flag of the main RAM 64 is turned OFF. After that, the process shifts to normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the interrupt permission setting, the interrupt prohibition setting, the random number update process, and the power supply monitoring process of the timer interrupt process described in each aspect described above are executed. By allowing the interrupt of the timer interrupt process and executing the above-described timer interrupt process, the game can proceed (the game progress mode is started).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11210 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11210: YES), the process proceeds to step S11213, and a RAM abnormality notification process is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command that is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. When receiving the RAM abnormality command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, a sound such as “RAM is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode” is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11213, the process proceeds to the normal game process described above. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the random number update process and the power supply monitoring process are executed, but other processes necessary for the progress of the game (for example, starting ball entrance) Processing, game times control processing, etc.) are not executed. Specifically, in this aspect, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the timer interrupt permission setting is not performed. Therefore, although it is apparently equivalent to the normal game progress mode, the player cannot advance the game. That is, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the game progress mode is not shifted. In this state, the administrator turns off the power of the pachinko machine 10 once, inserts the setting key into the setting keyhole and turns it on, and turns on the power while pressing the RAM clear button. The pachinko machine 10 may be activated in the setting change mode.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11209 described above that all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON (step S11209: YES), the process proceeds to step S11214, and the RAM abnormality flag is ON. It is determined whether or not there is.

  If it is determined in step S11214 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11214: NO), the process proceeds to step S11215, and a setting check process is executed. In the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), a process of displaying the current lottery setting setting information on the information display unit 45z is executed. That is, the setting confirmation mode is a mode in which an administrator or the like can confirm the current lottery setting setting information of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation mode) will be described later. After executing step S11215, the process proceeds to step S11216, where the power recovery process described above is executed to return to the previous power-off state. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11217, and the power recovery flag is turned OFF. After that, the process shifts to normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the interrupt permission setting, the interrupt prohibition setting, the random number update process, and the power supply monitoring process of the timer interrupt process described in each aspect described above are executed. By allowing the interrupt of the timer interrupt process and executing the above-described timer interrupt process, the game can proceed (the game progress mode is started).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11214 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11214: YES), the process proceeds to step S11218 to execute a RAM abnormality notification process. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command that is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. When receiving the RAM abnormality command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, a sound such as “RAM is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode” is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11218, the process proceeds to the normal game process described above. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the random number update process and the power supply monitoring process are executed, but other processes (for example, start-up) required for the progress of the game are performed. The entrance ball processing and game times control processing are not executed. Specifically, in this aspect, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the timer interrupt permission setting is not performed. Therefore, although it is apparently equivalent to the normal game progress mode, the player cannot advance the game. That is, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the game progress mode is not shifted. In this state, the administrator turns off the power of the pachinko machine 10 once, inserts the setting key into the setting keyhole and turns it on, and turns on the power while pressing the RAM clear button. The pachinko machine 10 may be activated in the setting change mode.

  If it is determined in step S11208 described above that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11208: YES), the process proceeds to step S11219, and all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON. Determine whether or not.

  If it is determined in step S11219 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step S11219: NO), the process proceeds to step S11220, and the above-described RAM abnormality flag is ON. It is determined whether or not. If it is determined in step S11220 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11220: NO), the process proceeds to step S11221.

  In step S11221, a first RAM clear process is executed. The first RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing to 0) the information stored in the main RAM 64 except for the lottery setting information. That is, when the first RAM clear process is executed, various flag information indicating various gaming states, various control information, and the like are erased, but the lottery setting information is not erased, and the setting information is maintained as it is. Further, in this aspect, in the first RAM clear process, a first RAM clear process execution command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. When receiving the first RAM clear process execution command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed. Specifically, for example, a sound such as “RAM cleared” is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11221, the process proceeds to the normal game process described above.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11220 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11220: YES), the process proceeds to step S11222 and RAM abnormality notification processing is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command that is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. When receiving the RAM abnormality command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, a sound such as “RAM is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode” is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11220, the process proceeds to the normal game process described above. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the random number update process and the power supply monitoring process are executed, but other processes (for example, start-up) required for the progress of the game are performed. The entrance ball processing and game times control processing are not executed. Specifically, in this aspect, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the timer interrupt permission setting is not performed. Therefore, although it is apparently equivalent to the normal game progress mode, the player cannot advance the game. That is, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the game progress mode is not shifted. In this state, the administrator turns off the power of the pachinko machine 10 once, inserts the setting key into the setting keyhole and turns it on, and turns on the power while pressing the RAM clear button. The pachinko machine 10 may be activated in the setting change mode.

  If it is determined in step S11219 that all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON (step S11219: YES), the process proceeds to step S11223, and whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON. Determine whether or not.

  If it is determined in step S11223 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11223: NO), the process proceeds to step S11224, and the first RAM clear process described above is executed. Then, it progresses to step S11225 and performs a setting change process. In the setting change process (setting change mode), a process of displaying the lottery setting setting information on the information display unit 45z is executed and a process of accepting a change of the lottery setting information is executed. That is, the setting change mode is a mode in which an administrator or the like can change the lottery setting setting information of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the setting change process (setting change mode) will be described later. After executing step S11225, the process proceeds to the normal game process described above.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11223 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11223: YES), the process proceeds to step S11226, and a RAM abnormality notification process is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command that is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. When receiving the RAM abnormality command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, a sound such as “RAM is abnormal” is output from the speaker 46. After executing Step S11226, the process proceeds to Step S11227.

  In step S11227, a second RAM clear process is executed. The second RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing to 0) all information including the lottery setting setting information among the information stored in the main RAM 64. That is, when the second RAM clear process is executed, the lottery setting information is deleted in addition to the various flag information indicating the gaming state and the various control information. Here, the reason why the second RAM clear process for erasing the setting information is executed instead of the first RAM clear process when the RAM abnormality flag is ON will be described. If the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the setting information stored in the main RAM 64 may not be normal. For example, the setting information may be overwritten by setting information not intended by the administrator due to noise or the like. This is because there is a possibility that numerical values outside the predetermined range may be stored although only numerical values within a predetermined range (for example, numerical values from 1 to 6) can be obtained. In the second RAM clear process of this aspect, “1” is stored as the initial value of the setting information after the setting information is erased. The RAM abnormality flag is also turned OFF by the second RAM clear process. Then, it progresses to step S11228 and performs a setting change process. Details of the setting change process (setting change mode) will be described later. After executing step S11228, the process proceeds to the normal game process described above.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart illustrating a setting change process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) according to the aspect 87 of the first embodiment. This setting change process is executed as a subroutine of steps S11225 and S11228 in FIG.

  In step S11301, a setting change notification start process is executed. In the setting change notification start process, a setting change mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has been started, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. When receiving the setting change mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 outputs a sound indicating that the setting change mode is in effect from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a sound such as “in the setting change mode. Please change the setting” is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. In addition, when receiving the setting change mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the symbol display device 41 to display information indicating that it is in the setting change mode. Specifically, for example, the sound emission control device 90 transmits a command for causing the symbol display device 41 to display a character string such as “in the setting change mode. Please change the setting” to the display control device 100. Then, the display control device 100 that has received the command causes the symbol display device 41 to display a character string such as “in the setting change mode. Please change the setting”. In addition, when receiving the setting change mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 controls the various lamps 47 so as to blink repeatedly by alternately turning on and off at the maximum luminance.

  Further, in the setting change notification start process, information indicating that the setting change mode has been started is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. The hall computer that has received the information indicating that the setting change mode has started displays the information of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode on the management screen. After executing Step S11301, the process proceeds to Step S11302.

  In step S11302, control for displaying the lottery setting setting information on the information display unit 45z is started. Specifically, the lottery setting information is displayed on the information display unit 45z. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11303, and it is determined whether or not the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In this aspect, since the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 has six levels from “1” to “6”, whether or not the setting information is a numerical value within the range from “1” to “6”. Determine. If it is determined in step S11303 that the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range (step S11303: YES), the process proceeds to step S11305. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S11303 that the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range (step S11303: NO), for example, when “0” or “7” is stored as the setting information, noise, or the like If information other than numerical values is stored in step S11304, the process advances to step S11304 to change the setting information to the initial value. In this aspect, “1” is stored as the initial value in the setting information. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11305.

  In step S11305, it is determined whether the RAM clear button has been pressed. If it is determined in step S11305 that the RAM clear button has not been pressed (step S11305: NO), the process advances to step S11306 to determine whether the setting change button has been pressed. If it is determined in step S11306 that the setting change button has been pressed (step S11306: YES), the process advances to step S11307 to update the lottery setting setting information. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical information stored as the setting information. However, when the setting change button is pressed in a situation where the numerical information stored as the setting information is “6”, the numerical information is updated to “1”. Thereafter, the process returns to step S11303 described above, and it is determined whether or not the updated setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11306 that the setting change button has not been pressed (step S11306: NO), the process returns to step S11303 described above without executing the process of step S11307, and the setting information is a predetermined value. It is determined whether the numerical value is within the range.

  If it is determined in step S11305 described above that the RAM clear button has been pressed (step S11305: YES), the process proceeds to step S11308, and it is determined whether or not the setting key is on the OFF side. If it is determined in step S11308 that the setting key is not on the OFF side (step S11308: NO), step S11308 is executed again. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11308 that the setting key is on the OFF side (step S11308: YES), the process proceeds to step S11309. That is, after the RAM clear button is pressed, the infinite loop is repeated until the setting key is turned off, and the process does not proceed to step S11309. When the setting key is turned off, the process proceeds to step S11309.

  In step S11309, the control for displaying the lottery setting setting information on the information display unit 45z ends. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11310.

  In step S11310, a setting change notification end process is executed. In the setting change notification end process, a setting change mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode is ended, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. When receiving the setting change mode end command, the sound emission control device 90 ends the various controls for notifying that the setting change mode is in progress.

  Further, in the setting change notification end process, information indicating that the setting change mode is ended is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. The hall computer that has received the information indicating that the setting change mode has ended displays information indicating that the setting change mode of the pachinko machine 10 has ended on the management screen. After executing step S11310, the setting change process is terminated. After executing the setting change notification end processing, the configuration information of the lottery setting after the change is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal, and the hall computer that has received the information displays the management screen on the management screen. It is good also as a structure which displays the setting information of the lottery setting after the change of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating a setting confirmation process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) according to the aspect 87 of the first embodiment. This setting confirmation process is executed as a subroutine of step S11215 of FIG.

  In step S11401, a setting confirmation notification start process is executed. In the setting confirmation notification start process, a setting confirmation mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode has been started, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. When receiving the setting confirmation mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that it is in the setting confirmation mode. Specifically, for example, a sound such as “in the setting confirmation mode” is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. In addition, when receiving the setting confirmation mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the symbol display device 41 to display information indicating that it is in the setting confirmation mode. Specifically, for example, the sound emission control device 90 transmits a command for causing the symbol display device 41 to display a character string such as “in setting confirmation mode” to the display control device 100, and the display that has received the command. The control device 100 causes the symbol display device 41 to display a character string such as “in setting confirmation mode”. In addition, when receiving the setting confirmation mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 controls the various lamps 47 so as to blink repeatedly by alternately turning on and off at the maximum luminance.

  Further, in the setting confirmation notification start process, information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has been started is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. The hall computer that has received the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has been started displays the information of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode on the management screen. After executing Step S11401, the process proceeds to Step S11402.

  In step S11402, control for displaying the lottery setting setting information on the information display unit 45z is started. Specifically, the lottery setting information is blinked and displayed on the information display unit 45z. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11403.

  In step S11403, it is determined whether the setting key is on the OFF side. If it is determined in step S11403 that the setting key is not OFF (step S11403: NO), step S11403 is executed again. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11403 that the setting key is on the OFF side (step S11403: YES), the process proceeds to step S11404. That is, the infinite loop is repeated until the setting key becomes OFF, and the process does not proceed to step S11404. When the setting key becomes OFF, the process proceeds to step S11404.

  In step S11404, the control for displaying the lottery setting setting information on the information display unit 45z ends. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11405.

  In step S11405, a setting confirmation notification end process is executed. In the setting confirmation notification end process, a setting confirmation mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode is ended, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. When receiving the setting confirmation mode end command, the sound emission control device 90 ends the various controls for notifying that the above-described setting confirmation mode is in progress.

  Further, in the setting confirmation notification end process, information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. The hall computer that has received the information indicating that the setting check mode has ended displays information indicating that the setting check mode of the pachinko machine 10 has ended on the management screen. After executing step S11405, the setting confirmation process is terminated.

  As described above, in this aspect, the pachinko machine 10 has all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch turned on when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and When the RAM clear switch is turned on, the setting change mode is executed. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are all turned on. When the RAM clear switch is OFF, the setting confirmation mode is executed. That is, in this aspect, the pachinko machine 10 that has already been started (for example, executing the game progress mode) cannot be shifted to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode while the power is on. In order to shift the activated pachinko machine 10 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the power of the pachinko machine 10 must be turned off and then turned on again while performing the above-described predetermined operation. It is configured as follows.

  Generally, in the game hall, the equipment layout is such that a person other than the administrator cannot operate the power switch provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, so that it has the purpose of obtaining illegal profits. Even if there is a person who changes or confirms the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter also referred to as an unauthorized person), an unauthorized person who is not an administrator can use a power supply provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. It is difficult to operate the switch. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized person from illegally shifting the pachinko machine 10 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Furthermore, in this aspect, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, a sound and an alarm sound indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has been activated are output from the speaker 46, so that an unauthorized person is not aware of the surroundings and is selected by lottery. Can be made more difficult to change or confirm. As a result, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized person from changing or confirming the lottery setting illegally.

  Furthermore, in this aspect, in order to shift the pachinko machine 10 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 need to be opened, so that unauthorized persons are not noticed by the surroundings. It is even more difficult to change or confirm the lottery setting. As a result, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized person from changing or confirming the lottery setting illegally.

  Further, in this aspect, during the start-up process from when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on until the execution of the game progress mode is started (the period during which the process from step S11201 to step S11228 in FIG. 51 is being executed) In the middle), the game history information is not displayed on the information display unit 45z, and the setting information of the lottery setting is displayed when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is executed. That is, during the start-up process, the game history information is not displayed on the information display unit 45z, and only the setting information for the lottery setting can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the manager from wondering whether the information displayed on the information display unit 45z is the lottery setting information or the game history information during the start-up process. It is possible to prevent the administrator from misinterpreting the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z as game history information.

  Furthermore, in this aspect, even when an operation for executing the setting confirmation mode is performed when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value of the main RAM 64 is normal, and the RAM determination is performed. If it is determined that the value is not normal, the setting confirmation mode is not executed, the main RAM 64 is informed of an abnormality, and the game is not shifted to the game progress mode in which the game can proceed. Therefore, the setting confirmation mode and the game progress mode are executed while leaving the possibility that the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 has an abnormal value not intended by the administrator. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, in this aspect, the operation for executing the setting change mode includes an operation of pressing the RAM clear button, and the pachinko machine 10 executes the RAM clear process ( The first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process) is executed. That is, in order to cause the pachinko machine 10 to execute the setting change mode, the administrator operates the RAM clear button, and the pachinko machine 10 also executes a RAM clear process when executing the setting change mode. In general, an administrator who manages the pachinko machine 10 recognizes that the RAM clear process is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM clear button is pressed. Therefore, according to the configuration of this aspect, when the administrator operates the RAM clear button to execute the setting change mode, not only the setting change mode is executed but also the RAM clear process is executed. It is possible to strongly recognize that it is done. As a result, for example, when the administrator wants to start the pachinko machine 10 while maintaining the gaming state such as the high probability mode and restart the game progress mode from the state when the power was previously turned off, that is, the pachinko machine 10 If the RAM clear process should not be executed at the time of startup, it can be ensured that the setting change mode accompanying the execution of the RAM clear process should not be executed.

  Furthermore, in this aspect, among the information stored in the main RAM 64, it is possible to execute a first RAM clear process that does not erase the lottery setting information and a second RAM clear process that erases the setting information. Of the information stored in the main-side RAM 64, the processing steps corresponding to both the processing steps to leave the setting information and delete other information and the processing steps to delete including the setting information Can be realized. For example, if the setting information is normal and maintained, and other information is a processing step that should be deleted, the first RAM clear process is executed, and the setting information becomes an abnormal value that is not intended by the administrator. In the case of a processing step that may be trapped, a configuration for executing the second RAM clear processing can be realized.

  Furthermore, in this aspect, when the pachinko machine 10 determines that the power recovery flag is not ON and the RAM determination value is not normal when the power is turned ON, the main RAM 64 is After notifying that there is an abnormality, the game does not shift to the game progress mode in which the game can proceed. Then, after turning off the power of the pachinko machine 10 and turning it on again, an operation for executing the setting change mode is performed and the setting change mode is not executed. It is configured not to execute a game progress mode in which progress is possible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game progress mode from being executed with the possibility that the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 has an abnormal value unintended by the administrator. it can.

  Furthermore, in this aspect, when executing the setting change mode, the RAM clear process is executed. Therefore, the information stored in the main RAM 64 after the lottery setting is changed and the main lottery setting before the lottery setting is changed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a malfunction in the progress of the game due to inconsistency with the information stored in the side RAM 64.

  In this aspect, the first RAM clear process is executed in step S11224 in FIG. 51 and then the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed in step S11225. However, instead of this configuration, a setting change process ( The first RAM clear process may be executed after executing the setting change mode. With such a configuration, various flag information indicating various game states and various control information stored in the main RAM 64 are deleted while maintaining the lottery setting setting information set by the setting change process. Can do. Further, when it is determined in step S11223 in FIG. 51 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON, the setting change process is performed after the first RAM clear process is executed after the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed. When the setting key is turned to the OFF side and removed from the setting key hole without changing the lottery setting (or without confirming the changed setting information) in (setting change mode), the first RAM clear process It is good also as a structure which transfers to game progress mode, without performing. According to such a configuration, the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed by turning on the power while pressing the RAM clear button while the setting key is accidentally turned to the ON side unintentionally. Even if it is a case, by not changing the setting information of the lottery setting (or not confirming the changed setting information), the execution of the first RAM clear process is avoided, and the game progresses from the state when the power is turned off last time. The mode can be resumed.

  Further, in this aspect, after the first RAM clear process is executed in step S11224 in FIG. 51, the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed in step S11225. It is good also as a structure which performs a setting change process (setting change mode) after performing. Even in such a configuration, after the lottery setting is erased by the second RAM clear process and the initial value (for example, “1”) is stored as the setting information, the lottery setting is changed to the desired setting information by the setting change process. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the game progress mode being executed while the lottery setting setting information is kept at the initial value (for example, “1”).

  Further, in this aspect, after the second RAM clear process is executed in step S11227 in FIG. 51, the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed in step S11228. However, instead of this configuration, a setting change process ( The first RAM clear process may be executed after executing the setting change mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to erase various information stored in the main RAM 64 determined to be abnormal while maintaining the lottery setting setting information set by the setting change process.

  Further, in this aspect, after the second RAM clear process is executed in step S11227 in FIG. 51, the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed in step S11228. Instead of this structure, the first RAM clear process is executed. It is good also as a structure which performs a setting change process (setting change mode) after performing. According to such a configuration, the lottery setting information is an abnormal value, and the lottery setting information is maintained at an abnormal value even after execution of the first RAM clear process. In addition, the setting information of the lottery setting can be reset to an appropriate value by the setting change process (setting change mode).

  Moreover, in this aspect, when it is determined in step S11210, step S11214, and step S11220 in FIG. 51 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the RAM abnormality notification process is executed and the game progress mode is not shifted. However, instead of this configuration, if it is determined in step S11210, step S11214, and step S11220 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON, after executing the RAM abnormality notification process, the second RAM clear process is executed and the lottery setting is performed. The setting information may be set to an initial value (eg, “1”), and then the game progress mode may be entered.

  Further, in this aspect, after executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) in step S11215 of FIG. 51, the power recovery process is performed in step S11216, and the power recovery flag is turned off in step S11217. Instead of this configuration, a configuration confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) may be performed after the power recovery process and the process of turning off the power recovery flag are performed.

  Further, in this aspect, the setting information is updated when the setting change button is pressed in step S11306 in FIG. 52, and the setting information is confirmed when the RAM clear button is pressed in step S11305. The operation for updating and confirming the setting information is not limited to this. For example, the setting information is updated when the RAM clear button is pressed, and the setting information is confirmed when the RAM clear button is continuously pressed for a predetermined time or more. A configuration may be adopted. According to this configuration, since the setting change button can be omitted, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. The setting information may be determined when the setting key is turned off, and the setting information is determined when a game ball is detected by a ball detection sensor provided at a predetermined ball entrance. It is good also as a structure.

  Further, in this aspect, the condition for executing the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is configured such that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are in the open state. It is not essential for the condition that the door frame 14 is in the open state. For example, it is included in the condition that the inner frame 13 is in the open state, and the condition that the front door frame 14 is in the open state is included in the condition. It is good also as a structure which is not included, and it is good also as a structure which is included in the said condition that it is included in the said condition that the front door frame 14 is an open state, and the inner frame 13 is an open state. Also, neither the inner frame 13 nor the front door frame 14 may be configured to be included in the conditions.

  Further, in this mode, the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z in the setting change mode is a display mode that lights up, and the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z in the setting check mode is a display mode that flashes. Although the display mode of the setting information in each mode is not limited to these, for example, the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z in the setting change mode is a flashing display mode and is in the setting confirmation mode. The setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z may be configured to be in a display mode that lights up.

  In addition, in this aspect, after the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are finished, the game progress mode is executed as it is, but instead of this configuration, after the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are finished, A predetermined operation for executing the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode by temporarily turning off the power of the pachinko machine 10 without shifting the game progress mode to the standby state where the game cannot proceed. It is good also as a structure which performs game progress mode, when a power supply is turned on without performing.

<Aspect 88>
In the above aspect 87, when the pachinko machine 10 determines that the power recovery flag is not ON and the RAM determination value is not normal when the power is turned on, the main RAM 64 is abnormal. However, instead of this configuration, when the power is turned on, the power recovery flag is not ON. When the determination is made and when it is determined that the RAM determination value is not normal, even if the operation for executing the setting change mode is not performed, it is notified that the main RAM 64 is abnormal. Then, it is good also as a structure which performs setting change mode and transfers to game progress mode after that. This will be specifically described below.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart illustrating a part of main processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) according to the aspect 88 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on.

  In step S11501, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in advance in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the sub-side control devices (the sound emission control device 90, the display control device 100, the payout control device 70, etc.) are operable. In order to wait for the state to be reached, a wait process is executed for about 1 second, for example. Then, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11502, and internal function register setting processing is executed. Then, it progresses to step S11503 and the process for alert | reporting that the said pachinko machine 10 was turned on and started is performed. Specifically, an activation command indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has been activated is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. When receiving the activation command, the sound emission control device 90 executes a process for notifying that the pachinko machine 10 has been activated. Specifically, for example, a sound such as “being activated” or a predetermined alarm sound is output from the speaker 46. After executing Step S11503, the process proceeds to Step S11504.

  In step S11504, it is determined whether the power recovery flag is ON.

  Here, the power recovery flag will be described. In this aspect, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or when a power failure occurs, various information (information indicating the game state, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main CPU 62x is mainly used. Retreat to a predetermined area of the side RAM 64. When the saving of these pieces of information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, a RAM determination value (for example, a checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64. Remember. Note that after the supply of power from the commercial power supply is cut off, the power supply is switched from a backup power supply such as a capacitor. Thus, the power recovery flag is a flag for identifying at the time of power-on whether or not information for returning to the state when the power was turned off last time is stored in the main RAM 64.

  If it is determined in step S11504 that the power recovery flag is ON (step S11504: YES), the process proceeds to step S11505, and the RAM determination value of the main RAM 64 is calculated. In this aspect, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM determination value. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11506, whether or not the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) is normal, that is, the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) and the RAM determination value stored in the main RAM 64 ( It is determined whether or not the checksum value matches. If it is determined in step S11506 that the RAM determination value is normal (step S11506: YES), the process proceeds to step S11507.

  In step S11507, it is determined whether the RAM clear button is ON. If it is determined in step S11507 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S11507: NO), the process proceeds to step S11508, and whether or not all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON. Determine. The frame opening switch is a switch that is turned on when the inner frame 13 is open with respect to the outer frame 11, and the door opening switch is a state where the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13. It is a switch that is sometimes turned on.

  If it is determined in step S11508 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step S11508: NO), the process proceeds to step S11509 to return to the previous power-off state. Execute power recovery processing. Specifically, in the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the main RAM 64 is written into the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the data saved in the main RAM 64 is restored to the register of the main CPU 62x. Then, the state of the register of the main CPU 62x is restored to the state before the power is shut off. After executing step S11509, the process proceeds to step S11510, and the power recovery flag of the main RAM 64 is turned OFF. After that, the process shifts to normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the interrupt permission setting, the interrupt prohibition setting, the random number update process, and the power supply monitoring process of the timer interrupt process described in each aspect described above are executed. By allowing the interrupt of the timer interrupt process and executing the above-described timer interrupt process, the game can proceed (the game progress mode is started).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11508 described above that all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON (step S11508: YES), the process proceeds to step S11511 to execute setting confirmation processing. . The details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) are the same as the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. After executing step S11511, the process proceeds to step S11512, where the power recovery process described above is executed to return to the previous power-off state. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11513, and the power recovery flag is turned OFF. After that, the process shifts to normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the interrupt permission setting, the interrupt prohibition setting, the random number update process, and the power supply monitoring process of the timer interrupt process described in each aspect described above are executed. By allowing the interrupt of the timer interrupt process and executing the above-described timer interrupt process, the game can proceed (the game progress mode is started).

  If it is determined in step S11507 described above that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11507: YES), the process proceeds to step S11514, where all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON. Determine whether or not.

  If it is determined in step S11514 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step S11514: NO), the process proceeds to step S11515.

  In step S11515, a first RAM clear process is executed. The first RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing to 0) the information stored in the main RAM 64 except for the lottery setting information. That is, when the first RAM clear process is executed, various flag information indicating various gaming states, various control information, and the like are erased, but the lottery setting information is not erased, and the setting information is maintained as it is. Further, in this aspect, in the first RAM clear process, a first RAM clear process execution command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. When receiving the first RAM clear process execution command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed. Specifically, for example, a sound such as “RAM cleared” is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11515, the process proceeds to the normal game process described above.

  If it is determined in step S11514 described above that all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON (step S11514: YES), the process proceeds to step S11516, and the first RAM clear process described above is executed. To do. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11517 to execute a setting change process. The details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as the setting change process shown in FIG. After executing step S11517k, the process proceeds to the normal game process described above.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11504 that the power recovery flag is not ON (step S11504: NO) and if it is determined in step S11506 that the RAM determination value is not normal (step S11506: NO). ), And proceeds to step S11518 to execute a RAM abnormality notification process. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command that is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. When receiving the RAM abnormality command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, a sound such as “RAM is abnormal” is output from the speaker 46. After executing Step S11518, the process proceeds to Step S11519.

  In step S11519, a second RAM clear process is executed. The second RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing to 0) all information including the lottery setting setting information among the information stored in the main RAM 64. That is, when the second RAM clear process is executed, the lottery setting information is deleted in addition to the various flag information indicating the gaming state and the various control information. In the second RAM clear process of this aspect, “1” is stored as the initial value of the setting information after the setting information is erased. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11520, and setting change processing is executed. The details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as the setting change process shown in FIG. After executing step S11520, the process proceeds to the normal game process described above.

  As described above, according to this aspect, even when the operation for executing the setting change mode is not performed when the power is turned on, it is determined that the power recovery flag is not ON, and The main RAM 64 determines whether or not the RAM determination value is normal. If it is determined that the RAM determination value is not normal, the main RAM 64 is informed of the abnormality and then the second RAM is cleared. After executing the processing and the setting change mode and confirming the setting information, the process proceeds to the game progress mode in which the game can proceed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game progress mode from being executed with the possibility that the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 has an abnormal value unintended by the administrator. it can.

  For example, even when an operation for executing the setting confirmation mode is performed when the power is turned on, when it is determined that the power recovery flag is not ON, and the RAM determination value of the main RAM 64 is normal. If the RAM determination value is not normal, the second RAM clear process is performed after notifying that the main RAM 64 is abnormal without executing the setting confirmation mode. After the setting change mode is executed and the setting information is confirmed, the game shifts to the game progress mode in which the game can proceed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game progress mode from being executed with the possibility that the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 has an abnormal value unintended by the administrator. it can.

<Aspect 89>
In the main process in FIG. 87 (FIG. 51), after determining whether or not the RAM clear button has been pressed (step S11208), whether all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON. (Step S11209 and step S11219), but instead of this configuration, after determining whether all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON, the RAM It may be configured to determine whether or not the clear button is pressed. This will be specifically described below.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a part of main processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the aspect 89 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on.

  In step S11601, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in advance in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the sub-side control devices (the sound emission control device 90, the display control device 100, the payout control device 70, etc.) are operable. In order to wait for the state to be reached, a wait process is executed for about 1 second, for example. Then, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11602, and internal function register setting processing is executed. Then, it progresses to step S11603 and performs the process for alert | reporting that the said pachinko machine 10 was turned on and started. Specifically, an activation command indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has been activated is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. When receiving the activation command, the sound emission control device 90 executes a process for notifying that the pachinko machine 10 has been activated. Specifically, for example, a sound such as “being activated” or a predetermined alarm sound is output from the speaker 46. After executing Step S11603, the process proceeds to Step S11604.

  In step S11604, it is determined whether the power recovery flag is ON.

  Here, the power recovery flag will be described. In this aspect, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or when a power failure occurs, various information (information indicating the game state, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main CPU 62x is mainly used. Retreat to a predetermined area of the side RAM 64. When the saving of these pieces of information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, a RAM determination value (for example, a checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64. Remember. Note that after the supply of power from the commercial power supply is cut off, the power supply is switched from a backup power supply such as a capacitor. Thus, the power recovery flag is a flag for identifying at the time of power-on whether or not information for returning to the state when the power was turned off last time is stored in the main RAM 64.

  If it is determined in step S11604 that the power recovery flag is ON (step S11604: YES), the process proceeds to step S11605, and the RAM determination value of the main RAM 64 is calculated. In this aspect, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM determination value. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11606, whether or not the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) is normal, that is, the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) and the RAM determination value stored in the main RAM 64 ( It is determined whether or not the checksum value matches. If it is determined in step S11606 that the RAM determination value is normal (step S11606: YES), the process proceeds to step S11608, which will be described later.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11604 that the power recovery flag is not ON (step S11604: NO), and if it is determined in step S11606 that the RAM determination value is not normal (step S11606: NO). ), The process proceeds to step S11607, and the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON. That is, the RAM abnormality flag is a flag that is turned on when the power recovery flag is OFF or when the power recovery flag is ON but the RAM determination value is not normal. Information stored in the main RAM 64 is stored in the RAM abnormality flag. It is a flag indicating that the state is not normal. After executing step S11607, the process proceeds to step S11608.

  In step S11608, it is determined whether all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON. The frame opening switch is a switch that is turned on when the inner frame 13 is open with respect to the outer frame 11, and the door opening switch is a state where the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13. It is a switch that is sometimes turned on. If it is determined in step S11608 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step S11608: NO), the process proceeds to step S11609, and whether the RAM clear button is ON. Determine whether.

  If it is determined in step S11609 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S11609: NO), the process proceeds to step S11610, and it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON.

  If it is determined in step S11610 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11610: NO), the process proceeds to step S11611 to execute a power recovery process for returning to the previous power-off state. Specifically, in the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the main RAM 64 is written into the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the data saved in the main RAM 64 is restored to the register of the main CPU 62x. Then, the state of the register of the main CPU 62x is restored to the state before the power is shut off. After executing step S11611, the process proceeds to step S11612, and the power recovery flag of the main RAM 64 is turned off. After that, the process shifts to normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the interrupt permission setting, the interrupt prohibition setting, the random number update process, and the power supply monitoring process of the timer interrupt process described in each aspect described above are executed. By allowing the interrupt of the timer interrupt process and executing the above-described timer interrupt process, the game can proceed (the game progress mode is started).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11610 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11610: YES), the process proceeds to step S11613 to execute a RAM abnormality notification process. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command that is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. When receiving the RAM abnormality command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, a sound such as “RAM is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode” is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11613, the process proceeds to the normal game process described above. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the random number update process and the power supply monitoring process are executed, but other processes necessary for the progress of the game (for example, starting ball entrance) Processing, game times control processing, etc.) are not executed. Specifically, in this aspect, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the timer interrupt permission setting is not performed. Therefore, although it is apparently equivalent to the normal game progress mode, the player cannot advance the game. That is, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the game progress mode is not shifted. In this state, the administrator turns off the power of the pachinko machine 10 once, inserts the setting key into the setting keyhole and turns it on, and turns on the power while pressing the RAM clear button. The pachinko machine 10 may be activated in the setting change mode.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11609 described above that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11609: YES), the process proceeds to step S11614, and it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S11614 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11614: NO), the process proceeds to step S11615.

  In step S11615, a first RAM clear process is executed. The first RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing to 0) the information stored in the main RAM 64 except for the lottery setting information. That is, when the first RAM clear process is executed, various flag information indicating various gaming states, various control information, and the like are erased, but the lottery setting information is not erased, and the setting information is maintained as it is. Further, in this aspect, in the first RAM clear process, a first RAM clear process execution command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. When receiving the first RAM clear process execution command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed. Specifically, for example, a sound such as “RAM cleared” is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11615, the process proceeds to the normal game process described above.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11614 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11614: YES), the process proceeds to step S11616, and a RAM abnormality notification process is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command that is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. When receiving the RAM abnormality command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, a sound such as “RAM is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode” is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11616, the process proceeds to the normal game process described above. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the random number update process and the power supply monitoring process are executed, but other processes (for example, start-up) required for the progress of the game are performed. The entrance ball processing and game times control processing are not executed. Specifically, in this aspect, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the timer interrupt permission setting is not performed. Therefore, although it is apparently equivalent to the normal game progress mode, the player cannot advance the game. That is, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the game progress mode is not shifted. In this state, the administrator turns off the power of the pachinko machine 10 once, inserts the setting key into the setting keyhole and turns it on, and turns on the power while pressing the RAM clear button. The pachinko machine 10 may be activated in the setting change mode.

  If it is determined in step S11608 described above that all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON (step S11608: YES), the process proceeds to step S11617, and whether the RAM clear button is ON. Determine whether or not.

  If it is determined in step S11617 that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11617: YES), the process proceeds to step S11618, and it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON.

  If it is determined in step S11618 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11618: NO), the process proceeds to step S11619, and setting confirmation processing is executed. In the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), a process of displaying the current lottery setting setting information on the information display unit 45z is executed. That is, the setting confirmation mode is a mode in which an administrator or the like can confirm the current lottery setting setting information of the pachinko machine 10. The details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) are the same as the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. After executing step S11619, the process proceeds to step S11620, where the power recovery process described above is executed to return to the previous power-off state. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11621 and the power recovery flag is turned OFF. After that, the process shifts to normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the interrupt permission setting, the interrupt prohibition setting, the random number update process, and the power supply monitoring process of the timer interrupt process described in each aspect described above are executed. By allowing the interrupt of the timer interrupt process and executing the above-described timer interrupt process, the game can proceed (the game progress mode is started).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11618 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11618: YES), the process proceeds to step S11622, and a RAM abnormality notification process is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command that is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. When receiving the RAM abnormality command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, a sound such as “RAM is abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode” is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11622, the process proceeds to the normal game process described above. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this aspect, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the random number update process and the power supply monitoring process are executed, but other processes (for example, start-up) required for the progress of the game are performed. The entrance ball processing and game times control processing are not executed. Specifically, in this aspect, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the timer interrupt permission setting is not performed. Therefore, although it is apparently equivalent to the normal game progress mode, the player cannot advance the game. That is, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the game progress mode is not shifted. In this state, the administrator turns off the power of the pachinko machine 10 once, inserts the setting key into the setting keyhole and turns it on, and turns on the power while pressing the RAM clear button. The pachinko machine 10 may be activated in the setting change mode.

  If it is determined in step S11217 that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11217: YES), the process proceeds to step S11223, and it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON.

  If it is determined in step S11623 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11623: NO), the process proceeds to step S11624, and the first RAM clear process described above is executed. Then, it progresses to step S11625 and performs a setting change process. In the setting change process (setting change mode), a process of displaying the lottery setting setting information on the information display unit 45z is executed and a process of accepting a change of the lottery setting information is executed. That is, the setting change mode is a mode in which an administrator or the like can change the lottery setting setting information of the pachinko machine 10. The details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as the setting change process shown in FIG. After executing step S11625, the process proceeds to the normal game process described above.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11623 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11623: YES), the process proceeds to step S11626, and a RAM abnormality notification process is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command that is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. When receiving the RAM abnormality command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, a sound such as “RAM is abnormal” is output from the speaker 46. After executing Step S11626, the process proceeds to Step S11627.

  In step S11627, a second RAM clear process is executed. The second RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing to 0) all information including the lottery setting setting information among the information stored in the main RAM 64. That is, when the second RAM clear process is executed, the lottery setting information is deleted in addition to the various flag information indicating the gaming state and the various control information. Here, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the reason for executing the second clear process for erasing the setting information instead of the first clear process will be described. If the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the setting information stored in the main RAM 64 may not be normal. For example, the setting information may be overwritten by setting information not intended by the administrator due to noise or the like. This is because there is a possibility that numerical values outside the predetermined range may be stored although only numerical values within a predetermined range (for example, numerical values from 1 to 6) can be obtained. In the second RAM clear process of this aspect, “1” is stored as the initial value of the setting information after the setting information is erased. The RAM abnormality flag is also turned OFF by the second clear process. Then, it progresses to step S11628 and performs a setting change process. The details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as the setting change process shown in FIG. After executing step S11628, the process proceeds to the normal game process described above.

  Even with the configuration of the present aspect described above, the same effects as those of the above-described aspect 87 can be obtained. Various modified configurations described in the above aspect 87 can also be applied to this aspect.

<Aspect 90>
In the main process (FIG. 54) in the above-described aspect 88, after determining whether or not the RAM clear button is pressed (step S11507), whether all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON. (Step S11508 and step S11514), but instead of this configuration, after determining whether all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON, the RAM It may be configured to determine whether or not the clear button is pressed. This will be specifically described below.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart illustrating a part of main processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) according to the aspect 90 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on.

  In step S11701, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in advance in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the sub-side control devices (the sound emission control device 90, the display control device 100, the payout control device 70, etc.) are operable. In order to wait for the state to be reached, a wait process is executed for about 1 second, for example. Then, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11702, and internal function register setting processing is executed. Then, it progresses to step S11703 and performs the process for alert | reporting that the said pachinko machine 10 was turned on and started. Specifically, an activation command indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has been activated is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. When receiving the activation command, the sound emission control device 90 executes a process for notifying that the pachinko machine 10 has been activated. Specifically, for example, a sound such as “being activated” or a predetermined alarm sound is output from the speaker 46. After executing Step S11703, the process proceeds to Step S11704.

  In step S11704, it is determined whether the power recovery flag is ON.

  Here, the power recovery flag will be described. In this aspect, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or when a power failure occurs, various information (information indicating the game state, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main CPU 62x is mainly used. Retreat to a predetermined area of the side RAM 64. When the saving of these pieces of information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, a RAM determination value (for example, a checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in the main RAM 64. Remember. Note that after the supply of power from the commercial power supply is cut off, the power supply is switched from a backup power supply such as a capacitor. Thus, the power recovery flag is a flag for identifying at the time of power-on whether or not information for returning to the state when the power was turned off last time is stored in the main RAM 64.

  If it is determined in step S11704 that the power recovery flag is ON (step S11704: YES), the process proceeds to step S11705, and the RAM determination value of the main RAM 64 is calculated. In this aspect, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM determination value. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11706, and whether or not the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) is normal, that is, the calculated RAM determination value (checksum value) and the RAM determination value stored in the main RAM 64 ( It is determined whether or not the checksum value matches. If it is determined in step S11706 that the RAM determination value is normal (step S11706: YES), the process proceeds to step S11707.

  In step S11707, it is determined whether all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON. The frame opening switch is a switch that is turned on when the inner frame 13 is open with respect to the outer frame 11, and the door opening switch is a state where the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13. It is a switch that is sometimes turned on. If it is determined in step S11707 that at least one of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch is not ON (step S11707: NO), the process proceeds to step S11708, and whether or not the RAM clear button is ON. Determine whether.

  If it is determined in step S11708 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S11708: NO), the process proceeds to step S11709, and a power recovery process for returning to the previous power-off state is executed. Specifically, in the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the main RAM 64 is written into the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the data saved in the main RAM 64 is restored to the register of the main CPU 62x. Then, the state of the register of the main CPU 62x is restored to the state before the power is shut off. After executing step S11709, the process proceeds to step S11710, and the power recovery flag of the main RAM 64 is turned OFF. After that, the process shifts to normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the interrupt permission setting, the interrupt prohibition setting, the random number update process, and the power supply monitoring process of the timer interrupt process described in each aspect described above are executed. By allowing the interrupt of the timer interrupt process and executing the above-described timer interrupt process, the game can proceed (the game progress mode is started).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11708 described above that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11708: YES), the process proceeds to step S11711 to execute the first RAM clear process. The first RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing to 0) the information stored in the main RAM 64 except for the lottery setting information. That is, when the first RAM clear process is executed, various flag information indicating various gaming states, various control information, and the like are erased, but the lottery setting information is not erased, and the setting information is maintained as it is. Further, in this aspect, in the first RAM clear process, a first RAM clear process execution command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. When receiving the first RAM clear process execution command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed. Specifically, for example, a sound such as “RAM cleared” is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11711, the process proceeds to the normal game process described above.

  If it is determined in step S11707 described above that all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON (step S11707: YES), the process proceeds to step S11712, and whether the RAM clear button is ON. Determine whether or not.

  If it is determined in step S11712 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S11712: NO), the process proceeds to step S11713, and a setting confirmation process is executed. The details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) are the same as the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. After executing step S11713, the process proceeds to step S11714, where the power recovery process described above is executed to return to the previous power-off state. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11715, and the power recovery flag is turned OFF. After that, the process shifts to normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the interrupt permission setting, the interrupt prohibition setting, the random number update process, and the power supply monitoring process of the timer interrupt process described in each aspect described above are executed. By allowing the interrupt of the timer interrupt process and executing the above-described timer interrupt process, the game can proceed (the game progress mode is started).

  If it is determined in step S11712 that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11712: YES), the process proceeds to step S11716, and the first RAM clear process described above is executed. Then, it progresses to step S11717 and performs a setting change process. The details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as the setting change process shown in FIG. After executing step S11717, the process proceeds to the normal game process described above.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11704 that the power recovery flag is not ON (step S11704: NO) and if it is determined in step S11706 that the RAM determination value is not normal (step S11706: NO). ), The process proceeds to step S11718, and RAM abnormality notification processing is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command that is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. When receiving the RAM abnormality command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, a sound such as “RAM is abnormal” is output from the speaker 46. After executing Step S11718, the process proceeds to Step S11719.

  In step S11719, a second RAM clear process is executed. The second RAM clearing process is a process of erasing (clearing to 0) all information including the lottery setting setting information among the information stored in the main RAM 64. That is, when the second RAM clear process is executed, the lottery setting information is deleted in addition to the various flag information indicating the gaming state and the various control information. In the second RAM clear process of this aspect, “1” is stored as the initial value of the setting information after the setting information is erased. Then, it progresses to step S11720 and performs a setting change process. The details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as the setting change process shown in FIG. After executing step S11720, the process proceeds to the normal game process described above.

  Even with the configuration of the present aspect described above, the same effects as those of the above-described aspect 88 can be achieved. Moreover, the various deformation | transformation structure demonstrated in the said aspect 88 can also be applied to this aspect.

<Aspect 91>
In the setting change processing (FIG. 52) in each of the above aspects, the lottery setting setting information is confirmed when the RAM clear button is pressed (step S11305). However, instead of this configuration, a setting key is used. The configuration may be such that the lottery setting setting information is confirmed when it is turned off. This will be specifically described below.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart illustrating a setting change process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) according to the aspect 91 of the first embodiment. The same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as those included in the setting change process shown in FIG. The main difference from the setting change process shown in FIG. 52 is that the process for confirming the changed setting information in FIG. 52 is that the RAM clear button is pressed (step S11305). The process for confirming the changed setting information is that the setting key is set to the OFF side (step S11305a), and the process of step S11308 in FIG. 52 is omitted accordingly. This will be specifically described below.

  In step S11301, a setting change notification start process is executed. In the setting change notification start process, a setting change mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has been started, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. When receiving the setting change mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 outputs a sound indicating that the setting change mode is in effect from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, sound such as “in the setting change mode” is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. In addition, when receiving the setting change mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 causes the symbol display device 41 to display information indicating that it is in the setting change mode. Specifically, for example, the sound emission control device 90 transmits a command for causing the symbol display device 41 to display a character string such as “in setting change mode” to the display control device 100, and the display that has received the command. The control device 100 causes the symbol display device 41 to display a character string such as “in the setting change mode”. In addition, when receiving the setting change mode start command, the sound emission control device 90 controls the various lamps 47 so as to blink repeatedly by alternately turning on and off at the maximum luminance.

  Further, in the setting change notification start process, information indicating that the setting change mode has been started is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. The hall computer that has received the information indicating that the setting change mode has started displays the information of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode on the management screen. After executing Step S11301, the process proceeds to Step S11302.

  In step S11302, control for displaying the lottery setting setting information on the information display unit 45z is started. Specifically, the lottery setting information is displayed on the information display unit 45z. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11303, and it is determined whether or not the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In this aspect, since the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 has six levels from “1” to “6”, whether or not the setting information is a numerical value within the range from “1” to “6”. Determine. If it is determined in step S11303 that the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range (step S11303: YES), the process proceeds to step S11305. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S11303 that the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range (step S11303: NO), for example, when “0” or “7” is stored as the setting information, noise, or the like If information other than numerical values is stored in step S11304, the process advances to step S11304 to change the setting information to the initial value. In this aspect, “1” is stored as the initial value in the setting information. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11305a.

  In step S11305a, it is determined whether the setting key is on the OFF side. If it is determined in step S11305a that the setting key is not on the OFF side (step S11305a: NO), the process advances to step S11306 to determine whether the setting change button has been pressed. If it is determined in step S11306 that the setting change button has been pressed (step S11306: YES), the process advances to step S11307 to update the lottery setting setting information. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical information stored as the setting information. However, when the setting change button is pressed in a situation where the numerical information stored as the setting information is “6”, the numerical information is updated to “1”. Thereafter, the process returns to step S11303 described above, and it is determined whether or not the updated setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11306 that the setting change button has not been pressed (step S11306: NO), the process returns to step S11303 described above without executing the process of step S11307, and the setting information is a predetermined value. It is determined whether the numerical value is within the range.

  If it is determined in step S11305a that the setting key has been turned OFF (step S11305a: YES), the process advances to step S11309 to perform control for displaying the lottery setting setting information on the information display unit 45z. finish. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11310.

  In step S11310, a setting change notification end process is executed. In the setting change notification end process, a setting change mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode is ended, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. When receiving the setting change mode end command, the sound emission control device 90 ends the various controls for notifying that the setting change mode is in progress.

  Further, in the setting change notification end process, information indicating that the setting change mode is ended is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal. The hall computer that has received the information indicating that the setting change mode has ended displays information indicating that the setting change mode of the pachinko machine 10 has ended on the management screen. After executing step S11310, the setting change process is terminated. After executing the setting change notification end processing, the configuration information of the lottery setting after the change is transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall via the external terminal, and the hall computer that has received the information displays the management screen on the management screen. It is good also as a structure which displays the setting information of the lottery setting after the change of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

  According to the configuration of the present aspect described above, the operation of pressing the RAM clear button to confirm the changed setting information can be omitted, so that an operation required for the administrator to change the setting information The process can be simplified.

<Aspect 92>
Among the above-described aspects, in the configuration capable of executing the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the main display unit 45 displays a game progress capable of progressing the game during the execution of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. It is good also as a structure which displays the display pattern (display mode) which is not displayed during execution of mode. This will be specifically described below.

  As described above, the main display unit 45 includes a plurality of light emitting units. Specifically, the main display unit 45 includes a first symbol display unit 37a including a plurality of segment light emission units, a second symbol display unit 37b including a plurality of segment light emission units, and a first holding unit including a plurality of LED lamps. The display unit 37c includes a second holding display unit 37d composed of a plurality of LED lamps, a universal unit 38 composed of a plurality of LED lamps, and a round display unit 39 composed of a plurality of LED lamps.

  The main display unit 45 controls each light emitting unit so that the display mode reflects the progress of the game during the execution of the game progress mode in which the game can be progressed. During the execution of the progress mode, all the light emitting units constituting the main display unit 45 are not lit at the same time, or all the light emitting units are not blinked in synchronization.

  Therefore, in this aspect, the main display unit 45 performs control to simultaneously turn on all the light emitting units constituting the main display unit 45 during execution of the setting change mode in which the setting information of the lottery setting can be changed. During the execution of the setting confirmation mode in which the setting information of the lottery setting can be confirmed, control is performed to flash all the light emitting units constituting the main display unit 45 in synchronization.

  According to such a configuration, it becomes possible for the administrator or the like to identify whether the current pachinko machine 10 is in the game progress mode, the setting change mode, or the setting confirmation mode. Furthermore, according to such a configuration, for example, it is not necessary to newly add a light emitting unit for mode display for identifying the current mode of the pachinko machine 10 to the main display unit 45. Only by changing the control program of the pachinko machine 10 without changing the hardware configuration, the current mode of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed to a configuration that allows an administrator or the like to be identified.

  In addition, the main display unit 45 executes control to blink all the light emitting units constituting the main display unit 45 in synchronization during execution of the setting change mode in which the setting information of the lottery setting can be changed. During the execution of the setting confirmation mode in which the setting information can be confirmed, it is possible to perform a control for simultaneously lighting all the light emitting units constituting the main display unit 45.

  Further, if the display mode displayed on the main display unit 45 during execution of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is a display mode (lighting pattern) that is not displayed during execution of the game progress mode, the main display unit It is not limited to a configuration in which all the light emitting units constituting 45 are turned on and blinking, and other display modes may be used.

  In addition, one light emitting unit for mode display (for example, LED) is added to the main display unit 45, the light emitting unit is turned off while the game progress mode is being executed, and the light emitting unit is turned on while the setting change mode is being executed. The light emitting unit may be blinked during execution of the setting confirmation mode. According to such a configuration, the current mode of the pachinko machine 10 can be clearly recognized by an administrator or the like, and the pachinko machine using the voice light emission control device 90, the display control device 100, and the symbol display device 41 can be used. Compared with the configuration for notifying the current mode of the machine 10, the configuration can be simplified.

  Further, two light emitting units (for example, LEDs) for mode display are added to the main display unit 45 (first light emitting unit and second light emitting unit), and the first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit are executed during the game progress mode. Both are turned off, the first light emitting unit is turned on during execution of the setting change mode, the second light emitting unit is turned off, and the second light emitting unit is turned on during execution of the setting confirmation mode. A configuration may be adopted in which the first light emitting unit is turned off. According to such a configuration, the current mode of the pachinko machine 10 can be clearly recognized by an administrator or the like, and the pachinko machine using the voice light emission control device 90, the display control device 100, and the symbol display device 41 can be used. Compared with the configuration for notifying the current mode of the machine 10, the configuration can be simplified. Furthermore, since it is only necessary to control the two light emitting units added to the main display unit 45, an increase in data capacity due to the addition of a control program or a lighting pattern can be suppressed.

<Aspect 93>
Of the above aspects, in the configuration in which the information display unit 45z includes four 7-segment displays 45z1 to 45z4, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, all the light-emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z are turned on for a predetermined time ( For example, it may be configured to light up for 3 seconds and then blink in synchronization for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds).

  According to such a configuration, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is a light emitting unit that does not turn on due to a failure such as a disconnection in the light emitting unit constituting the information display unit 45z. It is possible to confirm whether there is a light emitting unit that is always turned on due to a problem and does not turn off. For example, if the segment light emitting part G and the segment light emitting part D of the right middle 7-segment display 45z3 are not lit due to a malfunction, control for displaying “3” on the right middle 7-segment display 45z3 is executed. Even in this case, since the segment light emitting part G and the segment light emitting part D are not turned on, “7” is displayed on the middle 7 segment display 45z3. As a result, the administrator may misunderstand the numerical information of the game history information. On the other hand, according to the configuration of this aspect, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, it is confirmed whether or not there is a light-emitting portion that does not turn on due to a failure such as a disconnection in the light-emitting portion constituting the information display portion 45z. In addition, it is possible to check whether there is a light emitting unit that is always turned on due to a malfunction and does not turn off, so that such misidentification can be suppressed.

  Further, an information display unit inspection button for inspecting the information display unit 45z is provided, and when the information display unit inspection button is pressed, all the light emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z are set for a predetermined time (for example, 3 (Second) and then flashing in synchronization with a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds).

  According to such a configuration, even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is not turned on, light emission that does not light up due to a malfunction such as a disconnection in the light emitting unit constituting the information display unit 45z by pressing the information display unit inspection button. It is possible to check whether there is a light emitting part that does not turn off due to a malfunction. That is, since it is not necessary to once turn off the power of the pachinko machine 10 in order to confirm whether or not a problem has occurred in the information display unit 45z, it is possible to improve the work efficiency of the administrator.

In the configuration in which the above-described base (during the normal mode) is calculated and stored, and the stored base (during the normal mode) is displayed on the information display unit 45z, the main control device 60 determines the measured number of discharge passage passages N _OUT Each time the number reaches 60000, the section is divided and the base (in normal mode) is calculated and stored for each section, and the information display unit 45z has a plurality of types of bases (normal mode in different sections to be calculated). It is good also as a structure which switches and displays middle.

  Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment calculates and stores a base of up to seven sections (during the normal mode), and the information display unit 45z has a base (normal mode) corresponding to a maximum of seven sections. Switch between (middle) and display. The seven sections are as follows.

"BL": Base under measurement (in normal mode)
The exit rate calculated in the current section until the number N _OUT of the discharge passage currently measured reaches 60000 (in normal mode)
"B1": Base that has been measured in the previous section (in normal mode)
The exit rate calculated in the section immediately before the section where the measured discharge passage passage number N _OUT reaches 60000 and is currently being measured (in normal mode)
"B2": Base already measured in the previous section (in normal mode)
The exit rate calculated in the section where the measured discharge passage passage number N _OUT has reached 60000, and is the section immediately before the section currently being measured (in normal mode)
・ "B3": Base already measured in the previous three sections (in normal mode)
The exit rate calculated in the section where the measured discharge passage passage number N _OUT has reached 60000 and is three times before the currently measured section (in normal mode)
・ "B4": Base that has been measured in the previous four sections (in normal mode)
The exit rate calculated in the section where the measured discharge passage passage number N _OUT has reached 60000 and is four times before the currently measured section (in normal mode)
・ "B5": Base that has been measured in the previous section (in normal mode)
The exit rate calculated in the section where the measured discharge passage passage number N _OUT has reached 60000 and is five times before the currently measured section (in normal mode)
"B6": Base that has been measured in the previous six sections (in normal mode)
The exit rate calculated in the section where the measured discharge passage passage number N _OUT has reached 60000 and is six times before the section currently being measured (in normal mode)

In the initial state in which the game history basic information such as information on the number of balls entered into each club is not stored, measurement of the section corresponding to “bL” is started, and the number N _OUT of discharge passage passages being measured is 60000. When it reaches, the game history basic information stored as the section for “bL” is shifted to the section corresponding to “b1”, and the measurement of the section corresponding to “bL” is newly started. When the discharge passage passage number N _OUT reaches 60000 in the section corresponding to “bL” for which measurement has been newly started, the game history basic information stored as the section for “b1” corresponds to “b2”. The game history basic information stored as the section for “bL” is shifted to the section corresponding to “b1”, and the measurement of the section corresponding to “bL” is newly started. In this way, every time the discharge passage passage number N _OUT being measured reaches 60000, the game history basic information for each section is shifted, and the game history basic information is updated up to the section corresponding to “b6” at the maximum. Remember. When the game history basic information is stored as the section corresponding to “b6” and the number of discharge passage passages N _OUT being measured reaches 60000, it is stored as the section corresponding to “b6”. The game history basic information is deleted, and the game history basic information stored as the section corresponding to “b5” is shifted to the section corresponding to “b6”.

That is, in this aspect, game history basic information is accumulated and stored until the maximum number of discharge passage passages N _OUT of 60000 × 7 sections is measured.

  And in this aspect, the information display part 45z switches and displays the base (in normal mode) of the some area memorize | stored every 5 seconds. Specifically, for example, when a base (in normal mode) of five sections “bL”, “b1”, “b2”, “b3”, and “b4” is stored, the information display unit 45z Is “bL.31” → “b1.31” → “b2.30” → “b3.31” → “b4.30” → “bL.31” → “b1.31”. The base of each section (in normal mode) is displayed repeatedly while switching every second.

  According to such a configuration, the inspector or manager of the gaming machine can compare the bases (in the normal mode) for each section by confirming the display of the information display unit 45z. As a result of this, for example, when a malfunction occurred in the pachinko machine 10 or when the base (in normal mode) value became an abnormal value due to an irregularity, at which timing the malfunction occurred in the past Can be predicted.

In this aspect, each time the measured discharge passage passage number N _OUT reaches 60000, a section is divided, and a base (in normal mode) is calculated and stored for each section, and a base (normal mode) stored for each section is calculated. Middle) is switched every predetermined time (for example, every 5 seconds) and displayed on the information display unit 45z. Instead of this configuration, an RTC 96 is provided, and the section is divided every time the date is changed, and is divided by the date. The base (in normal mode) is calculated and stored for each section, and the base (in normal mode) stored for each date (for each section) is switched every predetermined time (for example, every 5 seconds) to display the information display section 45z. It is good also as a structure displayed on. Specifically, for example, “bL” is the current day, “b1” is the previous day, “b2” is the previous 2 days, “b3” is the previous 3 days, and “b4” is the previous 4 days. , “B5” is defined as a section five days ago, and “b6” is defined as a section six days ago.

  According to such a configuration, the inspector or manager of the gaming machine compares the bases (in normal mode) for each section divided by date by confirming the display of the information display unit 45z. Is possible. As a result, for example, when the value of the base (during the normal mode) becomes an abnormal value due to the occurrence or malfunction of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to predict the date on which the malfunction occurred. It becomes possible.

Further, game history basic information such as information on the number of balls entered into each pitching section and game history information such as base (during normal mode) are stored in the main RAM 64, and the pachinko machine is in a state where the RAM clear button is pressed. After the game history basic information and the game history information are erased in the configuration in which the game history basic information and the game history information are erased (cleared) by the RAM clear process executed by turning on the power of the power supply 10 Until the measured discharge passage passage number N _OUT reaches a predetermined number (for example, 300), when the game history information is displayed on the information display unit 45z, the type information of the game history information is displayed. The numerical information of the history information may not be displayed.

Specifically, for example, in a configuration in which a base (during normal mode) is calculated and stored as game history information, and the stored base (during normal mode) is displayed on the information display unit 45z, the game history basic is performed by RAM clear processing. After the information and the game history information are deleted, until the measured number of discharge passage passages N _OUT reaches 300, “bL.” Is displayed in the type information display area of the information display unit 45z, and the numerical information display area May be configured to display “-(two hyphens)”.

According to such a configuration, the inspector or manager of the gaming machine has deleted the game history basic information and the game history information when “bL .--” is displayed on the information display unit 45z. It can be recognized that the discharge passage passage number N _OUT measured after the pachinko machine 10 is shipped from the manufacturer's factory or after 300 has not reached 300. In addition, for example, when a maker ships the pachinko machine 10, there are cases where several game balls are inserted into the respective entrances to check the operation. In this case, since the number of game balls that have entered each entry portion is measured in a situation that is not a case where the game is not properly performed, for example, the number of discharge passage passages N _OUT initially measured is 300. Until the number is reached, there is a possibility that the influence of the check by the manufacturer will be greatly exerted on the game history basic information and game history information. Therefore, according to the configuration of this aspect, until the measured number of discharge passage passages N _OUT reaches 300, “bL .--” is displayed on the information display unit 45z and the base (during the normal mode) is displayed. Since numerical information is not displayed, it is possible to prevent the administrator from confirming numerical values that are greatly affected by the manufacturer's check and misunderstanding that the pachinko machine 10 may have malfunctioned. can do.

<Aspect 94>
Of the above aspects, in the configuration for calculating the game history information for each of a plurality of sections, the game history basic information corresponding to the section is stored up to the upper limit, and the game history information is calculated and stored. The game history basic information that is the basis for calculating the history information may be deleted. Specifically, for example, after the discharge passage passage number N _OUT being measured reaches 60000 and the game history information is calculated and stored, the game history basic information that is the basis for calculating the game history information is It is good also as a structure to erase. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity necessary for storing the game history basic information.

<Aspect 95>
Various functions described in the above embodiments (for example, a function for storing the number of game balls that enter each entrance, and a payout based on the number of game balls that enter each entrance) A function for calculating the number of played game balls, a function for storing the number of game balls paid out as a prize ball, a function for calculating game history information such as a ratio of bonuses, a function for storing calculated game history information, Configuration in which the game history management chip 300 realizes at least a part of functions such as a function of displaying stored game history information and a function of erasing various information stored in various storage means such as a RAM and a flash memory. The main CPU 62x (the main MPU 62 excluding the game history management chip 300) may be realized, or the inspection machine 320 may be realized. In addition, the game history management chip 300, the main CPU 62x (the main MPU 62 excluding the game history management chip 300), and the inspection machine 320 share or cooperate to realize at least some of these various functions. It is good.

<Aspect 96>
The first embodiment and the other aspects described above can be applied not only to the pachinko machine 10 but also to other types of gaming machines. For example, the present invention can also be applied to a spinning-type game machine such as a pachinko slot machine. Specifically, for example, the number of game medals obtained by winning at the time of a bonus, the number of game medals obtained by a child role drawn during a normal section, and an advantageous section (AT, ART) different from the bonus For a configuration in which a ratio with the number of obtained game medals is calculated and the ratio is displayed on a liquid crystal display device, or the ratio is output to an inspection machine and the ratio is displayed on a display unit of the inspection machine Can be applied.

<Aspect 97>
In the first embodiment and the other aspects described above, a part or all of the functions realized by software (implemented by the CPU executing a program) may be realized by hardware. For example, the game history management chip 300 may be configured to include dedicated hardware designed to execute arithmetic processing for calculating game history information. According to such a configuration, it is possible to speed up the arithmetic processing for calculating the game history information, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of fraud such as that the arithmetic program is illegally altered and correct game history information is not calculated. Can be suppressed. Note that the hardware may be configured with a digital circuit or an analog circuit. If it is composed of an analog circuit, it is possible to further speed up the arithmetic processing compared to a digital circuit.

<Aspect 98>
A configuration in which one or a plurality of configurations included in the first embodiment and the modes 1 to 97 described above are appropriately replaced or combined may be employed. Moreover, you may combine the 1 or several structure contained in said 1st Embodiment and said aspect 1 to aspect 97, and the 1 or several structure contained in embodiments other than 1st Embodiment. In addition, among the configurations included in the first embodiment and the above-described modes 1 to 97, the configuration that is not essential can be omitted as appropriate without departing from the spirit of the configuration.

B. Application to other configurations:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines that release a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball enters a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right by generating a right, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball and the like.

  Also, a non-ballistic gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, the reel rotation is started by the insertion of medals and the operation of the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the active line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body that is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.

  In addition, in the above embodiment, a part of the function realized by software may be realized by hardware, or a part of the function realized by hardware may be realized by software.

C. About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments, etc .:
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
The feature A group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature A1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area (game ball launching mechanism 81);
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed a predetermined area;
Process execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising
The process execution means includes
Information storage means (register 304, calculation result storage memory 309) that is stored inside the casing of the gaming machine main body and that nonvolatilely stores detection information that is information acquired based on detection by the detection means. )When,
Transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting information stored in the information storage means to a predetermined device connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the characteristic A1, the process execution unit includes an information storage unit that non-volatilely stores detection information that is information acquired based on detection by the detection unit. Since the detection information is information having a correlation with the behavior of the game ball in the executed game, the detection information differs for each gaming machine and is information unique to the gaming machine. That is, the detection information is information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to the feature A1, the detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, is stored in the information storage means of the processing execution means stored in the housing of the gaming machine body. Thus, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by obtaining detection information from the gaming machine body itself. When the gaming machine is installed in the gaming hall, the gaming machine can acquire information on the characteristics of the gaming machine using a hall computer installed in the gaming hall. However, since gaming machines circulate constantly, they may be placed in a state where they are not connected to the hall computer. In this case, conventional gaming machines may hold information on characteristics of the gaming machines. Can not. The gaming machine of feature A1 stores the detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, in the information storage means of the processing execution means stored in the housing of the gaming machine body, so that the gaming machine is connected to the hall computer. Even in a state where the game machine is not connected, detection information can be acquired from the gaming machine main body. That is, the gaming machine of the feature A1 is a state in which the gaming machine and the detection information are always linked one-to-one regardless of the state of the gaming machine (a state installed in the gaming hall or a distribution state). It is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the game soundness can be improved.

[Feature A2]
A gaming machine according to feature A1,
Provided with control means (main side CPU 62x) for controlling the execution of the game,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the processing execution means is operated by the same power source as the control means.

  According to the feature A2, since the processing execution means operates with the same power source as the control means, for example, when the gaming machine is installed in a gaming hall, the hall computer can obtain information on the characteristics of the gaming machine. If there is a problem with the power system of the hall computer, or if there is a problem with the processing of the hall computer, if the situation is that power is supplied to the gaming machine , Detection information can be acquired. If the control means and the processing execution means are operated by different power sources, and if there is a problem with the power supply of the processing execution means, the detection information is acquired even though the game is being executed by the gaming machine The problem that it cannot be done occurs. On the other hand, according to the feature A2, since the control unit and the processing execution unit are operated by the same power source, the detection information can be acquired without fail if the game is executable. Therefore, the reliability of detection information can be improved.

[Feature A3]
A gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2,
The information storage means stores the detection information for each period until a predetermined number (500) of game balls are detected by a predetermined detection means (discharge passage detection sensor 44h).

  According to the feature A3, since the detection information for each period until the predetermined number of game balls are detected by the predetermined detection means is stored, the time until the predetermined number of game balls are detected by each gaming machine varies. Even if there is, detection information that does not affect the variation in time can be acquired. That is, even when there is a difference in the frequency with which game balls are fired, it is possible to acquire highly accurate detection information that is not easily affected by the difference.

[Feature A4]
A gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the information storage means stores the detection information for each preset period (every hour).

  According to the feature A4, the information storage unit stores the detection information for each predetermined period that is set in advance, so that statistical processing using the concept of time can be performed using the detection information.

[Feature A5]
A gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2,
The information storage means stores the detection information for each period from when the supply of power to the gaming machine is started until the power is turned off.

  According to feature A5, the information storage means stores detection information for each period from the start of the supply of power to the gaming machine until the interruption of the power, so that, for example, the gaming machine is in the gaming hall. If installed, detection information for each business day of the game hall can be acquired.

[Feature A6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5,
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
With
The process execution means includes
Prize ball number information for obtaining prize ball number information (prize ball number data), which is information relating to the number of game balls (number of prize balls) to be paid out from the payout means as prize balls set for each of the plurality of detection means. Acquisition means;
Calculation execution means (CPU 308) for executing a predetermined calculation based on the detection information and the prize ball number information;
With
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the information storage means stores calculation result information that is information related to a calculation result (such as an accessory ratio) by the calculation execution means.

  According to the feature A6, the process execution means stores calculation result information. Since the calculation result information is information calculated based on the detection information and the number of prize balls, information regarding the number of prize balls paid out by the gaming machine is reflected. Therefore, according to the feature A6, it is possible to acquire the characteristics of the gaming machine regarding the paid-out prize ball. As a result, it is possible to manage the characteristics of the gaming machine relating to the paid-out prize balls.

<Feature B group>
The feature B group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature B1]
Control means (main CPU 62x) for controlling the execution of the game;
Calculation execution means (CPU 308) that executes calculation processing based on the first information acquired based on the executed game and the second information set in advance to acquire third information;
Information storage means for storing the third information in a nonvolatile manner (operation result storage memory 309);
A gaming machine comprising
The arithmetic execution means and the information storage means are operated by the same power source as the control means.

  According to the feature B1, the first information is information acquired based on the executed game, and the third information is information acquired based on the first information. Therefore, the third information includes information regarding the executed game. Therefore, since the information storage means stores the third information including the information related to the executed game, the information related to the game executed in the past using the third information stored in the information storage means. Is possible to get. Therefore, by using the third information, it is possible to manage the game characteristics of the gaming machine. And since the calculation execution means and the information storage means operate | move with the same power supply as a control means, if the power supply is supplied to the gaming machine, the third information can be acquired. If the calculation execution means and the information storage means and the control means are operated by different power sources, and if there is a problem with the power supply of the calculation execution means and the information storage means, the game is being executed by the gaming machine. Nevertheless, there is a problem that the third information cannot be acquired. On the other hand, according to the feature B2, since the calculation execution means, the information storage means, and the control means are operated by the same power source, the third information is always acquired if the game can be executed. be able to. Therefore, the reliability of the third information can be improved. As a result, the inspection reliability of the gaming machine can be improved, and the game soundness can be improved.

[Feature B2]
A gaming machine according to feature B1,
A gaming machine comprising: transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting the third information stored in the information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine.

  According to the feature B2, since the transmission unit transmits the third information stored in the information storage unit to a predetermined device connected to the gaming machine, the third information is transmitted using the predetermined device. It becomes possible to manage the game-related characteristics of the used gaming machine.

[Feature B3]
A gaming machine according to Feature B1 or Feature B2,
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area (game ball launching mechanism 81);
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed a predetermined area;
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
With
The first information is information acquired based on detection by the detection means,
The second information is information relating to the number of game balls (number of prize balls) to be paid out from the payout means as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means,
The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the third information is information relating to the number of prize balls paid out by the gaming machine in the executed game.

  According to the feature B3, the third information is information related to the number of prize balls paid out by the gaming machine in the executed game. Therefore, using the third information stored in the information storage means, it is possible to manage the characteristics of the gaming machine relating to the actually paid out prize ball.

<Feature C group>
The feature C group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature C1]
Control means (main CPU 62x) for controlling the execution of the game;
Information storage means (register 304, operation result storage memory 309) for storing the first information acquired based on the executed game in a nonvolatile manner;
A gaming machine comprising
The information storage means is stored in a housing (a substrate box to which a seal seal is attached) in which traces of opening and closing are left.

  According to the feature C1, the information storage means is stored inside the casing where the trace of opening and closing remains. Therefore, when physical contact is made with the information storage means, a trace of opening the case remains. Therefore, if the first information stored in the information storage unit is modified through physical contact with the information storage unit, it is possible to grasp the modification from the trace of the housing. Become. Therefore, unauthorized modification of the first information can be prevented. Since some gaming machines circulate in various ways, various external contacts are made in the process of being circulated, but the information storage means is stored inside the case where the opening and closing traces remain, so the gaming machine Even in a situation in which there is a continuous circulation, unauthorized modification of the first information by someone can be suppressed. In addition, since the first information is information acquired based on the executed game, it is possible to manage and inspect the game characteristics of the gaming machine using the first information. Therefore, according to the feature C1, it is possible to properly manage and inspect the gaming machine by preventing unauthorized modification of the first information reflecting the game-related characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the game soundness can be improved.

[Feature C2]
A gaming machine according to feature C1,
The information storage means operates with the same power source as the control means.

  According to the feature C2, since the information storage unit operates with the same power source as the control unit, the first information can be acquired in a situation where power is supplied to the gaming machine. If the information storage means and the control means are operated by different power sources, and there is a problem with the power supply of the information storage means, the first information will be executed despite the game being executed by the gaming machine. There is a problem that cannot be acquired. On the other hand, according to the feature C2, since the information storage means and the control means are operated by the same power source, the first information can be always obtained if the game is executable. Therefore, the reliability of the first information can be improved. As a result, the inspection reliability of the gaming machine can be improved, and the game soundness can be improved.

[Feature C3]
A gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2,
A gaming machine comprising: a transmission unit (CPU 308) that transmits the first information to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine.

  According to the feature C3, since the first information stored in the information storage means is provided to a predetermined device connected to the gaming machine, the first information is obtained using the predetermined device. It becomes possible to manage and inspect the game-related characteristics of the used gaming machine.

<Feature D group>
The feature D group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature D1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area (game ball launching mechanism 81);
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed a predetermined area;
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
First prize ball number information storage for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information relating to the number of game balls (number of prize balls) to be paid out as prize balls set for each of the plurality of detection means. Means (main ROM 63);
Process execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising
The process execution means includes
Prize ball number information acquisition means for acquiring the prize ball number information stored in the first prize ball number storage means;
Second prize ball number information storage means (award ball number data storage memory 306) for storing the prize ball number information acquired by the prize ball number information acquisition means;
Number information storage means (register 304) for storing information on the number of game balls detected by the detection means;
By executing a calculation based on the information on the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means and the prize ball number information stored in the second prize ball number information storage means, Calculation execution means (CPU 308) for calculating game history information (such as an accessory ratio) that is information relating to the history of
A game history information storage means (calculation result storage memory 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation execution means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In general, the award ball number information set in the gaming machine is set to a different value for each type (model) of the gaming machine.

  According to the feature D1, since the process execution means acquires the prize ball number information stored in the first prize ball number storage means, different prize ball number information is set for each type (model) of gaming machine. Even so, the process execution means can calculate correct game history information using the award ball number information set for each type of gaming machine.

  If the gaming machine is illegally modified, the calculated game history information may become an unnatural value different from the assumed value. Accordingly, the inspector of the gaming machine can appropriately determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally modified by confirming the gaming history information. As a result, the game soundness can be improved.

[Feature D2]
A gaming machine according to feature D1,
Prize ball number information transmitting means (CPU 62x) for transmitting a signal including the prize ball number information stored in the first prize ball number information storage means to the process execution means,
The said acquisition means acquires the said winning ball number information by receiving the said signal transmitted from the said winning ball number information transmission means. The game machine characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the feature D2, since the signal including the prize ball number information stored in the first prize ball number information storage unit is transmitted to the process execution unit, the process execution unit accesses the first prize ball number storage unit. Even if the configuration cannot be performed or the configuration in which the process execution means cannot grasp the storage position (memory address) of the prize ball number information stored in the first prize ball number storage means, the process execution means It is possible to acquire the prize ball number information stored in the first prize ball number storage means.

[Feature D3]
A gaming machine according to Feature D1 or Feature D2,
Game history information transmitting means (CPU 308) for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine. To play.

  According to the feature D3, the game history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to the predetermined device, so that the predetermined device can display the game history information of the gaming machine. Then, the inspector of the gaming machine can check the game history information displayed on the predetermined device.

[Feature D4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information stored in the game history information storage means.

  According to the feature D4, since the game history information is displayed on the display unit of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine can use the gaming history of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information. Information can be confirmed.

[Feature D5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4,
The launching unit is configured so as not to be able to launch a game ball until the processing execution unit completes storing the prize ball number information in the second prize ball number information storage unit. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature D5, since the game ball is not fired until the storage of the prize ball number information in the second prize ball number information storage unit is completed, the game ball leaks from the calculation target of the game history information by the calculation execution unit. Can be suppressed.

<Feature E group>
The feature E group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature E1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area (game ball launching mechanism 81);
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed a predetermined area;
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
Process execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising
The process execution means includes
Prize ball number information storage means (award ball number data) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data), which is information relating to the number of game balls (award ball number) to be paid out as a prize ball set for each of the plurality of detection means. Ball data storage memory 306);
Number information storage means (register 304) for storing information on the number of game balls detected by the detection means;
Each time the number of game balls (discharge passage passage number N _OUT ) detected by the predetermined detection means (discharge passage detection sensor 44h) stored in the number information storage means reaches a specified value (500 pieces), Information relating to the history of the game by performing calculations based on the information on the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means and the prize ball number information stored in the prize ball number information storage means Calculation execution means (CPU 308) for calculating game history information (such as an accessory ratio),
A game history information storage means (calculation result storage memory 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation execution means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E1, since the game history information is calculated every time the number of game balls detected by the predetermined detection means reaches a specified value, until the number of game balls detected by each gaming machine reaches the specified value. Even if there is a variation in the time, the game history information that does not affect the variation in the time can be calculated. That is, even when there is a difference in the frequency at which game balls are detected, it is possible to calculate highly accurate game history information that is not easily affected by the difference. As a result, the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm the highly accurate gaming history information, and can appropriately determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the game soundness can be improved.

[Feature E2]
A gaming machine according to feature E1,
As a calculation execution condition that is a condition for executing the calculation, a first calculation execution condition storage unit (main-side ROM 63) that stores information on the predetermined detection unit (discharge passage detection sensor 44h) and the specified value (500 pieces). )
The process execution means includes
Calculation execution condition acquisition means for acquiring the calculation execution condition stored in the first calculation execution condition storage means;
Second calculation execution condition storage means (calculation execution condition storage memory 307) for storing the acquired calculation execution condition;
With
The calculation execution means executes the calculation when the calculation execution condition stored in the second calculation execution condition storage means is satisfied.

  When the type (model) of the gaming machine is different, the characteristics of the game are also different, so that the optimum conditions for executing the calculation for calculating the game history information are also different. For this reason, as the calculation execution conditions, different conditions are stored for each type (model) of gaming machine.

  According to the feature E2, since the process execution unit acquires the calculation execution condition stored in the first calculation execution condition storage unit, the calculation execution condition set for each type (model) of the gaming machine is established. Operations can be performed in some cases.

[Feature E3]
A gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2,
The process execution means includes
A gaming machine comprising: erase means for erasing information relating to the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means after the computation execution means has performed the computation.

  According to the feature E3, after the calculation execution unit executes the calculation, the information on the number of game balls stored in the number information storage unit is deleted, so that the information on the number of game balls is stored in the number information storage unit again. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, the storage capacity required for the number information storage means can be reduced.

[Feature E4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3,
Game history information transmitting means (CPU 308) for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine. To play.

  According to the feature E4, since the game history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device can display the game history information of the gaming machine. Then, the inspector of the gaming machine can check the game history information displayed on the predetermined device.

[Feature E5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information stored in the game history information storage means.

  According to the feature E5, since the game history information is displayed on the display unit of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine can use the gaming history of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information. Information can be confirmed.

<Feature F group>
The feature F group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature F1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area (game ball launching mechanism 81);
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed a predetermined area;
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
Process execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising
The process execution means includes
Prize ball number information storage means (award ball number data) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data), which is information relating to the number of game balls (award ball number) to be paid out as a prize ball set for each of the plurality of detection means. Ball data storage memory 306);
Number information storage means (register 304) for storing information on the number of game balls detected by the detection means;
Each time a predetermined time (one hour) elapses, based on information relating to the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means and the prize ball number information stored in the prize ball number information storage means. Calculation execution means (CPU 308) for calculating game history information (such as an accessory ratio), which is information related to the game history,
A game history information storage means (calculation result storage memory 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation execution means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature F1, the game history information is calculated every time a predetermined time elapses, so the inspector of the gaming machine can check the game history information calculated by statistical processing using the concept of time, It is possible to appropriately determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the game soundness can be improved.

[Feature F2]
The gaming machine according to Feature F1,
As a calculation execution condition that is a condition for executing the calculation, a first calculation execution condition storage unit (main-side ROM 63) that stores information related to a time interval for executing the calculation,
The process execution means includes
Calculation execution condition acquisition means for acquiring the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage means;
Second calculation execution condition storage means (calculation execution condition storage memory 307) for storing the acquired calculation execution condition;
With
The calculation execution means executes the calculation when the calculation execution condition stored in the second calculation execution condition storage means is satisfied.

  When the type (model) of the gaming machine is different, the characteristics of the game are also different, so that the optimum conditions for executing the calculation for calculating the game history information are also different. For this reason, as the calculation execution conditions, different conditions are stored for each type (model) of gaming machine.

  According to the feature F2, since the process execution unit acquires the calculation execution condition stored in the first calculation execution condition storage unit, the calculation execution condition set for each type (model) of the gaming machine is established. Operations can be performed in some cases.

[Feature F3]
A gaming machine according to Feature F1 or Feature F2,
A measuring means for measuring an elapsed time after the calculation is performed;
Determining means for determining whether or not a game is being played by the player;
With
The gaming machine is characterized by interrupting the measurement of the elapsed time during a period in which it is determined that the game is not being performed by the determination unit.

  According to the feature F3, in the period in which it is determined that the game is not performed, the measurement of the elapsed time since the calculation is interrupted, so that only the period in which the game is actually performed is targeted. History information can be calculated.

[Feature F4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3,
Game history information transmitting means (CPU 308) for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine. To play.

  According to the feature F4, since the game history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device can display the game history information of the gaming machine. Then, the inspector of the gaming machine can check the game history information displayed on the predetermined device.

[Feature F5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information stored in the game history information storage means.

  According to the feature F5, since the game history information is displayed on the display unit of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine can use the gaming history of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for confirming the gaming history information. Information can be confirmed.

<Feature G group>
The feature G group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature G1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area (game ball launching mechanism 81);
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed a predetermined area;
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
Process execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
Monitoring means (power failure monitoring circuit 86) for monitoring the occurrence of power interruption;
A gaming machine comprising
The process execution means includes
Prize ball number information storage means (award ball number data) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data), which is information relating to the number of game balls (award ball number) to be paid out as a prize ball set for each of the plurality of detection means. Ball data storage memory 306);
Number information storage means (register 304) for storing information on the number of game balls detected by the detection means;
When the monitoring means detects the occurrence of power interruption, the information on the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means and the prize ball number information stored in the prize ball number information storage means Calculation execution means (CPU 308) for calculating game history information (such as an accessory ratio) that is information related to a game history by executing a calculation based on
A game history information storage means (calculation result storage memory 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation execution means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature G1, since the game history information is calculated when the occurrence of power interruption is detected, it is detected during the period from the start of power supply to the gaming machine until the occurrence of power interruption. The game history information can be calculated based on the number of game balls. That is, the game history information is calculated for each business day of the game hall since the game history information is calculated for each period from the start to the end of the game hall business. Therefore, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily grasp whether or not the characteristics of the gaming history information have changed across the business days of the gaming hall, so that the gaming machine has not been illegally modified. It becomes possible to judge appropriately. As a result, the game soundness can be improved.

[Feature G2]
A gaming machine according to feature G1,
A gaming machine comprising supply means (capacitor) for supplying power to the arithmetic execution means even after the power supply is cut off.

  According to the feature G2, since supply means for supplying power to the calculation execution means even after power interruption occurs, calculation of game history information by the calculation execution means and game history information storage means for game history information It is possible to reliably complete the storage in the memory.

[Feature G3]
A gaming machine according to Feature G1 or Feature G2,
Game history information transmitting means (CPU 308) for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine. To play.

  According to the feature G3, the game history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to the predetermined device, so that the predetermined device can display the game history information of the gaming machine. Then, the inspector of the gaming machine can check the game history information displayed on the predetermined device.

[Feature G4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information stored in the game history information storage means.

  According to the feature G4, since the game history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine can use the gaming history of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for confirming the gaming history information. Information can be confirmed.

<Feature H group>
The feature H group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature H1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area (game ball launching mechanism 81);
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed a predetermined area;
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
An informing means for informing in a predetermined case;
Process execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising
The process execution means includes
Prize ball number information storage means (award ball number data) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data), which is information relating to the number of game balls (award ball number) to be paid out as a prize ball set for each of the plurality of detection means. Ball data storage memory 306);
Number information storage means (register 304) for storing information on the number of game balls detected by the detection means;
Based on the information on the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means and the prize ball number information stored in the prize ball number information storage means, game history information which is information on game history A calculation means (CPU 308) for calculating (a ratio of an accessory)
Game history information storage means (operation result storage memory 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
With
The notifying means notifies when the game history information stored in the game history information storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

  According to the feature H1, since the notification is made when the game history information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily find a gaming machine whose game history information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. it can. Then, by checking the game history information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the game soundness can be improved.

[Feature H2]
A gaming machine according to feature H1,
The notification means notifies when a specific value (such as a payout ratio) included in the game history information stored in the game history information storage means is not included in a predetermined range. Machine.

  According to the feature H2, when the specific value included in the game history information is no longer included in the predetermined range, the inspector of the gaming machine has the specific value included in the game history information within the predetermined range. It is possible to easily find gaming machines that are no longer included in the list. Then, by checking the game history information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the game soundness can be improved.

[Feature H3]
A gaming machine according to feature H2,
The informing means determines an informing mode (color of the LED lamp) according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

  According to the feature H3, the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation of a specific value from a predetermined range, so that the inspector of the gaming machine can determine which specific value included in the game history information It can be easily grasped whether there is a deviation.

[Feature H4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3,
The informing means includes display means for performing a predetermined display as the informing.

  According to the feature H4, since the display unit that performs a predetermined display as a notification is provided, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the gaming history information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

[Feature H5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4,
Game history information transmitting means (CPU 308) for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine. To play.

  According to the feature H5, the gaming history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to the predetermined device, so that the predetermined device can display the gaming history information of the gaming machine. Then, the inspector of the gaming machine can check the game history information displayed on the predetermined device.

[Feature H6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information stored in the game history information storage means.

  According to the feature H6, since the game history information is displayed on the display unit of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine can use the gaming history of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for confirming the gaming history information. Information can be confirmed.

<Feature I group>
The feature group I is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature I1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area (game ball launching mechanism 81);
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed a predetermined area;
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
Process execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising
The process execution means includes
Prize ball number information storage means (award ball number data) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data), which is information relating to the number of game balls (award ball number) to be paid out as a prize ball set for each of the plurality of detection means. Ball data storage memory 306);
Every time a game ball is detected by the detection means, a ball entry information storage means (entrance information storage memory 309b) that sequentially stores the ball entry information, which is information indicating that the game ball has been detected by the detection means. When,
With respect to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine, the winning ball stored in the incoming ball information storage means and the winning ball number information storage means are stored in the winning ball information storage means. Transmitting means (CPU 308) for transmitting number information;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature I1, since the entry information and the winning ball number information are transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device is information relating to the game history based on the entering information and the winning ball number information. The game history information can be calculated within an arbitrary range. Therefore, the inspector of the gaming machine can check the gaming history information of the gaming machine calculated within an arbitrary range by using a predetermined device, and appropriately check whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. It becomes possible to judge. As a result, the game soundness can be improved.

[Feature I2]
A gaming machine according to feature I1,
Date and time information acquisition means (RTC 96) for acquiring date and time information that is information related to date and time,
The game machine characterized in that the entry information storage means stores the entry information by adding the date and time information corresponding to the date and time when the game ball was detected by the detection means.

  According to the feature I2, the predetermined device that has received the ball entry information with the date / time information added can calculate the game history information by designating the date / time range. Therefore, the inspector of the gaming machine can make a detailed inspection based on the game history information specifying the date and time range. In addition, if the predetermined device displays the ball entry information to which the date and time information is added, the inspector of the gaming machine can also grasp the date and time when the game ball is detected by each detection means. .

[Feature I3]
A gaming machine according to Feature I1 or Feature I2,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the entry information stored in the entry information storage means.

  According to the feature I3, since the entrance information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine can enter the entrance of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for confirming the entrance information. Information can be confirmed.

<Feature J group>
The feature J group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature J1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area (game ball launching mechanism 81);
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed a predetermined area;
Prize ball number information storage means (main ball data) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data), which is information relating to the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls set for each of the plurality of detection means (prize ball number data) Side ROM 63),
A game progression process (a jackpot lottery process, an electric role release lottery process, a prize ball payout process, a symbol on the main display unit 45, which is a process for proceeding with a game based on the detection of the game ball by the detecting means. (Variable display processing, opening / closing processing of the door 36b and the electric accessory 34a, etc.) and the detection information of the game ball detected by the detection means and the prize ball stored in the prize ball number information storage means Processing execution means (main CPU 62x) for executing processing for calculating game history information (such as an accessory ratio) that is information related to the history of the game by performing an operation based on the number information;
Game history information storage means (main side RAM 64, flash memory 64x) for storing the game history information calculated by the processing execution means while being stored in the casing of the gaming machine main body;
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature J1, game history information storage means for storing game history information is provided. Since the game history information is information having a correlation with the behavior of the game ball in the game, the game history information is different for each gaming machine and is information unique to the gaming machine. That is, the game history information is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to the feature J1, game history information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, is stored in the gaming history information storage means stored in the housing of the gaming machine body. Thus, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, it is possible to inspect the characteristics of the gaming machine by obtaining gaming history information from the gaming machine body itself. When the gaming machine is installed in the gaming hall, the gaming machine can acquire information on the characteristics of the gaming machine using a hall computer installed in the gaming hall. However, since gaming machines circulate frequently, they may be placed in a state where they are not connected to the hall computer. In this case, in a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to acquire information on characteristics of the gaming machine. Can not. The gaming machine of feature J1 stores gaming history information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, in gaming history information storage means stored in the casing of the gaming machine body, so that the gaming machine is connected to the hall computer. Even if it is not in a state, game history information can be acquired from the gaming machine main body. That is, according to the feature J1, a gaming machine and gaming history information can be linked one-on-one, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected. As a result, the game soundness can be improved.

  Furthermore, according to the feature J1, since the single process execution means executes the game progress process and the process of calculating the game history information, it is necessary to provide another arithmetic chip or the like for executing the calculation process. In addition, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

[Feature J2]
A gaming machine according to feature J1,
The process execution means includes
A first mode (game mode) that is a mode capable of executing the game progress process;
When the first condition is satisfied (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is executed, when an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is executed, the inspection terminal 65 is connected to the inspection machine The second mode (inspection mode), which is a mode executed when 320 is connected, when a predetermined time comes, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer;
Is possible and
In the second mode, the game machine is configured not to execute the game progress process even when the game ball passes through the predetermined area.

  According to the feature J2, since the second mode in which the game progress process is not executed can be executed even when the game ball passes a predetermined area, it is not preferable to execute it in parallel with the game progress process. In the second mode, it is possible to execute a process or a process that is likely to cause a problem when executed in parallel with the game progress process. Further, according to the feature J2, since the game progress process is not executed in the second mode, when the program of the process to be executed in the second mode is developed, the game progress process is executed in parallel. Since measures need not be taken into consideration, the development efficiency of a program for processing executed in the second mode can be greatly improved.

[Feature J3]
A gaming machine according to feature J2,
The gaming machine, wherein the second mode is a mode for outputting the gaming history information.

  The game history information is information whose contents change when a game ball is detected and a game progress process is executed. Therefore, if a configuration that executes a process of outputting game history information in parallel with the game progress process is adopted, the game progress is performed while the inspector of the gaming machine inspects the characteristics of the gaming machine with the game history information. When the process is executed, the content of the game history information may change at any time, and it may be difficult to perform the inspection smoothly. On the other hand, according to the feature J3, since the game history information is output in the second mode in which the game progress process is not executed even when the game ball passes a predetermined area, the game history information is output. The content of the game history information can be prevented from changing during the game. As a result, the inspector of the gaming machine can perform the inspection smoothly.

[Feature J4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3,
The process execution means includes
A first mode (game mode) that is a mode capable of executing the game progress process;
When the first condition is satisfied (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is executed, when an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is executed, the inspection terminal 65 is connected to the inspection machine The second mode (inspection mode), which is a mode executed when 320 is connected, when a predetermined time comes, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer;
Is possible and
When the first condition is satisfied during execution of the game progress process in the first mode (when the operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, the power button is pressed while pressing the mode switching button. When the operation is performed, when the inspection machine 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, or when a predetermined time comes, the timing at which the second condition is satisfied (the symbol variation display process ends) Transition from the first mode to the second mode at the timing when the game progress process such as the completed timing is completed up to a predetermined processing stage, the timing when all of the game progress processes being executed are completed) A gaming machine characterized by being configured to do so.

  According to the feature J4, when the first condition is satisfied in the first mode, the first mode is shifted to the second mode at the timing when the second condition is satisfied. Therefore, the second mode is compared with the configuration in which the first mode is shifted to the second mode at the timing immediately after the first condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the second condition is satisfied. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems in processing when shifting to.

  For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the first mode is shifted to the second mode at the timing immediately after the first condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the second condition is satisfied, If the first condition that the predetermined operation is executed during the period in which the symbol variation display process as the game progress process is being executed in the mode of the game, the second is displayed in the middle of the symbol variation display. This makes it difficult to control the timing of symbol stop and the time for symbol change. On the other hand, according to the feature J4, for example, the first condition that a predetermined operation is executed during the period in which the symbol variation display process as the game progress process is executed in the first mode is If it is established, the second mode is entered at the timing when the second condition that the symbol variation display process is not executed, that is, the timing after the symbol during variation display is stopped. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems such as difficulty in controlling the timing of symbol stop and control of symbol variation time.

[Feature J5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J4,
The process execution means includes
A first mode (game mode) that is a mode capable of executing the game progress process;
When the first condition is satisfied (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is executed, when an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is executed, the inspection terminal 65 is connected to the inspection machine The second mode (inspection mode), which is a mode executed when 320 is connected, when a predetermined time comes, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer;
Is possible and
When the third condition is satisfied during the second mode (when 10 minutes have passed since the transition to the inspection mode), an operation for shifting from the second mode to the first mode Even if the transition operation (operation of pressing the mode switching button, operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button) is not executed, the first mode is switched from the second mode to the first mode. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to enter a mode.

  According to the feature J5, when the third condition is satisfied during the second mode, even if the transition operation for shifting from the second mode to the first mode is not executed, Since it is configured to shift from the second mode to the first mode, it is possible to prevent the transition operation from being performed and not returning to the first mode. For example, after the transition to the second mode, the administrator or inspector of the gaming machine forgets to perform the transition operation, and the gaming machine does not return to the first mode in which the game progress process can be executed, It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where a person cannot play a game with the gaming machine.

[Feature J6]
A gaming machine according to feature J5,
The third condition is that a predetermined time elapses from a predetermined time (10 minutes elapses from the time of transition to the inspection mode).

  According to feature J6, when a predetermined time has elapsed from a predetermined time during the second mode, a transition operation for shifting from the second mode to the first mode is not performed. However, since it is configured to shift from the second mode to the first mode, it is possible to reliably prevent the transition operation from being performed and not returning to the first mode. For example, even if the administrator of the gaming machine, the inspector, etc. forget to execute the transition operation after the transition to the second mode, if the predetermined time elapses from the predetermined time, the first Since returning to the mode, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the gaming machine does not return to the first mode in which the game progress process can be executed and the player cannot play a game with the gaming machine.

[Feature J7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J6,
Game progress processing information storage means (main-side RAM 64) that is stored in the casing of the gaming machine main body and stores information related to the game progress processing;
Based on the execution of an erasing operation (an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button), which is an operation for erasing information stored in the game progress processing information storage means Erasing means for erasing information stored in the progress processing information storage means;
With
The process execution means includes
A first mode (game mode) that is a mode capable of executing the game progress process;
When the first condition is satisfied (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is executed, when an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is executed, the inspection terminal 65 is connected to the inspection machine The second mode (inspection mode), which is a mode executed when 320 is connected, when a predetermined time comes, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer;
Is possible and
In the state after the transition to the second mode and before the transition to the first mode (the state in the inspection mode, the state where the power is turned off as it is after the transition to the inspection mode), Even if it is a case where the said erasure | elimination operation is performed, it is comprised so that the information memorize | stored in the said game progress process information storage means may not be erased.

  According to the feature J7, in the state after the transition to the second mode and before the transition to the first mode, an erasing operation for erasing the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means is executed. Even if it is a case, since the information memorize | stored in the game progress process information memory | storage means is not erase | eliminated, in the state after transfering to 2nd mode and before shifting to 1st mode, it is in 1st mode Even when an erasing operation is mistakenly executed in an attempt to shift, it is possible to prevent the information from being erased by mistake.

  For example, the erasing operation for erasing the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means is an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the erasing button, and the first mode and the second mode In the configuration in which the operation for shifting the mode between the two modes is an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the transition button, the transition button is tried to shift from the second mode to the first mode. Although the user intends to press the power button while pressing, there is a risk that the power button will be pressed by mistake while pressing the delete button. However, according to the feature J7, in the state after the transition to the second mode but before the transition to the first mode, an operation of erroneously pressing the power button while pressing the delete button is executed. Even if it is a case, it can suppress that the said information is deleted accidentally.

  More specifically, for example, when shifting from the first mode to the second mode, the game progress process executed in the first mode is temporarily stopped and the stopped game progress process is performed. In the case of adopting a configuration in which information for resuming the game after returning to the second mode is stored in the game progress processing information storage means, a transition button is pressed to return to the first mode from the second mode. If you intend to press the power button while pressing, but accidentally press the power button while pressing the delete button, the information for resuming the game progress process will be deleted. After returning to this mode, the game progress process cannot be resumed, which may cause a disadvantage to the player. On the other hand, according to the feature J7, in the state after the transition to the second mode and before the transition to the first mode, the erasing button is erroneously pressed to shift to the first mode. However, even if the power button is pressed, information stored in the game progress processing information storage means can be prevented from being accidentally erased. Can be suppressed.

[Feature J8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J7,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information.

  According to the feature J8, since the game history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine can use the gaming history of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for confirming the gaming history information. Information can be confirmed.

[Feature J9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J8,
The game history information storage means is constituted by a non-volatile memory (flash memory 64x) capable of holding memory even when power supply is cut off.

  According to the feature J9, since the game history information is retained even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the gaming machine is placed in any state (for example, a distribution state where power is not supplied to the gaming machine). However, the gaming machine and the game history information can always be in a one-to-one relationship, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected.

[Feature J10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J9,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the game history information storage means is stored inside a casing (a substrate box to which a seal seal is attached) in which traces of opening and closing remain.

  According to the feature J10, game history information storage means is stored in the inside of the case where the opening / closing trace remains. Therefore, when physical contact is made with the game history information storage means, a trace of opening the case remains. Therefore, if the game history information stored in the game history information storage means is modified through physical contact with the game history information storage means, the fact that it has been modified is grasped from the trace of the housing. Is possible. Therefore, unauthorized modification of game history information can be prevented. Since some gaming machines circulate in various ways, various external contacts are made in the process of being distributed, but since the game history information storage means is stored inside the casing where traces of opening and closing remain, Even in a situation where game machines are constantly circulating, it is possible to suppress unauthorized modification of game history information by somebody. In addition, since the game history information is information acquired based on the executed game, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics of the gaming machine using the game history information. Therefore, according to the feature J10, the gaming machine can be appropriately managed and inspected by preventing unauthorized modification of the gaming history information reflecting the gaming-related characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the game soundness can be improved.

[Feature J11]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J10,
A gaming machine comprising: notification means for notifying when the game history information stored in the game history information storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

  According to the feature J11, since the notification is made when the game history information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily find the gaming machine whose game history information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. it can. Then, by checking the game history information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the game soundness can be improved.

[Feature J12]
A gaming machine described in feature J11,
The notification means notifies when a specific value (such as a payout ratio) included in the game history information stored in the game history information storage means is not included in a predetermined range. Machine.

  According to the feature J12, when the specific value included in the game history information is no longer included in the predetermined range, the inspector of the gaming machine has the specific value included in the game history information within the predetermined range. It is possible to easily find gaming machines that are no longer included in the list. Then, by checking the game history information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the game soundness can be improved.

[Feature J13]
A gaming machine described in feature J12,
The informing means determines an informing mode (color of the LED lamp) according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

  According to the feature J13, since the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation of a specific value from a predetermined range, the inspector of the gaming machine can determine which specific value included in the game history information It can be easily grasped whether there is a deviation.

[Feature J14]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J11 to J13,
The informing means includes display means for performing a predetermined display as the informing.

  According to the feature J14, since the display unit that performs a predetermined display as a notification is provided, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the gaming history information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

<Feature K group>
The feature K group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature K1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area (game ball launching mechanism 81);
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed a predetermined area;
A game progression process (a jackpot lottery process, an electric role release lottery process, a prize ball payout process, a symbol on the main display unit 45, which is a process for proceeding with a game based on the detection of the game ball by the detecting means. Game progress processing execution means (main-side CPU 62x) for executing fluctuation display processing, opening / closing processing of the door 36b and the electric accessory 34a, and the like;
With
The game progress process execution means includes
A first mode (game mode) that is a mode capable of executing the game progress process;
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, when an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is performed, the inspection machine 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65. A second mode (inspection mode), which is a mode executed when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer)
Is possible and
In the second mode, the game machine is configured not to execute the game progress process even when the game ball passes through the predetermined area.

  According to the feature K1, it is possible to execute the second mode in which the game progress process is not executed even when the game ball passes a predetermined area, and therefore it is not preferable to execute it in parallel with the game progress process. In the second mode, it is possible to execute a process or a process that is likely to cause a problem when executed in parallel with the game progress process. Further, according to the feature K1, since the game progress process is not executed in the second mode, when the program of the process to be executed in the second mode is developed, the game progress process is executed in parallel. Since measures need not be taken into consideration, the development efficiency of a program for processing executed in the second mode can be greatly improved.

[Feature K2]
A gaming machine according to the feature K1,
Detection information (game information including game information, information about the number of games entered, and ratios of game objects, etc.) that is stored in the casing of the gaming machine main body and is information based on the fact that a game ball has been detected by the detection means ) Storage means (calculation result storage memory 309, incoming ball number storage memory 309a, incoming ball information storage memory 309b, main RAM 64, flash memory 64x),
The gaming machine, wherein the second mode is a mode for outputting the detection information.

  According to the feature K2, the detection information can be stored and the detection information can be output in the second mode. Since the detection information is information having a correlation with the behavior of the game ball in the game, the detection information differs for each gaming machine and is information unique to the gaming machine. That is, the detection information is information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to the feature K2, the detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, is stored in the storage means stored in the casing of the gaming machine body. Thus, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by obtaining detection information from the gaming machine body itself. When the gaming machine is installed in the gaming hall, the gaming machine can acquire information on the characteristics of the gaming machine using a hall computer installed in the gaming hall. However, since gaming machines circulate frequently, they may be placed in a state where they are not connected to the hall computer. In this case, in a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to acquire information on characteristics of the gaming machine. Can not. The gaming machine of feature K2 stores the detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, in the storage means stored in the casing of the gaming machine body, so that the gaming machine is not connected to the hall computer. Even if it exists, detection information can be acquired from the said gaming machine main body. That is, according to the feature K2, a gaming machine and detection information can be in a one-to-one relationship, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected. As a result, the game soundness can be improved.

  The detection information is information whose contents change when a game ball is detected and a game progress process is executed. Therefore, if a configuration for executing the process of outputting the detection information in parallel with the game progress process is adopted, the game progress process is performed while the inspector of the game machine inspects the characteristics of the game machine by the detection information. When it is executed, the content of the detection information may change from time to time, and it may be difficult to carry out the inspection smoothly. On the other hand, according to the feature K2, the detection information is output because the detection information is output in the second mode in which the game progress process is not executed even when the game ball passes through the predetermined area. It can suppress that the content of the said detection information changes in the meantime. As a result, the inspector of the gaming machine can perform the inspection smoothly.

[Feature K3]
A gaming machine according to feature K2,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information output in the second mode.

  According to the feature K3, since the detection information is displayed on the display unit of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine can check the detection information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the detection information. can do.

[Feature K4]
A gaming machine according to feature K2 or feature K3,
The storage means is a non-volatile memory that can hold the memory even when the power supply is cut off (the calculation result storage memory 309, the number-of-balls storage memory 309a, the ball-entry information storage memory 309b, the flash A gaming machine comprising a memory 64x).

  According to the feature K4, since the detection information is retained even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the gaming machine is placed in any state (for example, a distribution state where power is not supplied to the gaming machine). In addition, the gaming machine and the detection information can always be in a one-to-one relationship, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected.

[Feature K5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features K2 to K4,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the storage means is stored inside a casing (a substrate box to which a seal seal is affixed) where traces of opening and closing are left.

  According to the feature K5, the storage unit is stored inside the casing where the opening and closing traces remain. Therefore, when the storage means is physically contacted, a trace of opening the housing remains. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the storage unit is modified through physical contact with the storage unit, it can be grasped from the trace of the housing. Therefore, unauthorized modification of detection information can be prevented. Since some gaming machines circulate constantly, various external contacts are made in the process of being distributed, but since the storage means is stored inside the case where the opening and closing traces remain, the gaming machine Even in a situation where the information is constantly circulated, it is possible to suppress unauthorized modification of detection information by somebody. In addition, since the detection information is information acquired based on the executed game, it is possible to manage and inspect the game characteristics of the gaming machine using the detection information. Therefore, according to the feature K5, it is possible to properly manage and inspect the gaming machine by preventing unauthorized modification of the detection information that reflects the gaming-related characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the game soundness can be improved.

[Feature K6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features K2 to K5,
A gaming machine comprising: notification means for notifying when the detection information stored in the storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

  According to the feature K6, since the notification is made when the detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily find the gaming machine whose detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Then, by confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the game soundness can be improved.

[Feature K7]
A gaming machine according to Feature K6,
The notifying means notifies when a specific value (such as a payout ratio) included in the detection information stored in the storage means is not included in a predetermined range.

  According to the feature K7, when the specific value included in the detection information is not included in the predetermined range, the inspector of the gaming machine includes the specific value included in the detection information in the predetermined range. Easily find gaming machines that are no longer available. Then, by confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the game soundness can be improved.

[Feature K8]
A gaming machine according to feature K7,
The informing means determines an informing mode (color of the LED lamp) according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

  According to the feature K8, the notification mode is determined according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range, so the inspector of the gaming machine can determine how much the specific value included in the detection information is within the predetermined range. It is possible to easily grasp whether there is a divergence.

[Feature K9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features K6 to K8,
The informing means includes display means for performing a predetermined display as the informing.

  According to the feature K9, since the display unit that performs a predetermined display as notification is provided, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the detection information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

<Feature L group>
The feature L group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature L1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area (game ball launching mechanism 81);
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed a predetermined area;
A game progression process (a jackpot lottery process, an electric role release lottery process, a prize ball payout process, a symbol on the main display unit 45, which is a process for proceeding with a game based on the detection of the game ball by the detecting means. Game progress processing execution means (main-side CPU 62x) for executing fluctuation display processing, opening / closing processing of the door 36b and the electric accessory 34a, and the like;
With
The game progress process execution means includes
A first mode (game mode) that is a mode capable of executing the game progress process;
When the first condition is satisfied (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is executed, when an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is executed, the inspection terminal 65 is connected to the inspection machine The second mode (inspection mode), which is a mode executed when 320 is connected, when a predetermined time comes, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer;
Is possible and
When the first condition is satisfied during execution of the game progress process in the first mode (when the operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, the power button is pressed while pressing the mode switching button. When the operation is performed, when the inspection machine 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, or when a predetermined time comes, the timing at which the second condition is satisfied (the symbol variation display process ends) Transition from the first mode to the second mode at the timing when the game progress process such as the completed timing is completed up to a predetermined processing stage, the timing when all of the game progress processes being executed are completed) A gaming machine characterized by being configured to do so.

  According to the feature L1, when the first condition is satisfied in the first mode, the first mode is shifted to the second mode at the timing when the second condition is satisfied. Therefore, the second mode is compared with the configuration in which the first mode is shifted to the second mode at the timing immediately after the first condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the second condition is satisfied. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems in processing when shifting to.

  For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the first mode is shifted to the second mode at the timing immediately after the first condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the second condition is satisfied, If the first condition that the predetermined operation is executed during the period in which the symbol variation display process as the game progress process is being executed in the mode of the game, the second is displayed in the middle of the symbol variation display. This makes it difficult to control the timing of symbol stop and the time for symbol change. On the other hand, according to the feature L1, for example, the first condition that a predetermined operation is executed during the period in which the symbol variation display process as the game progress process is executed in the first mode is If it is established, the second mode is entered at the timing when the second condition that the symbol variation display process is not executed, that is, the timing after the symbol during variation display is stopped. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems such as difficulty in controlling the timing of symbol stop and control of symbol variation time.

[Feature L2]
A gaming machine according to feature L1,
Detection information (game information including game information, information about the number of games entered, and ratios of game objects, etc.) that is stored in the casing of the gaming machine main body and is information based on the fact that a game ball has been detected by the detection means ) Storage means (calculation result storage memory 309, incoming ball number storage memory 309a, incoming ball information storage memory 309b, main RAM 64, flash memory 64x),
The gaming machine, wherein the second mode is a mode for outputting the detection information.

  According to the feature L2, it is possible to store the detection information and output the detection information in the second mode. Since the detection information is information having a correlation with the behavior of the game ball in the game, the detection information differs for each gaming machine and is information unique to the gaming machine. That is, the detection information is information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to the feature L2, the detection information which is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine is stored in the storage means stored in the casing of the gaming machine main body. Thus, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by obtaining detection information from the gaming machine body itself. When the gaming machine is installed in the gaming hall, the gaming machine can acquire information on the characteristics of the gaming machine using a hall computer installed in the gaming hall. However, since gaming machines circulate frequently, they may be placed in a state where they are not connected to the hall computer. In this case, in a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to acquire information on characteristics of the gaming machine. Can not. The gaming machine of feature L2 stores the detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, in the storage means stored in the casing of the gaming machine body, so that the gaming machine is not connected to the hall computer. Even if it exists, detection information can be acquired from the said gaming machine main body. That is, according to the feature L2, the gaming machine and the detection information can be in a one-to-one relationship, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected. As a result, the game soundness can be improved.

[Feature L3]
A gaming machine according to feature L2,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information output in the second mode.

  According to the feature L3, since the detection information is displayed on the display unit of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine can check the detection information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the detection information. can do.

[Feature L4]
The gaming machine according to the feature L2 or the feature L3,
The storage means is a non-volatile memory that can hold the memory even when the power supply is cut off (the calculation result storage memory 309, the number-of-balls storage memory 309a, the ball-entry information storage memory 309b, the flash A gaming machine comprising a memory 64x).

  According to the feature L4, since the detection information is retained even when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the gaming machine is placed in any state (for example, a distribution state where power is not supplied to the gaming machine). In addition, the gaming machine and the detection information can always be in a one-to-one relationship, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected.

[Feature L5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features L2 to L4,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the storage means is stored inside a casing (a substrate box to which a seal seal is affixed) where traces of opening and closing are left.

  According to the feature L5, the storage unit is stored inside the casing where the opening and closing traces remain. Therefore, when the storage means is physically contacted, a trace of opening the housing remains. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the storage unit is modified through physical contact with the storage unit, it can be grasped from the trace of the housing. Therefore, unauthorized modification of detection information can be prevented. Since some gaming machines circulate constantly, various external contacts are made in the process of being distributed, but since the storage means is stored inside the case where the opening and closing traces remain, the gaming machine Even in a situation where the information is constantly circulated, it is possible to suppress unauthorized modification of detection information by somebody. In addition, since the detection information is information acquired based on the executed game, it is possible to manage and inspect the game characteristics of the gaming machine using the detection information. Therefore, according to the feature L5, it is possible to properly manage and inspect the gaming machine by preventing unauthorized modification of the detection information that reflects the gaming-related characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the game soundness can be improved.

[Feature L6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features L2 to L5,
A gaming machine comprising: notification means for notifying when the detection information stored in the storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

  According to the feature L6, since the notification is made when the detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily find the gaming machine whose detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Then, by confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the game soundness can be improved.

[Feature L7]
A gaming machine according to Feature L6,
The notifying means notifies when a specific value (such as a payout ratio) included in the detection information stored in the storage means is not included in a predetermined range.

  According to the feature L7, when the specific value included in the detection information is not included in the predetermined range, the inspector of the gaming machine includes the specific value included in the detection information in the predetermined range. Easily find gaming machines that are no longer available. Then, by confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the game soundness can be improved.

[Feature L8]
The gaming machine according to Feature L7,
The informing means determines an informing mode (color of the LED lamp) according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

  According to the feature L8, since the notification mode is determined according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range, the inspector of the gaming machine can determine how much the specific value included in the detection information is within the predetermined range. It is possible to easily grasp whether there is a divergence.

[Feature L9]
The gaming machine according to any one of features L6 to L8,
The informing means includes display means for performing a predetermined display as the informing.

  According to the feature L9, since the display unit that performs a predetermined display as a notification is provided, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the detection information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

<Feature M group>
The feature M group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature M1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area (game ball launching mechanism 81);
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed a predetermined area;
A game progression process (a jackpot lottery process, an electric role release lottery process, a prize ball payout process, a symbol on the main display unit 45, which is a process for proceeding with a game based on the detection of the game ball by the detecting means. Game progress processing execution means (main-side CPU 62x) for executing fluctuation display processing, opening / closing processing of the door 36b and the electric accessory 34a, and the like;
With
The game progress process execution means includes
A first mode (game mode) that is a mode capable of executing the game progress process;
When the first condition is satisfied (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is executed, when an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is executed, the inspection terminal 65 is connected to the inspection machine The second mode (inspection mode), which is a mode executed when 320 is connected, when a predetermined time comes, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer;
Is possible and
When the second condition is satisfied during the second mode (when 10 minutes have passed since the transition to the inspection mode), a predetermined value for shifting from the second mode to the first mode Even if the operation (the operation of pressing the mode switching button, the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button) is not executed, the second mode is changed to the first mode. A gaming machine that is configured to migrate.

  According to the feature M1, when the second condition is satisfied during the second mode, even if a predetermined operation for shifting from the second mode to the first mode is not executed. Since it is configured to shift from the second mode to the first mode, it is possible to prevent a predetermined operation from being performed and not returning to the first mode. For example, after the transition to the second mode, the administrator or inspector of the gaming machine forgets to perform a predetermined operation, the gaming machine does not return to the first mode in which the game progress process can be performed, Occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot play a game with the gaming machine can be suppressed.

[Feature M2]
A gaming machine according to the feature M1,
The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the second condition is that a predetermined time elapses from a predetermined time point (10 minutes elapses from the time of transition to the inspection mode).

  According to the feature M2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from a predetermined time point during the second mode, a predetermined operation for shifting from the second mode to the first mode is not executed. Even if it exists, since it is comprised so that it may transfer to 1st mode from 2nd mode, it can suppress reliably that it does not perform predetermined operation but does not return to 1st mode. For example, even if the administrator or inspector of the gaming machine has forgotten to perform a predetermined operation after the transition to the second mode, the first is performed if a predetermined time elapses from a predetermined time point. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game machine does not return to the first mode in which the game progress process can be executed and the player cannot play a game with the game machine.

[Feature M3]
A gaming machine according to the feature M1 or the feature M2,
Detection information (game information including game information, information about the number of games entered, and ratios of game objects, etc.) that is stored in the casing of the gaming machine main body and is information based on the fact that a game ball has been detected by the detection means ) Storage means (calculation result storage memory 309, incoming ball number storage memory 309a, incoming ball information storage memory 309b, main RAM 64, flash memory 64x),
The gaming machine, wherein the second mode is a mode for outputting the detection information.

  According to the feature M3, the detection information can be stored and the detection information can be output in the second mode. Since the detection information is information having a correlation with the behavior of the game ball in the game, the detection information differs for each gaming machine and is information unique to the gaming machine. That is, the detection information is information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to the feature M3, the detection information that is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine is stored in the storage means stored in the casing of the gaming machine main body. Thus, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by obtaining detection information from the gaming machine body itself. When the gaming machine is installed in the gaming hall, the gaming machine can acquire information on the characteristics of the gaming machine using a hall computer installed in the gaming hall. However, since gaming machines circulate frequently, they may be placed in a state where they are not connected to the hall computer. In this case, in a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to acquire information on characteristics of the gaming machine. Can not. The gaming machine of feature M3 stores the detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, in the storage means stored in the casing of the gaming machine body, so that the gaming machine is not connected to the hall computer. Even if it exists, detection information can be acquired from the said gaming machine main body. That is, according to the feature M3, the gaming machine and the detection information can be linked in a one-to-one relationship, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected. As a result, the game soundness can be improved.

  Further, according to the feature M3, after the inspector of the gaming machine inspects the characteristics of the gaming machine based on the detection information output in the second mode, the execution of the predetermined operation is forgotten, and the gaming machine It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot play a game with the gaming machine without returning to the first mode in which the progress process can be executed.

[Feature M4]
A gaming machine according to feature M3,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information output in the second mode.

  According to the feature M4, since the detection information is displayed on the display unit of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine can check the detection information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the detection information. can do.

[Feature M5]
A gaming machine according to feature M3 or feature M4,
The storage means is a non-volatile memory that can hold the memory even when the power supply is cut off (the calculation result storage memory 309, the number-of-balls storage memory 309a, the ball-entry information storage memory 309b, the flash A gaming machine comprising a memory 64x).

  According to the feature M5, since the detection information is retained even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the gaming machine is placed in any state (for example, a distribution state where power is not supplied to the gaming machine). In addition, the gaming machine and the detection information can always be in a one-to-one relationship, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected.

[Feature M6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features M3 to M5,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the storage means is stored inside a casing (a substrate box to which a seal seal is affixed) where traces of opening and closing are left.

  According to the feature M6, the storage unit is stored inside the casing where the opening and closing traces remain. Therefore, when the storage means is physically contacted, a trace of opening the housing remains. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the storage unit is modified through physical contact with the storage unit, it can be grasped from the trace of the housing. Therefore, unauthorized modification of detection information can be prevented. Since some gaming machines circulate constantly, various external contacts are made in the process of being distributed, but since the storage means is stored inside the case where the opening and closing traces remain, the gaming machine Even in a situation where the information is constantly circulated, it is possible to suppress unauthorized modification of detection information by somebody. In addition, since the detection information is information acquired based on the executed game, it is possible to manage and inspect the game characteristics of the gaming machine using the detection information. Therefore, according to the feature M6, it is possible to properly manage and inspect the gaming machine by preventing unauthorized modification of the detection information reflecting the gaming-related characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the game soundness can be improved.

[Feature M7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features M3 to M6,
A gaming machine comprising: notification means for notifying when the detection information stored in the storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

  According to the feature M7, since the notification is made when the detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily find the gaming machine whose detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Then, by confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the game soundness can be improved.

[Feature M8]
A gaming machine according to feature M7,
The notifying means notifies when a specific value (such as a payout ratio) included in the detection information stored in the storage means is not included in a predetermined range.

  According to the feature M8, when the specific value included in the detection information is not included in the predetermined range, the inspector of the gaming machine includes the specific value included in the detection information in the predetermined range. Easily find gaming machines that are no longer available. Then, by confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the game soundness can be improved.

[Feature M9]
A gaming machine according to feature M8,
The informing means determines an informing mode (color of the LED lamp) according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

  According to the feature M9, since the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range, the inspector of the gaming machine can determine how much the specific value included in the detection information is from the predetermined range. It is possible to easily grasp whether there is a divergence.

[Feature M10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features M7 to M9,
The informing means includes display means for performing a predetermined display as the informing.

  According to the feature M10, since the display unit that performs a predetermined display as notification is provided, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the detection information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

<Feature N group>
The feature N group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature N1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area (game ball launching mechanism 81);
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed a predetermined area;
A game progression process (a jackpot lottery process, an electric role release lottery process, a prize ball payout process, a symbol on the main display unit 45, which is a process for proceeding with a game based on the detection of the game ball by the detecting means. Game progress processing execution means (main-side CPU 62x) for executing fluctuation display processing, opening / closing processing of the door 36b and the electric accessory 34a, and the like;
Storage means (main-side RAM 64) that is stored in the casing of the gaming machine main body and stores information related to the game progress processing;
An erasing unit for erasing information stored in the storage unit based on execution of a predetermined operation (an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button);
With
The game progress process execution means includes
A first mode (game mode) that is a mode capable of executing the game progress process;
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (when an operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, when an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is performed, the inspection machine 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65. A second mode (inspection mode), which is a mode executed when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer)
Is possible and
In the state after the transition to the second mode and before the transition to the first mode (the state in the inspection mode, the state where the power is turned off as it is after the transition to the inspection mode), Even if it is a case where the said predetermined operation is performed, it is comprised so that the information memorize | stored in the said memory | storage means may not be deleted.

  According to the feature N1, the state after the transition to the second mode and before the transition to the first mode is when a predetermined operation for erasing the information stored in the storage means is executed. Even in such a case, the information stored in the storage means is not erased. Therefore, in the state after the transition to the second mode and before the transition to the first mode, the information is erroneously determined to shift to the first mode. Even if this operation has been executed, it is possible to prevent the information from being erased by mistake.

  For example, the predetermined operation for erasing the information stored in the storage means is an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the erasing button, and between the first mode and the second mode. In the configuration in which the operation for shifting the mode is an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the transition button, the transition button is pressed to shift from the second mode to the first mode. While the user intends to press the power button, the user may accidentally press the power button while pressing the delete button. However, according to the feature N1, in the state after the transition to the second mode but before the transition to the first mode, an operation of erroneously pressing the power button while pressing the delete button is executed. Even if it is a case, it can suppress that the said information is deleted accidentally.

  More specifically, for example, when shifting from the first mode to the second mode, the game progress process executed in the first mode is temporarily stopped and the stopped game progress process is performed. In the case of adopting a configuration in which information for resuming the operation after the return to the second mode is stored in the storage means, the power supply is pressed while pressing the transition button in order to return from the second mode to the first mode. If you intend to press the button, but accidentally press the power button while pressing the delete button, the information for resuming the game progress process will be deleted, and you will enter the second mode. After the return, the game progress process cannot be resumed, and there is a risk that the player may be disadvantaged. On the other hand, according to the feature N1, in the state after the transition to the second mode and before the transition to the first mode, the erasing button is erroneously pressed to shift to the first mode. However, even if the power button is pressed, information stored in the storage means can be prevented from being accidentally erased, so that the player is disadvantaged. Can be suppressed.

[Feature N2]
A gaming machine according to the feature N1,
Detection information (game information including game information, information about the number of games entered, and ratios of game objects, etc.) that is stored in the casing of the gaming machine main body and is information based on the fact that a game ball has been detected by the detection means Detection information storage means for storing
The game machine according to claim 2, wherein the second mode is a mode for outputting the detection information (game history information including entrance information, information on the number of entrances, and a ratio of bonuses).

  According to the feature N2, it is possible to store the detection information and output the detection information in the second mode. Since the detection information is information having a correlation with the behavior of the game ball in the game, the detection information differs for each gaming machine and is information unique to the gaming machine. That is, the detection information is information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to the feature N2, the detection information that is the information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine is stored in the detection information storage means stored in the casing of the gaming machine main body. Thus, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by obtaining detection information from the gaming machine body itself. When the gaming machine is installed in the gaming hall, the gaming machine can acquire information on the characteristics of the gaming machine using a hall computer installed in the gaming hall. However, since gaming machines circulate frequently, they may be placed in a state where they are not connected to the hall computer. In this case, in a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to acquire information on characteristics of the gaming machine. Can not. The gaming machine of feature N2 stores the sensing information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, in the sensing information sensing information storage means stored in the casing of the gaming machine body, so that the gaming machine is connected to the hall computer. Even if it is not, the detection information can be acquired from the gaming machine main body. That is, according to the feature N2, a gaming machine and detection information can be in a one-to-one relationship, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected. As a result, the game soundness can be improved.

[Feature N3]
A gaming machine described in feature N2,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information output in the second mode.

  According to the feature N3, since the detection information is displayed on the display unit of the gaming machine, the inspector of the gaming machine can check the detection information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the detection information. can do.

[Feature N4]
A gaming machine according to feature N2 or feature N3,
The gaming machine characterized in that the detection information storage means is stored inside a casing (substrate box with a seal sticker) on which an open / closed trace remains.

  According to the feature N4, the detection information storage means is stored in the inside of the case where the opening / closing trace remains. Therefore, when physical contact is made with the detection information storage means, a trace of opening the case remains. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the detection information storage means is modified through physical contact with the detection information storage means, it can be grasped from the trace of the housing. Become. Therefore, unauthorized modification of detection information can be prevented. Since some gaming machines circulate constantly, various external contacts are made during the distribution process, but since the detection information storage means is stored inside the case where the opening and closing traces remain, Even in a situation where machines are in circulation, unauthorized alteration of detection information by someone can be suppressed. In addition, since the detection information is information acquired based on the executed game, it is possible to manage and inspect the game characteristics of the gaming machine using the detection information. Therefore, according to the feature N4, it is possible to properly manage and inspect the gaming machine by preventing unauthorized modification of the detection information reflecting the gaming-related characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the game soundness can be improved.

[Feature N5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features N2 to N4,
A gaming machine comprising: notification means for notifying when the detection information stored in the detection information storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

  According to the feature N5, notification is made when the detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, so that the inspector of the gaming machine can easily find a gaming machine whose detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Then, by confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the game soundness can be improved.

[Feature N6]
A gaming machine according to feature N5,
The informing means notifies when a specific value (such as a payout ratio) included in the detection information stored in the detection information storage means is not included in a predetermined range.

  According to the feature N6, when the specific value included in the detection information is no longer included in the predetermined range, the inspector of the gaming machine includes the specific value included in the detection information in the predetermined range. Easily find gaming machines that are no longer available. Then, by confirming the detection information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the game soundness can be improved.

[Feature N7]
A gaming machine according to feature N6,
The informing means determines an informing mode (color of the LED lamp) according to the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

  According to the feature N7, since the notification mode is determined in accordance with the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range, the inspector of the gaming machine can determine how much the specific value included in the detection information is within the predetermined range. It is possible to easily grasp whether there is a divergence.

[Feature N8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features N5 to N7,
The informing means includes display means for performing a predetermined display as the informing.

  According to the feature N8, since the display unit that performs a predetermined display as notification is provided, the inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the detection information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

  Note that the invention of the above-described feature group A to feature group N solves the following problems.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure, control, production and the like for the purpose of improving the fun of games.

  Further, in addition to improving the interest of the game, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of the game, such as the discovery and deterrence of illegal acts by players and unauthorized modifications to the gaming machines.

  For example, if an illegal act (so-called goto act) is performed by a player, or a nail provided on a game board of a pachinko machine is illegally bent and modified, each entry such as a general prize opening or a start opening is made. The ratio of the game balls entering the ball opening becomes different from that originally assumed, and the performance and gameability assumed for the pachinko gaming machine may be impaired. However, it was very difficult to find such fraud.

  Such fraud may be performed by a player during business hall hours. In some cases, unauthorized modification may be performed by someone after the business hours of the game hall. Further, there may be cases where unauthorized modification is made to the game machine being transported before being installed in the game hall. Further, there may be cases where illegal modification is performed on the gaming machine before being shipped to the gaming hall. There is also the possibility that unauthorized modifications will be made before that.

  Based on such a situation, an object is to detect illegal acts and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines and improve the soundness of games.

<Feature O group>
The feature O group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the aspect 23 of the first embodiment.

[Feature O1]
A gaming machine comprising processing execution means (main CPU 62x) for starting execution of predetermined processing (timer interrupt processing) at a predetermined interval (4 msec interval),
The process execution means is capable of executing a specific process (arithmetic process for calculating game history information) as one process included in the predetermined process.
The specific process is composed of a plurality of processing stages (task 1 and task 2 in FIG. 29),
The process execution means includes
In one execution of the predetermined process, one of the plurality of process stages constituting the specific process can be executed,
A gaming machine, wherein all of the plurality of processing steps constituting the specific process are executed by executing the predetermined process a plurality of times.

  According to the characteristic O1, one processing stage among a plurality of processing stages constituting a specific process can be executed in one execution of the predetermined process, and by executing the predetermined process a plurality of times, Since all of the plurality of processing stages constituting the specific process are executed, the predetermined process is compared with the structure of executing all of the plurality of processing stages constituting the specific process in one execution of the predetermined process. The time required for one execution can be shortened. As a result, the time required for one execution of the predetermined process becomes longer than the predetermined interval for starting the execution of the predetermined process, and the predetermined process cannot be executed at the predetermined interval. Can be suppressed.

[Feature O2]
A gaming machine according to the characteristic O1,
The specific process is configured by a series of processes in which the execution order is determined,
The plurality of processing steps are obtained by dividing the series of processes constituting the specific process.
The process execution means executes one process stage (task 1 in FIG. 29) of the plurality of process stages, and then executes the process stage (task 2 in FIG. 29) executed next to the one process stage. A gaming machine characterized by specifying.

  According to the feature O2, a series of processes in which the order of execution is determined is divided, and in one execution of a predetermined process, after executing one process stage of a plurality of process stages, Since the processing stage to be executed next to the processing stage is specified, even if it is a series of processes that, when incorporated in a predetermined process, the time required for executing the predetermined process becomes longer than a predetermined interval And can be executed by being incorporated into a predetermined process executed at a predetermined interval.

[Feature O3]
A gaming machine according to feature O2,
The process execution means can execute a game progress process that is a process related to the progress of a game as a process included in the predetermined process.
The game machine characterized in that the specific process is a process (arithmetic process) different from the game progress process.

  According to the feature O3, when a process different from the game progress process (process other than the game progress process) is incorporated in the predetermined process, the time required for one execution of the predetermined process becomes longer than the predetermined interval. Even in a gaming machine configured as described above, a process different from the game progress process can be incorporated into a predetermined process executed at a predetermined interval. In addition, since the processing different from the game progress processing does not affect the progress of the game even if not executing all the processing steps in one execution of the predetermined processing, the time required for one execution of the predetermined processing Can be allocated to the execution time of the game progress process included in the predetermined process, and the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved. It should be noted that as the process different from the game progress process, various arbitrary processes can be adopted. For example, a process for calculating game history information, which is information related to a game history, or a game hall is installed. It is possible to employ a transmission process or the like that transmits information on the game situation to a hall computer at a predetermined timing.

[Feature O4]
A gaming machine described in feature O3,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific process is a calculation process (arithmetic process) that is a process of calculating game history information that is information relating to a game history.

  According to the feature O4, when the calculation process for calculating the game history information is incorporated in the predetermined process, the game is configured such that the time required for one execution of the predetermined process becomes longer than the predetermined interval. Also in the machine, the calculation process can be incorporated into a predetermined process executed at a predetermined interval. In addition, the calculation process for calculating the game history information does not affect the progress of the game even if all the processing steps are not executed in one execution of the predetermined process, and therefore is required for one execution of the predetermined process. The time can be allocated to the execution time of the game progress process included in the predetermined process, and the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved.

<Feature P group>
The feature P group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the aspect 23 of the first embodiment.

[Feature P1]
A gaming machine comprising processing execution means (main CPU 62x) for starting execution of predetermined processing (timer interrupt processing) at a predetermined interval (4 msec interval),
The process execution means includes
As one process included in the predetermined process, a specific process (prize ball counting process) can be executed,
In one execution of the predetermined process, a part of the process target candidates (2 bits) are selected from the plurality of process target candidates (8 bits in the buffer area). (Aggregating process) can be set as a process target, and the specific process can be executed on the set process target.
The gaming machine, wherein the specific process is executed for all of the plurality of process target candidates by executing the predetermined process a plurality of times.

  According to the characteristic P1, in one execution of a predetermined process, some process target candidates are set as process targets for a specific process from among a plurality of process target candidates, and the set process target is The specific process can be executed, and by executing the predetermined process a plurality of times, the specific process is executed for all of the plurality of processing target candidates. Therefore, the time required for one execution of the predetermined process can be shortened as compared with the configuration in which the specific process is executed for all of the plurality of processing target candidates in one execution of the predetermined process. As a result, the time required for one execution of the predetermined process becomes longer than the predetermined interval for starting the execution of the predetermined process, and the predetermined process cannot be executed at the predetermined interval. Can be suppressed.

[Feature P2]
A gaming machine according to feature P1,
The gaming machine characterized in that the plurality of processing target candidates are fixed in advance.

  According to the feature P2, since a plurality of processing target candidates are fixed in advance, there is no need to execute a process of selecting a plurality of processing target candidates, and the process can be simplified. Can be improved. Furthermore, the storage capacity for storing information such as programs and parameters necessary for selecting a plurality of processing target candidates can be reduced.

[Feature P3]
A gaming machine according to feature P1 or feature P2,
The processing target setting means sets the partial processing target candidates from among the plurality of processing target candidates as a processing target for the specific processing in a predetermined order. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature P3, when setting a part of the processing target candidates from among the plurality of processing target candidates as the processing target for the specific processing, the processing target for the specific processing is set in a predetermined order. It is not necessary to execute a process for determining which process target candidate to set, and the process can be simplified. As a result, the processing speed can be improved. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity for storing information such as programs and parameters necessary for executing the determination process.

[Feature P4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P3,
It has multiple entrances where game balls can enter,
Each of the plurality of processing target candidates corresponds to each of the plurality of entrance parts,
Each of the processing target candidates is information (entrance detection information stored in each bit of the buffer area) that is updated based on the detection of the entrance of a game ball to each of the entrance parts.
The process execution means performs the predetermined process a plurality of times in a time shorter than the shortest interval (about 18 msec) detected by continuously entering two game balls in one of the entrances ( The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific process can be executed on all of the process target candidates by executing the process four times.

  According to the feature P4, the shortest time required for two game balls to successively enter one ball-entry unit to be detected until a specific process is executed on all the processing target candidates. Since the interval between the game balls can be made shorter than the interval of the information, the information that is updated based on the detection of the entry of the game balls into each of the entry portions is detected as the entry of one game ball. It can be stored as information updated on the basis. More specifically, when two game balls enter the entrance part in succession, it is updated based on the entrance of the first game ball being detected at the entrance part. Even if the specified information is set as a processing target and a specific process is executed, and then the remaining other processing target candidates are set as processing targets and the specific process is executed, the next second game All of these specific processes can be completed before the incoming ball is detected in the incoming ball part. That is, at the time when the updated information based on the detection of the second game ball being detected in the ball-entry unit is set as the processing target and the specific process is executed, one is already present. The specific processing for the information updated based on the detection of the entry of the game ball of the eye at the entrance portion has been completed, and the entry of the second game ball is detected at the entrance portion. The information updated on the basis of being played can be treated as information updated on the basis of the fact that a new first game ball has been detected in the entrance. Therefore, the information that is updated based on the detection of the entry of a game ball into each ball entry unit is stored as the information that is updated based on the detection of the entry of one game ball. be able to. As a result, for example, it is possible to store information that is updated based on the detection of a game ball entering each ball entry unit as binary information indicating the presence or absence of a ball. In this case, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity for storing information that is updated based on the detection of a game ball entering each ball entry unit, and to improve the processing speed of a specific process. be able to.

<Feature Q group>
The feature Q group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the aspect 23 of the first embodiment.

[Feature Q1]
Process execution means (main CPU 62x) capable of executing a specific process (game history process) and a process other than the specific process (process related to the progress of the game);
A storage area (main RAM 64) in which information can be written;
A gaming machine comprising
The process execution means includes holding means (register) for holding information (register information) for execution of the process,
The specific process is:
A first process (save process) for writing information (register information) for execution of the other process, which is information held by the holding unit, into the storage area;
A second process (return process) for causing the holding means to hold the information written in the storage area in the first process;
A gaming machine characterized by including:

  According to the characteristic Q1, the specific process includes a first process that is information held by the holding unit and writes information for execution of other processes in the storage area. At the time of starting, if the holding means holds information for execution of another process that was executed immediately before the start of a specific process, Information can be temporarily moved (saved) by writing the information in the storage area. Therefore, the information for executing another process held in the holding unit may be deleted, and when the process execution unit executes the specific process, the holding unit holds the information for executing the specific process. it can. In addition, the specific process includes a second process that causes the holding unit to hold the information written in the storage area in the first process. Therefore, when the specific process is terminated, the specific process is performed for executing another process. The information can be held again by the holding unit, and another process executed before the start of the specific process can be executed again from the state immediately before the start of the specific process. Furthermore, since the first process and the second process are included in the specific process, even if only the program for executing the specific process is deleted, other processes other than the specific process are executed without any problem. Machine can be provided. That is, it is possible to easily delete only the program for executing the specific process without modifying the program for executing another process other than the specific process. As a result, for example, when improving the gaming machine so as not to execute a specific process or when developing a new gaming machine that does not execute a specific process based on the gaming machine, the design change is minimized. It becomes possible to do.

[Feature Q2]
A gaming machine according to feature Q1,
The process execution means includes
In the first process included in the specific process, information for execution of the other process is written in a predetermined specific area (second area) of the storage area, and Writing of information in a specific process is executed only for the specific area (second area) of the storage area.

  According to the characteristic Q2, the process execution means writes information for executing another process in a predetermined specific area of the storage area in the first process included in the specific process, and Since writing of information in a specific process is executed only for a specific area of the storage area, information written in other areas other than the specific area of the storage area Can be prevented from being rewritten by the execution of. Therefore, when a process using the other area is executed by the process execution unit, it is possible to suppress a specific process from affecting the process.

[Feature Q3]
A gaming machine according to feature Q1 or feature Q2,
The process execution means includes
Writing of information in the other processing is executed only for an area (first area) other than the specific area in the storage area.

  According to the characteristic Q3, information writing in other processing is executed only for an area other than the specific area of the storage area, so information written in the specific area of the storage area However, it can be prevented from being rewritten by the execution of other processes. Therefore, when a specific process is executed by a process execution unit using a specific area, it is possible to suppress the other process from affecting the specific process.

[Feature Q4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q3,
The specific process is a process different from the game progress process that is a process related to the progress of the game,
The other process is the game progress process. A gaming machine, wherein:

  According to the feature Q4, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the game progress process is executed without any problem even if only the program for executing the process different from the game progress process is deleted. That is, it is possible to easily delete only a program for executing a process different from the game progress process. As a result, for example, when the gaming machine is improved so as not to execute a process different from the game progress process, or when a new gaming machine that does not execute a process different from the game progress process is developed, the design change is minimized. It becomes possible to limit. Note that, as a process different from the game progress process, various arbitrary processes can be adopted. For example, a process for calculating and displaying game history information, which is information related to a game history, It is possible to employ a transmission process or the like that transmits information about the game situation to the hall computer installed at a predetermined timing.

[Feature Q5]
A gaming machine according to feature Q4,
The specific process is a game history information-related process (game history process) that is a process for calculating and displaying game history information (a combination of ratios of consecutive objects) that is information relating to a game history. A featured gaming machine.

  According to the feature Q5, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the game progress process is executed without any problem even if only the program for executing the game history information related process is deleted. That is, only the program for executing the game history information related process can be easily deleted. As a result, for example, when modifying the gaming machine so as not to execute the game history information related process or when developing a new gaming machine that does not execute the game history information related process, the design change is minimized. Is possible.

<Feature R group>
The feature R group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the aspect 23 of the first embodiment.

[Feature R1]
A process execution means (main CPU 62x) capable of executing a plurality of processes including a specific process (game history process);
A storage area (main RAM 64) in which information can be written;
A gaming machine comprising
The process execution means includes
Writing of information in the specific process is executed only for a predetermined specific area (second area) in the storage area.

  According to the feature R1, since the process execution unit executes writing of information in a specific process only to a predetermined specific area of the storage area, other than the specific area of the storage area. It is possible to prevent the information written in this area from being rewritten by executing a specific process. Therefore, when a process using an area other than the specific area in the storage area is executed by the process execution unit, it is possible to prevent the specific process from affecting the process. it can.

[Feature R2]
A gaming machine according to feature R1,
The process execution means includes
The writing of information in other processing (processing related to the progress of the game) other than the specific processing is executed only for an area other than the specific area (first area) in the storage area. A featured gaming machine.

  According to the feature R2, since the process execution unit executes the writing of information in other processes other than the specific process only to other areas other than the specific area of the storage area, The information written in the specific area can be prevented from being rewritten by the execution of the other process. Therefore, when a specific process is executed by a process execution unit using a specific area, it is possible to suppress the other process from affecting the specific process.

[Feature R3]
A gaming machine according to feature R1 or feature R2,
The process execution means includes
Comprising holding means (register) for holding information for execution of processing (register information), and executing the specific processing and the other processing exclusively;
The specific process is:
A first process (save process) to write information (register information) for execution of the other process, which is information held by the holding unit, into the specific area;
A second process (return process) for causing the holding means to hold the information written in the specific area in the first process;
A gaming machine characterized by including:

  According to the feature R3, since the specific process includes the first process, when the process execution unit starts the specific process, the holding unit executes another process that was performed immediately before the start of the specific process. If the information is held, the information for executing another process held by the holding means can be temporarily moved (saved) by writing the information into a specific area. Therefore, the information for executing another process held in the holding unit may be deleted, and when the process execution unit executes the specific process, the holding unit holds the information for executing the specific process. it can. In addition, since the specific process includes the second process, when the specific process is ended, the information for executing another process is held again in the holding unit, and is executed before the start of the specific process. Other processes can be executed again from the state immediately before the start of the specific process. Furthermore, since the first process and the second process are included in the specific process, even if only the program for executing the specific process is deleted, other processes other than the specific process are executed without any problem. Machine can be provided. That is, it is possible to easily delete only the program for executing the specific process without modifying the program for executing another process other than the specific process. As a result, for example, when improving the gaming machine so as not to execute a specific process or when developing a new gaming machine that does not execute a specific process based on the gaming machine, the design change is minimized. It becomes possible to do.

[Feature R4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features R1 to R3,
The specific process is a process different from the game progress process that is a process related to the progress of the game,
A process other than the specific process is the game progress process.

  According to the feature R4, the process execution means executes the writing of information in a process different from the game progress process only to a predetermined specific area of the storage area, so that the game progress process is executed. When executed by means, it is possible to suppress the processing different from the game progress processing from affecting the game progress processing.

[Feature R5]
A gaming machine according to feature R4,
The specific process is a game history information-related process (game history process) that is a process for calculating and displaying game history information (a combination of ratios of consecutive objects) that is information relating to a game history. A featured gaming machine.

  According to the feature R5, since the process execution means executes the writing of information in the game history information related process only to a predetermined specific area of the storage area, the game progress process is performed by the process execution means. When executed, it is possible to prevent the game history information related process from affecting the game progress process.

<Feature S group>
The feature S group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the aspect 23 of the first embodiment.

[Feature S1]
The entrance part where game balls can enter,
An incoming detection means (entrance detection sensor) for detecting the entrance of a game ball into the entrance part,
Parameter storage means (prize ball totaling buffer) for storing predetermined parameters (prize ball totaling value);
A process execution means (main CPU 62x) for starting execution of a predetermined process (timer interrupt process) at a predetermined interval (4 msec interval),
The process execution means includes
As the predetermined process,
A parameter update process (prize ball counting process) for updating the predetermined parameter stored in the parameter storage means triggered by the entry of a game ball into the pitching unit;
A calculation process (task 1 and task 2 in FIG. 29) for calculating game history information, which is information relating to a game history, based on the predetermined parameter stored in the parameter storage means;
Is possible and
The gaming machine, wherein the calculation process is not executed when the parameter update process is executed in one predetermined process.

  According to the feature S1, when the parameter update process is executed in one predetermined process, the calculation process is not executed. That is, since both the parameter update process and the calculation process are not executed in one predetermined process, the time required for one execution of the predetermined process can be shortened. As a result, the time required for one execution of the predetermined process becomes longer than the predetermined interval for starting the execution of the predetermined process, and the predetermined process cannot be executed at the predetermined interval. Can be suppressed. Furthermore, according to the feature S1, the parameter update process in which the game ball entry status and the processing load correlate are executed in preference to the calculation process in which the game ball entry status and the process load do not correlate. The parameter update process execution interval is suppressed from increasing, and as a result, the process result of the parameter update process (awarded ball total value) cannot accurately reflect the entry status of the game ball. Can be suppressed.

[Feature S2]
A gaming machine according to the feature S1,
Determination means for determining whether or not to execute the calculation process (the process of step S10810 in FIG. 29);
The process execution means includes
A gaming machine, wherein the calculation process is executed when the parameter update process is not executed and the determination unit determines that the calculation process is executed.

  According to the feature S2, since the calculation process is executed when the parameter update process is not executed and the determination unit determines to execute the calculation process, the parameter update process and the calculation process are not executed in the predetermined process. In addition, in this situation, instead of the parameter update process and the calculation process, other processes independent of these processes (for example, a process for determining the updated parameters and the validity of the calculation result of the calculation process) are performed. It becomes possible to execute. Furthermore, if either one of the parameter update process or the calculation process is executed in one predetermined process, the time required for one execution of the predetermined process is shorter than a predetermined interval. In the above, by executing a process having a shorter processing time than the parameter update process and the calculation process, it is possible to reliably prevent the time required for one execution of the predetermined process from becoming longer than the predetermined interval. Can do.

[Feature S3]
A gaming machine according to feature S1 or feature S2,
In the calculation process in one predetermined process, the process execution means can calculate a plurality of types of game history information (a combination ratio, a continuous combination ratio) in the calculation process. The game machine is characterized by executing a process (task 1 or task 2 in FIG. 29) for calculating one type of the game history information.

  According to the feature S3, although a plurality of types of game history information can be calculated in the calculation process, in the calculation process in one predetermined process, a process for calculating one type of game history information is performed. Therefore, the time required for one execution of a predetermined process is shortened compared to a configuration in which a process for calculating a plurality of types of game history information is performed in a calculation process in one predetermined process. be able to. As a result, the time required for executing the predetermined process becomes longer than the predetermined interval for starting the execution of the predetermined process, and the predetermined process cannot be executed at the predetermined interval. Can be suppressed. In addition, the storage capacity for temporarily storing the calculated game history information can be reduced.

[Feature S4]
A gaming machine according to the feature S3,
The process execution means includes
The process of calculating the one type of game history information (task 1 or task 2 in FIG. 29) is executed over a plurality of times of the predetermined process, thereby calculating the one type of game history information. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature S4, since the process for calculating one type of game history information is executed over a plurality of predetermined processes, the one type of game history information is calculated. Compared to a configuration in which calculation of one type of game history information is completed in the calculation process in the predetermined process, the time required for executing the predetermined process once can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required for executing the predetermined process from exceeding the execution interval of the predetermined process.

  Note that the inventions of the feature O group to the feature S group solve the following problems.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, there are various structures, controls, effects, etc. for the purpose of improving the fun of gaming, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, etc. Technical improvements have been made from the point of view.

  In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as the discovery and suppression of illegal acts by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

  For gaming machines such as those mentioned above, further technological improvements are desired for the purposes of improving gaming, reducing the processing load on gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, and providing healthier games. It is rare.

<Feature T group>
The feature T group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature T1]
Control means for controlling the execution of the game (the main CPU 62x of the aspect 38 of the first embodiment);
Information storage means (flash memory 64x) for storing information obtained based on the executed game (game history information such as prize ball total value, winning ratio, etc., number of entered balls, etc.);
An operation means (flash memory clear button) for receiving a predetermined operation,
An erasure unit (erase IC chip) for erasing the information stored in the information storage unit based on the fact that the operation unit has received the predetermined operation;
A gaming machine comprising
The gaming machine is characterized in that the operation means is stored in a space where an open trace remains (inside a board box to which a seal seal is attached).

  According to the feature T1, since the operation means is stored in the space where the trace of opening remains, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine, the space of the gaming machine When the operating means is operated in the open state, a trace of opening remains in the space of the gaming machine. That is, there is a possibility that the information stored in the information storage means has been erased by opening the space of the gaming machine based on whether or not the trace of opening remains in the space of the gaming machine. It becomes possible to grasp whether or not.

  Here, if the gaming machine is illegally modified, the executed game will be affected by the unauthorized modification, and the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine will be displayed. The effects of the unauthorized modification may appear. A person who inspects whether or not a normal game is being executed by a gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as “inspector”) is applied to the gaming machine by checking information stored in the information storage means. Unauthorized alterations can be found. For this reason, there is a person who wants to prevent an inspector from discovering that the gaming machine has been tampered with by deleting the information (hereinafter also referred to as “illegal person”) there's a possibility that.

  However, according to this feature, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means, it is necessary to operate the operating means with the space of the gaming machine open. Then, since the trace of opening remains in the space of the gaming machine, even if the information stored in the information storage means is deleted, the information may be deleted for illegal concealment. Traces will remain. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal unauthorized alterations made to gaming machines, and in turn, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of motives such as making unauthorized modifications to gaming machines, thereby improving game soundness. Can be made.

  Note that gaming machines may be circulated by transaction, and those who want to newly distribute gaming machines that have already been played (so-called used gaming machines) are stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine. There are cases where there is a legitimate request to delete the stored information and distribute it. Therefore, if a distribution system can be established so that only those who wish to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine for a legitimate reason can erase the trace of the opening of the space, It is possible to promote smooth distribution of gaming machines while ensuring the performance.

[Feature T2]
A gaming machine according to feature T1,
The information storage means is capable of holding memory even when power supply is cut off.

  According to the feature T2, even when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the information acquired based on the executed game can be held. Even when power is not supplied, it is possible to check whether or not a normal game has been executed in the gaming machine.

[Feature T3]
A gaming machine according to feature T1 or feature T2,
The information acquired based on the executed game includes information on the number of game balls that have already been paid out as prize balls (award ball total value).

  According to the feature T3, it is possible to inspect whether or not a normal game has been executed in the gaming machine by using information on the number of gaming balls that have already been paid out as prize balls.

[Feature T4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features T1 to T3,
The information storage means is stored in a space where an open trace remains (inside a board box to which a seal seal is attached).

  According to the feature T4, since the information storage means is stored in the space where the trace of opening remains, in order to make an unauthorized modification to the information stored in the information storage means, The space of the gaming machine will be opened, leaving a trace of opening in the space of the gaming machine. That is, based on whether or not there is a trace of opening in the space of the gaming machine, the space of the gaming machine is opened and the information stored in the information storage means has been tampered with. It becomes possible to grasp whether or not there is a possibility. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal unauthorized modification applied to information stored in the information storage means, and in turn, to generate motivation to perform unauthorized modification on information stored in the information storage means. Can be suppressed, and the soundness of the game can be improved.

<Feature U group>
The feature U group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature U1]
Control means for controlling the execution of the game (the main CPU 62x of the aspect 39 of the first embodiment);
Information storage means (flash memory 64x) for storing information obtained based on the executed game (game history information such as prize ball total value, winning ratio, etc., number of entered balls, etc.);
Connection means (inspection terminal 65) capable of connecting a predetermined device (inspection machine 320);
An erasing unit (erase IC chip) for erasing the information stored in the information storage unit;
A gaming machine comprising
The erasing means includes means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means based on receiving a predetermined signal (erase command signal) from the predetermined device connected to the connection means. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the characteristic U1, the erasing means includes means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means based on reception of the predetermined signal from the predetermined apparatus connected to the connection means. Can erase the information stored in the information storage means. In other words, it becomes possible to limit the deletion of the information by a person who does not have a predetermined device.

  Here, if the gaming machine is illegally modified, the executed game will be affected by the unauthorized modification, and the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine will be displayed. The effects of the unauthorized modification may appear. A person who inspects whether or not a normal game is being executed by a gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as “inspector”) is applied to the gaming machine by checking information stored in the information storage means. Unauthorized alterations can be found. For this reason, there is a person who wants to prevent an inspector from discovering that the gaming machine has been tampered with by deleting the information (hereinafter also referred to as “illegal person”) there's a possibility that.

  However, according to this feature, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means, a predetermined device that can be connected to the connection means of the gaming machine is required. If the persons who can have the predetermined device are restricted, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the information storage means from being erased by an unauthorized person. It is possible to suppress the generation of motivation such as remodeling and improve the soundness of the game.

  Note that gaming machines may be circulated by transaction, and those who want to newly distribute gaming machines that have already been played (so-called used gaming machines) are stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine. There are cases where there is a legitimate request to delete the stored information and distribute it. Therefore, if a person who wants to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine for a legitimate reason is established, a distribution system capable of having a predetermined device can be established. It is possible to facilitate the smooth distribution of gaming machines while securing it.

[Feature U2]
A gaming machine according to feature U1,
Prior to erasing the information stored in the information storage means, the erasure means transmits the information stored in the information storage means to the predetermined device connected to the connection means. A gaming machine comprising a means.

  According to the characteristic U2, the transmission unit that transmits the information stored in the information storage unit to a predetermined device connected to the connection unit prior to the deletion of the information stored in the information storage unit. The information stored in the information storage means has been deleted from the information storage means even if the information is accidentally deleted by an operation contrary to the intention of the person having the predetermined device. The information can be confirmed by the predetermined device.

[Feature U3]
A gaming machine according to Feature U1 or Feature U2,
The information storage means is capable of holding memory even when power supply is cut off.

  According to the feature U3, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the information acquired based on the executed game can be retained. Even when power is not supplied, it is possible to check whether or not a normal game has been executed in the gaming machine.

[Feature U4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U3,
The information acquired based on the executed game includes information on the number of game balls that have already been paid out as prize balls (award ball total value).

  According to the feature U4, it is possible to inspect whether or not a normal game has been executed in the gaming machine by using information regarding the number of gaming balls that have already been paid out as prize balls.

[Feature U5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U4,
The information storage means is stored in a space where an open trace remains (inside a board box to which a seal seal is attached).

  According to the feature U5, since the information storage means is stored inside the space where the trace of opening remains, in order to make an unauthorized modification to the information stored in the information storage means, The space of the gaming machine will be opened, leaving a trace of opening in the space of the gaming machine. That is, based on whether or not there is a trace of opening in the space of the gaming machine, the space of the gaming machine is opened and the information stored in the information storage means has been tampered with. It becomes possible to grasp whether or not there is a possibility. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal unauthorized modification applied to information stored in the information storage means, and in turn, to generate motivation to perform unauthorized modification on information stored in the information storage means. Can be suppressed, and the soundness of the game can be improved.

<Feature V group>
The feature V group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature V1]
Control means for controlling the execution of the game (the main CPU 62x of the aspect 40 of the first embodiment);
Information storage means (flash memory 64x) for storing information obtained based on the executed game (game history information such as prize ball total value, winning ratio, etc., number of entered balls, etc.);
Connection means (inspection terminal 65) capable of connecting a predetermined device (inspection machine 320);
An operation means (flash memory clear button) for receiving a predetermined operation,
An erasing unit (erase IC chip) for erasing the information stored in the information storage unit;
A gaming machine comprising
The operation means is stored in a space where an open trace remains (inside a substrate box to which a seal seal is attached),
The erasing unit is configured to receive the predetermined operation from the operation unit and receive a predetermined signal (erase command signal) from the predetermined device connected to the connection unit. A gaming machine comprising: means for deleting the information stored in the game machine.

  According to the feature V1, since the operating means is stored inside the space where the trace of opening remains, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine, the space of the gaming machine When the operating means is operated in the open state, a trace of opening remains in the space of the gaming machine. Further, the erasing means includes means for erasing information stored in the information storage means based on reception of a predetermined signal from a predetermined device connected to the connection means. The information stored in the information storage means can be erased. Therefore, there is a possibility that the information stored in the information storage means is erased because the space of the gaming machine is opened based on whether or not the trace of opening remains in the space of the gaming machine. It is possible to determine whether or not the information is erased by a person who does not have a predetermined device.

  Here, if the gaming machine is illegally modified, the executed game will be affected by the unauthorized modification, and the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine will be displayed. The effects of the unauthorized modification may appear. A person who inspects whether or not a normal game is being executed by a gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as “inspector”) is applied to the gaming machine by checking information stored in the information storage means. Unauthorized alterations can be found. For this reason, there is a person who wants to prevent an inspector from discovering that the gaming machine has been tampered with by deleting the information (hereinafter also referred to as “illegal person”) there's a possibility that.

  However, according to this feature, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means, a predetermined device that can be connected to the connection means of the gaming machine is required. And if the person who can have the said predetermined | prescribed apparatus is restrict | limited, it can suppress that the information memorize | stored in the information storage means will be erased by an unauthorized person. Further, even if an unauthorized person has a predetermined device, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means, the game machine is opened and the space is opened. It is necessary to operate the means. Then, since the trace of opening remains in the space of the gaming machine, even if the information stored in the information storage means is deleted, the information may be deleted for illegal concealment. Traces will remain. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the information storage means from being erased by an unauthorized person, and to make it difficult to conceal the unauthorized modification applied to the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to further suppress the generation of motivation to improperly modify the gaming machine, and improve the game soundness.

  Note that gaming machines may be circulated by transaction, and those who want to newly distribute gaming machines that have already been played (so-called used gaming machines) are stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine. There are cases where there is a legitimate request to delete the stored information and distribute it. Therefore, only those who have a desire to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine for a valid reason can have a predetermined device and erase the trace of opening of the space. If a distribution system that can be used is established, it is possible to promote smooth distribution of gaming machines while ensuring the soundness of games.

[Feature V2]
A gaming machine according to feature V1,
Prior to erasing the information stored in the information storage means, the erasure means transmits the information stored in the information storage means to the predetermined device connected to the connection means. A gaming machine comprising a means.

  According to the feature V2, the transmission unit transmits the information stored in the information storage unit to a predetermined device connected to the connection unit prior to the deletion unit deleting the information stored in the information storage unit. The information stored in the information storage means has been deleted from the information storage means even if the information is accidentally deleted by an operation contrary to the intention of the person having the predetermined device. The information can be confirmed by the predetermined device.

[Feature V3]
A gaming machine according to feature V1 or feature V2,
The information storage means is capable of holding memory even when power supply is cut off.

  According to the feature V3, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the information acquired based on the executed game can be held. Even when power is not supplied, it is possible to check whether or not a normal game has been executed in the gaming machine.

[Feature V4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features V1 to V3,
The information acquired based on the executed game includes information on the number of game balls that have already been paid out as prize balls (award ball total value).

  According to the feature V4, it is possible to inspect whether or not a normal game has been executed in the gaming machine by using information regarding the number of gaming balls that have already been paid out as prize balls.

[Feature V5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features V1 to V4,
The information storage means is stored in a space where an open trace remains (inside a board box to which a seal seal is attached).

  According to the feature V5, since the information storage means is stored inside the space where the trace of opening remains, in order to make an unauthorized modification to the information stored in the information storage means, The space of the gaming machine will be opened, leaving a trace of opening in the space of the gaming machine. That is, based on whether or not there is a trace of opening in the space of the gaming machine, the space of the gaming machine is opened and the information stored in the information storage means has been tampered with. It becomes possible to grasp whether or not there is a possibility. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal unauthorized modification applied to information stored in the information storage means, and in turn, to generate motivation to perform unauthorized modification on information stored in the information storage means. Can be suppressed, and the soundness of the game can be improved.

<Feature W group>
The feature W group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature W1]
Control means for controlling the execution of the game (the main CPU 62x of the aspect 46 of the first embodiment);
Based on the first information (information used in the game progress process stored in the first area of the main RAM 64), which is information used for controlling the execution of the game by the control means, and the executed game Information storage means for storing second information which is acquired information (award ball total value stored in the second area of the main side RAM 64, game history information such as an accessory ratio, number of balls entered, etc.) (Main RAM 64),
Erasing means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means;
A gaming machine comprising
The erasing means includes means for erasing the first information stored in the information storage means when erasing the second information stored in the information storage means. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature W1, since the erasure unit includes a unit for erasing the first information when erasing the second information, the second information which is information acquired based on the executed game is In spite of being erased, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the first information, which is information used for controlling the execution of the game, is maintained without being erased.

  Specifically, for example, the second information, which is information acquired based on the executed game, is information serving as collateral for determining the fairness of the game executed in the gaming machine. When the second information is deleted, the first information used for controlling the execution of the game in the gaming machine (for example, information on the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag indicating the gaming state) is used. It is preferable to erase and initialize the gaming state of the gaming machine. According to this feature, since the erasing means includes means for erasing the first information when erasing the second information, the second information serving as collateral for judging the fairness of the game is erased. Despite being done, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the gaming state of the gaming machine is maintained as it is because the first information is not erased.

[Feature W2]
A gaming machine according to the feature W1,
The erasing means comprises means for erasing the first information out of information stored in the information storage means and not erasing the second information.

  According to the feature W2, the erasing means includes means for erasing the first information out of the information stored in the information storage means and not erasing the second information. Therefore, the erasing means is obtained based on the executed game. It is possible to erase the first information, which is information used for controlling the execution of the game, while leaving the second information, which is the information that has been performed.

  Specifically, for example, the first information, which is information used for controlling the execution of the game, is deleted when a malfunction occurs in the control of the game execution or at the start or end of the game hall business. There is a demand for executing initialization of control of the gaming machine but not erasing the second information which is information acquired based on the executed game. According to this feature, the first information, which is information used for controlling the execution of the game, is deleted while the second information, which is information acquired based on the executed game, is left, and the gaming machine It is possible to execute control initialization.

<Feature X group>
The feature X group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature X1]
Control means for controlling the execution of the game (the main CPU 62x of the aspect 42 of the first embodiment);
Based on the first information (information used in the game progress process stored in the first area of the main RAM 64), which is information used for controlling the execution of the game by the control means, and the executed game Information storage means for storing second information which is acquired information (award ball total value stored in the second area of the main side RAM 64, game history information such as an accessory ratio, number of balls entered, etc.) (Main RAM 64),
First operation means (RAM clear button and power switch) for receiving a first operation (operation for turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM clear button pressed);
Erasing means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means;
A gaming machine comprising
The erasing unit erases the first information out of the information stored in the information storage unit based on the fact that the first operation unit has received the first operation, and the second operation unit A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for not erasing information.

  According to the feature X1, the erasure unit erases the first information out of the information stored in the information storage unit based on the first operation unit receiving the first operation, and the second operation unit Since there is means for not erasing the information, the first information, which is information used for controlling the execution of the game, is deleted while leaving the second information, which is the information acquired based on the executed game. Is possible.

  Specifically, for example, the first information, which is information used for controlling the execution of the game, is deleted when a malfunction occurs in the control of the game execution or at the start or end of the game hall business. There is a demand for executing initialization of control of the gaming machine but not erasing the second information which is information acquired based on the executed game. According to this feature, the first information that is used for controlling the execution of the game while leaving the second information that is the information acquired based on the executed game by operating the first operating means. It becomes possible to execute initialization of control of the gaming machine by deleting the information of 1.

[Feature X2]
A gaming machine according to feature X1,
A second operation means (second RAM clear button) for accepting a second operation (an operation of pressing the second RAM clear button for a predetermined time while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON);
The erasing means includes means for erasing the second information stored in the information storage means based on the fact that the second operation means has accepted the second operation. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature X2, the erasing means includes means for erasing the second information stored in the information storage means based on the fact that the second operating means has accepted the second operation. The second information that cannot be deleted by operating the operating means can be deleted by operating the second operating means.

[Feature X3]
A gaming machine according to feature X2,
The gaming machine, wherein the second operation means (second RAM clear button) is stored inside a space where a trace of opening remains (inside a board box to which a seal seal is affixed).

  According to the feature X3, since the second operation means is stored in the space where the trace of opening remains, in order to erase the second information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine, The second operating means will be operated with the space of the gaming machine open, leaving a trace of opening in the space of the gaming machine. That is, the second information stored in the information storage means can be erased based on whether or not there is a trace of opening in the space of the gaming machine. It becomes possible to grasp whether or not there is a sex.

  Here, if the gaming machine is illegally modified, the executed game is affected by the unauthorized modification, and is further stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine. In some cases, the information may affect the unauthorized modification. A person who inspects whether or not a normal game is being executed by a gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as “inspector”) is applied to the gaming machine by checking information stored in the information storage means. Unauthorized alterations can be found. For this reason, there is a person who wants to prevent an inspector from discovering that the gaming machine has been tampered with by deleting the information (hereinafter also referred to as “illegal person”) there's a possibility that.

  However, according to this feature, in order to erase the second information stored in the information storage means, it is necessary to operate the second operation means with the space of the gaming machine open. Then, since the trace of opening remains in the space of the gaming machine, even if the second information stored in the information storage means is deleted, the information may be deleted for illegal concealment. There will be a trace that there is. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal unauthorized alterations made to gaming machines, and in turn, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of motives such as making unauthorized modifications to gaming machines, thereby improving game soundness. Can be made.

  Note that gaming machines may be circulated by transaction, and those who want to newly distribute gaming machines that have already been played (so-called used gaming machines) are stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine. In some cases, there may be a legitimate request to distribute the deleted second information. Therefore, if only those who have a desire to delete the second information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine for a legitimate reason can establish a distribution system that can erase the trace of the opening of the space, It is possible to promote smooth distribution of gaming machines while ensuring the soundness of games.

<Feature Y group>
The feature Y group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature Y1]
Control means for controlling the execution of the game (the main CPU 62x of aspects 43 and 44 of the first embodiment);
Based on the first information (information used in the game progress process stored in the first area of the main RAM 64), which is information used for controlling the execution of the game by the control means, and the executed game Information storage means for storing second information which is acquired information (award ball total value stored in the second area of the main side RAM 64, game history information such as an accessory ratio, number of balls entered, etc.) (Main RAM 64),
Operation means (RAM clear button and power switch) for receiving a predetermined operation;
Erasing means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means;
A gaming machine comprising
The erasing means includes
The operation means performs a first operation (turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button, and the RAM clear button is not pressed within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. The first information stored in the information storage means is erased based on receiving the operation)
A second operation different from the first operation by the operation means (an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button and continuing the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed for a predetermined time) A gaming machine comprising: means for erasing the second information stored in the information storage means on the basis of accepting the information.

  According to the characteristic Y1, the erasure unit erases the first information stored in the information storage unit based on the fact that the operation unit has accepted the first operation, and the operation unit Includes means for erasing the second information stored in the information storage means on the basis of accepting a different second operation, so that the information storage means can be executed by executing different operations on the operation means. It is possible to select information to be deleted from the information stored in. That is, the target information to be erased can be selected without providing other operating means for selecting the information to be erased, so that the structure of the gaming machine can be simplified.

  Specifically, for example, the first information, which is information used for controlling the execution of the game, is deleted when a malfunction occurs in the control of the game execution or when the game hall starts or ends. When it is desired to execute the initialization of the control of the gaming machine, the first operation is executed, while the second information which is the information acquired based on the executed game is deleted and the gaming machine is newly If it is desired to circulate, the second operation may be executed. As described above, by performing different operations on the operation unit, it is possible to select information to be deleted from the information stored in the information storage unit.

[Feature Y2]
A gaming machine according to feature Y1,
The erasing means accepts the second operation (an operation in which the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear button and the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed is continued for a predetermined time). Based on the above, in addition to erasing the second information stored in the information storage means, the gaming machine further comprises means for erasing the first information.

  According to the feature Y2, the erasure unit erases the second information stored in the information storage unit based on the fact that the operation unit has accepted the second operation. Since the information erasing unit is provided, it is possible to erase both the first information and the second information by executing the second operation on the operation unit.

<Characteristic Z group>
The feature Z group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature Z1]
Control means for controlling the execution of the game (the main CPU 62x of the aspect 41 of the first embodiment);
Information storage means (flash memory 64x) for storing information obtained based on the executed game (game history information such as prize ball total value, winning ratio, etc., number of entered balls, etc.);
An erasing unit (erase IC chip) for erasing the information stored in the information storage unit;
A receiving means for receiving authentication information (password);
A gaming machine comprising
The erasing means comprises means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means based on the fact that the authentication information received by the receiving means satisfies a predetermined condition.

  According to the feature Z1, the erasing means includes means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means based on the fact that the authentication information received by the receiving means satisfies a predetermined condition. A person who has the authentication information to satisfy can erase the information stored in the information storage means. In other words, it is possible to limit deletion of the information by a person who does not have authentication information that satisfies the predetermined condition.

  Here, if the gaming machine is illegally modified, the executed game will be affected by the unauthorized modification, and the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine will be displayed. The effects of the unauthorized modification may appear. A person who inspects whether or not a normal game is being executed by a gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as “inspector”) is applied to the gaming machine by checking information stored in the information storage means. Unauthorized alterations can be found. For this reason, there is a person who wants to prevent an inspector from discovering that the gaming machine has been tampered with by deleting the information (hereinafter also referred to as “illegal person”) there's a possibility that.

  However, according to this feature, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage unit, it is necessary to have authentication information that satisfies the predetermined condition. Then, by restricting who can have authentication information that satisfies the predetermined condition, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the information storage means from being erased by an unauthorized person, and in turn It is possible to suppress the generation of motives for improper modification of the machine, and to improve the soundness of the game.

  Note that gaming machines may be circulated by transaction, and those who want to newly distribute gaming machines that have already been played (so-called used gaming machines) are stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine. There are cases where there is a legitimate request to delete the stored information and distribute it. Therefore, if only a person who has a desire to delete information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine for a valid reason, a distribution system capable of having authentication information that satisfies the predetermined condition, It is possible to promote smooth distribution of gaming machines while ensuring the soundness of games.

[Feature Z2]
A gaming machine according to the feature Z1,
The information storage means is capable of holding memory even when power supply is cut off.

  According to the feature Z2, since the information acquired based on the executed game can be held even when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, for example, in the distribution process Even when power is not supplied, it is possible to check whether or not a normal game has been executed in the gaming machine.

[Feature Z3]
A gaming machine according to feature Z1 or feature Z2,
The information acquired based on the executed game includes information on the number of game balls that have already been paid out as prize balls (award ball total value).

  According to the feature Z3, it is possible to inspect whether or not a normal game has been executed in the gaming machine by using information on the number of gaming balls that have already been paid out as prize balls.

[Feature Z4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features Z1 to Z3,
The information storage means is stored in a space where an open trace remains (inside a board box to which a seal seal is attached).

  According to the feature Z4, since the information storage means is stored inside the space where the trace of opening remains, in order to make an unauthorized modification to the information stored in the information storage means, The space of the gaming machine will be opened, leaving a trace of opening in the space of the gaming machine. That is, based on whether or not there is a trace of opening in the space of the gaming machine, the space of the gaming machine is opened and the information stored in the information storage means has been tampered with. It becomes possible to grasp whether or not there is a possibility. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal unauthorized modification applied to information stored in the information storage means, and in turn, to generate motivation to perform unauthorized modification on information stored in the information storage means. Can be suppressed, and the soundness of the game can be improved.

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature T group to feature Z group solves the following problems.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, the structure, control, etc. for the purpose of improving the fun of gaming, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, optimizing the processing, simplifying the control, simplifying the structure, etc. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as production.

  In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as the discovery and suppression of illegal acts by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

  In the gaming machines as described above, for the purpose of improving the fun of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing the processing, simplifying the control, simplifying the structure, providing a more healthy game, etc. Improvement of technology is desired.

<Characteristic αA group>
The feature αA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αA1]
The entrance part where game balls can enter,
Signal output means (each of the incoming detection sensors 44a to 44h) for outputting a signal based on the entrance of the game ball into the entrance part;
Judgment information output means for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the pitching unit based on the signal and outputting judgment information (ballistic information) that is information based on the judgment IC62c),
Control means (main CPU 62x) for controlling the progress of the game based on the determination information;
A connection means (inspection terminal 65) capable of connecting a predetermined device;
A gaming machine comprising
The determination information output means includes means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means.

  According to the characteristic αA1, the determination information output unit includes a unit that outputs the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection unit without passing through the control unit. Therefore, the predetermined device is influenced by the control unit. It is possible to receive determination information that has not been received.

  For example, if the configuration that outputs the determination information via the control unit to a predetermined device connected to the connection unit without using the configuration of this feature, a problem occurs in the control unit. In the case where it is being performed or illegally modified, the determination information output to a predetermined device may be affected by the malfunction or unauthorized modification.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, the determination information output means includes a means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means. Even if it occurs or is illegally modified, the judgment information output to a predetermined device is not affected by the malfunction or unauthorized modification. As a result, the predetermined device connected to the connection means can execute processing based on determination information that is not affected by the malfunction or unauthorized modification.

[Feature αA2]
A gaming machine according to feature αA1,
A plurality of the entrance parts into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of the signal output means for outputting signals based on the entrance of game balls into the entrance parts,
The determination information output means determines whether or not a game ball has entered each of the plurality of ball-entry portions based on the signals output from each of the plurality of signal output means, The determination information (entrance information), which is information based on determination and corresponding to each of the plurality of ingress parts, is transmitted to the predetermined device connected to the connection means with a serial transmission method. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for outputting according to the above.

  According to the feature αA2, the determination information output means includes a means for outputting the determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball-entry units to the predetermined device connected to the connection means by a serial transmission method. Compared with the case where the configuration in which the determination information is output by the parallel transmission method is adopted, the configuration of the connection means for passing the determination information to the predetermined device can be simplified and the predetermined information for receiving the determination information can be received. The configuration of the apparatus can be simplified.

  Specifically, if a configuration is adopted in which determination information corresponding to each of a plurality of balls is output by a parallel transmission method, the connection means outputs outputs corresponding to the number of balls of the plurality of balls. It is necessary to provide a part. Similarly, the predetermined device needs to include input units corresponding to the number of the plurality of ball entering units. In addition, since the number of pitching units provided in the gaming machine differs for each type of gaming machine (for each model), it is necessary to prepare a predetermined device having a different number of terminals for each type of gaming machine (for each model). Occurs.

  On the other hand, according to the present feature, the determination information output means outputs, to the predetermined device connected to the connection means, determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball-entry portions by a serial transmission method. Therefore, the connection means may be configured to include at least one output unit that can output the determination information by the serial transmission method regardless of the number of the ball entering units included in the gaming machine. Therefore, the configuration of the connecting means can be simplified. Similarly, the predetermined device may be configured to include at least one input unit that can input the determination information output by the serial transmission method regardless of the number of the entrance units provided in the gaming machine. The configuration of the predetermined apparatus can be simplified. In addition, even when a predetermined device is connected to a gaming machine having a different number of pitching units, the predetermined device inputs determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of pitching units by a serial transmission method. Can do. In other words, the predetermined device can be used for other gaming machines having different numbers of pitching parts. As a result, it is possible to improve the versatility of the predetermined device.

[Feature αA3]
The gaming machine according to feature αA1 or feature αA2,
The connection means is configured to be able to connect to the predetermined device capable of calculating game history information (game history information such as an accessory ratio) that is information relating to a game history based on the determination information. A gaming machine.

  According to the characteristic αA3, the predetermined device connected to the connection unit can calculate the game history information based on the determination information not affected by the control unit. Therefore, the inspector who inspects the performance of the gaming machine can check the game history information that is not affected by the control means by using a predetermined device. As a result, game soundness can be ensured.

<Characteristic αB group>
The feature αB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αB1]
A plurality of entrances where game balls can enter;
A plurality of signal output means (each of the incoming detection sensors 44a to 44h) for outputting a signal based on the entrance of the game ball to each of the plurality of incoming balls;
Based on the signals output from each of the plurality of signal output means, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered each of the plurality of entrance parts, and information based on the determination. Determination information output means (entrance detection IC 62c) for outputting determination information (entrance information) which is information corresponding to each of the plurality of entrance parts,
Control means (main CPU 62x) for controlling the progress of the game based on the determination information;
A connection means (inspection terminal 65) capable of connecting a predetermined device;
A gaming machine comprising
The determination information output means includes means for outputting the determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of balls to the predetermined device connected to the connection means by a serial transmission method. To play.

  According to the characteristic αB1, the determination information output means includes a means for outputting the determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball-entry units to the predetermined device connected to the connection means by a serial transmission method. Compared with the case where the configuration in which the determination information is output by the parallel transmission method is adopted, the configuration of the connection means for passing the determination information to the predetermined device can be simplified and the predetermined information for receiving the determination information can be received. The configuration of the apparatus can be simplified.

  Specifically, if a configuration is adopted in which determination information corresponding to each of a plurality of balls is output by a parallel transmission method, the connection means outputs outputs corresponding to the number of balls of the plurality of balls. It is necessary to provide a part. Similarly, the predetermined device needs to include input units corresponding to the number of the plurality of ball entering units. In addition, since the number of pitching units provided in the gaming machine differs for each type of gaming machine (for each model), it is necessary to prepare a predetermined device having a different number of terminals for each type of gaming machine (for each model). Occurs.

  On the other hand, according to the present feature, the determination information output means outputs, to the predetermined device connected to the connection means, determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball-entry portions by a serial transmission method. Therefore, the connection means may be configured to include at least one output unit that can output the determination information by the serial transmission method regardless of the number of the ball entering units included in the gaming machine. Therefore, the configuration of the connecting means can be simplified. Similarly, the predetermined device may be configured to include at least one input unit that can input the determination information output by the serial transmission method regardless of the number of the entrance units provided in the gaming machine. The configuration of the predetermined apparatus can be simplified. In addition, even when a predetermined device is connected to a gaming machine having a different number of pitching units, the predetermined device inputs determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of pitching units by a serial transmission method. Can do. In other words, the predetermined device can be used for other gaming machines having different numbers of pitching parts. As a result, it is possible to improve the versatility of the predetermined device.

[Feature αB2]
A gaming machine according to the characteristic αB1,
The connection means is configured to be able to connect to the predetermined device capable of calculating game history information (game history information such as an accessory ratio) that is information relating to a game history based on the determination information. A gaming machine.

  According to the characteristic αB2, the predetermined device connected to the connection unit can calculate the game history information based on the determination information not affected by the control unit. Therefore, the inspector who inspects the performance of the gaming machine can check the game history information that is not affected by the control means by using a predetermined device. As a result, game soundness can be ensured.

[Feature αB3]
A gaming machine according to the characteristic αB1 or the characteristic αB2,
The determination information output means includes means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means.

  According to the characteristic αB3, the determination information output unit includes a unit that outputs the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection unit without passing through the control unit. Therefore, the predetermined device is influenced by the control unit. It is possible to receive determination information that has not been received.

  For example, if the configuration that outputs the determination information via the control unit to a predetermined device connected to the connection unit without using the configuration of this feature, a problem occurs in the control unit. In the case where it is being performed or illegally modified, the determination information output to a predetermined device may be affected by the malfunction or unauthorized modification.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, the determination information output means includes a means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means. Even if it occurs or is illegally modified, the judgment information output to a predetermined device is not affected by the malfunction or unauthorized modification. As a result, the predetermined device connected to the connection means can execute processing based on determination information that is not affected by the malfunction or unauthorized modification.

<Characteristic αC group>
The feature αC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αC1]
The entrance part where game balls can enter,
Signal output means (each of the incoming detection sensors 44a to 44h) for outputting a signal based on the entrance of the game ball into the entrance part;
Judgment information output means for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the pitching unit based on the signal and outputting judgment information (ballistic information) that is information based on the judgment IC62c),
Control means (main CPU 62x) for controlling the progress of the game based on the determination information;
A connection means (inspection terminal 65) capable of connecting a predetermined device;
A gaming machine comprising
The determination information output means is provided only when the relationship with the predetermined device connected to the connection means satisfies a predetermined condition (when a Hi level signal is input from the inspection device 320). A game machine comprising output control means for outputting the determination information to the device.

  According to the characteristic αC1, the determination information output unit includes a unit that outputs determination information to the predetermined device only when a relationship with the predetermined device connected to the connection unit satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the determination information of the gaming machine from being output to the outside except when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the determination information of the gaming machine from being analyzed and misused by a malicious person.

[Feature αC2]
A gaming machine according to feature αC1,
The predetermined condition includes receiving a predetermined signal from the predetermined device connected to the connection means.

  According to the characteristic αC2, the determination information of the gaming machine is output to the outside when a predetermined condition including receiving a predetermined signal from a predetermined device connected to the connection unit is not satisfied. Can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the determination information of the gaming machine from being analyzed and misused by a malicious person.

[Feature αC3]
A gaming machine according to feature αC1 or feature αC2,
A plurality of the entrance parts into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of the signal output means for outputting signals based on the entrance of game balls into the entrance parts,
The determination information output means determines whether or not a game ball has entered each of the plurality of ball-entry portions based on the signals output from each of the plurality of signal output means, The determination information (entrance information), which is information based on determination and corresponding to each of the plurality of ingress parts, is transmitted to the predetermined device connected to the connection means with a serial transmission method. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for outputting according to the above.

  According to the feature αC3, the determination information output means includes a means for outputting determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball-entry portions to a predetermined device connected to the connection means by a serial transmission method. Compared with the case where the configuration in which the determination information is output by the parallel transmission method is adopted, the configuration of the connection means for passing the determination information to the predetermined device can be simplified and the predetermined information for receiving the determination information can be received. The configuration of the apparatus can be simplified.

  Specifically, if a configuration is adopted in which determination information corresponding to each of a plurality of balls is output by a parallel transmission method, the connection means outputs outputs corresponding to the number of balls of the plurality of balls. It is necessary to provide a part. Similarly, the predetermined device needs to include input units corresponding to the number of the plurality of ball entering units. In addition, since the number of pitching units included in the gaming machine is different for each type of gaming machine (for each model), a predetermined device having a different number of input units for each type of gaming machine (for each model) is prepared. Need arises.

  On the other hand, according to the present feature, the determination information output means outputs, to the predetermined device connected to the connection means, determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball-entry portions by a serial transmission method. Therefore, the connection means may be configured to include at least one output unit that can output the determination information by the serial transmission method regardless of the number of the ball entering units included in the gaming machine. Therefore, the configuration of the connecting means can be simplified. Similarly, the predetermined device may be configured to include at least one input unit that can input the determination information output by the serial transmission method regardless of the number of the entrance units provided in the gaming machine. The configuration of the predetermined apparatus can be simplified. In addition, even when a predetermined device is connected to a gaming machine having a different number of pitching units, the predetermined device inputs determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of pitching units by a serial transmission method. Can do. In other words, the predetermined device can be used for other gaming machines having different numbers of pitching parts. As a result, it is possible to improve the versatility of the predetermined device.

[Feature αC4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features αC1 to αC3,
The connection means is configured to be able to connect to the predetermined device capable of calculating game history information (game history information such as an accessory ratio) that is information relating to a game history based on the determination information. A gaming machine.

  According to the characteristic αC4, the predetermined device connected to the connection unit can calculate the game history information based on the determination information not affected by the control unit. Therefore, the inspector who inspects the performance of the gaming machine can check the game history information that is not affected by the control means by using a predetermined device. As a result, game soundness can be ensured.

[Feature αC5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features αC1 to αC4,
The determination information output means includes means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means.

  According to the characteristic αC5, the determination information output unit includes a unit that outputs the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection unit without passing through the control unit. Therefore, the predetermined device is influenced by the control unit. It is possible to receive determination information that has not been received.

  For example, if the configuration that outputs the determination information via the control unit to a predetermined device connected to the connection unit without using the configuration of this feature, a problem occurs in the control unit. In the case where it is being performed or illegally modified, the determination information output to a predetermined device may be affected by the malfunction or unauthorized modification.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, the determination information output means includes a means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means. Even if it occurs or is illegally modified, the judgment information output to a predetermined device is not affected by the malfunction or unauthorized modification. As a result, the predetermined device connected to the connection means can execute processing based on determination information that is not affected by the malfunction or unauthorized modification.

<Characteristic αD group>
The feature αD group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αD1]
The entrance part where game balls can enter,
Signal output means (each of the incoming detection sensors 44a to 44h) for outputting a signal based on the entrance of the game ball into the entrance part;
Judgment information output means for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the pitching unit based on the signal and outputting judgment information (ballistic information) that is information based on the judgment IC62c),
Control means (main CPU 62x) for controlling the progress of the game based on the determination information;
A connection means (inspection terminal 65) capable of connecting a predetermined device;
A gaming machine comprising
The determination information output means includes means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means,
The gaming machine further includes:
The number of prize balls that is information that can specify the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball when one game ball enters the pitching unit with respect to the predetermined device connected to the connection means A gaming machine comprising a prize ball number information output means for outputting information.

  According to the feature αD1, since the prize ball number information output means for outputting the prize ball number information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means is provided, it is troublesome to manually input the prize ball number information to the predetermined device. Can be omitted, and erroneous prize ball number information can be prevented from being input to a predetermined device. As a result, the predetermined device can execute processing based on the determination information and the accurate prize ball number information output from the prize ball number information output means.

[Feature αD2]
A gaming machine according to feature αD1,
A gaming machine, comprising: type information output means for outputting type information, which is information capable of specifying the type of the pitched part, to the predetermined device connected to the connection means.

  According to the feature αD2, since the type information output unit that outputs the type information to the predetermined device connected to the connection unit is provided, it is possible to save the trouble of manually inputting the type information to the predetermined device. , It is possible to prevent erroneous type information from being input to a predetermined device. As a result, the predetermined apparatus can execute processing based on the determination information output from the determination information output unit and the accurate type information output from the type information output unit. In addition, the type of the entrance portion is, for example, the entrance portion where the signal output means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) such as the first start port, the second start port, the big winning opening, and the discharge passage are provided. It is a type.

[Feature αD3]
A gaming machine according to feature αD1 or feature αD2,
A plurality of the entrance parts into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of the signal output means for outputting signals based on the entrance of game balls into the entrance parts,
The determination information output means determines whether or not a game ball has entered each of the plurality of ball-entry portions based on the signals output from each of the plurality of signal output means, The determination information (entrance information), which is information based on determination and corresponding to each of the plurality of ingress parts, is transmitted to the predetermined device connected to the connection means with a serial transmission method. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for outputting according to the above.

  According to the feature αD3, the determination information output means includes a means for outputting determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball-entry portions to a predetermined device connected to the connection means by a serial transmission method. Compared with the case where the configuration in which the determination information is output by the parallel transmission method is adopted, the configuration of the connection means for passing the determination information to the predetermined device can be simplified and the predetermined information for receiving the determination information can be received. The configuration of the apparatus can be simplified.

  Specifically, if a configuration is adopted in which determination information corresponding to each of a plurality of balls is output by a parallel transmission method, the connection means outputs outputs corresponding to the number of balls of the plurality of balls. It is necessary to provide a part. Similarly, the predetermined device needs to include input units corresponding to the number of the plurality of ball entering units. In addition, since the number of pitching units provided in the gaming machine differs for each type of gaming machine (for each model), it is necessary to prepare a predetermined device having a different number of terminals for each type of gaming machine (for each model). Occurs.

  On the other hand, according to the present feature, the determination information output means outputs, to the predetermined device connected to the connection means, determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of ball-entry portions by a serial transmission method. Therefore, the connection means may be configured to include at least one output unit that can output the determination information by the serial transmission method regardless of the number of the ball entering units included in the gaming machine. Therefore, the configuration of the connecting means can be simplified. Similarly, the predetermined device may be configured to include at least one input unit that can input the determination information output by the serial transmission method regardless of the number of the entrance units provided in the gaming machine. The configuration of the predetermined apparatus can be simplified. In addition, even when a predetermined device is connected to a gaming machine having a different number of pitching units, the predetermined device inputs determination information corresponding to each of the plurality of pitching units by a serial transmission method. Can do. In other words, the predetermined device can be used for other gaming machines having different numbers of pitching parts. As a result, it is possible to improve the versatility of the predetermined device.

[Feature αD4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features αD1 to αD3,
The prize ball number information output means outputs means for outputting the prize ball number information based on receiving a predetermined signal (entrance entrance information transmission request command) from the predetermined device connected to the connection means. A gaming machine characterized by comprising.

  According to the feature αD4, the prize ball number information output means includes means for outputting the prize ball number information based on reception of a predetermined signal from a predetermined device connected to the connection means. It is possible to prevent the prize ball number information from being output to the outside at the timing.

[Feature αD5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features αD1 to αD4,
The prize ball number information output means includes means for outputting the prize ball number information when the predetermined device is connected to the connection means.

  According to the feature αD5, the prize ball number information output means includes means for outputting the prize ball number information when a predetermined apparatus is connected to the connection means, so that the predetermined apparatus is connected to the connection means. The winning ball number information can be acquired promptly. Therefore, for example, a predetermined device can quickly execute a process that requires the prize ball number information after being connected to the connection means.

[Feature αD6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features αD1 to αD5,
The connection means is configured to be able to connect to the predetermined device capable of calculating game history information (game history information such as an accessory ratio) that is information relating to a game history based on the determination information. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature αD6, the predetermined device connected to the connection unit can calculate the game history information based on the determination information not affected by the control unit. Therefore, the inspector who inspects the performance of the gaming machine can check the game history information that is not affected by the control means by using a predetermined device. As a result, game soundness can be ensured.

[Feature αD7]
The gaming machine according to any one of features αD1 to αD6,
The determination information output means includes means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means.

  According to the feature αD7, the determination information output unit includes a unit that outputs the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection unit without passing through the control unit. Therefore, the predetermined device is influenced by the control unit. It is possible to receive determination information that has not been received.

  For example, if the configuration that outputs the determination information via the control unit to a predetermined device connected to the connection unit without using the configuration of this feature, a problem occurs in the control unit. In the case where it is being performed or illegally modified, the determination information output to a predetermined device may be affected by the malfunction or unauthorized modification.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, the determination information output means includes a means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means. Even if it occurs or is illegally modified, the judgment information output to a predetermined device is not affected by the malfunction or unauthorized modification. As a result, the predetermined device connected to the connection means can execute processing based on determination information that is not affected by the malfunction or unauthorized modification.

[Feature αD8]
A gaming machine according to feature αD2,
The type information output means comprises means for outputting the type information based on receiving a predetermined signal (entrance entrance information transmission request command) from the predetermined device connected to the connection means. A gaming machine.

  According to the characteristic αD8, the type information output unit includes a unit that outputs the type information based on reception of a predetermined signal from a predetermined device connected to the connection unit. Information can be prevented from being output to the outside.

[Feature αD9]
The gaming machine according to feature αD2 or feature D8,
The type information output means includes means for outputting the type information when the predetermined device is connected to the connection means.

  According to the characteristic αD9, the type information output unit includes a unit that outputs the type information when the predetermined device is connected to the connection unit. Type information can be acquired. Therefore, for example, a predetermined device can quickly execute a process that requires the type information after being connected to the connection unit.

<Feature αE group>
The feature αE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αE1]
The entrance part where game balls can enter,
Signal output means (each of the incoming detection sensors 44a to 44h) for outputting a signal based on the entrance of the game ball into the entrance part;
Judgment information output means for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the pitching unit based on the signal and outputting judgment information (ballistic information) that is information based on the judgment IC62c),
Control means (main CPU 62x) for controlling the progress of the game based on the determination information;
A calculation means (main CPU 62x, game history management chip 300) for calculating game history information (game history information such as an accessory ratio) that is information related to a game history based on the determination information;
Storage means (flash memory 64x, game history management chip 300) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
A connection means (inspection terminal 65) capable of connecting a predetermined device;
A gaming machine comprising
The determination information output means includes means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means,
The gaming machine further includes:
A gaming machine comprising: game history information output means for outputting the game history information stored in the storage means to the predetermined device connected to the connection means.

  According to the feature αE1, since the game history information stored in the storage means and the determination information output means are provided for a predetermined device connected to the connection means, the connection means is connected. The predetermined device can receive the game history information stored in the storage means, and can execute processing based on the determination information.

  Specifically, for example, the predetermined device can display game history information (hereinafter also referred to as first game history information) stored in the storage means of the gaming machine. Further, the predetermined device calculates the game history information based on the determination information received during the predetermined inspection period connected to the connection means of the gaming machine, and the game history information (hereinafter referred to as the second game history information). Can be displayed. Thus, for example, an inspector who inspects a gaming machine can obtain a second game based on first game history information stored in storage means included in the gaming machine and determination information received by a predetermined device during a predetermined inspection period. It becomes possible to compare with history information.

  Here, if a gaming machine has a problem, or an illegal modification (for example, modification of a nail, etc.) has occurred, the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine have changed. Based on the first game history information (game history information calculated by the calculation means based on the determination information in the past predetermined period) and the determination information in the predetermined inspection period by the predetermined device. There may be a difference between the second game history information calculated in the above. Therefore, an inspector who inspects a gaming machine examines whether or not a malfunction or unauthorized modification (for example, modification of a nail) has occurred in the gaming machine by paying attention to a difference between two game history information. Can do.

[Feature αE2]
A gaming machine according to feature αE1,
The number of prize balls that is information that can specify the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball when one game ball enters the pitching unit with respect to the predetermined device connected to the connection means A gaming machine comprising a prize ball number information output means for outputting information.

  According to the feature αE2, since the prize ball number information output means for outputting the prize ball number information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means is provided, it is troublesome to manually input the prize ball number information to the predetermined device. Can be omitted, and erroneous prize ball number information can be prevented from being input to a predetermined device. As a result, the predetermined device can execute processing based on the determination information output from the determination information output means and the accurate prize ball number information output from the prize ball number information output means.

[Feature αE3]
A gaming machine according to feature αE1 or feature αE2,
The connection means is configured to be able to connect to the predetermined device capable of calculating game history information (game history information such as an accessory ratio) that is information relating to a game history based on the determination information. A gaming machine.

  According to the characteristic αE3, the predetermined device connected to the connection unit can calculate the game history information based on the determination information not affected by the control unit. Therefore, the inspector who inspects the performance of the gaming machine can check the game history information that is not affected by the control means by using a predetermined device. As a result, game soundness can be ensured.

[Feature αE4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features αE1 to αE3,
The determination information output means includes means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means.

  According to the feature αE4, the determination information output unit includes a unit that outputs the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection unit without passing through the control unit. Therefore, the predetermined device is influenced by the control unit. It is possible to receive determination information that has not been received.

  For example, if the configuration that outputs the determination information via the control unit to a predetermined device connected to the connection unit without using the configuration of this feature, a problem occurs in the control unit. In the case where it is being performed or illegally modified, the determination information output to a predetermined device may be affected by the malfunction or unauthorized modification.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, the determination information output means includes a means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means. Even if it occurs or is illegally modified, the judgment information output to a predetermined device is not affected by the malfunction or unauthorized modification. As a result, the predetermined device connected to the connection means can execute processing based on determination information that is not affected by the malfunction or unauthorized modification.

<Characteristic αF group>
The feature αF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αF1]
First process group execution means for repeatedly executing the first process group (residual process of the main process);
Based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied (a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the previous execution of the second processing group), the second processing group (game progress processing including game times control processing) is Second process group execution means for interrupting and executing the first process group;
A gaming machine comprising
The first process group execution means executes the first process group in a period (residual time) from the end of execution of one second process group to the start of execution of the next second process group. It has a means to execute repeatedly,
The first processing group includes game history information related processing (game history processing) that is processing related to calculation of game history information (such as an accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, etc.) that is information relating to a game history. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature αF1, the first process group including the game history information related process is repeatedly executed in a period from the end of execution of one second process group to the start of execution of the next second process group. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the execution of the first process group including the game history information related process is started even though the execution of one second process group has not ended. That is, while giving priority to the execution of the second processing group, the game history information is quickly obtained by repeatedly executing the first processing group including the game history information related processing in a period in which the second processing group is not executed. It is possible to calculate.

  In addition, if a configuration in which the game history information related processing is included in the second processing group without executing the configuration of this feature is adopted, the execution of one execution of the second processing group is performed. The time required from the start to the end becomes long. For example, the execution of one second process group is still completed at a timing when a predetermined condition that triggers the start of the execution of the next second process group is satisfied. In some cases, the execution of the next second processing group cannot be started until the execution of the one second processing group is completed. In this case, there is a possibility that a malfunction may occur due to a delay in the start of execution of the next second processing group.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, since the game history information related process is included in the first process group and executed, the game history information related process is included in the second process group and executed. The time required from the start to the end of one execution of the second processing group can be shortened. Therefore, for example, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the execution of one second processing group has not yet ended at the timing when a predetermined condition that triggers the start of execution of the next second processing group is satisfied. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the execution of the next second processing group cannot be started until the execution of the one second processing group is completed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems due to the delay in starting execution of the next second processing group.

  As described above, according to this feature, the game history information-related information is generated during a period in which the second processing group is not executed while suppressing the occurrence of a malfunction due to the delay in starting the execution of the next second processing group. It is possible to calculate game history information efficiently and promptly by repeatedly executing the first processing group including the processing.

[Feature αF2]
A gaming machine according to feature αF1,
The second processing group includes a game progress process that is a process related to the progress of a game.

  According to the feature αF2, since it is possible to suppress the start of execution of the second processing group including the game progress process that is a process related to the progress of the game from being delayed, a problem occurs in the progress of the game. While suppressing this, it is possible to quickly calculate the game history information by repeatedly executing the first process group including the game history information related process in the period when the second process group is not executed.

[Feature αF3]
A gaming machine according to feature αF1 or feature αF2,
The game history information-related processing includes a plurality of processing stages (multiple types of tasks) that complete the calculation of the game history information by executing sequentially.
The first processing group execution means executes a part of the plurality of processing steps in one execution of the game history information related processing.

  According to the feature αF3, the first process group executing means executes a part of the plurality of process stages in one execution of the game history information related process. For example, the game history information related process Compared to a configuration in which all of the plurality of processing stages are executed in one execution of the above, the time required from the start to the end of one execution of the game history information related process can be shortened. Specifically, for example, even if a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the game history information related process, the game history information related process being executed is completed in a short time. The time until the execution of the second processing group is started can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to quickly calculate the game history information by repeatedly executing the first process group while suppressing the occurrence of a malfunction due to the delay in starting the execution of the second process group. .

[Feature αF4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features αF1 to αF3,
The predetermined condition includes that a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the previous execution of the second processing group.

  According to the feature αF4, since the predetermined condition includes that a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the previous execution of the second processing group, the second processing group can be executed periodically. Then, after the execution of the second processing group is finished and until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the execution of the second processing group, the first processing group including the game history information related processing is changed. By repeatedly executing the game history information, it is possible to quickly calculate the game history information.

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature αA group-feature αF group solves the following problems.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, it is technical from various viewpoints of structure, control, production, etc. for the purpose of improving the fun of gaming, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, and simplifying control. Improvements have been made (for example, Patent Document 1).

  In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as the discovery and suppression of illegal acts by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

  In the gaming machines as described above, further technical improvements are desired for the purpose of improving the fun of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, simplifying the control, and providing a more sound game.

<Characteristic αG group>
The feature αG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αG1]
The entrance part where game balls can enter,
Lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the pitching unit;
Change means capable of changing a winning probability for winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by receiving a predetermined operation from outside;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed a predetermined area;
Storage means for storing detection information (game information basic information such as incoming ball information, incoming ball number information, winning ball total value, etc.) that is information based on the fact that a game ball has been detected by the detecting means;
Calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as an accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, etc.) which is information relating to a game history based on the detection information;
Display means for displaying based on the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
A gaming machine comprising
The storage means includes means for storing the detection information in a plurality of periods with a change in the winning probability as a boundary,
The calculating means includes means for calculating game history information for each of the plurality of periods based on the detection information for the plurality of periods.
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the display means includes means for displaying based on the game history information for each of the plurality of periods.

  According to the feature αG1, the inspector of the gaming machine can check the display based on the gaming history information for each of a plurality of periods with the change of the winning probability in the gaming machine as a boundary. For example, when the display based on the game history information is a numerical value of the game history information itself, the inspector may confirm that the game history information is within an appropriate range in the process in which the winning probability has been changed in the past in the gaming machine. It becomes possible to confirm whether or not there is a situation that has not occurred.

<Characteristic αH group>
The feature αH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αH1]
The entrance part where game balls can enter,
Lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the pitching unit;
Change means capable of changing a winning probability for winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by receiving a predetermined operation from outside;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed a predetermined area;
Storage means for storing detection information (game information basic information such as incoming ball information, incoming ball number information, winning ball total value, etc.) that is information based on the fact that a game ball has been detected by the detecting means;
Calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as an accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, etc.) which is information relating to a game history based on the detection information;
Display means for displaying based on the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
When the winning probability is changed again before the detection information stored in the storage means is accumulated to a predetermined amount after the winning probability is changed, predetermined information (short-term change information) is displayed. Predetermined information display means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the characteristic αH1, the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm whether or not the winning probability has been changed again before the detection information is accumulated up to a predetermined amount by confirming the predetermined information. As a result, it is possible to suppress a change in the winning probability based on an unauthorized intention by the administrator of the gaming machine.

  For example, if the detection information stored before the change of the winning probability is deleted based on the change of the winning probability, the gaming machine is inspected by the inspector. In addition, the manager of the gaming machine changes the winning probability again and stores it in the gaming machine even though the gaming machine is not often played after the winning probability is changed. The detected information may be deleted. However, according to this aspect, when the winning probability is changed again in a short period in spite of the fact that the game machine is not often played after the winning probability is changed, Short-term change information will be recorded and displayed. Therefore, by checking the short-term change information, the inspector can recognize that the winning probability may have been changed in a short time due to an unfair intention such as erasure of the detection information. . As a result, it is possible to suppress a change in the winning probability based on an unauthorized intention by the administrator of the gaming machine.

[Feature αH2]
A gaming machine described in feature αH1,
Erasing means for erasing the detection information stored in the storage means,
The storage means includes means for storing the detection information in a plurality of periods with a change in the winning probability as a boundary,
The calculation means includes means for calculating the game history information for each of the plurality of periods based on the detection information for the plurality of periods.
The display means includes means for displaying based on the game history information for each of the plurality of periods,
The erasing means includes means for erasing the detection information in the oldest period among the plurality of periods when the winning probability is changed.

  According to the feature αH2, the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm the display based on the gaming history information for each of a plurality of periods with the change of the winning probability in the gaming machine as a boundary. For example, when the display based on the game history information is a numerical value of the game history information itself, the inspector may confirm that the game history information is within an appropriate range in the process in which the winning probability has been changed in the past in the gaming machine. It becomes possible to confirm whether or not there is a situation that has not occurred.

  Furthermore, according to this feature, the inspector of the gaming machine can confirm whether or not the winning probability has been changed again before the detection information is accumulated to a predetermined amount by confirming the predetermined information. it can. As a result, it is possible to suppress a change in the winning probability based on an unauthorized intention by the administrator of the gaming machine.

  Specifically, for example, before a gaming machine is inspected by an inspector, the manager of the gaming machine repeatedly changes the winning probability in a short period of time, and changes the winning probability of the gaming machine as a boundary. The detection information in a plurality of periods may be deleted. However, according to this feature, when the winning probability is repeatedly changed in a short period, the above-described short-term change information is recorded and displayed. Therefore, by checking the short-term change information, the inspector can recognize that there is a possibility that the winning probability has been changed in a short time due to an unauthorized intention. As a result, it is possible to suppress a change in the winning probability based on an unauthorized intention by the administrator of the gaming machine.

<Characteristic αI group>
The feature αI group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αI1]
The entrance part where game balls can enter,
Lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the pitching unit;
Change means capable of changing a winning probability for winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by receiving a predetermined operation from outside;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed a predetermined area;
Storage means for storing detection information (game information basic information such as incoming ball information, incoming ball number information, winning ball total value, etc.) that is information based on the fact that a game ball has been detected by the detecting means;
Calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as an accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, etc.) which is information relating to a game history based on the detection information;
Display means for displaying based on the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
Erasing means for erasing the detection information stored in the storage means;
A gaming machine comprising
When the winning probability is changed, the erasure means changes the winning probability after the detection information stored in the storage means after the winning probability is changed is accumulated to a predetermined amount. A gaming machine comprising: means for erasing the detection information stored in the storage means before the game.

  According to the characteristic αI1, the detection information stored in the storage unit before the winning probability is changed until the detection information stored in the storage unit after the winning probability is changed is accumulated to a predetermined amount. Since it is not erase | eliminated, it can suppress that the detection information memorize | stored before the change of winning probability is erase | eliminated intentionally by changing the winning probability of a game machine. For example, if the detection information acquired and stored before the change of the winning probability is deleted immediately after the winning probability of the gaming machine is changed, the gaming machine is inspected by the inspector. There is a possibility that the manager of the gaming machine changes the winning probability before the detection information stored before the changing of the winning probability is deleted. On the other hand, according to this feature, the detection information stored before the change of the winning probability is acquired until the detection information acquired and stored after the winning probability is changed is accumulated up to a predetermined amount. Is not erased, it is possible to suppress a change in the winning probability due to an unauthorized intention by the administrator of the gaming machine.

[Feature αI2]
A gaming machine according to the feature αI1,
Erasing means for erasing the detection information stored in the storage means,
The storage means includes means for storing the detection information in a plurality of periods with a change in the winning probability as a boundary,
The calculation means includes means for calculating the game history information for each of the plurality of periods based on the detection information for the plurality of periods.
The display means includes means for displaying based on the game history information for each of the plurality of periods,
When the winning probability is changed, the erasing means stores the detection information stored in the storage means after the winning probability is changed up to a predetermined amount, and then includes the plurality of periods. A gaming machine comprising: means for erasing the detection information in the oldest period.

  According to the feature αI2, the inspector of the gaming machine can check the display based on the gaming history information for each of a plurality of periods with the change of the winning probability in the gaming machine as a boundary. For example, when the display based on the game history information is a numerical value of the game history information itself, the inspector may confirm that the game history information is within an appropriate range in the process in which the winning probability has been changed in the past in the gaming machine. It becomes possible to confirm whether or not there is a situation that has not occurred.

  Furthermore, according to this feature, the detection information in a plurality of periods with the change in the winning probability as a boundary can be prevented from being intentionally erased by repeatedly changing the winning probability of the gaming machine. it can. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which detection information in the oldest period among a plurality of periods with a change in winning probability as a boundary is deleted immediately after the winning probability of the gaming machine is changed, the gaming machine Before being inspected by the inspector, there is a possibility that the manager of the gaming machine repeatedly changes the winning probability and erases the detection information in a plurality of periods of the gaming machine. On the other hand, according to this feature, the detection information in the oldest period among a plurality of periods with the change in the winning probability as a boundary is the detection information acquired and stored after the winning probability is changed. Since it is not erased until the amount is accumulated, it is possible to suppress a change in the winning probability due to an unauthorized intention by the administrator of the gaming machine.

<Characteristic αJ group>
The feature αJ group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αJ1]
The entrance part where game balls can enter,
Lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the pitching unit;
Change means capable of changing a winning probability for winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by receiving a predetermined operation from outside;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed a predetermined area;
Storage means for storing detection information (game information basic information such as incoming ball information, incoming ball number information, winning ball total value, etc.) that is information based on the fact that a game ball has been detected by the detecting means;
Calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as an accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, etc.) which is information relating to a game history based on the detection information;
Display means for displaying based on the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
A gaming machine comprising
The storage means includes means for distinguishing and storing the detection information for each winning probability at the time when the detection means detects a game ball,
The calculating means includes means for calculating the game history information for each winning probability,
The display means includes means for displaying based on the game history information for each of the winning probabilities.

  According to the feature αJ1, for example, when the display based on the game history information is a numerical value of the game history information itself, the inspector of the gaming machine may determine that each game history information calculated and displayed for each winning probability is appropriate. It can be confirmed whether it is within the range. That is, the inspector can confirm whether or not there is a winning probability setting in which the game history information is not within an appropriate range in the gaming machine.

  Note that the inventions of the above-mentioned feature αG group to feature αJ group solve the following problems.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, it is technical from various viewpoints of structure, control, production, etc. for the purpose of improving the fun of gaming, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, and simplifying control. Improvements have been made (for example, Patent Document 1).

  In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as the discovery and suppression of illegal acts by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

  In the gaming machines as described above, further technical improvements are desired for the purpose of improving the fun of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, simplifying the control, and providing a more sound game.

<Characteristic αK group>
The feature αK group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αK1]
The entrance part where game balls can enter,
Lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the pitching unit;
Change means capable of changing a winning probability for winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by receiving a predetermined operation from outside;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed a predetermined area;
Storage means for storing detection information (game information basic information such as incoming ball information, incoming ball number information, winning ball total value, etc.) that is information based on the fact that a game ball has been detected by the detecting means;
Calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as an accessory ratio, a continuous feature ratio, a pitch rate, etc.) that is information relating to a game history based on the detection information;
It has a first display area and a second display area constituted by a plurality of display elements (segment light emitting part, CP light emitting part), and predetermined information is given to the first display area and the second display area. Display means capable of displaying;
A gaming machine comprising
The display means includes
When displaying the game history information, information related to the type of the game history information is displayed in the first display area using the display element, and the game history information is displayed in the second display area. Means for displaying numerical information using the display element;
When the winning probability is changed, the first display area is a display mode that is not displayed when displaying information related to the type of game history information, and displays information related to the type of game history information. Means for displaying a display mode using only display elements used in the event, and displaying numerical information related to the setting of the winning probability in the second display area using the display elements;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the characteristic αK1, the first display area is displayed when the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the second display area of the display means and when the numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability is displayed. The display mode of is clearly different. Therefore, for example, the administrator of the gaming machine can clearly determine whether the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the second display area of the display means or whether the numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability is displayed. It can be recognized separately. As a result, the manager of the gaming machine is prevented from misidentifying the numerical information displayed in the second display area between the numerical information of the game history information and the numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability. be able to.

  Furthermore, according to this feature, the display elements of the first display area that are not used when displaying the game history information (for example, the segment light emitting units A and B, the DP light emitting unit, the left middle 7 Since the segment light emitting part B) of the segment indicator 45z2 is not used even when the winning probability is changed, there are display elements that are not used (hereinafter referred to as non-use display elements) in the first display area. . Therefore, for example, even if a defect occurs in the unused display element in the first display area, the display mode in the first display area is not affected. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the display mode is affected when a defect occurs in the display element of the first display area.

  For example, when a light-emitting element such as an LED is used as the display element, the light-emitting element that is not used does not need to emit light, and thus the components necessary for causing the light-emitting element to emit light are omitted. Can do. Therefore, the cost of the display means can be reduced.

<Characteristic αL group>
The feature αL group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αL1]
The entrance part where game balls can enter,
Lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the pitching unit;
Change means capable of changing a winning probability for winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by receiving a predetermined operation from outside;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed a predetermined area;
Storage means for storing detection information (game information basic information such as incoming ball information, incoming ball number information, winning ball total value, etc.) that is information based on the fact that a game ball has been detected by the detecting means;
Calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as an accessory ratio, a continuous feature ratio, a pitch rate, etc.) that is information relating to a game history based on the detection information;
Display means having a first display area and a second display area, and capable of displaying predetermined information in the first display area and the second display area;
A gaming machine comprising
The display means includes
Means for displaying information relating to a type of the game history information in the first display area and displaying numerical information of the game history information in the second display area when displaying the game history information; ,
Means for displaying nothing in the first display area and numerical information relating to the setting of the winning probability in the second display area when the winning probability is changed;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the characteristic αL1, the first display area includes the case where the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the second display area of the display means and the case where the numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability is displayed. The display mode of is clearly different. Therefore, for example, the administrator of the gaming machine can clearly determine whether the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the second display area of the display means or whether the numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability is displayed. It can be recognized separately. As a result, the manager of the gaming machine is prevented from misidentifying the numerical information displayed in the second display area between the numerical information of the game history information and the numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability. be able to.

  Further, according to this feature, for example, the first display area is configured by a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs), predetermined information is displayed when the predetermined light emitting elements emit light, and all the light emitting elements are turned off. Thus, in the case of a configuration in which nothing is displayed, even if there is a problem that some of the light emitting elements constituting the first display area do not emit light, a serious problem that all the light emitting elements do not emit light. As long as no occurrence has occurred, the display mode of the first display area is different between when the game history information is displayed and when the numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability is displayed. Therefore, according to this feature, even if there is a problem that a part of the light emitting elements constituting the first display area does not emit light, it is important for the administrator that all the light emitting elements do not emit light. As long as no trouble has occurred, it is possible to distinguish and recognize whether the numerical information displayed in the second display area is game history information or numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability. That is, the manager determines that the numerical value displayed in the second display area is game history information when at least some of the light emitting elements emit light in the first display area, Only when all the light emitting elements constituting the display area are turned off, it can be determined that the numerical value displayed in the second display area is the numerical information related to the setting of the winning probability.

<Feature αM group>
The feature αM group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αM1]
The entrance part where game balls can enter,
Lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the pitching unit;
Change means capable of changing a winning probability for winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by receiving a predetermined operation from outside;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed a predetermined area;
Storage means for storing detection information (game information basic information such as incoming ball information, incoming ball number information, winning ball total value, etc.) that is information based on the fact that a game ball has been detected by the detecting means;
Calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as an accessory ratio, a continuous feature ratio, a pitch rate, etc.) that is information relating to a game history based on the detection information;
Display means having a predetermined display area and capable of displaying predetermined information in the predetermined display area;
A gaming machine comprising
The display means includes
Means for displaying numerical information of the game history information in a predetermined number of digits (two digits) in the predetermined display area when displaying the game history information;
Means for displaying numerical information related to the setting of the winning probability in the predetermined display area with a number of digits (one digit) different from the predetermined number of digits when the winning probability is changed;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature αM1, the number of digits of the displayed numerical value is displayed when the numerical information related to the game history information is displayed in the predetermined display area and when the numerical information related to the setting of the winning probability is displayed. Will be different. Therefore, for example, the administrator of the gaming machine clearly distinguishes whether the numerical information related to the game history information is displayed in the predetermined display area of the display means or whether the numerical information related to the setting of the winning probability is displayed. Can be recognized. As a result, the administrator of the gaming machine misidentifies the numerical information displayed in the predetermined display area of the display means between the numerical information of the game history information and the numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability. Can be suppressed.

<Characteristic αN group>
The feature αN group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αN1]
The entrance part where game balls can enter,
Lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the pitching unit;
Change means capable of changing a winning probability for winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by receiving a predetermined operation from outside;
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed a predetermined area;
Storage means for storing detection information (game information basic information such as incoming ball information, incoming ball number information, winning ball total value, etc.) that is information based on the fact that a game ball has been detected by the detecting means;
Calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as an accessory ratio, a continuous feature ratio, a pitch rate, etc.) that is information relating to a game history based on the detection information;
Display means having a first display area and a second display area, and capable of displaying predetermined information in the first display area and the second display area;
A gaming machine comprising
The display means includes
Means for displaying information relating to a type of the game history information in the first display area and displaying numerical information of the game history information in the second display area when displaying the game history information; ,
When changing the winning probability, a plurality of types of display modes (display pattern A and display pattern B) that are not displayed when the information related to the type of the game history information is displayed in the first display area are switched. Means for repeatedly displaying, and in the second display area, numerical information relating to the setting of the winning probability;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature αN1, the first display area includes the case where the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the second display area of the display means and the case where the numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability is displayed. The display mode of is clearly different. Therefore, for example, the administrator of the gaming machine can clearly determine whether the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the second display area of the display means or whether the numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability is displayed. It can be recognized separately. As a result, the manager of the gaming machine is prevented from misidentifying the numerical information displayed in the second display area between the numerical information of the game history information and the numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability. be able to.

  Furthermore, according to this feature, the display mode in the first display area dynamically changes during the period in which the numerical information related to the setting of the winning probability is displayed in the second display area. The manager can be alerted that this is an important state to carefully change the winning probability.

<Characteristic αO group>
The feature αO group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αO1]
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed a predetermined area;
Storage means for storing detection information (game information basic information such as incoming ball information, incoming ball number information, winning ball total value, etc.) that is information based on the fact that a game ball has been detected by the detecting means;
Calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as an accessory ratio, a continuous feature ratio, a pitch rate, etc.) that is information relating to a game history based on the detection information;
Display means for performing display based on the game history information calculated by the calculation means (display of type information and numerical information);
The game history in the display means based on the information amount of the detection information (the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage during the normal mode (the number of outs during the normal mode)) as a basis for calculating the game history information A determining means for determining a display mode (lighted display or flashing display) based on information;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the characteristic αO1, the administrator of the gaming machine can grasp how much detection information that is the basis for calculating the game history information is accumulated by confirming the display mode on the display means. For example, it is possible to determine whether or not the displayed numerical value of the game history information is calculated with a sufficient amount of statistical data accumulated.

  Note that the invention of the feature αK group to the feature αO group solves the following problems.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, it is technical from various viewpoints of structure, control, production, etc. for the purpose of improving the fun of gaming, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, and simplifying control. Improvements have been made (for example, Patent Document 1).

  In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as the discovery and suppression of illegal acts by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

  In the gaming machines as described above, further technical improvements are desired for the purpose of improving the fun of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, simplifying the control, and providing a more sound game.

<Characteristic αP group>
The feature αP group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αP1]
A gaming machine comprising a control means for controlling a game,
The control means includes
A CPU (main CPU 62x) that includes a plurality of registers including a flag register and a stack pointer and executes a plurality of types of programs including a first program and a second program;
Program storage means (of the main ROM 63) having a first program storage area for storing the first program and a second program storage area for storing the second program, which is an area different from the first program storage area. Program storage means 63a);
A first stack area corresponding to the first program accessible by a first stack area reference address stored in the stack pointer, and an area different from the first stack area, and stored in the stack pointer Stack means (stack means 64b of the main RAM 64) having a second stack area corresponding to the second program accessible by a second stack area reference address;
A first data storage area corresponding to the first program capable of updating data, and a second data storage area corresponding to the second program capable of updating data, which is different from the first data storage area; Data storage means (data storage means 64a of the main RAM 64),
The flag register is a register whose value changes in a predetermined case,
In the processing by the first program, the data in the first stack area and the first data storage area can be updated and referenced, and the data in the second stack area and the second data storage area cannot be updated, but can be referred to And
In the processing by the second program, the data in the second stack area and the second data storage area can be updated and referenced, and the data in the first stack area and the first data storage area cannot be updated, but can be referred to And
The CPU
By executing a program included in the first program, a first process (game progress process) is performed,
After executing the first process, by executing a program included in the first program, a storage process for storing the value of the flag register in the first stack area or the first data storage area is performed,
After executing the storage process, by executing a program included in the second program, the first stack area reference address stored in the stack pointer is stored in the second data storage area, Storing a second stack area reference address in a stack pointer, and storing a value of each of the plurality of registers in the second data storage area;
After executing the evacuation process, by executing a program included in the second program, the second process (game history information calculation display process) is performed,
After executing the second process, by executing a program included in the second program, the value of each of the plurality of registers is set to the value stored in the second data storage area by the save process, Performing a return process for storing the first stack area reference address stored in the second data storage area by the save process in the stack pointer;
After executing the return process, by executing a program included in the first program, the value of the flag register among the plurality of registers whose values are set by the return process is changed by the storage process. A gaming machine, wherein a change process for changing to a value stored in one stack area or the first data storage area is performed.

  According to the feature αP1, the saving process and the restoring process are performed, so that when the second program returns to the first program, the value of the register used in the first program has changed. Can be avoided.

  Further, according to this feature, even if the value of the flag register changes at the timing after the storage process and before the save process, by executing the change process, the flag register Since the value returns to the same value as that immediately after the end of the first process by the first program, there is no possibility of affecting the process by the first program performed after the return from the process by the second program. As a result, a plurality of programs can be configured independently.

  Moreover, according to this feature, the second process can be added without affecting the process by the first program only by adding the program for performing the second process to the second program. Therefore, it is possible to easily create a program for performing the second process independently of the first program.

  Further, for example, when the capacity of data to be stored in the stack area exceeds the upper limit value of the storage capacity of the stack area, a reset process for erasing all data stored in the stack area is performed. In the configuration, if the value of each of the plurality of registers is stored in the second stack area in the save process, the reset process may be performed. On the other hand, according to this feature, the value of each of the plurality of registers is stored in the second data storage area in the save process, so that it is possible to avoid the risk that the stack area reset process is performed.

<Characteristic αQ group>
The feature αQ group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αQ1]
A gaming machine comprising a control means for controlling a game,
The control means includes
A CPU (main CPU 62x) that includes a plurality of registers including a flag register and a stack pointer and executes a plurality of types of programs including a first program and a second program;
Program storage means (of the main ROM 63) having a first program storage area for storing the first program and a second program storage area for storing the second program, which is an area different from the first program storage area. Program storage means 63a);
A first stack area corresponding to the first program accessible by a first stack area reference address stored in the stack pointer, and an area different from the first stack area, and stored in the stack pointer Stack means (stack means 64b of the main RAM 64) having a second stack area corresponding to the second program accessible by a second stack area reference address;
A first data storage area corresponding to the first program capable of updating data, and a second data storage area corresponding to the second program capable of updating data, which is different from the first data storage area; Data storage means (data storage means 64a of the main RAM 64),
The flag register is a register whose value changes in a predetermined case,
In the processing by the first program, the data in the first stack area and the first data storage area can be updated and referenced, and the data in the second stack area and the second data storage area cannot be updated, but can be referred to And
In the processing by the second program, the data in the second stack area and the second data storage area can be updated and referenced, and the data in the first stack area and the first data storage area cannot be updated, but can be referred to And
The CPU
By executing a program included in the first program, a first process (game progress process) is performed,
After executing the first process, by executing a program included in the first program, a storage process for storing the value of the flag register in the first stack area or the first data storage area is performed,
After executing the storage process, the second stack area reference address is stored in the stack pointer by executing a program included in the second program, and the value of each of the plurality of registers is set to the second data. Implement save processing to store in the storage area,
After executing the evacuation process, by executing a program included in the second program, the second process (game history information calculation display process) is performed,
After executing the second process, by executing a program included in the second program, the value of each of the plurality of registers is set to the value stored in the second data storage area by the save process and fixed. A return process for storing the first stack area reference address as a value in the stack pointer is performed,
After executing the return process, by executing a program included in the first program, the value of the flag register among the plurality of registers whose values are set by the return process is changed by the storage process. A gaming machine, wherein a change process for changing to a value stored in one stack area or the first data storage area is performed.

  According to the feature αQ1, the saving process and the restoring process are performed, and therefore, when returning from the second program to the first program, the value of the register used in the first program has changed. Can be avoided.

  Further, according to this feature, even if the value of the flag register changes at the timing after the storage process and before the save process, by executing the change process, the flag register Since the value returns to the same value as that immediately after the end of the first process by the first program, there is no possibility of affecting the process by the first program performed after the return from the process by the second program. As a result, a plurality of programs can be configured independently.

  Moreover, according to this feature, the second process can be added without affecting the process by the first program only by adding the program for performing the second process to the second program. Therefore, it is possible to easily create a program for performing the second process independently of the first program.

  Further, for example, when the capacity of data to be stored in the stack area exceeds the upper limit value of the storage capacity of the stack area, a reset process for erasing all data stored in the stack area is performed. In the configuration, if the value of each of the plurality of registers is stored in the second stack area in the save process, the reset process may be performed. On the other hand, according to this feature, the value of each of the plurality of registers is stored in the second data storage area in the save process, so that it is possible to avoid the risk that the stack area reset process is performed.

  Further, according to this feature, the first stack area reference address, which is a fixed value in the return process, is stored in the stack pointer, so that the first stack area reference address stored in the stack pointer in the save process is set to the second address. There is no need to save to the data storage area. Therefore, the processing of the CPU can be simplified and the storage capacity of the second data storage area required for saving the first stack area reference address stored in the stack pointer can be reduced. .

<Characteristic αR group>
The feature αR group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αR1]
A gaming machine comprising a control means for controlling a game,
The control means includes
A CPU (main CPU 62x) that includes a plurality of registers including a flag register and a stack pointer and executes a plurality of types of programs including a first program and a second program;
Program storage means (of the main ROM 63) having a first program storage area for storing the first program and a second program storage area for storing the second program, which is an area different from the first program storage area. Program storage means 63a);
A first stack area corresponding to the first program accessible by a first stack area reference address stored in the stack pointer, and an area different from the first stack area, and stored in the stack pointer Stack means (stack means 64b of the main RAM 64) having a second stack area corresponding to the second program accessible by a second stack area reference address;
A first data storage area corresponding to the first program capable of updating data, and a second data storage area corresponding to the second program capable of updating data, which is different from the first data storage area; Data storage means (data storage means 64a of the main RAM 64),
The flag register is a register whose value changes in a predetermined case,
In the processing by the first program, the data in the first stack area and the first data storage area can be updated and referenced, and the data in the second stack area and the second data storage area cannot be updated, but can be referred to And
In the processing by the second program, the data in the second stack area and the second data storage area can be updated and referenced, and the data in the first stack area and the first data storage area cannot be updated, but can be referred to And
The CPU
By executing a program included in the first program, a first process (game progress process) is performed,
After executing the first process, by executing a program included in the first program, a storage process for storing the value of the flag register in the first stack area or the first data storage area is performed,
After executing the storage process, by executing a program included in the first program, to perform a first clear process to set the value of each of the plurality of registers to 0,
After executing the first clear process, by executing a program included in the second program, the first storage process for storing the second stack area reference address in the stack pointer is performed,
After executing the first storage process, by executing a program included in the second program, the second process (game history information calculation display process) is performed,
After executing the second process, by executing a program included in the second program, a second storage process for storing the first stack area reference address that is a fixed value in the stack pointer is performed,
After executing the second storage process, by executing a program included in the second program, a second clear process for setting each of the plurality of registers to 0 is performed,
After executing the second clear process, by executing a program included in the first program, the value of the flag register is stored in the first stack area or the first data storage area by the storage process. A gaming machine characterized by performing a change process for changing to a value.

  According to the feature αR1, the first clear process is performed by the program included in the first program and the second clear process is performed by the program included in the second program. The value of each of the plurality of registers can be matched with the value of each of the plurality of registers at the time immediately after the end of execution of the second program. Therefore, when returning from the second program to the first program, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems due to the change in the values of the plurality of registers used in the first program.

  Further, according to this feature, since the storage process and the change process are performed, the value of the flag register returns to the same value as that immediately after the end of the first process by the first program. Therefore, there is no possibility of affecting the processing by the first program performed after returning from the processing by the second program. As a result, a plurality of programs can be configured independently.

  Moreover, according to this feature, the second process can be added without affecting the process by the first program only by adding the program for performing the second process to the second program. Therefore, it is possible to easily create a program for performing the second process independently of the first program.

  Further, according to this feature, since the first stack area reference address which is a fixed value is stored in the stack pointer in the return process, the first stack area reference address stored in the stack pointer is stored in the save process. There is no need to save to the second data storage area. Therefore, the processing of the CPU can be simplified and the storage capacity of the second data storage area required for saving the first stack area reference address stored in the stack pointer can be reduced. .

<Characteristic αS group>
The feature αS group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αS1]
The entrance part where game balls can enter,
Lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the pitching unit;
A change mode execution means for executing a change mode capable of changing a winning probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by receiving a predetermined operation from the outside;
Storage means (main-side RAM 64) for storing information relating to the progress of the game;
Detecting means for detecting an abnormality of the storage means;
Initialization means for initializing the storage means when the detection means detects the abnormality;
A gaming machine comprising
The change mode execution means comprises means for executing the change mode even when the predetermined operation is not accepted when the initialization is executed.

  If the storage means is initialized due to an abnormality of the storage means, the setting information of the winning probability may be rewritten with setting information different from the setting information originally intended by the administrator. . If the configuration is such that the winning probability setting information is not initialized (not changed) even if the storage means is initialized, the setting information may be maintained different from the setting information originally intended by the administrator. .

  According to the feature αS1, when the storage unit is initialized due to abnormality of the storage unit, the change mode is executed. Therefore, the administrator of the gaming machine can change the change mode before the game is resumed in the gaming machine. In this case, the winning probability setting information can be changed to the originally intended setting information.

[Feature αS2]
A gaming machine according to the characteristic αS1,
The initialization means includes means for not initializing information relating to a gaming state among the information stored in the storage means when the storage means is initialized.

  According to the feature αS2, even when the storage means is initialized, information regarding the gaming state is not initialized, so that the player can resume the game while maintaining the gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the initialization of the storage means.

[Feature αS3]
A gaming machine according to feature αS1 or feature αS2,
A gaming machine comprising: notification means for notifying that the winning probability is changed when the winning probability is changed in the change mode.

  When the storage means is initialized due to an abnormality of the storage means and the change mode is executed, the player who has played a game in the gaming machine can manage the manager in the change mode after the initialization of the storage means. Whether or not the winning probability has been changed is assumed to become a suspicious assassin. However, according to this feature, when the winning probability is changed, the fact that the winning probability has been changed is notified, so that the player can confirm whether or not the winning probability has been changed. More specifically, do not let the player know what setting information the current winning probability setting information is, but only know whether or not the winning probability has been changed in the change mode. Can do. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the player must restart the game with an uneasy feeling without knowing whether or not the winning probability has been changed by the manager.

<Characteristic αT group>
The feature αT group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αT1]
The entrance part where game balls can enter,
Lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the pitching unit;
A change mode execution means for executing a change mode capable of changing a winning probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by receiving a predetermined operation from the outside;
Informing means for notifying that the winning probability is changed when the winning probability is changed in the change mode;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the characteristic αT1, the player can recognize that the winning probability has been changed in the change mode. Specifically, for example, it is possible to let the player understand only whether or not the winning probability has been changed in the change mode without grasping what the current winning probability setting is. it can.

[Feature αT2]
A gaming machine according to the characteristic αT1,
A gaming machine, comprising: second notification means for notifying in a manner different from the notification by the notification means when the winning probability is not changed in the change mote.

  According to the characteristic αT2, the player can recognize that the winning probability has not been changed in the change mode.

[Feature αT3]
A gaming machine according to feature αT1 or feature αT2,
The second informing means comprises means for informing that the winning probability has not been changed when the winning probability has not been changed in the change mode.

  According to the characteristic αT3, the player can clearly recognize that the winning probability has not been changed in the change mode.

<Characteristic αU group>
The feature αU group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αU1]
The entrance part where game balls can enter,
Lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the pitching unit;
A change mode execution means for executing a change mode capable of changing a winning probability for winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by receiving a first operation from the outside;
An information display mode executing means for executing an information display mode for displaying information on the winning probability in a mode in which the progress of the game is stopped by accepting a second operation different from the first operation from the outside;
An accessory that continues a certain operation regardless of the result of the predetermined lottery process;
A gaming machine comprising
The gaming machine is characterized in that the constant operation continues even in the information display mode.

  According to the characteristic αU1, since the operation of the accessory does not stop or change even at the start and end timing of the information display mode in which the progress of the game is stopped, for example, It is possible to suppress a player from illegally obtaining an advantageous result by launching a game ball aiming at a timing at which the operation stops or changes.

<Characteristic αV group>
The feature αV group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αV1]
The entrance part where game balls can enter,
Lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the pitching unit;
A change mode execution means for executing a change mode capable of changing a winning probability for winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by receiving a first operation from the outside;
An information display mode executing means for executing an information display mode for displaying information on the winning probability in a mode in which the progress of the game is stopped by accepting a second operation different from the first operation from the outside;
An accessory that continues a certain operation regardless of the result of the predetermined lottery process;
A gaming machine comprising
The gaming machine is in a predetermined state and stops the certain operation during the information display mode.

  According to the feature αV1, for example, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a failure in an accessory that may cause a failure when the operation is stopped in a state other than a predetermined state.

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature αP group to feature αV group solves the following problems.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, there is an increase in gaming interest, a reduction in processing load on gaming machines, optimization of processing, simplification of control, simplification of structure, efficiency of development of gaming machines, Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure, control, production, etc. for the purpose of providing gaming machines that are less prone to malfunctions, and providing gaming machines in consideration of players.

  In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as the discovery and suppression of illegal acts by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

  In gaming machines such as those mentioned above, there is an increase in gaming interest, reduction in processing load on gaming machines, optimization of processing, simplification of control, simplification of structure, efficiency of development of gaming machines, and problems. Further technical improvements are desired for the purpose of providing difficult gaming machines, providing gaming machines in consideration of players, and providing more sound games.

<Characteristic αW group>
The feature αW group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αW1]
The entrance part where game balls can enter,
Lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the pitching unit;
A setting change mode executing means for executing a setting change mode that can be changed by accepting an operation from the outside for setting the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process;
A gaming machine comprising
The setting change mode execution means is configured so that all of the first condition (setting key, frame opening switch and door opening switch are ON, and the RAM clear button is ON when the game machine is powered on. The setting change mode is executed when the first condition is satisfied, but the setting change mode is not executed even when the first condition is satisfied after the power is turned on. A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the feature αW1, in order for a gaming machine that has already been turned on to execute the setting change mode, it is necessary to turn the gaming machine off and then turn it on again. Generally, in a gaming hall, it is difficult for a person other than the manager of the gaming machine to operate the power switch provided on the back of the gaming machine to temporarily turn off the power and turn it on again. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the winning probability setting of the gaming machine from being illegally changed by a person who has an unauthorized intention and is not a manager of the gaming machine.

[Feature αW2]
A gaming machine described in feature αW1,
Setting information display mode executing means for executing a setting information display mode (setting confirmation mode) that displays the setting information that is information related to the setting of the winning probability but cannot change the setting of the winning probability,
The setting information display mode execution means is configured such that when the game machine is powered on, the second condition (the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are all ON, and the RAM clear button is The setting information display mode is executed when the power supply is turned on, but the setting information display mode is not executed even when the second condition is satisfied after the power is turned on. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature αW2, in order for a gaming machine that has already been turned on to execute the setting information display mode, it is necessary to turn off the gaming machine and then turn it on again. Generally, in a gaming hall, it is difficult for a person other than the manager of the gaming machine to operate the power switch provided on the back of the gaming machine to temporarily turn off the power and turn it on again. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the winning probability setting of the gaming machine from being illegally known by a person who has an unauthorized intention other than the manager of the gaming machine.

[Feature αW3]
A gaming machine according to feature αW1 or feature αW2,
A gaming machine comprising notification means for notifying when the gaming machine is powered on.

  According to the feature αW3, it is possible to make it difficult for a person with an unauthorized intention who is not a manager of a gaming machine to turn off the gaming machine and turn it on again without being noticed by the surroundings. Therefore, it is possible to further suppress a person having an unauthorized intention who is not a manager of the gaming machine from changing or confirming the setting of the winning probability of the gaming machine.

<Characteristic αX group>
The feature αX group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αX1]
The entrance part where game balls can enter,
Lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the pitching unit;
A setting change mode executing means for executing a setting change mode that can be changed by accepting an operation from the outside for setting the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process;
Setting information display mode execution means for executing a setting information display mode (setting confirmation mode) that displays setting information that is information related to the setting of the winning probability but cannot change the setting of the winning probability;
Storage means (main-side RAM 64) for storing information including the setting information;
Determination processing execution means for executing predetermined determination processing (processing for determining whether the RAM determination value is normal by calculating a RAM determination value) based on the information stored in the storage means;
A gaming machine comprising
The setting information display mode execution means is a result that the result of the predetermined determination process is a predetermined result (a RAM determination value is not normal) even when a condition for executing the setting information display mode is satisfied. ), The game machine is characterized by comprising means for not executing the setting information display mode.

  If the result of the predetermined determination process based on the information stored in the storage means is a predetermined result, the setting information stored in the storage means is an abnormal value that is not intended by the administrator of the gaming machine. There is a possibility that. According to the feature αX1, the setting information display mode is executed while leaving the possibility that the setting information of the winning probability stored in the storage means has become an abnormal value not intended by the administrator. Can be suppressed.

<Characteristic αY group>
The feature αY group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αY1]
The entrance part where game balls can enter,
Lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the pitching unit;
A setting change mode executing means for executing a setting change mode that can be changed by accepting an operation from the outside for setting the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process;
Operation means (RAM clear button) for receiving a predetermined operation (operation to press);
Storage means (main-side RAM 64) for storing information relating to the progress of the game;
An erasure process (RAM clear process) for erasing the information stored in the storage means when the operation means accepts the predetermined operation (when the RAM clear button is pressed) and the power is turned on. An erasing process executing means for executing
A gaming machine comprising
The setting change mode execution means has predetermined conditions including that the operating means has received the predetermined operation (when the power is turned on, all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are turned on. And when the RAM clear button is pressed), the setting change mode is provided.
The erasing process execution means includes means for executing the erasure process before or after execution of the setting change mode when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

  Generally, an administrator who manages a gaming machine executes an erasing process for erasing information stored in the storage means when the operating means is turned on in a state where the operating means accepts a predetermined operation. I recognize that. Therefore, according to the feature αY1, if the administrator changes the setting change mode by executing a setting change mode by satisfying a predetermined condition including that the operation means has received a predetermined operation, the setting change mode It is possible to strongly recognize that not only is executed but also an erasing process is executed. As a result, for example, when the administrator wants to start the gaming machine while maintaining the gaming state such as the high probability mode and restart the game from the previous power-off state, that is, when the gaming machine is started, When it is not allowed to execute, the determination that the setting change mode should not be executed can be ensured. That is, according to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which an administrator can easily understand the operation.

<Characteristic αZ group>
The feature αZ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αZ1]
The entrance part where game balls can enter,
Lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the pitching unit;
A setting change mode executing means for executing a setting change mode that can be changed by accepting an operation from the outside for setting the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process;
Storage means (main-side RAM 64) for storing information including setting information that is information relating to the setting of the winning probability;
Erasing means for erasing information stored in the storage means;
A gaming machine comprising
The erasing means includes
A first erasure process (first RAM clear process) for erasing information other than the setting information without erasing the setting information among the information stored in the storage means;
A second erasure process (second RAM clear process) for erasing information including the setting information among the information stored in the storage means;
A gaming machine characterized by being able to execute.

  According to the feature αZ1, in the information stored in the storage unit, the setting information remains and other information is deleted, and the processing step including the setting information is deleted. Corresponding processing steps can be realized. For example, if the setting information is normal and maintained while other information is a processing step that should be deleted, the setting information is not deleted and the setting information becomes an abnormal value that is not intended by the administrator. In the case of a processing step that may have occurred, a configuration for erasing information including setting information can be realized.

[Feature αZ2]
A gaming machine according to the feature αZ1,
A determination process execution unit configured to execute a predetermined determination process (a process of determining whether the RAM determination value is normal by calculating a RAM determination value) based on the information stored in the storage unit;
The erasing means includes means for executing the second erasing process when the result of the predetermined determination process is a predetermined result (a result that the RAM determination value is not normal). Machine.

  If the result of the predetermined determination process based on the information stored in the storage means is a predetermined result, the setting information stored in the storage means is an abnormal value that is not intended by the administrator of the gaming machine. There is a possibility that. According to the characteristic αZ2, it is possible to prevent the game from being executed while leaving the possibility that the setting information of the winning probability stored in the storage means has become an abnormal value not intended by the administrator. Can do.

<Characteristic βA group>
The feature βA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βA1]
The entrance part where game balls can enter,
Lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the pitching unit;
A setting change mode executing means for executing a setting change mode that can be changed by accepting an operation from the outside for setting the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process;
Storage means (main side RAM 64) for storing information including setting information which is information relating to the setting of the lottery probability;
Determination processing execution means for executing predetermined determination processing (processing for determining whether the RAM determination value is normal by calculating a RAM determination value) based on the information stored in the storage means;
A gaming machine comprising
The setting change mode execution means is a state in which a predetermined operation for executing the setting change mode (all of the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are ON and the RAM clear button is pressed) Even when the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 is not received, the result of the predetermined determination process is a predetermined result (result that the RAM determination value is not normal). A gaming machine comprising: means for executing the setting change mode.

  If the result of the predetermined determination process based on the information stored in the storage means is a predetermined result, the setting information stored in the storage means is an abnormal value that is not intended by the administrator of the gaming machine. There is a possibility that. According to the feature βA1, since the setting change mode is executed when the result of the predetermined determination process is a predetermined result, the administrator can change the setting of the winning probability. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being executed with the possibility that the setting information of the winning probability stored in the storage means has an abnormal value that is not intended by the administrator.

<Characteristic βB group>
The feature βB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βB1]
The entrance part where game balls can enter,
Lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the pitching unit;
A setting change mode executing means for executing a setting change mode that can be changed by accepting an operation from the outside for setting the winning probability in the predetermined lottery process;
Display means (main display unit 45) for displaying information about the game including the result of the predetermined lottery process;
A gaming machine comprising
The display means includes
A game machine comprising: means for displaying a first display mode (display pattern in which all the LEDs are lit) that are not displayed when the information related to the game is displayed during execution of the setting change mode.

  According to the feature βB1, it is possible to notify the manager and the player that the setting change mode is being executed using the display means for displaying information relating to the game. Further, for example, in the case of a gaming machine provided with display means for displaying information relating to a game, the setting change mode can be changed only by changing the control program of the gaming machine without changing the hardware configuration of the gaming machine. It can change to the structure which can alert | report to a manager or a player that it is performed. Therefore, for example, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which a dedicated display means for notifying that the setting change mode is being executed is additionally provided.

[Feature βB2]
A gaming machine according to the feature βB1,
Setting information display mode executing means for executing a setting information display mode (setting confirmation mode) that displays the setting information that is information related to the setting of the winning probability but cannot change the setting of the winning probability,
The display means includes
During execution of the setting information display mode, a second display mode (display mode in which all LEDs blink simultaneously) is a display mode that is not displayed when displaying information related to the game, and is different from the first display mode. ) Is displayed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature βB2, it is possible to notify the manager and the player that the setting information display mode is being executed instead of the setting change mode using the display means for displaying information relating to the game. In addition, for example, in the case of a gaming machine provided with display means for displaying information related to a game, the setting information display mode can be changed only by changing the control program of the gaming machine without changing the hardware configuration of the gaming machine. Can be changed to a configuration capable of notifying an administrator or a player that the game is being executed. Therefore, for example, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which dedicated display means for notifying that the setting information display mode is being executed is additionally provided.

<Characteristic βC group>
The feature βC group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βC1]
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed a predetermined area;
Storage means (main-side RAM 64) for storing detection information (game information basic information such as incoming ball information, incoming ball number information, winning ball total value, etc.) that is information based on the fact that a game ball has been detected by the detecting means; ,
Calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as an accessory ratio, a continuous feature ratio, a pitch rate, etc.) that is information relating to a game history based on the detection information;
Display means (information display section 45z) for performing display (display of type information and numerical information) based on the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
Control means for controlling the display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The display means is composed of a plurality of light emitting units,
The control means includes means for controlling so that all of the plurality of light emitting units constituting the display means are turned on based on the power supply to the gaming machine. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature βC1, when the gaming machine administrator turns on the power of the gaming machine, the light emitting unit constituting the display means checks whether there is a light emitting unit that does not turn on due to a malfunction such as disconnection. be able to.

[Feature βC2]
A gaming machine according to the feature βC1,
The control means includes means for controlling all of the plurality of light emitting units constituting the display means to be in a blinking state based on the power supply to the gaming machine. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature βC2, when the game machine administrator turns on the power of the game machine, there is a light-emitting part that does not turn off due to a malfunction in the light-emitting part that constitutes the display means. Can be confirmed.

<Characteristic βD group>
The feature βD group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βD1]
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed a predetermined area;
Storage means (main-side RAM 64) for storing detection information (game information basic information such as incoming ball information, incoming ball number information, winning ball total value, etc.) that is information based on the fact that a game ball has been detected by the detecting means; ,
Calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as an accessory ratio, a continuous feature ratio, a pitch rate, etc.) that is information relating to a game history based on the detection information;
Display means (information display section 45z) for performing display (display of type information and numerical information) based on the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
Control means for controlling the display means;
Operation means (information display section inspection button) for accepting a predetermined operation from the outside;
A gaming machine comprising
The display means is composed of a plurality of light emitting units,
The control means includes means for controlling so that all of the plurality of light emitting units constituting the display means are turned on based on the operation means accepting the predetermined operation. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature βD1, the administrator of the gaming machine can always check whether there is a light-emitting unit that does not turn on due to a failure such as disconnection in the light-emitting unit constituting the display unit by operating the operation unit. Can do.

[Feature βD2]
A gaming machine according to the feature βD1,
The control means includes means for controlling so that all of the plurality of light emitting units constituting the display means blink based on the fact that the operation means has received the predetermined operation. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature βD2, the administrator of the gaming machine can always check whether there is a light-emitting unit that does not turn off due to a malfunction in the light-emitting unit constituting the display unit by operating the operation unit. Can be confirmed.

<Feature βE group>
The feature βE group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βE1]
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed a predetermined area;
Storage means (main-side RAM 64) for storing detection information (game information basic information such as incoming ball information, incoming ball number information, winning ball total value, etc.) that is information based on the fact that a game ball has been detected by the detecting means; ,
Calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as an accessory ratio, a continuous feature ratio, a pitch rate, etc.) that is information relating to a game history based on the detection information;
Display means (information display section 45z) for displaying the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
A gaming machine comprising
The storage means includes means for storing the detection information in a plurality of periods with a predetermined timing as a boundary,
The calculation means includes means for calculating the game history information for each of the plurality of periods based on the detection information for the plurality of periods.
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the display means includes means for switching and displaying a plurality of the game history information for each of the plurality of periods.

  According to the feature βE1, an inspector of a gaming machine can check a plurality of pieces of game history information for a plurality of periods with a predetermined timing in the gaming machine as a boundary. For example, the inspector can confirm whether or not there is a situation in which the game history information does not fall within an appropriate range in a plurality of periods with a predetermined timing as a boundary in the gaming machine.

[Feature βE2]
A gaming machine described in the feature βE1,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined timing is a timing when a date changes.

  According to the feature βE2, the inspector of the gaming machine can check a plurality of gaming history information for each date in the gaming machine. For example, the inspector can check for each date whether there is a situation where the game history information does not fall within the proper range.

<Characteristic βF group>
The feature βF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βF1]
A plurality of detection means (entrance detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting a game ball that has passed a predetermined area;
Storage means (main-side RAM 64) for storing detection information (game information basic information such as incoming ball information, incoming ball number information, winning ball total value, etc.) that is information based on the fact that a game ball has been detected by the detecting means; ,
Calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as an accessory ratio, a continuous feature ratio, a pitch rate, etc.) that is information relating to a game history based on the detection information;
Display means (information display section 45z) for displaying the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
An erasing unit for erasing the detection information stored in the storage unit when a predetermined operation is received;
A gaming machine comprising
After the detecting means is erased by the erasing means, the display means is the game history information until a predetermined condition is satisfied (until the measured discharge passage passage number N _OUT reaches a predetermined number). A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for not displaying the numerical information.

  According to the feature βF1, the inspector of the gaming machine, when the numerical information of the game history information is not displayed on the display means, the predetermined condition is not satisfied after the detecting means is erased by the erasing means Can be recognized.

  Note that the invention of the feature αW group to the feature βF group solves the following problems.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, there is an increase in gaming interest, a reduction in processing load on gaming machines, optimization of processing, simplification of control, simplification of structure, efficiency of development of gaming machines, Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure, control, production, etc. for the purpose of providing gaming machines that are less prone to malfunctions, and providing gaming machines in consideration of players.

  In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as the discovery and suppression of illegal acts by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

  In gaming machines such as those mentioned above, there is an increase in gaming interest, reduction in processing load on gaming machines, optimization of processing, simplification of control, simplification of structure, efficiency of development of gaming machines, and problems. Further technical improvements are desired for the purpose of providing difficult gaming machines, providing gaming machines in consideration of players, and providing more sound games.

  Note that a configuration in which one or a plurality of configurations included in the feature A group to the feature βF group are appropriately combined may be employed. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

  Pachinko machine: Launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player, and a start entrance ball that is provided in the game area and can enter a game ball flowing down the game area And an acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means based on the fact that a game ball has entered the start ball entering section. Machine.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: design display means for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, start means for starting variable display of the plurality of pictures due to operation of the start operation means, and operation of stop operation means A gaming machine comprising stop means for stopping the variable display of the plurality of pictures due to or after elapse of a predetermined time, and privilege grant means for giving a privilege to the player in accordance with the stopped picture.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be realized with various configurations without departing from the spirit thereof. For example, the technical features in the embodiments and the modifications corresponding to the technical features in each embodiment described in the summary section of the invention are to solve some or all of the above-described problems, or In order to achieve part or all of the effects, replacement or combination can be performed as appropriate. Further, if the technical feature is not described as essential in the present specification, it can be deleted as appropriate.

10 ... Pachinko machine 11 ... Outer frame 12 ... Pachinko machine body 13 ... Inner frame 14 ... Front door frame 15 ... Hinge 16 ... Hinge 17 ... Cylinder lock 18. ..Window 19 ... Glass unit 20 ... Upper plate 21 ... Lower plate 22 ... Discharge port 23 ... Lever 24 ... Direction operation button 25 ... Operation handle 25a ... Touch sensor 25b ... weight button 25c ... variable resistor 26 ... game ball launch button 30 ... game board 31 ... guide rail 31a ... inner rail part 31b ... outer rail part 32 ... General prize opening 32a ... First prize opening 32b ... Second prize opening 32c ... Third prize opening 33 ... First start opening 34 ... Second start opening 34a ... Electric accessory 34b ... Electrical accessory drive unit 35 ... Through gate 36 ... Variable winning device 36a ... Large winning opening 36b ... Opening / closing door 36c ... Variable winning drive unit 37 ... Special figure unit 37a ... 1st symbol display part 37 ... 2nd symbol display part 37c ... 1st hold display part 37d ... 2nd hold display part 38 ... Normal figure unit 39 ... Round display part 40 ... Variable display unit 41 .. . Symbol display device 42 ... Nail 43 ... Out port 45 ... Main display part 45z ... Game history information display part (information display part)
46 ... Speaker 47 ... Various lamps 51 ... First control unit 52 ... Second control unit 53 ... Third control unit 54 ... Tank 55 ... Tank rail 56 ... Case rail 60 ... Main controller 61 ... Main control board 62 ... Main side MPU
62x ... Main CPU
63 ... Main ROM
64 ... Main side RAM
64x ... flash memory 70 ... payout control device 71 ... payout device 80 ... launch control device 81 ... game ball launch mechanism 85 ... power supply device 86 ... power failure monitoring circuit 90 .. .Sound Emission Control Device 91 ... Sound Emission Control Board 96 ... RTC
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 ... Display control apparatus 300 ... Game history management chip 302 ... Buffer 304 ... Register 306 ... Prize ball number data storage memory 307 ... Calculation execution condition storage memory 307a ... Memory for storage execution condition storage 308 ... CPU
309 ... Memory for calculation result storage 309a ... Memory for storing number of balls 309b ... Memory for storing ball information 320 ... Inspection machine 321 ... CPU
328 ... Display section 329 ... Connection cable

Claims (2)

A plurality of detecting means for detecting a game ball that has passed a predetermined area;
Storage means for storing detection information which is information based on the fact that a game ball is detected by the detection means;
Calculation means for calculating game history information which is information relating to a game history based on the detection information;
Display means for displaying the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
A gaming machine comprising
The storage means includes means for storing the detection information in a plurality of periods with a predetermined timing as a boundary,
The calculation means includes means for calculating the game history information for each of the plurality of periods based on the detection information for the plurality of periods.
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the display means includes means for switching and displaying a plurality of the game history information for each of the plurality of periods. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined timing is a timing when a date changes.

Images